NV Series V Series Programming Instructions (LD FBD SFC ST)

6F8C1226
Programming Instructions
(LD/FBD/SFC/ST)
Unied Controller
nv Series
Integrated Controller
vseries
1226.3.1009

P
r
o
g
r
a
m
m
i
n
g

I
n
s
t
r
u
c
t
i
o
n
s

(
L
D
/
F
B
D
/
S
F
C
/
S
T
)
U
n
i
e
d

C
o
n
t
r
o
l
l
e
r

n
v

s
e
r
i
e
s

&
I
n
t
e
g
r
a
t
e
d

C
o
n
t
r
o
l
l
e
r

V

s
e
r
i
e
s
Unied Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series
Programming Instructions (LD/FBD/SFC/ST)
September 30, 2010
Toshiba Corporation 2010
All Right Reserved.
No part of this document may be reproduced
without the prior written consent of Toshiba.
Transmission Distribution & Industrial Systems Company
Microelectronics & System Components Department - System Components Support Group
1, Toshiba-Cho, Fuchu-Shi, Tokyo, 183-8511, Japan Tel +81-42-333-2206
Third Edition
Notes
(1) The technical information provided herein describes typical operations and applications of the product and does not
guarantee the intellectual property rights or other rights of Toshiba or third parties nor allows license of its use.
(2) No part or the whole of this document may be reproduced without prior consent.
(3) The information herein may be changed in the future without notice.
(4) All possible measures have been taken to prepare the information herein. If you have any question, comment, or
nd any error, please contact us.
PROSEC, TOSLINE, TOSDIC, CIEMAC are trademarks or registered trademarks of Toshiba Corporation.
Microsoft, Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and other countries.
DeviceNet is a registered trademark of Open DeviceNet Vender Association Inc.

Unified Controller nv series/Integrated Controller V series Programming Instructions (LD/FBD/SFC/ST)
i

Restrictions on Application
This product is not developed/manufactured for use in systems involving devices that
directly affect human life (Note 1). Do not use them for such applications.
To use this product for systems that involve devices that significantly affect human safety
or maintenance of public functions (Note 2), special considerations (Note 3) are required
in system operation, maintenance, and management. In this case, contact one of
Toshiba's sales representatives.
(Note 1) Devices that directly affect human life include the following.
Medical devices such as life supporting devices and devices for surgical units.
(Note 2) Systems that involve devices that significantly affect human safety or
maintenance of public functions include the following.
Main unit control systems of nuclear power plants, safety protection systems of
nuclear facilities, and other systems that are critical for safety
Operation control systems of mass transportation systems and air traffic control
systems
(Note 3) Special considerations indicate sufficient discussions with Toshiba's engineers to
construct a safe system (e.g. employing fool-proof design, fail-safe design, or
redundant design).

Disclaimer
Toshiba shall not be responsible for any damage caused by fire or earthquake, acts of a
third party, other accidents, the user's willful acts or negligence, misuse, or use in
abnormal conditions.
Toshiba shall not be responsible for any incidental damage (loss of business profits,
interruption of business, change or loss of stored memory) caused by use of or being
unable to use this product.
Toshiba shall not be responsible for any damage caused by failure to observe the
information described in the operation manual.
Toshiba shall not be responsible for any damage caused by malfunctions due to
combination with any connected device.

Toshiba shall not be responsible for any damage caused by malfunctions due to
combination with any application program created by the customer.

Note
Use your cellular phone or PHS 1 meter or more away from the product main unit in operation,
various transmission cables, and I/O bus cable. Otherwise, the system may malfunction.

6F8C1226
ii

Creating control programs for Unified Controller nv series and Integrated Controller V series requires
dedicated engineering tools.
This manual describes instructions for programming languages which include ladder diagram language
(hereinafter referred to as LD language), function block diagram (hereinafter referred to as FBD
language), sequential function chart (herein after referred to as SFC) and structured text (herein after
referred to as ST). They are utilized to create control programs for Unified Controller nv series or
Integrated Controller V series using engineering tools.
The instructions found in this manual can be utilized in the following engineering tools:

Engineering tools Use
nv-Tool 4 client server version
nv-Tool 4 stand alone version
For Unified Controller nv series
nv-Tool 3 client server version
nv-Tool 3 stand alone version
For Integrated Controller V series

The L controller of Integrated Controller V series offers MCS connection version and DS connection
version which are described as follows in this manual:

Type V series Model Notation
MCS connection
version
Model2000 L2PU11/L2PU12 L2
Model3000 L3PU11 L3
DS connection
version
Model2000 L2PU22 L2DS
Model3000 P3PU21 L3DS

Instruction manuals regarding engineering tools include the following:
Unified Controller nv series Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 Setup 6F8C1291

Unified Controller nv series Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 Basic 6F8C1290

Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 3 Setup 6F8C1011

Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 3 Basic 6F8C1006

Introduction

iii
CONTENTS

Chapter 1

For
Programming

1

1.1 What are LD, FBD, SFC, and ST Languages? 3
1.2 Data 6
1.2.1 Data Type 6
1.2.2 Data Structure 8
1.2.3 Real Number Format 9
1.2.4 Variables 10
1.2.5 Variable Memory Allocation Rules 11
1.2.6 Variable Declaration Examples 11
1.2.7 Reading and Writing Variable 15
1.3 Program Structure 16
1.3.1 Task 16
1.3.2 POU (Program Organization Unit) 17
1.3.3 Program 18
1.3.4 Function 18
1.3.5 Function Block 22
1.4 Index Registers 25
1.5 System Flags 26
1.6 Handling of REAL Data 28
1.7 Introduction Behavior when Exceeding Data Boundary 30
1.8 Step Counting 31
1.9 How to Read Instruction Spec. 33
1.10 Instruction List 35

Chapter 2

LD/FBD
Instructions

51

2.1 Contacts & Coils 52
2.2 Execution Control 72
2.3 Counters 77
2.4 Timers 85
2.5 Flip-Flops 104
2.6 Moving 111
2.7 Comparison 124
2.8 Selection 145
2.9 Type Conversion 167
2.10 Numeric Function 237
2.11 Logical Operation 259
2.12 Bit Operation 278
2.13 Arithmetic Operation 291
2.14 Data Processing 321

6F8C1226
iv

2.15 I/O 333
2.16 Process Operation 371
2.17 Program Control 451
2.18 String Processing 465
2.19 Control Statements 485
2.20 Communication 524
2.21 Duplex Control 594
2.22 Process Control 603
2.23 Tag Operation 638
2.24 RAS 686

Chapter 3

SFC Instructions

699

Appendix A

Using Any
Function

731

INDEX

749

1
Chapter 1
For Programming

This manual describes the format and handling of the instructions. Read
Chapter 1 thoroughly for it provides knowledge required to understand this
manual.

1.1 What are LD, FBD, SFC, and ST Languages? 3
1.2 Data 6
1.2.1 Data Type 6
1.2.2 Data Structure 8
1.2.3 Real Number Format 9
1.2.4 Variables10
1.2.5 Variable Memory Allocation Rules11
1.2.6 Variable Declaration Examples 11
1.2.7 Reading and Writing Variable15
1.3 Program Structure16
1.3.1 Task16
1.3.2 POU (Program Organization Unit) 17
1.3.3 Program18
1.3.4 Function18
1.3.5 Function Block22
1.4 Index Registers25
1.5 System Flags26
1.6 Handling of REAL Data28
1.7 Introduction Behavior when Exceeding Data Boundary30
Chapter 1 For Programming
6F8C1226
2
1.8 Step Counting31
1.9 How to Read Instruction Spec. 33
1.10 Instruction List 35
1.1 What are LD, FBD, SFC, and ST Languages?
3


LD Language
Ladder Diagram is a graphic language for commonly used Boolean operation and
described using a combination of contacts and coils.
The LD language can be treated in the same manner as electrical relay circuits and must
be connected to the left and right power rails.

Switch_1 Motor_On
ADD_INT
EN ENO
Done
Offset

LD
Value

LD
Value

SET
Switch_3
Switch_2
Switch_4
Horizontal link
Right power rail
Left power rail
Vertical link
Note: The characters LD, ST and SET are
displayed on the semi-graphic Program Editor,
but not displayed on the full-graphic one.

FBD Language
Function block diagram is a graphic language that expresses the flow of signals and
data and is described using a combination of function s and function blocks.

ADD_TIME
Timer_1
Switch2

LD
Switch1

LD
DelayTime

LD
AND_BOOL TON
preset

LD
IN
PT
Q
ET
T_Value

ST
Start

ST
Note: The characters LD, ST and SET are
displayed on the semi-graphic Program Editor,
but not displayed on the full-graphic one.

6F8C1226
4

SFC Language
Sequential Function Chart is a graphic language suited for sequential control and
consists of an SFC structure unit, which shows the control flow, action unit, which shows
the action performed at each step, and transition condition unit, which shows the
conditions for advancing through the steps.

START
T0

S1 S1

S2 Action_1 N

LED

S3

S1_ON S2_ON
S3_ON
T1
T2

ST language
Structured text (ST) is a text language similar to C and PASCAL. It supports variables,
multipliers, operators, assign statements, IF statements, CASE statements, FOR
statements, WHILE statements, REPEAT statements, and call statements of functions
and function blocks. It efficiently programs complicated control statements such as
arithmetic operations and repeat.

(* Initialize *)
XO[0]:=XOUT; (* Output value *)
XU[0]:=XIN; (* Input value *)
XOUT:=B[0]*XIN;

(* Conditional statement *)
IF RUN THEN
FOR XI:=M TO 0 BY -1 DO
XOUT:=XOUT+A[XI]*XO[XI];
REPEAT
A[XJ]:=A[XJ]+XO[XI];
UNTIL A[XJ]<100
END_REPEAT;
END_FOR;
ELSE
WHILE XIN<100 DO
XOUT:=XOUT+A[XI];
IF XOUT>200 THEN
EXIT;
END_IF;
END_WHILE;
END_IF;
CASE XK OF
0..9:
(*Function*)
XOUT:=FUN_XOUT(XIN,XK);
10,20:
(*Function block*)
FBK_XIN_1(XIN,XK);
XOUT:= FBK_XIN_1.OUT;
END_CASE;
Assign statement
Free comment
IF statement
FOR statement
Operator
WHILE statement
EXIT statement
CASE statement
Function call statement
Function block call statement

5

The following operators can be used for structured text (ST):

Operation Description Priority
() Bracket expression 1
** Power 2
NOT, ~ Bitwise Boolean NOT 3
* Multiply 4
/ Divide 4
MOD Remainder 4
+ Add 5
- Subtract 5
<, >, <=, >= Comparison 6
=, <> Equality, inequality 7
AND, & Bitwise Boolean AND 8
XOR Bitwise Boolean XOR 9
OR Bitwise Boolean OR 10

6F8C1226
6

1.2 Data
1.2.1 Data Type
The following table shows the data types supported by the Unified Controller nv series
and Integrated Controller V series and their data range.

Notation
(Data Type)
Data type Bits
Constant
specification
Data range
BOOL Boolean 1

0(FALSE), 1(TRUE)
INT Integer 16

-32768 to 32767
DINT Double integer 32

-2147483648 to 2147483647
UINT Unsigned integer 16

0 to 65535
REAL Real numbers 32

-3.40282310
38
to -1.401298-10
-45

0
1.401298-10
-45
to 3.40282310
38

TIME Duration 32

-2147483648 to 2147483647ms
(-596h31m23s648ms to 596h31m23s647ms)
DATE
D(abbreviation)
Date 32

1998-01-01 to 2097-12-31 *3
TIME_OF_DAY
TOD(abbreviation)
Time of day 32

00:00:00.000 to 23:59:59.999 *3
DATE_AND_TIME
DT(abbreviation)
Date and time of
day
64
1998-01-01-00:00:00.000
to 2097-12-31-23:59:59.999 *3
STRING
Fixed-length
character string

Maximum number of characters: 256
Character code system: shift JIS
Possibility use only with the retained global variable
*2
WORD Bit string of length 16 16

0000 to FFFF
DWORD Bit string of length 32 32

00000000 to FFFFFFFF
PTR *1 Word pointer
PTRB *1 Bit pointer

*1 Unified Controller and the Integrated Controller supports this data type to enable flexible address handling and
provide compatibility with programs on conventional machines.
*2 When using string definition instruction DEF_STRING, it may be used in variable scope without retaining
specification. Refer to the Define String instruction page for details.
*3 In the DATE, TIME_OF_DAY(TOD), and DATE_AND_TIME(DT) types, an asterisk (*) is displayed in the V
engineering tool (program monitor, data value monitor) if data exceeding the range above is set. No setting is
allowed from the V engineering tool (e.g. data value monitoring).
1.2 Data
7
To program constants in one of the data types, do the following:
Specify the data type in <DataType>#.
<DataType># can be omitted in the types other than Duration, Date and Time of day.
Constants can be specified in binary (2#), decimal (default), octal (8#), or
hexadecimal(16#).
If a number is 16 in decimal, the value 2#10000 in binary specification, 8#20 in octal
specification, and 16#10 in hexadecimal specification are all equal.
Underscores _ can be inserted between numbers to make constants easy to read.
2#1_0000 in binary specification, 8#2_0 in octal specification, 16#1_0 in hexadecimal
specification are allowed.
The following table shows examples of constant specification:

Notation
(DataType)
Data type
DataType
can be
omitted?
Example of constant specification
BOOL Boolean Yes
BOOL#0, BOOL#FALSE,0, FALSE
BOOL#1, BOOL#TRUE, 1, TRUE
INT Integer Yes INT#15, 15, INT#16#F
DINT Double integer Yes DINT#15, 15, DINT#16#F
UINT Unsigned integer Yes UINT#15, 15, UINT#16#F
REAL Real numbers Yes REAL#15, 15, REAL#16#F, 15.0, 1.5E+1
TIME Duration No
d=Day, h=Hour, m=Minute, s=Second, ms=Millisecond
A decimal point can be used in the last field.
Each effective unit can overflow.
<DataType> can be specified in TIME#, T#.
TIME#6d_10m, TIME#16d_5h_4m_3s_21ms
T#6d_10m, T#12.34s
DATE
D (abbreviation)
Date No DATE#2007-12-10, D#2007-12-10
TIME_OF_DAY
TOD(abbreviation)
Time of day No TIME_OF_DAY#1:2:3.456, TOD#1:2:3
WORD
Bit string of
length 16
Yes WORD#4660, 4660, WORD#16#1234, 16#12_34
DWORD
Bit string of
length 32
Yes
DWORD#305419896, 305419896
DWORD#16#1234_5678, 16#12345678

6F8C1226
8

1.2.2 Data Structure
1) Integer (INT)/Unsigned integer (UINT)/Bit string of length 16 (WORD)
data
15 0
0

2) Double integer (DINT)/Real numbers (REAL)/Duration (TIME)/Time of day
(TOD)/Bit string of length 32 (DWORD)
data (H)
data (L)
15 0
0
1

3) Date (DATE)
year (INT)
15 0
month day
0
1

Example) 1999-10-11<year-month-day>

4) Date and time of day (DT)
year (INT)
15 0
month day
0
1
time of day (H)
time of day (L) 2
3

5) Fixed-length character string (STRING)

VAR length
15 0
1st stri ng 2nd string
0
1
2
3
String l ength (n)
3rd string 4th string
5th string 6th string 4
An example of 6 character data is shown at left.
Variables:
Variable Data type Dec.
SAMPLE STRING[6] VAR

6) Derived data type Array data (ARRAY)

data [0]
15 0
data [1]
data [2]
data [n-1]
2
n-1
0
1
An example of 16 bit data is shown at left. A 32 bit data is
stored every 4 bytes as (2) and (3).
Variables:
data ARRAY[0..n-1] OF INT VAR

1.2 Data
9

7) Derived data type structure (STRUCT)

data (INT)
15 0

0
1
data1 (DINT H)
data1 (DINT L) 2
3
bit0 bit1
An example of INT+BOOL+DINT.
Variables:
data typeSAMPLE VAR
Structures:
Data type Parent type
typeSAMPLE STRUCT
Members:
Member Data type
data INT
bit0 BOOL
bit1 BOOL
data1 DINT

1.2.3 Real Number Format
An arbitrary size single word real data is expressed as follows:

REAL value SM 2
E

Mantissa
Exponent
Sign

Where S is the sign, M is a decimal less than 1, and E is between -127 and +127. The
data format is as follows:

31 30 23 22
Exponent (8 bits) e Mantissa (23 bits) m
0
Sign (1 bit) s

From the above formula, a real value is obtained as :
S = s
M = 1+m 2
-23

E = e -127
REAL value = (s)(1+m 2
-23
)2
e-127

The range of real data is shown in [1.2.1 Data Type].
The following notation is used when the above data range is exceeded:
Infinity: Exponent e = 255, Mantissa m=0
NAN: Exponent e = 255, Mantissa m<>0

Note
For addition/subtraction of real data, if the absolute value of two data differ significantly
(difference in exponent 24), the result is the value of the data with larger absolute value.

6F8C1226
10

1.2.4 Variables
Variables used in applications are divided into local variables and global variables.

Major
classification
Minor classification Variable feature
Temporary variable
A variable that can be used only in the POU in which it is included.
The variable value cannot be retained because memory is reset
each time the POU is executed.
Initialization is required before using the variable.
Static variable
The variable value is retained because memory is reserved
statically.
The initial operation varies depending on the setting in "Module
Parameter" - "Controller Operation Setting" - "Local Variable
Initialization."
If "Yes" is set, the variable is initialized to zero when the controller
starts up in RUN.
If "No" is set, the variable is not initialized when the controller starts
up in RUN, and starts from the previous operation result. *1
Local variable
Non-tracking type static
variable (Unified Controller
nv series only)
The variable value is retained because memory is reserved
statically.
In the initialization operation, the variable is initialized to zero when
the controller starts up in RUN.
In a duplex system, this variable is not tracked.
Network variable
A variable that can be used if the stations are organically linked via
scan transmission, and managed in an integrated fashion. It is
used for exchanging information and data between different
stations. The scope of the variable is the system in which the
variable is used. Only scan memory such as TC-net and FL-net
can be network variables.
Station global variable
A variable that is used globally in the station, and used for referring
to information and data of the transmission modules in the station.
The scope of the variable is the station in which the variable is
used.
For a station variable declared as Boolean, available slots are
restricted.
[Integrated Controller V series]
Can be used only in Slot 0 and Slot 1.
[Unified Controller nv series]
Can be used only in Slot 0.
Global variable
Controller global variable
A variable that is used globally in the controller, and used for
exchanging information and data between different programs in the
controller. The scope of the variable is the controller in which the
variable is used.
Controller variables include controller-specific variables (special
registers, data registers), user-defined user variables, and I/O
variables.
*1 The local variable area (e.g. the area storing the previous value of the rising edge detection instruction and
instance of the timer instruction) that is automatically generated in the standard function block is initialized to
zero.
1.2 Data
11

1.2.5 Variable Memory Allocation Rules
Variables used within a program are allocated in internal memory in the order of their
definition. For example, consecutively defined BOOL type variables are allocated from
the least significant bit to optimize memory usage.

Variables:
V1 BOOL VAR
V2 BOOL VAR
V3 INT VAR
V4 BOOL VAR

0
1
15 0
V3
2
V2
V4
V1

1.2.6 Variable Declaration Examples
The following restrictions apply to variable names:
A variable name must begin with an alphabet and consists of alphanumeric
characters or underscore. See the software model section in Chapter 1 of V
Engineering Tool Basic Instruction for details.
Upper and lower case are not distinguished.
The length must not exceed 20 characters.
Arrays are allowed with brackets used to denote the elements. Array index starts from
0.
Structures are allowed with period used to denote the elements.
Reserved words may not be used as variable name.

Reserved word Description
N, R, S, L, D, P, P0, P1, SD, DS, SL, NH, SH,
LH, DH
Action qualifier
ACTION ... END_ACTION Action declaration
ARRAY OF Derived data type array variable declaration
AT Variable declaration (memory address specification)
CASE ... OF ... ELSE ... END_CASE CASE statement
CONFIGURATION ... END_CONFIGURATION Configuration declaration
CONSTANT Variable declaration (constant declaration)
BOOL, SINT, INT, DINT, LINT, USINT, UINT,
UDINT, ULINT, REAL, LREAL, TIME, DATE,
TIME_OF_DAY, TOD, DATE_AND_TIME,
DT, STRING, BYTE, WORD,
DWORD, LWORD, PTR, PTRB
Data type
EN, ENO Function execution control in LD
EXIT FOR, WHILE, REPEAT statements
FALSE, TRUE FALSE/TRUE or Boolean constants
F_EDGE Falling edge detector qualifier
FOR ... TO ... BY ... DO ... END_FOR FOR statement
FUNCTION ... END_FUNCTION Function
6F8C1226
12

Reserved word Description
Function, Function block name
Function or function block names such as SIN, COS,
TAN, TON, CTU.
FUNCTION BLOCK ...
END_FUNCTION BLOCK
Function block declaration
IF ... THEN ... ELSEIF ... ELSE ... END_IF IF statement
INITIAL_STEP ... END_STEP Initial step declaration
PROGRAM ... WITH ... Program allocation
PROGRAM ... END_PROGRAM Program declaration
R_EDGE Rising edge detector qualifier
READ_ONLY, READ_WRITE Access path instruction
REPEAT ... UNTIL ... END_REPEAT REPEAT statement
RESOURCE ... ON ... END_RESOURCE Resource declaration
RETAIN Variable declaration (retained variable specification)
RETURN Return from function or function block
STEP ... END_STEP Step declaration
STRUCT ... END_STRUCT Derived data type structure declaration
TASK Task declaration
IL language text operator Operators such as LD, ST, AND
ST language text operator Operators such as NOT, MOD
TRANSITION ... FROM ... TO ...
END_TRANSITION
Transition declaration
TYPE ... END_TYPE Derived data declaration
VAR ... END_VAR
VAR_TEMP ... END_VAR
VAR_INPUT ... END_VAR
VAR_OUTPUT ... END_VAR
VAR_IN_OUT ... END_VAR
VAR_GLOBAL ... END_VAR
VAR_EXTERNAL ... END_VAR
VAR_ACCESS ... END_VAR
Variable declaration
WHILE ... DO ... END_WHILE WHILE statement
WITH Program or function block task association
XI, XJ, XK, XL, XM, XN, XP, XQ Index registers

Static variable
Static variables used within POU* are declared using the keyword VAR.
Variables:
LOCAL_VAR_1 INT VAR
LOCAL_VAR_2 WORD VAR
* POU stands for Program Organization Unit. See section [1.3.2
POU (Program Organization Unit)] for details.
1.2 Data
13

Non-tracking type static variable (Unified Controller nv series only)
Non-tracking type static variables used within POU are declared using the keyword
VAR (Non Tracking).
Variables:
Variable Date type Dec.
LOCAL_NT_VAR_1 INT VAR(NonTracking)
LOCAL_NT_VAR_2 WORD VAR(NonTracking)

Temporary variable
Temporary variables used within POU are declared using the keyword VAR_TEMP.
Variables:
TEMP_VAR_1 INT VAR_TEMP
TEMP_VAR_2 WORD VAR_TEMP

Input parameter
Represent the input arguments for POU and are declared using the keyword
VAR_INPUT.
Variables:
INPUT_VAR_1 INT VAR_INPUT
INPUT_VAR_2 WORD VAR_INPUT

Output parameter
Represent the output arguments for POU and are declared using the keyword
VAR_OUTPUT.
Variables:
OUTPUT_VAR_1 INT VAR_OUTPUT
OUTPUT_VAR_2 WORD VAR_OUTPUT

Input/Output parameter
Represent the input/output arguments for POU and are declared using the keyword
VAR_IN_OUT.
Variables:
INOUT_VAR_1 INT VAR_IN_OUT
INOUT_VAR_2 WORD VAR_IN_OUT
6F8C1226
14

Global variable
When using global variables, declare them as network, station, I/O and controller
variables.
Variables:
Variable Date type
GLOBAL_VAR_1 INT
GLOBAL_VAR_2 WORD

Derived data type Array declaration
The ARRAYOF keyword is used to declare arrays to be used within POU.
For example, an INT array with ten elements is declared as follows:
Variables:
ARRAY_VAR ARRAY[0..9] OF INT VAR

Derived data type structure declaration
The STRUCT keyword is used to declare structures to be used within POU.
Variables:
data STRUCT_NAME VAR

Structures
STRUCT_NAME STRUCT

Members:
Member Data type
VAL1 INT
VAL_ARY ARRAY[0..9] OF BOOL
VAL2 DINT

1.2 Data
15

1.2.7 Reading and Writing Variable
The following instructions are used to read from and write to variables. See section
[1.3.4 Function] for details. Furthermore, they may be used in combination with Gate
instructions. Refer to the [Normally Open Contact] and the [Normally Close Contact]
instruction description page for details.

Function Instruction Symbol Description
Read
Load
instruction
LD
LD instruction is used to specify input arguments to
function or function block.
Store
instruction
ST
ST instruction is used to write the result of function or
function block without execution control to a variable.
Write
Set store
instruction
SET
SET instruction is used to write the result of function with
execution control to a variable.

ADD_INT
SAMPLE1

LD
SAMPLE2

LD
SAMPLE3

ST
ADD_INT
EN ENO
SAMPLE1

LD
SAMPLE2

LD
SAMPLE3

SET
SIGNAL1
Use ST instruction
Use SET instruction
SAMPLE1

LD
SAMPLE2

ST
SIGNAL1
When SIGNAL1=FALSE(OFF) : SAMPLE2=0
When SIGNAL1=TRUE(ON) : SAMPLE2=SAMPLE1
When SIGNAL1=FALSE(OFF) : SAMPLE2=Previous value
When SIGNAL1=TRUE(ON) : SAMPLE2=SAMPLE1

SIGNAL2
SAMPLE1

LD
SAMPLE2

SET
SIGNAL1
Combination with function
Function without execution control
Function with execution control
Combination with gate instruction
Example of normally open contact gate and store instruction
Example of normally open contact gate and SET store instruction

6F8C1226
16

1.3 Program Structure
1.3.1 Task
The integrated controller control application programs in units called task. This
represents a program execution unit. Any program can be executed by including it in a
task.
[Number of programs that can be registered in each task in the Integrated Controller V series]
Controller
Task name Priority
S3 S2
L3
(L3DS)
L2
(L2DS)
L1
Execution
method
Event task EV 1 8 8
8
(16)
8
(16)
Event
Super high
speed task
SS 2 1 1
1
()
1
()
Scan
Interrupt task IP 3 8 8
8
(32)
8
(32)
Event
Highspeed task HS 4 1 32
32
(128)
8
(128)
Scan
Main task MS 5 256 256
256
(256)
64
(256)
8 Scan
Background task BG 6 4 4
4
(4)
1
(4)
Event or scan
*1 S3PU21/S3PU45 : 32S3PU55/S3PU65 : 128

Number of programs that can be registered in each task in the Unified Controller nv series
Controller
Task name Priority
type1 type2
Execution method
Event task EV 8 8
1

Event (select EV or IP)
Interrupt task *1 IP 16 16
Event
Super high
speed task
SS 1 2

Scan
(select IP, SS, or
RIO)
RIOt task *2*3 RIO 0

Highspeed task HS
3
128 128
Scan (select HS or RIO)
Main task MS 4 256 512 Scan
*1 An interrupt task can be selected in Priority 1 or Priority 2.
*2 Only type1 can be selected. An RIO task can be selected in Priority 2 or Priority 3.
*3 Selection of RIO task in Priority 2 is supported by type1 controller version: V01.50.
17

1.3.2 POU (Program Organization Unit)
Programs, functions, and function blocks are referred to as Program Organization Unit
(POU). Refer to the subsequent sections for details.

[Number of POUs that can be registered in the Integrated Controller V series]
Controller POU (Program
Organization
Unit)
Instance
S3 S2
L3
(L3DS)
L2
(L2DS)
L1
Static
variable
Temporary
variable
Task
registration
Function
value
Argument
Program
Program
instance

Function

Function block
Function block
instance
1

437

2048
(2048)
512
(2048)
64

1 S3PU21 : 437S3PU45 : 821S3PU55/S3PU65 : 917

[Number of POUs that can be registered in the Unified Controller nv series]
Controller
POU (Program
Organization
Unit)
Instance
type1 type2
Static
variable
Temporary
variable
Task
registration
Function
value
Argument
Program Program instance

Function

Function block
Function block
instance
940 2000

6F8C1226
18

1.3.3 Program
A program is a combination of program body, functions, and function blocks. Functions
and function blocks may be used in common among several programs and function
blocks.

Task
Function block
Program
Function block
Program Program Program
Function
Function Function
Function block

1.3.4 Function
What is Function?
A function is executed with specific arguments and outputs a function value. In other
words it always produces the same operation result for the same input and does not
have internal storage. Instructions such as SIN and COS defined by IEC611313 are
examples of functions.

Function Execution Control with EN/ENO
Functions can have EN input and ENO output. They control the execution of the function.
ST language does not support EN input and ENO output.

<Example without execution control> <Example with execution control>

ADD_INT SAMPLE1

LD
SAMPLE2

LD
SAMPLE3

ST
ADD_INT
EN ENO
SAMPLE1

LD
SAMPLE2

LD
SAMPLE3

SET

SIGNAL1 SIGNAL2

19

Instructions to store the result to be connected to a function are divided into Store
instruction (ST) and Set Store instruction (SET).
The following rules apply to these instructions:

EN input Function processing ENO output
Set Store (SET)
instruction action
Store (ST)
Instruction action
Remarks
FALSE
(OFF)
Not executed (Output 0) FALSE(OFF) No data update
Update with
default value (0)
1
Normal
completion
TRUE(ON)
Yes
TRUE
(ON)
Executed
(Outputs
operation result)

Error
completion
(Error)
Depend on
function *2
Update with
operation result
Update with
operation result

No Executed Not available
Update with
operation result

(*1) When EN input is FALSE(OFF), function output is 0 and if that output is used directly as input to another
instruction, the input to that instruction is 0. For example, if a coil instruction is connected to a BOOL output
type function, that coil becomes FALSE(OFF). However, if that instruction is a Set Store instruction, 0 is not
stored and no data update is performed as shown in the above table.
(*2) In the function description, if there is no description of ENO output, the EN input state is output as the ENO
output.

When the function output is BOOL variable

In case where SAMPLE1SAMPLE2:

When SIGNAL1=FALSE(OFF)
SIGNAL2 FALSE(OFF)
SIGNAL3 is unchanged

When SIGNAL1=TRUE(ON)
SIGNAL2 TRUE(ON)
SIGNAL3 TRUE(ON)
In case where SAMPLE1SAMPLE2

SIGNAL2 FALSE(OFF)
SIGNAL3 FALSE(OFF)

SIGNAL2 TRUE(ON)
SIGNAL3 TRUE(ON)
SAMPLE1

LD
SIGNAL1
SAMPLE2

LD

SIGNAL2
SIGNAL3

SET
SAMPLE1

LD
SIGNAL1
SAMPLE2

LD

SIGNAL2
GT_INT
EN ENO
GT_INT
EN ENO

SIGNAL3

When the function output is not BOOL variable

SIGNAL2 FALSE(OFF)
SAMPLE3 is unchanged
SIGNAL2 TRUE(ON)
SAMPLE3 SAMPLE1+SAMPLE2
SAMPLE1

LD
SIGNAL1
SAMPLE2

LD

SIGNAL2
SAMPLE3

SET
ADD_INT
EN ENO
6F8C1226
20

Example of execution control with EN,ENO

SIGNAL2 FALSE(OFF)
SAMPLE4 is unchanged

SIGNAL2 TRUE(ON)
SAMPLE4 (SAMPLE1+SAMPLE2)SAMPLE3
SAMPLE1

LD
SI GNAL1
SAMPLE2

LD

SIGNAL2
SAMPLE4

SET
ADD_INT

EN ENO
MUL_INT

EN ENO
SAMPLE3

LD
ENO and EN on the same circuit are used connected.
When EN is FALSE(OFF), 0 is output.

User Defined Function
The user can define a new function by combining existing functions. This enables
program components to be packaged for reuse.

SAMPLE1
LD
SAMPLE2
LD
SAMPLE3
ST
USR_FUN
DATA1
DATA2
DATA1
LD
DATA1
LD
MUL_REAL
MUL_REAL
DATA2
LD
DATA2
LD
SUB_REAL USR_FUN
ST
SQRT
User defined function blockUSR_FUN

USR FUN
SAMPLE SAMPLE
_
2 2
1 2

21

Important
With regard to input arguments, output arguments, I/O arguments, and function return values,
when an argument is specified as indicated in the below table () and the argument and return
value is referenced or updated in the user defined function, it would take longer to process the
instruction. For details, refer to the Run time of Instruction Word in appendix of each controller
functional manual.

Data type VAR_IPUT VAR_OUTPUT VAR_IN_OUT
Return
value
BOOL

INT

DINT

UINT

REAL

TIME

DATE

TOD

DT

WORD

DWORD

STRING

PTR

PTRB

Derived ARRAY data

Derived structure

:Longer instruction process time,
:Normal instruction process time, :Cannot be specified

6F8C1226
22

Function/Function Block Restrictions
The following restrictions apply when the function value of a function or output argument
of a function block is DT, STRING, PTR or PTRB.
Function value and output argument must be stored in a single variable only.
Always connect function value and output argument with Store or Set Store instruction.

LEFT
IN

L
STRING1
LD
NUMBER
LD
STRING2
ST
LEFT
IN

L
STRING1
LD
NUMBER
LD
STRING2
ST
LEFT
IN

L
STRING1
LD
NUMBER
LD
STRING2
LD
MID
IN

L
STRING3
ST
<Supported case>
<Unsupported case>
Function value is stored in two or more variables
Function value is connected to instructions other than ST/SET

1.3.5 Function Block
What is Function Block?
A function block (FB) is a program organization unit that returns one or more value when
executed. More than one instance (copy) of a named FB can be created. An instance
requires an identifier (instance name) for identity. The output variables and internal
variables are retained from one execution to the next. Therefore, the result of
executing an FB with the same argument is not necessary the same. Instructions such
as CTU and TON defined by IEC61131-3 are examples of function blocks.
23

When storing data from FB instance output argument to variable, data is read from the
FB instance output variable by the LD instruction and the result is stored in the variable
by the ST instruction.

User Defined Function Block
The user can define a new function block by combining existing functions and function
blocks. This enables program components to be packaged for reuse.

SAMPLE1
LD
SAMPLE2
LD
SAMPLE3
ST
USR_FB
D
CK
User defined function block:USR_FB
Q
notQ
SAMPLE4
ST
SR

CK
P
D
D
S1
R
Q

Q

notQ
SR_1
USR_FB_1

TON_1
PT
IN
TON
CT
Q
SIGNAL_2 SIGNAL 1
SAMPLE_2
ST
SAMPLE_1
LD
BOOL type LD instruction
inserted automatically
TIME type LD instruction inserted
automatically
6F8C1226
24

Important
With regard to input arguments, output arguments, and I/O arguments, when an argument is
specified as indicated in the below table (
) and the argument is referenced or updated in the

user defined function block, it would take longer to process the instruction. For details, refer to
the Run time of Instruction Word in appendix of each controller functional manual.

Data type VAR_IPUT VAR_OUTPUT VAR_IN_OUT
BOOL

INT

DINT

UINT

REAL

TIME

DATE

TOD

DT

WORD

DWORD

STRING

PTR

PTRB

Derived ARRAY data

Derived structure

:Longer instruction process time,
:Normal instruction process time

1.4 Index Registers
25

1.4 Index Registers
The following eight registers are available as index registers:
XI, XJ, XK, XL, XM, XN, XP, XQ
These index registers are controlled every the task type. (These become the global
registers every task type.) Therefore, they do not overlap, even if the same index
registers are used between the different task type. They can be used to specify a
memory area that is offset by the index register from the specified variable. This is
referred to as index modification.
An index modification of a variable is coded as follows:

Variables:
TABLE ARRAY[0..3] OF DINT VAR
SAMPLE DINT VAR

When index register XI=1 and XJ=3,
SAMPLETABLE[XI]TABLE[XJ]
TABLE[1]TABLE[3]
15030
is calculated and the result 180 is stored in SAMPLE
TABLE[XI]
LD
TABLE[XJ]
LD
SAMPLE
ST
ADD_DINT
100
150
70
30 3
2
1
0
ArrayTABLE
Program

Important
Using index modification to access variables other than INT, UINT, and WORD results in longer
instruction process time.
INT, UINT, WORD unchanged
Other than INT, UINT, WORD longer process time
For details, refer to the Run time of Instruction Word in appendix of each controller functional
manual.

6F8C1226
26

1.5 System Flags
The following list shows the flags that are set when an error occurs within a function or
used in operation with carry.
Flags that are set when errors occur are described in Function and Error information
of each section.
These system flags are controller dependent. Therefore, refer to sections describing
variables in controller function manuals.

The flags below are common to all tasks for Integrated Controllers.

Flag Description Supported instruction
User carry flag
Carry flag used in operations with carry and in
shift and rotate instructions.
ADC, SBB, SHL, SHR,
ROL, ROR
Error flag
Set to TRUE(ON) when an error occurs during
function execution. Set together with the
following flags.

Boundary error flag
Set to TRUE(ON) when the address range is
exceeded in an indirect address specification.
LD,ST, and instructions specified
with pointers.
Divide error flag
Set to TRUE(ON) when divisor=0 occurs in a
divide instruction
DIV, MOD
BCD error flag
Set to TRUE(ON) when BCD data is outside the
range from 0 to 9 in BCD related instructions.
UINT_TO_BCD_WORD
WORD_BCD_TO_UINT etc.
Table operation error flag
Set to TRUE(ON) when the operation pointer is
outside the table size in the table operation
instructions.
TSET,TRST
Encode error flag
Set to TRUE(ON) when the encode error occurs
in the encode instructions.
ENC

1.5 System Flags
27

In the Unified Controller, the flags include common flags for all tasks for compatibility
with the Integrated Controller, and common tasks for each task.

System flag Description
Common for all tasks
For compatibility with the
Common for Priority 1 For EV/IP tasks
Common for Priority 2 For SS/IP tasks
Common for Priority 3 For HS tasks
Common for Priority 4 For MS tasks

Flag Description Supported instruction
User carry flag
Carry flag used in operations with carry and in
shift and rotate instructions.
ADC, SBB, SHL,
SHR, ROL, ROR
Error flag
Set to TRUE(ON) when an error occurs
during function execution. Set together with
the following flags.

Divide error flag
Set to TRUE(ON) when divisor=0 occurs in a
divide instruction.
DIV, MOD
BCD error flag
Set to TRUE(ON) when BCD data is outside
the range from 0 to 9 in BCD related
instructions.
UINT_TO_BCD_WORD
WORD_BCD_TO_UINT etc.
Table operation error flag
Set to TRUE(ON) when the operation pointer
is outside the table size in the table operation
instructions, or an unsupported variable is
specified in the table operation instructions or
function instructions.
TSET, TRST, TMOV, PLN etc.
Encode error flag
Set to TRUE(ON) when the encode error
occurs in the encode instructions.
ENC
ASC data conversion error flag
Set to TRUE(ON) when invalid ASCII code is
detected in ASCII data conversion in an
instruction handling ASCII data.
ASCDEC_TO_DINT,
DINT_TO_ASCDEC etc.

6F8C1226
28

1.6 Handling of REAL Data
In calculations using REAL data (four arithmetic operations such as ADD/SUB/MUL/DIV
and functions such as SIN/COS/PID), if "infinity/nonnumeric" is specified in the input
data, the calculation result becomes "infinity/nonnumeric," or the result becomes
"infinity/nonnumeric" during the calculation, the Integrated Controller and Unified
Controller perform the following calculations:

Integrated Controller Unified Controller
Infinity/Nonnumeric is
specified in the input data
Calculation is done by using the input
data as it is, so the calculation result
also becomes "infinity/nonnumeric."
For a function with EN, the ENO
output is set to OFF(FALSE).
Calculation is done by limiting the input
data to " maximum value."
For a function with EN, the ENO output is
set to OFF(FALSE).
Calculation result is
Infinity/Nonnumeric
The calculation result is outputted as it
is.
The calculation result is limited to "
maximum value" and outputted.
set to OFF(FALSE).
Result is
Infinity/Nonnumeric during
the calculation
Calculation is continued by using the
"infinity/nonnumeric" result during the
calculation, so the calculation result
also becomes "infinity/nonnumeric."
Calculation is continued by limiting the
result to " maximum value" during the
calculation.
set to OFF(FALSE).

Therefore, the range of real data of the Integrated Controller and Unified Controller is as
follows:

Input/output data
Integrated
Controller
Real data representation
Decimal
representation
S2/S3 L2/L3
Unified Controller
+Nonnumeric
+NAN
(not a number)
7FFF.FFFF
:
7F80.0001

+Infinity +INF(infinity) 7F80.0000
+NF
+3.4028235E+38
(+Maximum value)
Normalized
value
+3.4028235E+38(+Maximum value)
:
+1.1754944E-38
7F7F.FFFF
:
0080.0000
Unnormalized
value
+1.1754942E-38
:
+1.4012985E-45
007F.FFFF
:
0000.0001

+0 0000.0000 +0
Zero
-0 8000.0000
+0
-0
+0
Unnormalized
value
-1.4012985E-45
:
-1.1754942E-38
8000.0001
:
807F.FFFF
Normalized
value
-1.1754944E-38
:
-3.4028235E38(-Maximum value)
8080.0000
:
FF7F.FFFF

-Infinity -INF(infinity) FF80.0000
-Nonnumeric
-NAN
(not a number)
FF80.0001
:
FFFF.FFFF

-INF
-3.4028235E+38
(-Maximum value)
1.6 Handling of REAL Data
29

Important
In the Integrated Controller and Unified Controller, the calculation results are
different when "infinity" or "nonnumeric" is inputted in a calculation using real data, or
when the calculation result becomes "infinity" or "nonnumeric."
When real data is used in the user program and the effect of the difference exists,
the validity of calculation result="maximum value" can be ensured by writing the
program in the following manner.
When real calculation is needed, real calculation can be used as a function with EN
so that a factor resulting in a calculation result of "infinity" or "nonnumeric" can be
detected when ENO=FALSE(OFF).
The cautions on handling real data are as follows:
Check if it is within the expected input/output data range. Is the limit
processing required before or after the calculation?
In division, is there any division with divisor=0?
In data comparison, is it OK to use "=" (equality)?
When calculation is done as a function with EN and the ENO output is normal
(TRUE(ON)), is the calculation result required to be used?

1
6F8C1226
30

1.7 Instruction Behavior when Exceeding Data Boundary
When the data boundary is exceeded, the message User task data boundary is
exceeded appears in the error log. In this case, the data read from the variable is
treated as 0 and no write to variable is performed. The controller operation after the
error depends on information set in the controller parameter. The behavior of each
instruction is as follows:

Instruction
Data read
from
variable
Instruction output
Variable
write
Remarks
0 0
0 1
0 0
1 (when previous data=1 with
input=1) 0
0 (other than above)

Previous value is updated as
pulse function.

Previous value is updated as
pulse function.

LD 0
ST/SET

1.8 Step Counting
31

1.8 Step Counting
When a constant is used to specify an input argument or for index modification, or the
number of words exceeding 64k, there are cases where the step count is changed. This
is described below.

Specification by constant
One step if the data structure is a single word constant specification and two steps if the
data structure is a two word size constant specification.

index modification of BOOL variable
Increases by one step each time the level of index modification increased (increased by
one step for single index specification, by two steps for double index specification).
Examples of index modification using BOOL variable BOOL_VAL are shown below:

BOOL_VAL
1 step
BOOL_VAL[XI]
2 step
BOOL_VAL[XI][XJ]
3 step
No index modification
Single index modification
Double index modification

Index modification of WORD variable
For single word data type, double or more index specification results in increase of one
step and for double word data type, single or more index specification results in increase
of one step. Thereafter, the step is increased by one each time the level of index
modification increases as with BOOL variables. Examples of index modification of INT
variable INT_VAL and DINT variable DINT_VAL are shown below:

INT_VAL 1 step
DINT_VAL 1 step
No index modification
INT_VAL[XI] 1 step DINT_VAL[XI] 2 step
Single index modification
INT_VAL[XI][XJ] 2 step DINT_VAL[XI][XJ] 3 step
Double index modification
<INT variable> <Dint variable>

Note
Currently, only single index modification is allowed. Double index is not allowed (this is currently
under development).
6F8C1226
32
Variables whose word number exceeds 64k
The step increases by one when a variable whose word number exceeds 64k (word
number65536) is used. This variable usually corresponds with a user variable.

User variable

Word no.
+0
+65535
+65536
+81919
<When user variable size is 80kW>
Step increases by one when variable
whose word number exceeds 64k is
specified

1.9 How to Read Instruction Spec.
33

1.9 How to Read Instruction Spec.

[ST language notation]
S AMPLE2 := MOVE_INT(SAMPLE1);
Arguments:
The following data types are supported for input and output arguments and the instruction symbol depends on the data
type.
Arg. Operand Type Const. Description Remarks
Input Input
Output
See below
Output

Moving Move Data
LD/FBD language
notation

EN input Edge execution*3 Index modification Modifier

ST language notation Output := MOVE_(Input);
Input Output
MOVE_
Instruction name
Remarks *1
Graphical form
Program example
Whether modification is allowed
Description of the operation in
a program sample
Explanation of the instruction
LD, FBD, SFC language notation
ST language notation *2
ST language notation
Function
Input data is output as result.
Input Output
MOVE_

Input Symbol(_) Output
INT MOVE_INT Input
DINT MOVE_DINT INT
UNIT MOVE_UINT DINT
REAL MOVE_REAL UNIT
WORD MOVE_WORD REAL
DWORD MOVE_DWORD WORD
TIME MOVE_TIME DWORD
TOD MOVE_TOD TIME
DATE MOVE_DATE TOD
DT MOVE_DT DATE
STRING MOVE_STRING DT

Program example
[LD/FBD language notation]
Content of variable SAMPLE1 1234 is moved to variable sample SAMPLE2
SAMPLE1
1234
LD
SAMPLE2
1234
ST
MOVE_INT
: constant specification allowed
: constant specification not allowed
LD, FBD,SFC language notation

*1 The Remarks column provides the following information for instructions supported by
programmable controller PROSEC T series or Control Station PCS series, or supported exclusively
for Integrated Controller or Unified Controller.
Instruction unique to T series: :T compatible instruction
Instruction unique to PCS series: :PCS compatible instruction
Instruction unique toTOSDIC series: :TOSDIC compatible instruction
Dedicated instruction for Integrated Controller: :V dedicated instruction
Dedicated instruction for Unified Controller: : nv dedicated instruction
6F8C1226
34

*2 A function block is described as follows:

[Instance name] (Input argument 1, Input argument 2);
[Variable name] : = [Instance name]. Output argument1;
[Variable name] : = [Instance name]. Output argument 2;

Example: Ondelay timer (0.1ms/1ms/10ms/100ms/0.1 min)

[Instance name] (IN, PT);
[Variable name] : = [Instance name]. Q;
[Variable name] : = [Instance name]. ET;

Refer to Program example for the actual program displayed.
With regard to the function block name used for the [Instance name], specify TON,
TON_100MS, TONM_P for the data type during variable declaration.

*3 Edge execution is not currently supported.

1.10 Instruction List
35

The V series controller instructions are listed below. The following symbols are used in
the table.
: Supported from the initial version of the respective controller (available)

Number :Supported from the specified version of the respective controller (available)
: Not supported by the respective controller (Unavailable)
Carefully check the available instruction when programming.

Important
When an unsupported instruction is used during programming, the action depends on the
controller as follows:
[Integrated Controller S Controller and Unified Controller nv series]
POU using unsupported instruction is not downloaded to the controller. If it is downloaded, the
engineering tool displays an error message indicating that it is an unsupported message.
[Integrated Controller L Controller]
POU using unsupported message can be downloaded to the controller, but the program will go
into fallback mode or fail when it detects the unsupported instruction.

Nv series V series
Instruction Symbol
t
y
p
e
1

t
y
p
e
2

S
3

S
2

L
3

L
3
D
S

L
2

L
2
D
S

L
1

S
t
e
p

P
a
g
e

Contacts & Coils P.52
Normally Open Contact

1 P.53
Normally Closed Contact

1 P.54
Positive transition-
sensing Contact

2 P.55
Negative transition-
sensing Contact

2 P.56
Rising Edge Detector

1 P.57
Falling Edge Detector

1 P.58
Inverter

1 P.59
Coil

1 P.60
Negated Coil

1 P.61
SET Coil

1 P.62
RESET Coil

1 P.63
Positive Transition-sensing Coil

2 P.64
Negative Transition-sensing Coil

2 P.65
Forced Coil

1 P.66
Forced Negated Coil

1 P.67
Forced SET Coil 1 P.68
Forced RESET Coil 1 P.69
Forced Positive
Transition-sensing Coil
2 P.70
Forced Negative
2 P.71
6F8C1226
36

Instruction nv series V series
ContactCoil
Symbol
t
y
p
e
1

t
y
p
e
2

S
3

S
2

L
3

L
3
D
S

L
2

L
2
D
S

L
1

S
t
e
p

P
a
g
e

Execution Control P.72
Jump Control Set JCS

1 P.73
Jump Control Reset JCR

1 P.73
Jump

1 P.74
Label LABEL

1 P.74
Conditional Execution
Instruction

1 P.75
End of Conditional
Execution Instruction

1 P.75
Master Control Set MCS

1 P.76
Master Control Reset MCR

1 P.76
Counters P.77
Up Counter CTU

1 P.78
Down Counter CTD

1 P.80
Up Down Counter CTUD

1 P.82
Timers P.85
On-Delay Timer (0.1ms) TON_100us

STC 2 P.87
On-Delay Timer (1ms) TON

1 P.87
On-Delay Timer (10ms) TON_10ms

2 P.87
On-Delay Timer (100ms) TON_100ms

2 P.87
On-Delay Timer
(0.1 minute)
TONM_P

2 P.87
Off-Delay Timer (0.1ms) TOF_100us

STC 2 P.90
Off-Delay Timer (1ms) TOF

1 P.90
Off-Delay Timer (10ms) TOF_10ms

2 P.90
Off-Delay Timer (100ms) TOF_100ms

2 P.90
Off-Delay Timer (0.1
minute)
TOFM_P

2 P.90
Pulse Timer (0.1ms) TP_100us

STC 2 P.93
Pulse Timer (1ms) TP

1 P.93
Pulse Timer (10ms) TP_10ms

2 P.93
Pulse Timer (100ms) TP_100ms

2 P.93
Single Shot (100ms) SS_P

2 P.96
Single Shot (0.1 minute) SSM_P

2 P.96
Real Time Clock RTC

2 P.98
Real Time Clock RTC_N

2 P.100
On/Off-Delay Timer DEL_L

2.30
2 P.102
Flip-Flops
P104
Set Type Flip-Flop SR

2 P105
Reset Type Flip-Flop RS

2 P107
Semaphore SEMA

2 P109
Moving P.111
Gate

1 P.112
Normally Closed
Contact Gate

1 P.114
37

Instruction nv series V series
ContactCoil
Symbol
t
y
p
e
1

t
y
p
e
2

S
3

S
2

L
3

L
3
D
S

L
2

L
2
D
S

L
1

S
t
e
p

P
a
g
e

Moving
P111
MOVE_INT

1.30 1.10 2.30

1 P.116
MOVE_DINT

1.30 1.10 2.30

1 P.116
MOVE_UINT

1.30 1.10 2.30

1 P.116
MOVE_REAL

1.30 1.10 2.30

1 P.116
MOVE_WORD

1.30 1.10 2.30

1 P.116
MOVE_DWORD

1.30 1.10 2.30

1 P.116
MOVE_TIME

1.30 1.10 2.30

1 P.116
MOVE_TOD

1.30 1.10 2.30

1 P.116
MOVE_DATE

1.30 1.10 2.30

1 P.116
MOVE_DT

1.30 1.10 2.30

1 P.116
Move Data
MOVE_STRING 1 P.116
Move Table Data TMOV

2.30 1 P.118
XCHG_INT

2 P.120
XCHG_DINT

2 P.120
XCHG_UINT

2 P.120
XCHG_REAL

2 P.120
XCHG_WORD

2 P.120
XCHG_DWORD

2 P.120
XCHG_TIME

2 P.120
XCHG_TOD

2 P.120
Data Exchange
XCHG_DATE

2 P.120
TINZ_INT

1 P.122
TINZ_DINT

1 P.122
TINZ_UINT

1 P.122
TINZ_REAL

1 P.122
TINZ_WORD

1 P.122
TINZ_DWORD

1 P.122
TINZ_TIME

1 P.122
TINZ_TOD

1 P.122
TINZ_DATE

1 P.122
Initialize Table Data
TINZ_DT 1 P.122
Comparison P.124
GT_INT

1 P.125
GT_DINT

1 P.125
GT_UINT

1 P.125
GT_REAL

1 P.125
GT_WORD

1 P.125
GT_DWORD

1 P.125
GT_TIME

1 P.125
GT_TOD

1 P.125
GT_DATE 1 P.125
Greater Than
GT_DT 1 P.125
6F8C1226
38

nv series V series
Instruction Symbol
t
y
p
e
1

t
y
p
e
2

S
3

S
2

L
3

L
3
D
S

L
2

L
2
D
S

L
1

S
t
e
p

P
a
g
e

Comparison P.124
GE_INT

1 P.127
GE_DINT

1 P.127
GE_UINT

1 P.127
GE_REAL

1 P.127
GE_WORD

1 P.127
GE_DWORD

1 P.127
GE_TIME

1 P.127
GE_TOD

1 P.127
GE_DATE 1 P.127
Greater Than or Equal
GE_DT 1 P.127
EQ_INT

1 P.129
EQ_DINT

1 P.129
EQ_UINT

1 P.129
EQ_REAL

1 P.129
EQ_WORD

1 P.129
EQ_DWORD

1 P.129
EQ_TIME

1 P.129
EQ_TOD

1 P.129
EQ_DATE

1 P.129
Equal
EQ_DT 1 P.129
LE_INT

1 P.131
LE_DINT

1 P.131
LE_UINT

1 P.131
LE_REAL

1 P.131
LE_WORD

1 P.131
LE_DWORD

1 P.131
LE_TIME

1 P.131
LE_TOD

1 P.131
LE_DATE 1 P.131
Less Than or Equal
LE_DT 1 P.131
LT_INT

1 P.133
LT_DINT

1 P.133
LT_UINT

1 P.133
LT_REAL

1 P.133
LT_WORD

1 P.133
LT_DWORD

1 P.133
LT_TIME

1 P.133
LT_TOD

1 P.133
LT_DATE 1 P.133
Less Than
LT_DT 1 P.133

39

nv series V series
Instruction Symbol
t
y
p
e
1

t
y
p
e
2

S
3

S
2

L
3

L
3
D
S

L
2

L
2
D
S

L
1

S
t
e
p

P
a
g
e

Comparison P.124
NE_INT

1 P.135
NE_DINT

1 P.135
NE_UINT

1 P.135
NE_REAL

1 P.135
NE_WORD

1 P.135
NE_DWORD

1 P.135
NE_TIME

1 P.135
NE_TOD

1 P.135
NE_DATE

1 P.135
Not Equal
NE_DT 1 P.135
Comparison with Hysteresis
(greater than)
GT_L 2.30 2 P.137
(less than)
LT_L 2.30 2 P.139
(greater than or equal)
GE_L 2.30 2 P.141
(less than or equal)
LE_L 2.30 2 P.143
Selection P.145
MAX_INT

1 P.146
MAX_DINT

1 P.146
MAX_UINT

1 P.146
MAX_REAL

1 P.146
MAX_WORD

1 P.146
MAX_DWORD

1 P.146
MAX_TIME

1 P.146
MAX_TOD

1 P.146
MAX_DATE 1 P.146
Maximum
MAX_DT 1 P.146
MAXL_INT

1 P.148
MAXL_DINT

1 P.148
MAXL_UINT

1 P.148
MAXL_REAL

1 P.148
MAXL_TIME

1 P.148
MAXL_TOD

1 P.148
MAXL_DATE 1 P.148
Maximum of Table Data
MAXL_DT 1 P.148
MIN_INT

1 P.150
MIN_DINT

1 P.150
MIN_UINT

1 P.150
MIN_REAL

1 P.150
MIN_WORD

1 P.150
MIN_DWORD

1 P.150
MIN_TIME

1 P.150
MIN_TOD

1 P.150
MIN_DATE 1 P.150
Minimum
MIN_DT 1 P.150
6F8C1226
40

nv series V series
Instruction Symbol
t
y
p
e
1

t
y
p
e
2

S
3

S
2

L
3

L
3
D
S

L
2

L
2
D
S

L
1

S
t
e
p

P
a
g
e

Selection P.145
MINL_INT

1 P.152
MINL_DINT

1 P.152
MINL_UINT

1 P.152
MINL_REAL

1 P.152
MINL_TIME

1 P.152
MINL_TOD

1 P.152
MINL_DATE 1 P.152
Minimum of Table Data
MINL_DT 1 P.152
AVE_INT

1 P.154
AVE_DINT

1 P.154
AVE_UINT

1 P.154
AVE_REAL

1 P.154
Average Value
AVE_TIME

1 P.154
AVEL_INT

1 P156
AVEL_DINT

1 P.156
AVEL_UINT

1 P.156
AVEL_REAL

1 P.156
Average of Table Data
AVEL_TIME

1 P.156
LIMIT_INT

1 P.158
LIMIT_DINT

1 P.158
LIMIT_UINT

1 P.158
LIMIT_REAL

1 P.158
LIMIT_WORD

1 P.158
LIMIT_DWORD

1 P.158
LIMIT_TIME

1 P.158
LIMIT_TOD

1 P.158
LIMIT_DATE 1 P.158
Limiter
LIMIT_DT 1 P.158
SEL_BOOL

1 P.161
SEL_INT

1 P.161
SEL_DINT

1 P.161
SEL_UINT

1 P.161
SEL_REAL

1 P.161
SEL_WORD

1 P.161
SEL_DWORD

1 P.161
SEL_TIME

1 P.161
SEL_TOD

1 P.161
SEL_DATE

1 P.161
Selector
SEL_DT 1 P.161

41

nv series V series
Instruction Symbol
t
y
p
e
1

t
y
p
e
2

S
3

S
2

L
3

L
3
D
S

L
2

L
2
D
S

L
1

S
t
e
p

P
a
g
e

Selection P.145
MUX_BOOL

1 P.163
MUX_INT

1 P.163
MUX_DINT

1 P.163
MUX_UINT

1 P.163
MUX_WORD

1
P.163
MUX_DWORD

1 P.163
MUX_REAL

1 P.163
MUX_TIME

1 P.163
MUX_TOD

1 P.163
MUX_DATE

1 P.163
Multiplex
MUX_DT 1 P.163
MPX_INT

1 P.165
MPX_DINT

1 P.165
MPX_UINT

1 P.165
MPX_WORD

1 P.165
MPX_DWORD

1 P.165
MPX_REAL

1 P.165
MPX_TIME

1 P.165
MPX_TOD

1 P.165
MPX_DATE

1 P.165
Multiplex of Table
Data
MPX_DT 1 P.165
Type Conversion P.167
INT_TO_DINT

1.30 1.10 2.30

2.30 1 P.169
INT_TO_UINT

2.50 2.53 1 P.169
DINT_TO_INT

1.30 1.10 2.30
2.30 1 P.169
DINT_TO_UINT

2.50 2.53 1 P.169
UINT_TO_INT

2.50 2.53 1.30 1.10 2.30

2.30 1 P.169
Integer-Integer
Conversion
UINT_TO_DINT

2.50 2.53 1.30 1.10 2.30

2.30 1 P.169
INT_TO_REAL

1 P.171
DINT_TO_REAL

1 P.171
Integer-Real
Numbers
Conversion
UINT_TO_REAL

2.50 2.53 1.30 1.10 2.30

1.03 1 P.171
INT_TO_WORD

1.03 1 P.172
INT_TO_DWORD

2.50 2.53

1.03 1 P.172
DINT_TO_WORD

2.50 2.53 1 P.172
DINT_TO_DWORD

1.03 1 P.172
UINT_TO_WORD

1.03 1 P.172
Integer-Bit String
Conversion
UINT_TO_DWORD

2.50 2.53

1.03 1 P.172
INT_TO_BCD_WORD

2.50 2.53 1 P.174
INT_TO_BCD_DWORD

2.50 2.53 1 P.174
DINT_TO_BCD_WORD

2.50 2.53 1 P.174
DINT_TO_BCD_DWORD

1 P.174
UINT_TO_BCD_WORD

1 P.174
Integer-BCD
Conversion
UINT_TO_BCD_DWORD

2.50 2.53 1 P.174
6F8C1226
42

nv series V series
Instruction Symbol
t
y
p
e
1

t
y
p
e
2

S
3

S
2

L
3

L
3
D
S

L
2

L
2
D
S

L
1

S
t
e
p

P
a
g
e

INT_TO_TIME

2.50 2.53 1.30 1.10 2.30

2.30 1 P.176
DINT_TO_TIME

2.50 2.53 1.30 1.10 2.30

2.30 1 P.176
Integer-Duration
Conversion
UINT_TO_TIME

2.50 2.53 1.30 1.10 2.30

2.30 1 P.176
REAL_TO_INT

1 P.177
REAL_TO_DINT

1 P.177
Real Numbers Integer
Conversion
REAL_TO_UINT

2.50 2.53 1 P.177
REAL_TO_BCD_WORD

2.50 2.53 1 P.179 Real Numbers-BCD
Conversion REAL_TO_BCD_DWORD

2.50 2.53 1 P.179
Real
Numbers-Duration
Conversion
REAL_TO_TIME

2.50 2.53 1.30 1.10 2.30

1.03 1 P.181
WORD_TO_INT

1.03 1 P.183
WORD_TO_DINT

2.50 2.53

1.03 1 P.183
WORD_TO_UINT

1.03 1 P.183
DWORD_TO_INT

2.50 2.53 1 P.183
DWORD_TO_DINT

1.03 1 P.183
Bit String-Integer
Conversion
DWORD_TO_UINT

2.50 2.53 1 P.183
WORD_TO_DWORD

1.30 1.10 2.30

2.30 1 P.185 Bit String-Bit String
Conversion DWORD_TO_WORD

1.30 1.10 2.30

2.30 1 P.185
WORD_BCD_TO_INT

2.50 2.53 1 P.187
WORD_BCD_TO_DINT

2.50 2.53 1 P.187
WORD_BCD_TO_UINT

1 P.187
DWORD_BCD_TO_INT

2.50 2.53 1 P.187
DWORD_BCD_TO_DINT

1 P.187
BCD-Integer
Conversion
DWORD_BCD_TO_UINT

2.50 2.53 1 P.187
WORD_BCD_TO_REAL

2.50 2.53 1 P.189 BCD-Real Numbers
Conversion DWORD_BCD_TO_REAL

2.50 2.53 1 P.189
WORD_BCD_TO_TIME

2.50 2.53 1 P.191 BCD-Duration
Conversion DWORD_BCD_TO_TIME

2.50 2.53 1 P.191
TIME_TO_INT

2.50 2.53 1.30 1.10 2.30

2.30 1 P.193
TIME_TO_DINT

2.50 2.53 1.30 1.10 2.30

2.30 1 P.193
Duration-Integer
Conversion
TIME_TO_UINT

2.50 2.53

1 P.193
Duration-Real
Numbers Conversion
TIME_TO_REAL

2.50 2.53 1.30 1.10 2.30

1.03 1 P.195
TIME_TO_BCD_WORD

2.50 2.53 1 P.196 Duration-BCD
Conversion TIME_TO_BCD_DWORD

2.50 2.53 1 P.196
TRUNC_INT

1 P.198
TRUNC_DINT

1 P.198 Truncation
TRUNC_UINT

2.50 2.53 1 P.198
NEG_INT

1 P.200
NEG_DINT

1 P.200 Sign Negative
NEG_REAL

1 P.200
DEG-RAD Conversion DEG_TO_RAD

1 P.202
RAD-DEG Conversion RAD_TO_DEG

1 P.203
BIN_INT_P

1 P.204 BIN Conversion
BIN_DINT_P

1 P.204
43

nv series V series
Instruction Symbol
t
y
p
e
1

t
y
p
e
2

S
3

S
2

L
3

L
3
D
S

L
2

L
2
D
S

L
1

S
t
e
p

P
a
g
e

DT_TO_TOD

2.50 2.53 1 P.206
Time Data Type Conversion
DT_TO_DATE

2.50 2.53 1 P.206
Concatenate Time Data CONCAT_D_TOD

2.50 2.53 1 P.208
ASCII-HEX Conversion ATOH_T

1 P.210
HEX-ASCII Conversion HTOA_T

1 P.212
ASCII-Real Numbers Conversion ASC_TO_REAL

1 P.214
Real Numbers-ASCII Conversion REAL_TO_ASC

1 P.216
ASCII (decimal)-Double Integer Conversion ASCDEC_TO_DINT

2.50 2.53 1 P.219
ASCII (hexadecimal)-Double
Integer Conversion
ASCHEX_TO_DINT

2.50 2.53 1 P.222
Double Integer-ASCII (decimal) Conversion DINT_TO_ASCDEC

2.50 2.53 1 P.225
Double Integer-ASCII
(hexadecimal) Conversion
DINT_TO_ASCHEX

2.50 2.53 1 P.228
Array-String Conversion ARRAY_TO_STRING 1 P.231
String-Array Conversion STRING_TO_ARRAY 1 P.233
Tag Number Conversion TO_INDEX

1.1A 1.18 2.23 1 P.235
Numeric Function P.237
Square Root SQRT

1 P.238
Exponential EXP

1 P.239
Common Logarithms LOG

1 P.241
Natural Logarithms LN

1 P.243
ABS_INT

1 P.245
ABS_DINT

1 P.245 Absolute Value
ABS_REAL

1 P.245
Sine SIN

1 P.247
Cosine COS

1 P.249
Tangent TAN

1 P.251
Arcsine ASIN

1 P.253
Arccosine ACOS

1 P.255
Arctangent ATAN

1 P.257
Logical Operation P.259
AND_BOOL

1 P.260
AND_WORD

1 P.260 Bitwise Boolean AND
AND_DWORD

1 P.260
Bitwise Boolean AND of Table Data TAND

2.50 2.53 1 P.262
OR_BOOL

1 P.264
OR_WORD

1 P.264 Bitwise Boolean OR
OR_DWORD

1 P.264
Bitwise Boolean OR of Table Data TOR

2.50 2.53 1 P.266
NOT_BOOL

1 P.268
NOT_WORD

1 P.268 Bitwise Boolean NOT
NOT_DWORD

1 P.268
Bitwise Boolean NOT of Table Data TNOT

2.50 2.53 1 P.269
XOR_BOOL

1 P.271
XOR_WORD

1 P.271 Bitwise Boolean XOR
XOR_DWORD

1 P.271
6F8C1226
44

nv series V SERIES
Instruction Symbol
t
y
p
e
1

t
y
p
e
2

S
3

S
2

L
3

L
3
D
S

L
2

L
2
D
S

L
1

S
t
e
p

P
a
g
e

Logical Operation P.259
Bitwise Boolean XOR of
Table Data
TXOR

2.50 2.53 1 P.273
Bitwise Boolean NOT
XOR of Table Data
TXNR

2.50 2.53 1 P.275
TEST_WORD

1 P.277
Test
TEST_DWORD

1 P.277
Bit Opeation P.278
SHR_WORD

1 P.279
Shift Bits Right
SHR_DWORD

1 P.279
SHL_WORD

1 P.281
Shift Bits Left
SHL_DWORD

1 P.281
ROR_WORD

1 P.283
Rotate Bits Right
ROR_DWORD

1 P.283
ROL_WORD

1 P.285
Rotate Bits Left
ROL_DWORD

1 P.285
SFA_WORD_P

1 P.287
Arithmetic Shift
SFA_DWORD_P

1 P.287
SFL_WORD_P

1 P.289
Logical Shift
SFL_DWORD_P

1 P.289
Arithmetic Operation P.291
ADD_INT

1 P.292
ADD_DINT

1 P.292
ADD_UINT

1 P.292
Add
ADD_REAL

1 P.292
ADC_INT

1 P.294
Add with Carry
ADC_DINT

1 P.294
SUB_INT

1 P.296
SUB_DINT

1 P.296
SUB_UINT

1 P.296
Subtract
SUB_REAL

1 P.296
SBB_INT

1 P.298
Subtract with Carry
SBB_DINT

1 P.298
MUL_INT

1 P.300
MUL_DINT

1 P.300
MUL_UINT

1 P.300
MUL_REAL

1 P.300
Multiply
MUL_INT_DINT

1 P.302
DIV_INT

1 P.303
DIV_DINT

1 P.303
DIV_UINT

1 P.303
Divide
DIV_REAL

1 P.303
MOD_INT

1 P.305
MOD_DINT

1 P.305 Remainder
MOD_UINT

1 P.305
45

nv series V SERIES
Instruction Symbol
t
y
p
e
1

t
y
p
e
2

S
3

S
2

L
3

L
3
D
S

L
2

L
2
D
S

L
1

S
t
e
p

P
a
g
e

Arithmetic Operation P.291
INC_INT

1 P.307
INC_DINT

1 P.307
INC_UINT 1 P.307
INC_REAL 1 P.307
Increment
INC_TIME 1 P.307
DEC_INT

1 P.309
DEC_DINT

1 P.309
DEC_UINT 1 P.309
DEC_REAL 1 P.309
Decrement
DEC_TIME 1 P.309
EXPT_INT

1 P.311
EXPT_DINT

1 P.311
EXPT_UINT

1 P.311
Power
EXPT_REAL

1 P.311
ADD_T_T 1 P.313
ADD_TOD_T 1 P.313
ADD_DT_T 1 P.313
ADD_D_INT 1 P.313
ADD_D_DINT 1 P.313
Add Time Data
ADD_D_UINT 1 P.313
SUB_T_T 1 P.315
SUB_D_D 1 P.315
SUB_TOD_T 1 P.315
SUB_TOD_TOD 1 P.315
SUB_DT_T 1 P.315
SUB_DT_DT 1 P.315
SUB_D_D_INT 1 P.315
SUB_D_D_DINT 1 P.315
SUB_D_D_UINT 1 P.315
SUB_D_INT 1 P.315
SUB_D_DINT 1 P.315
Subtract Time Data
SUB_D_UINT 1 P.315
MUL_T_INT 1 P.317
MUL_T_DINT 1 P.317 Multiply Time Data
MUL_T_UINT 1 P.317
DIV_T_INT 1 P.319
DIV_T_DINT 1 P.319 Divide Time Data
DIV_T_UINT 1 P.319
Data Processing P.321
Set Carry SETC

1 P.322
Reset Carry RSTC

1 P.323
6F8C1226
46

nv series V SERIES
Instruction Symbol
t
y
p
e
1

t
y
p
e
2

S
3

S
2

L
3

L
3
D
S

L
2

L
2
D
S

L
1

S
t
e
p

P
a
g
e

Data Processing P.321
ENC_WORD_INT

2.50 2.53 1 P.324
ENC_WORD_DINT

2.50 2.53 1 P.324
ENC_DWORD_INT

2.50 2.53 1 P.324
Encode
ENC_DWORD_DINT

2.50 2.53 1 P.324
DEC_INT_WORD

2.50 2.53 1 P.326
DEC_INT_DWORD

2.50 2.53 1 P.326
DEC_DINT_WORD

2.50 2.53 1 P.326
Decode
DEC_DINT_DWORD

2.50 2.53 1 P.326
BC_WORD

2.50 2.53 1 P.328
Bit Counter
BC_DWORD

2.50 2.53 1 P.328
TSET_INT

2.50 2.53 1 P.329
TSET_DINT

2.50 2.53 1 P.329
TSET_WORD

2.50 2.53 1 P.329
Table Bit Set
TSET_DWORD

2.50 2.53 1 P.329
TRST_INT

2.50 2.53 1 P.331
TRST_DINT

2.50 2.53 1 P.331
TRST_WORD

2.50 2.53 1 P.331
Table Bit Reset
TRST_DWORD

2.50 2.53 1 P.331
I/O P.333
I/O Memory Read MREAD

1.35 1.10 2.10

1 P.334
I/O Memory Write MWRITE

1.35 1.10 2.10

1 P.337
I/O Memory Read (nv) MREAD_N 1.20 1.70 2 P.340
I/O Memory Write (nv) MWRITE_N 1.20 1.70 2 P.343
ASC Module String Data Input ASCREAD 1 P.346
ASC Module String Data Output ASCWRITE 1 P.349
State Change Detection Read GET_IP_INF

2.06 2.52 1 P.352
Direct I/O IO_T 2.50 2.53 1 P.355
I/O Node State Read GET_SIO_STS

1 P357
I/O Module State Read GET_IO_STS

1 P.361
I/O Fallback Request IOFB_REQ

1 P.365
I/O Fallback Recovery Request IORC_REQ

1 P.367
Drive Device State Read GET_DRV_STS 1.20 1 P.369
Process Operation P.371
DB_INT

1 P.372
DB_DINT

1 P.372 Dead Band
DB_REAL

1 P.372
Derivative DIF2

2 P.374
Integrator INTG

2 P.377
Super Two Degrees of
Freedom PID
PID2

2 P.380
MV Calculation MVS

2 P.385
Fix MV MVF

2.50 2.53

1 P.388
PLN_INT

1 P.390 Polygonal Line
Function PLN_REAL

1 P.390
Polygonal Line Function
(high-speed version)
PLN_REAL2 1.20 1 P.393
47

nv series V SERIES
Instruction Symbol
t
y
p
e
1

t
y
p
e
2

S
3

S
2

L
3

L
3
D
S

L
2

L
2
D
S

L
1

S
t
e
p

P
a
g
e

Process Operation P.371
ILNL_INT

2.50 2.53 1 P.395 Inverse Polygonal
Line Function ILNL_REAL

2.50 2.53

1 P.395
Inverse Polygonal Line Function
(highspeed version)
ILNL_REAL2 1.20 1 P.399
Dead Time DT

1 P.402
Moving Average (highspeed version) MAV

2.50 2.53

1 P.406
Moving Average
(low-speed version)
MAV_N
1.32/
3.10
1 P.410
DLM_INT

2 P.414
DLM_DINT

2 P.414 Rate Limiter
DLM_REAL

2 P.414
Lag/Lead Filter LAG2

2 P.416
Engineering Unit Conversion UNT

2.50 2.53

1 P.418
Percent Conversion PCT

2.50 2.53

1 P.420
Essential Succession PID PID3

2.50 2.53 2 P.422
Estimate with Reset RSM_L 2.30 2 P.430
Parameter Structure P.433
Program Control P.451
Return RETURN

1 P.452

1 P.453

2/3 P.454
Program Enable EN_P

1 P.456
Program Disable DIS_P

1 P.458
Event Program Startup START_P

1 P.460
Interrupt Enable EI_T

1 P.463
Interrupt Disable DI_T

1 P.464
String Processing P.465
String Length LEN 1 P.466
Leftmost extract string LEFT 1 P.467
Rightmost extract string RIGHT 1 P.469
Extract String MID 1 P.471
Concatenate string CONCAT_STRING 1 P.473
Insert String INSERT 1 P.475
Delete String DELETE 1 P.477
Replace String REPLACE 1 P.479
Find String FIND 1 P.481
Define String DEF_STRING 1 P.483
Control Statements P.485
IF IF

1 P.486
THEN THEN

1 P.488
ELSE (IFstatement) ELSE

1 P.490
ELSEIF ELSEIF

1 P.492
END_IF END_IF

1 P.494
CASE CASE

1 P.495

1 P.497
. . . .

1 P.499
6F8C1226
48

nv series V SERIES
Instruction Symbol
t
y
p
e
1

t
y
p
e
2

S
3

S
2

L
3

L
3
D
S

L
2

L
2
D
S

L
1

S
t
e
p

P
a
g
e

Control Statements P.485
, ,

1 P.501
. . , . . ,

1 P.503
ELSE (CASE statement) ELSE

1 P.505
END_CASE END_CASE

1 P.507
FOR_DO FOR_DO

1 P.509
EXIT (FOR statement) EXIT

1 P.511
END_FOR END_FOR

1 P.513
WHILE WHILE

1 P.514
DO DO

1 P.515
EXIT (WHILE statement) EXIT

1 P.516
END_WHILE END_WHILE

1 P.518
REPEAT REPEAT

1 P.519
UNTIL UNTIL

1 P.520
EXIT (REPEAT statement) EXIT

1 P.521
END_REPEAT END_REPEAT

1 P.523
Communication P.524
Socket Communication Send USEND_T

1.20 2 P.525
Socket Communication Send USEND_N

2 P.542
Socket Communication Receive URCV_T

1.20 2 P.558
Socket Communication Receive URCV_N

2 P.570
Communication FB (XMIT_T) XMIT_T 2.50 2.50 2 P.590
Communication FB (XMIT_N) XMIT_N 1.20 2 P.592
Duplex Control P.594
Duplex Online-Standby Change DUPLEX_CHG

1.37 1.10 2.35

1 P.595
Duplex Self-System Down DUPLEX_DOWN

1.37 1.10 2.35

1 P.597
Partial Equalizer
(variable specification)
EQUALIZE_VAR 2.50 2.53 1 P.599
Partial Equalizer (address
specification)
EQUALIZE_ADDR 2.50 2.53 1 P.601
Process Control P.603
Current Output PID PID_P

1.10

2.00 2 P.605
Current Output Sample PI SPI_P

2 P.612
Pulse Output PID PIDP_P

1.10

2.00 2 P.618
Pulse Output Sample PI SPIP_P

2 P.623
Feed Forward FFD_P

2 P.629
Double Cross Limit DCL_P

1.10

2.00 2 P.633
Tag Operation P.638
Change Adjuster Mode CMLP_P

1.10

1 P.639
Change Push Button Mode CMPB_P

1.10

1 P.641
Change Sequence Mode CMSQ_P

1.10

1 P.643
Set SV SSV_P

1.10

1 P.645
Reset SV RSV_P

1.10

1 P.649
Set MV SMV_P

1.10

1 P.651
49

nv series V SERIES
Instruction Symbol
t
y
p
e
1

t
y
p
e
2

S
3

S
2

L
3

L
3
D
S

L
2

L
2
D
S

L
1

S
t
e
p

P
a
g
e

Tag Operation P.638
Reset MV RMV_P

1.10

1 P.655
Shut CV SCV_P

1.10

1 P.657
Push Button ON PB_P

1.10

1 P.661
Push Button Lock LB_P

1.10

1 P.664
Action Timer ACT_P

1.10

1 P.666
Action Counter ACC_P

1.10

1 P.670
Self Step Jump SJ_P

1.10

1 P.674
Reset Jump RJ_P

1.10

1 P.678
Reset Jump2 RJ_P2 1.60 1 P.682
SFC Initialize INI_STEP 1.60 1 P.684
RAS P.686
Cyclic Trace DATALOGC

2.17 2.52 2 P.687
Calendar Data Acquisition GET_CLND

1 P.689
Interlock Diagnosis DIAG_D
2.75 2 P.691
Interlock Diagnosis with First Fault
Diagnosis Permission Input
DIAG_D2 1.50
2.7J/
3.7E
2 P.694
SFC P.699
Step

1 P.701
Initial Step

2 P.703
Transition

2 P.704
Divergence/Conver
gence of Sequence

2 P.706
Divergence/Conver
gence of Simultaneous Sequences

2 P.707
Link

2 P.708
Action (BOOL type)

3 P.710
Action (User defined type)

3/5 P.710
Sequence

2 P.717
Phase Step

5 P.720
6F8C1226
50

nv series V SERIES
Instruction Symbol
t
y
p
e
1

t
y
p
e
2

S
3

S
2

L
3

L
3
D
S

L
2

L
2
D
S

L
1

S
t
e
p

P
a
g
e

SFC P.699
Phase End Step

1 P.723
Answer Step

3 P.725
Phase Step 2 1.60 4 P.727
Answer Step 2 1.60 3 P.729

2
Ph2

51
Chapter 2
LD/FBD Instructions

2.1 Contacts & Coils52
2.2 Execution Control 72
2.3 Counters 77
2.4 Timers85
2.5 FlipFlops 104
2.6 Moving111
2.7 Comparison 124
2.8 Selection 145
2.9 Type Conversion 167
2.10 Numeric Function 237
2.11 Logical Operation 259
2.12 Bit Operation 278
2.13 Arithmetic Operation 291
2.14 Data Processing 321
2.15 I/O 333
2.16 Process Operation 371
2.17 Program Control 451
2.18 String Processing 465
2.19 Control Statements 485
2.20 Communication 524
2.21 Duplex Control 594
2.22 Process Control 603
2.23 Tag Operation 638
2.24 RAS 686

Chapter 2 LD/FBD Instructions
6F8C1226
52
2.1 Contacts & Coils

No. Instruction Remarks
1
2

3
Positive Transition-sensing
Contact

4
Negative Transition-sensing
Contact

5
6
7
Inverter
8
Coil
9
Negated Coil
10
SET Coil
11
RESET Coil
12
Positive Transition-sensing
Coil

13
Negative Transition-sensing
Coil

14
Forced Coil
15
Forced Negated Coil
16
Forced SET Coil
17
Forced RESET Coil
18
Forced Positive

19
Forced Negative

53


Contacts & Coils Normally Open Contact
LD/FBD language
notation

Variable (BOOL)
Input Output

EN input Edge execution Index modification
Modifier

Function
Normally open contact of variable (BOOL).

Input Condition Output
FALSE(OFF) Regardless of variable (BOOL) state FALSE(OFF)
Variable (BOOL)=FALSE(OFF) FALSE(OFF)
TRUE(ON)
Variable (BOOL)=TRUE(ON) TRUE(ON)

Program example

SIGNAL2 SIGNAL3

SIGNAL1

Coil SIGNAL3 is TRUE(ON) only when states of SIGNAL1 and SIGNAL2 are both
TRUE(ON).

SIGNAL1
SIGNAL2
SIGNAL3

Error information
When there is a boundary error due to index modification, the value of variable
(BOOL) is treated as FALSE(OFF) and the data boundary is exceeded.

6F8C1226
54


Contacts & Coils Normally Closed Contact
LD/FBD language
notation

Variable (BOOL)
Input Output

Modifier

Function
Relay coil b contact (normally closed contact) corresponding to variable (BOOL).

Variable (BOOL) = FALSE(OFF) TRUE(ON)
TRUE(ON)
Variable (BOOL) = TRUE(ON) FALSE(OFF)

Program example

SIGNAL2 SIGNAL3 SIGNAL1

Coil SIGNAL3 is TRUE(ON) only when states of both SIGNAL1, SIGNAL2 are
FALSE(OFF).

SIGNAL1
SIGNAL2
SIGNAL3

Error information

55

Positive Transitionsensing Contact

Contacts & Coils Positive Transitionsensing Contact
LD/FBD language
notation

Variable (BOOL)
P Input Output

Modifier

Function
The output is kept TRUE(ON) for one scan time only when the input is
TRUE(ON) and the variable (BOOL) changes from FALSE(OFF) to TRUE(ON).

FALSE (OFF) Regardless of variable (BOOL) state FALSE(OFF)
Variable (BOOL) = FALSE(OFF) FALSE(OFF) FALSE(OFF)
Variable (BOOL) = TRUE(ON) FALSE(OFF) FALSE(OFF)
Variable (BOOL) = FALSE(OFF) TRUE(ON) TRUE(ON)
TRUE (ON)
Variable (BOOL) = TRUE(ON) TRUE(ON) FALSE(OFF)

Program example

P
SIGNAL2 SIGNAL3

SIGNAL1

When the SIGNAL1 is TRUE(ON) and SIGNAL2 changes from FALSE(OFF)
to TRUE (ON), coil SIGNAL3 keeps TRUE(ON) for one scan time only.

t t t : 1 scan time
SIGNAL2
SIGNAL3
SIGNAL1

Error information
6F8C1226
56

Negative Transitionsensing Contact

Contacts & Coils Negative Transitionsensing Contact
LD/FBD language
notation

Variable (BOOL)
N Input Output

Modifier

Function
The output is kept TRUE(ON) for one scan time when the input is TRUE(ON) and
variable (BOOL) changes from TRUE(ON) to FALSE(OFF).

Variable (BOOL) = FALSE(OFF) FALSE(OFF) FALSE(OFF)
Variable (BOOL) = TRUE(ON) FALSE(OFF) TRUE(ON)
Variable (BOOL) = FALSE(OFF) TRUE(ON) FALSE(OFF)
TRUE(ON)
Variable (BOOL) = TRUE(ON) TRUE(ON) FALSE(OFF)

Program example

N
SIGNAL2 SIGNAL3

SIGNAL1

When the SIGNAL1 is TRUE(ON) and SIGNAL2 changed from TRUE(ON) to FALSE
(OFF), coil SIGNAL3 keeps TRUE(ON) for one scan time only.

t t t : 1 scan time
SIGNAL2
SIGNAL3
SIGNAL1

Error information
57


Contacts & Coils Rising Edge Detector
LD/FBD language
notation

Input Output
Modifier

Function
The output is kept TRUE(ON) for one scan time, when the input changes from
FALSE(OFF) to TRUE(ON).

FALSE(OFF) Regardless of previous input state FALSE(OFF)
Previous input = FALSE(OFF) TRUE(ON)
TRUE(ON)
Previous input = TRUE(ON) FALSE(OFF)

Program example

SIGNAL2

SIGNAL1

The coil SIGNAL2 keeps TRUE(ON) for one scan time only when SIGNAL1
changes from FALSE(OFF) to TRUE(ON).

t t t
t1 scan time
SIGNAL2
SIGNAL1

6F8C1226
58


Contacts & Coils Falling Edge Detector
LD/FBD language
notation

Input Output
Modifier

Function
The output is kept TRUE(ON) for one scan time, when the input changes from
TRUE(ON) to FALSE(OFF).

Previous input = FALSE(OFF) FALSE(OFF)
FALSE(OFF)
Previous input = TRUE(ON) TRUE(ON)
TRUE(ON) Regardless of previous input state FALSE(OFF)

Program example

SIGNAL2

SIGNAL1

The coil SIGNAL2 keeps TRUE(ON) for one scan time only when the SIGNAL1
changes from TRUE(ON) to FALSE(OFF).

t t t
t : 1 scan time
SIGNAL2
SIGNAL1

59

Inverter

Contacts & Coils Inverter
LD/FBD language
notation

I Input Output
Modifier

Function
When the input is TRUE(ON), output is FALSE(OFF). When the input is FALSE (OFF),
the output is TRUE(ON).

FALSE(OFF) TRUE(ON)
TRUE(ON) FALSE(OFF)

Program example

I
SIGNAL2

SIGNAL1

When the SIGNAL1 is TRUE(ON), coil SIGNAL2 is FALSE(OFF).
When the SIGNAL1 is FALSE(OFF), coil SIGNAL2 is TRUE(ON).
SIGNAL2
SIGNAL1

6F8C1226
60

Coil

Contacts & Coils Coil
LD/FBD language
notation

Variable (BOOL)
Input

Modifier

Function
Relay coil of a variable (BOOL) that stores the input state in the variable (BOOL).

Input Action Output
FALSE(OFF) Variable (BOOL)=FALSE(OFF)
TRUE(ON) Variable (BOOL)=TRUE(ON)

Program example

SIGNAL2 SIGNAL3

SIGNAL1

The coil SIGNAL3 is TRUE(ON) only when the state of both SIGNAL1 and SIGNAL2
are TRUE(ON).

SIGNAL2
SIGNAL3
SIGNAL1

Error information
(BOOL) is unchanged and the data boundary is exceeded.

61

Negated Coil

Contacts & Coils Negated Coil
LD/FBD language
notation

Variable (BOOL)
Input

Modifier

Function
The negated coil of a variable (BOOL) that stores the negated input state in the
variable (BOOL).

Input Action Output
FALSE(OFF) Variable (BOOL)=TRUE(ON)
TRUE(ON) Variable (BOOL)=FALSE(OFF)

Program example

SIGNAL2 SIGNAL3

SIGNAL1

The coil SIGNAL 3 is FALSE(OFF) only when the state of both SIGNAL1 and
SIGNAL2 are TRUE(ON).

SIGNAL2
SIGNAL3
SIGNAL1

Error information
(BOOL)is unchanged and the data boundary is exceeded.
6F8C1226
62

SET Coil

Contacts & Coils SET Coil
LD/FBD language
notation

Variable (BOOL)
S Input

Modifier

Function
Set coil of a variable (BOOL) that sets variable (BOOL) to TRUE(ON) when the input
state is TRUE(ON).

Input Action Output
FALSE(OFF) Variable (BOOL)=unchanged
TRUE(ON) Variable (BOOL)=TRUE(ON)

Program example

SIGNAL2 SIGNAL3

SIGNAL1
S

The coil SIGNAL3 is set when the state of both SIGNAL1 and SIGNAL2 are
TRUE(ON). Then, SIGNAL3 remains TRUE(ON) even when SET coil input is
FALSE(OFF).

SIGNAL2
SIGNAL3
SIGNAL1

Error information
63

RESET Coil

Contacts & Coils RESET Coil
LD/FBD language
notation

Variable (BOOL)
R Input

Modifier

Function
Reset coil of a variable (BOOL) that resets variable (BOOL) to FALSE(OFF) when the
input state is TRUE(ON).

Input Action Output
FALSE(OFF) Variable (BOOL)=unchanged

Program example

SIGNAL2 SIGNAL3

SIGNAL1
R

The coil SIGNAL3 is reset when the state of both SIGNAL1 and SIGNAL2 are
TRUE(ON). Then, SIGNAL3 remains FALSE(OFF) even when RESET coil input is
FALSE(OFF).

SIGNAL2
SIGNAL3
SIGNAL1

Error information

6F8C1226
64

Positive Transition-sensing Coil

Contacts & Coils Positive Transition-sensing Coil
LD/FBD language
notation

Variable (BOOL)
P Input

Modifier

Function
When the input changes from FALSE(OFF) to TRUE(ON), variable (BOOL) is kept to
TRUE(ON) for one scan time only.

Input Action Output
FALSE(OFF) Variable (BOOL)=FALSE(OFF)
When previous input=FALSE(OFF), variable
(BOOL)=TRUE(ON)

TRUE(ON)
When previous Input=TRUE(ON), variable
(BOOL)=FALSE(OFF)

Program example

SIGNAL2 SIGNAL1

P

The SIGNAL2 is kept to TRUE(ON) only when the SIGNAL1 changes from

t t t
t : 1 scan time
SIGNAL2
SIGNAL1

Error information
(BOOL) is unchanged and the data boundary is exceeded. However, the input state for
pulse operation is saved.

65

Negative Transition-sensing Coil

Contacts & Coils Negative Transition-sensing Coil
LD/FBD language
notation

Variable (BOOL)
N Input

Modifier

Function
When the input changed from TRUE(ON) to FALSE(OFF), the variable (BOOL) is kept
to TRUE(ON) for one scan time only.

Input Action Output
When previous Input=FALSE(OFF),variable (BOOL)=FALSE(OFF)
FALSE(OFF)
When previous Input=TRUE(ON), variable (BOOL)=TRUE(ON)

Program example

SIGNAL2 SIGNAL1

N

The SIGNAL2 is TRUE(ON) for only one scan time, only when SIGNAL1 changes
from TRUE(ON) to FALSE(OFF).

t t t
t : 1 scan time
SIGNAL2
SIGNAL1

Error information
6F8C1226
66

Forced Coil

Contacts & Coils Forced Coil
LD/FBD language
notation

Input
Variable (BOOL)

Modifier

Function
A coil that retains the state of a variable (BOOL) when forced, regardless of the input
state.
The operation as forced coil is not guaranteed when the same variable is used as coil
in more than one place.

Input Action Output
FALSE(OFF) Variable (BOOL)=retains previous state
TRUE(ON) Variable (BOOL)=retains previous state

Program example

SIGNAL2 SIGNAL1

The forced set state of SIGNAL2 is retained regardless of the state of SIGNAL1.
If the state of SIGNAL2 just before being forced set is TRUE(ON), the forced coil
retains the TRUE(ON) state (see Ex. 1).
If the state of SIGNAL2 just before being forced set is FALSE(OFF), the forced coil
retains the FALSE(OFF) state (see Ex. 2).

SIGNAL1

SIGNAL2

Set forced
Ex.1 Ex.2
Set forced Reset
forced
Reset
f orced

Error information
67

Forced Negated Coil

Contacts & Coils Forced Negated Coil
LD/FBD language
notation

Input
Variable (BOOL)

Modifier

Function
A negated coil that retains the state of a variable (BOOL) when forced, regardless of
the input state.
The operation as forced negated coil is not guaranteed when the same variable is
used as coil in more than one place.

Input Action Output
FALSE(OFF) Variable (BOOL)=retains previous
state

TRUE(ON) Variable (BOOL)=retains previous
state

Program example

SIGNAL2 SIGNAL1

If the state of SIGNAL2 just before being forced set is FALSE(OFF), the forced
negated coil retains the FALSE(OFF) state (see Ex. 1).
If the state of SIGNAL2 just before being forced set is TRUE(ON), the forced negated
coil retains the TRUE(ON) state (see Ex. 2).

Ex.1 Ex.2
Set forced Set forced Reset
forced
Reset
forced
SIGNAL2
SIGNAL1

Error information
6F8C1226
68

Forced SET Coil

Contacts & Coils Forced SET Coil
LD/FBD language
notation

S Input
Variable (BOOL)

Modifier

Function
A SET coil that retains the state of a variable (BOOL) when forced, regardless of the
input state.
The operation as forced SET coil is not guaranteed when the same variable is used as
coil in more than one place.

Input Action Output
FALSE(OFF) Variable (BOOL) = retains previous state
TRUE(ON) Variable (BOOL) = retains previous state

Program example

SIGNAL2 SIGNAL1
S

If the state of SIGNAL2 just before being forced set is FALSE(OFF), the forced SET
coil retains the FALSE(OFF) state (see Ex. 1).
If the state of SIGNAL2 just before being forced set is TRUE(ON), the forced SET coil
retains the TRUE(ON) state (see Ex. 2).

SIGNAL1

SIGNAL2

Ex.1 Ex.2
Set forced Reset
forced
Set forced Reset
forced

Error information
69

Forced RESET Coil

Contacts & Coils Forced RESET Coil
LD/FBD
language notation

R Input
Variable (BOOL)

Modifier

Function
A RESET coil that retains the state of a variable (BOOL) when forced, regardless of
the input state.
The operation as forced RESET coil is not guaranteed when the same variable is used
as coil in more than one place.

Input Action Output

Program example

SIGNAL2 SIGNAL1
R

If the state of SIGNAL2 just before being forced set is TRUE(ON), the forced RESET
coil retains the TRUE(ON) state (see Ex. 1).
If the state of SIGNAL2 just before being forced set is FALSE(OFF), the forced RESET
coil retains the FALSE(OFF) state (see Ex. 2).

SIGNAL1

SIGNAL2

Ex.1 Ex.2
Reset
forced
forced

Error information
6F8C1226
70

Forced Positive Transition-sensing Coil

Contacts & Coils Forced Positive Transition-sensing Coil
LD/FBD language
notation

P Input
Variable (BOOL)

Modifier

Function
A forced positive transitionsensing coil that retains the state of a variable (BOOL)
when forced, regardless of the input state.
The operation as forced positive transitionsensing coil is not guaranteed when the
same variable is used as coil in more than one place.

Input Action Output

Program example

SIGNAL2 SIGNAL1
P

If the state of SIGNAL2 just before being forced set is FALSE(OFF), the forced positive
transitionsensing coil retains the FALSE(OFF) state (see Ex. 1).
If the state of SIGNAL2 just before being forced set is TRUE(ON), the forced positive
transitionsensing coil retains the TRUE(ON) state (see Ex. 2).

SIGNAL1

SIGNAL2

Ex.1 Ex.2
t t
t : 1 scan time Set forced Reset
forced
Set forced Reset
forced

Error information
71

Forced Negative Transition-sensing Coil

Contacts & Coils Forced Negative Transition-sensing Coil
LD/FBD language
notation

N Input
Variable (BOOL)

Modifier

Function
A forced negative transition-sensing coil that retains the state of a variable (BOOL)
when forced, regardless of the input state.
The operation as forced negative transition-sensing coil is not guaranteed when the
same variable is used as coil in more than one place.

Input Action Output

Program example

SIGNAL2 SIGNAL1
N

If the state of SIGNAL2 just before being forced set is TRUE(ON), the forced negative
transitionsensing coil retains the TRUE(ON) state (see Ex. 1).
If the state of SIGNAL2 just before being forced set is FALSE(OFF), the forced
negative transitionsensing coil retains the FALSE(OFF) state (see Ex. 2).

SIGNAL2
SIGNAL1
Ex.1
Ex.2
t t
t : 1 scan time
t
forced
Reset
forced

Error information
6F8C1226
72

2.2 Execution Control

1 Jump Control Set JCS

2 Jump Control Reset JCR

3 Jump

4 Label LABEL

5 Conditional Execution Instruction

6
End of Conditional Execution
Instruction

7 Master Control Set MCS

8 Master Control Reset MCR

73

Jump Control Set/Reset

Execution Control Jump Control Set/Reset
LD/FBD language
notation

Condition input JCS
Circuit P

JCR
Modifier

Function
When the input to JCS is TRUE(ON), instructions between JCS and JCR are skipped
and instructions are executed from JCR.
When the input to JCS is FALSE(OFF), instructions between JCS and JCR are
executed.
JCS and JCR must be used as pair. JCS must always be described before JCR.
The JCS-JCR combination may be nested.

Input Action Output
FALSE(OFF) Jump not performed
TRUE(ON) Jump performed

Program example

SIGNAL1
JCS
JCR
Circuit A
Circuit B

When the SIGNAL1 is FALSE(OFF), Circuit A and Circuit B instructions are executed.
When the SIGNAL1 is TRUE(ON), Circuit A is not executed and instructions are
executed from Circuit B.

6F8C1226
74

Jump/Label

Execution Control Jump/Label
LD/FBD language
notation

Condition input
Circuit P
Label

Label
LABEL:
Modifier

Function
When the input to jump instruction is TRUE(ON), instructions between Jump and
Label are skipped and instructions are executed from Label instruction.
When the input to jump instruction is FALSE(OFF), instructions between jump and
label are executed.
Jump and Label instructions must be used as pair. The JumpLabel instructions may
be nested.

Input Action Output
FALSE(OFF) Jump not performed
TRUE(ON) Jump performed

Program example

SIGNAL1
Circuit A
Circuit B
JMP_A
LABEL
JMP_A

When the SIGNAL1 is FALSE(OFF), Circuit A and Circuit B instructions are executed.
When the SIGNAL1 is TRUE(ON), Circuit A is not executed and instructions are

75

Conditional Execution Instruction/End of Conditional Execution Instruction

Execution Control
Conditional Execution Instruction/End of Conditional
Execution Instruction

LD/FBD language
notation

Condition
input
Circuit P

Modifier

Function
When the input to Conditional execution instruction is FALSE(OFF), instructions
between Conditional execution instruction and End of conditional execution instruction
are skipped and instructions are executed from End of conditional execution
instruction.
When the input to Conditional execution instruction is TRUE(ON), instructions
between Conditional execution instruction and End of conditional execution instruction
are executed.
Conditional execution instruction and End of conditional execution instruction must be
used as pair.
The Conditional execution instruction and end of conditional execution instruction may
be nested.

Input Action Output
FALSE(OFF) Jump performed
TRUE(ON) Jump not performed

Program example

SIGNAL1
Circuit A
Circuit B

When SIGNAL1 is TRUE(ON), Circuit A and Circuit B instructions are executed.
When SIGNAL1 is FALSE(OFF), Circuit A is not executed and instructions are
6F8C1226
76

Master Control Set/Reset

Execution Control Master Control Set/Reset
LD/FBD
language notation

Condition input MCS
Circuit P

MCR
Modifier

Function
When input to MCS is FALSE(OFF), the power rail input between MCS and MCR is
reset to FALSE(OFF).
When input to MCS is TRUE(ON), normal operation is performed.
MCS and MCR must be used as pair. MCS must always come before MCR. MCS
MCR combination cannot be nested.

Input Action Output
FALSE(OFF) Power rail input FALSE(OFF)
TRUE(ON) Normal operation

Program example

Circuit A1

Circui t A2

SIGNAL1
MCS
MCR
Circuit B
MOVE_INT SAMPLE1
ST
1234
LD
MOVE_INT
EN ENO
5678
LD

SIGNAL2

SIGNAL3
SAMPLE2
SET

When SIGNAL1 is FALSE(OFF):
Circuit A1, Circuit B : Normal operation
Circuit A2 : Operates as SIGNAL2 input=FALSE(OFF) with
SIGNAL3=FALSE(OFF) and SAMPLE2=previous value.
When SIGNAL1 is TRUE(ON), Circuit A1, Circuit A2 and Circuit B operate normally.

2.3 Counters
77

2.3 Counters

1 Up Counter CTU

2 Down Counter CTD

3 Up Down Counter CTUD

6F8C1226
78

Up Counter

Counters Up Counter
LD/FBD language
notation

Instance name
CTU
Count up command
Reset command
Preset value
Count up status
Current value
CU
R
PV
Q
CV
Modifier

ST language notation [Instance name] ( CU, R, PV );
[Variable name]: = [Instance name]. Q;
[Variable name]: = [Instance name]. CV;

Arguments

Arg. Operand Type Const. Description
CU BOOL
Count up command
R BOOL
Reset command Input

PV INT
Preset value
Q BOOL Count up status
Output
CV INT Current value

Instance structure

Name Type Description Remarks
Q BOOL Count up status
Can be accessed from the user program.

Function
When the Reset command R is TRUE(ON), the current value CV is initialized to 0.
However, count up at the rising edge of the count up command is not performed while
R=TRUE(ON).
When the Reset command R is FALSE(OFF), count up is performed at the rising edge
of the count up input.
When the current value CV reaches a preset value PV, count up status Q is set to
TRUE(ON).

Input Output
CU R
Action
Q CV
TRUE(ON) Not executed 0
FALSE(OFF)
TRUE(ON)
CV=CV+1 until PV is reached.
Otherwise
FALSE(OFF)

When CV<PV
FALSE(OFF)
When CV=PV
TRUE(ON)
Current
CV
2.3 Counters
79

Program example

Up_Ctr
CTU
SAMPLE1
LD

SIGNAL1

SIGNAL2

SIGNAL3
SAMPLE2
ST
SIGNAL1
SAMPLE2
SIGNAL2
SIGNAL3
SAMPLE1
CU
R
PV
Q
CV

Up_Ctr( SIGNAL1, SIGNAL2, SAMPLE1);
SIGNAL3 := Up_Ctr.Q;
SAMPLE2 := Up_Ctr.CV;

While SIGNAL2 is TRUE(ON), SAMPLE2 becomes 0 because current value CV is
initialized.
When SIGNAL2 is FALSE(OFF), count up is performed when SIGNAL1 changes from
When the preset value of SAMPLE1 is equal to the current value, SIGNAL3 becomes
TRUE(ON) because count up status Q becomes TRUE(ON).

Remark
Positive transitionsensing contact or rising edge detector need not be programmed prior to
number up input CU because number up input CU detects the rising edge with Up counter
instruction.

Error information
If preset value PV is less than 0, Up Counter instruction is executed with 0 as the
limit.
6F8C1226
80

Down Counter

Counters Down Counter
LD/FBD language
notation

Instance name
CTD
Count down command
Load command
Preset value
Count down status
Current value
CD
LD
PV
Q
CV
Modifier

ST language notation [Instance name] ( CD, LD, PV );
[Variable name] : =[Instance name]. Q;
[Variable name : =[Instance name]. CV;

Arguments

CD BOOL
Count down command

LD BOOL
Reset command Input

PV INT
Preset value
Q BOOL Count down status
Output

Instance structure

Q BOOL Count down status

Function
When the Load command LD is TRUE(ON), the current value CV is initialized with
preset value PV. However, while LD = TRUE(ON), count down is not performed at
the rising edge of the Count Down command.
When the Load command LD is FALSE(OFF), count down is performed at the rising
edge of the count down input.
When the current value CV reaches 0, the count down status Q is set to TRUE(ON).

Input Output
CD LD
Action
Q CV
TRUE(ON) Not executed PV
FALSE(OFF)
TRUE(ON)
CV=CV-1 until 0 is reached
Otherwise
FALSE(OFF)

When CV>0
FALSE(OFF)
When CV=0
TRUE(ON)
Current
CV
2.3 Counters
81

Program example

Dn_Ctr
CTD
SAMPLE1
LD

SIGNAL1

SIGNAL2

SIGNAL3
SAMPLE2
ST
SIGNAL1
SAMPLE2
SIGNAL2
SIGNAL3
SAMPLE1
CD
LD
PV
Q
CV

Dn_Ctr (SIGNAL1, SIGNAL2, SAMPLE1);
SIGNAL3 := Dn_Ctr.Q;
SAMPLE2 := Dn_Ctr.CV;

While SIGNAL2 is TRUE(ON), SAMPLE2 becomes preset value PV because current
value CV is initialized.
When SIGNAL2 is FALSE(OFF), count down is performed when SIGNAL1 changes
from FALSE(OFF)TRUE(ON). The current value is stored in SAMPLE2.
When SAMPLE2 which is the current value becomes 0, SIGNAL3 becomes
TRUE(ON) because the count down status Q becomes TRUE(ON).

Remark
Positive transitionsensing contact or rising edge detector need not be programmed prior to
number down input CU because count down input CD detects the rising edge with Down
Counter instruction.

Error information
If preset value PV is less than 0, Down Counter instruction is executed with 0 as the
limit.
6F8C1226
82

Up Down Counter

Counters Up Down Counter
LD/FBD language
notation
Instance name
CTUD
Reset command
Preset value
CU
CD
R
LD
PV
QU
QD
CV
Count down command
Load command
Count up command
Count down status
Count up status
Current value
Modifier

ST language notation [Instance name]( CU, CD, R, LD, PV );
[Variable name] : = [Instance name]. QU;
[Variable name] : = [Instance name]. QD;
[Variable name] : = [Instance name]. CV;

Arguments

CU BOOL
Count d command
CD BOOL
Count down command

R BOOL
Reset command
LD BOOL
Load command
Input
PV INT
Preset value
QU BOOL Count up status
QD BOOL Count down status Output

Instance structure

QU BOOL Count up status
QD BOOL Count down status

Function
When the Reset command R is TRUE(ON), current value CV is initialized to 0.
When the Load command LD is TRUE(ON) and the Reset command R is
FALSE(OFF), the current value CV is initialized with preset value PV.
While R= TRUE(ON) or LD= TRUE(ON), count at the rising edge of the count up
command and count down command are not performed.
2.3 Counters
83

When the Reset command R and Load command LD are FALSE(OFF), count up is
performed at the rising edge of the count up input.
When the Reset command R and Load command LD are FALSE(OFF), count down is
performed at the rising edge of the count down input.
When the current value CV reaches a preset value PV, count up status QU is set to
TRUE(ON).
When the current value CV reaches 0, count down status QD is set to TRUE(ON).
When both the count up input CU and count down input CD are TRUE(ON), count
operation is not performed.

Input Output
CU CD R LD
Action
QU QD CV
TRUE(ON) 0

FALSE(OFF) TRUE(ON)
Not executed
PV
TRUE(ON) TRUE(ON)
When CV<PV
FALSE(OFF)
When CV>0
FALSE(OFF)
FALSE(OFF)
TRUE(ON)
FALSE(OFF)
CV=CV+1 until
PV is reached
FALSE(OFF)
FALSE(OFF)
TRUE(ON)
FALSE(OFF) FALSE(OFF)
CV=CV -1 until
0 is reached
When
CV=PV
TRUE(ON)
When CV=0
TRUE(ON)
Current
CV

Program example

Ud_Ctr
CTUD
SAMPLE1
LD

SIGNAL1

SIGNAL2

SIGNAL5
SAMPLE2
ST
SIGNAL1
SAMPLE2
SIGNAL2
SIGNAL5
SAMPLE1
CU
CD
R

SIGNAL6
LD
PV
QU
QD
CV
SIGNAL3

SIGNAL4
SIGNAL3
SIGNAL4
SIGNAL6

Ud_Ctr( SIGNAL1, SIGNAL2, SIGNAL3, SIGNAL4, SAMPLE1);
SIGNAL5 := Ud_Ctr.QU;
SIGNAL6 := Ud_Ctr.QD;
SAMPLE2 := Ud_Ctr.CV;

While SIGNAL3 is TRUE(ON), SAMPLE2 becomes 0 because current value CV is
initialized.
6F8C1226
84

While SIGNAL3 is FALSE(OFF) and SIGNAL4 is TRUE(ON), SAMPLE2 becomes
preset value PV because current value CV is initialized.
Count up is performed when SIGNAL1 changes from FALSE(OFF) to TRUE(ON) and
count down is performed when SIGNAL2 changes from FALSE(OFF) to TRUE(ON).
The current value is stored in SAMPLE2. However, count is not performed when
SIGNAL1 and SIGNAL2 are both TRUE(ON).
When SAMPLE2 which is the current value reaches the preset value PV, SIGNAL5
becomes TRUE(ON).
When SAMPLE2 which is the current value reaches 0, SIGNAL6 becomes
TRUE(ON).

Remark
Positive transition-sensing contact or rising edge detector need not be programmed prior to
count up input CU or count down input CD because count up input CU and number down input
CD detect the rising edge with Up Down Counter instruction.

Error information
If preset value PV is less than 0, Up Down Counter instruction is executed with 0 as
the limit.

2.4 Timers
85

2.4 Timers

1 On-Delay Timer (0.1ms) TON_100us
2 On-Delay Timer (1ms) TON
3 On-Delay Timer (10ms) TON_10ms
4 On-Delay Timer (100ms) TON_100ms
5
On-Delay Timer (0.1 minute)
TONM_P
PCS compatible
instruction
6 Off-Delay Timer (0.1ms) TOF_100us
7 Off-Delay Timer (1ms) TOF
8 Off-Delay Timer (10ms) TOF_10ms
9 Off-Delay Timer (100ms) TOF_100ms
10
Off-Delay Timer (0.1 minute)
TOFM_P
PCS compatible
instruction
11 Pulse Timer (0.1ms) TP_100us
12 Pulse Timer (1ms) TP
13 Pulse Timer (10ms) TP_10ms
14 Pulse Timer (100ms) TP_100ms
15
Single Shot (100ms)
SS_P
PCS compatible
instruction
16
Single Shot (0.1 minute)
SSM_P
PCS compatible
instruction
17 Real Time Clock RTC V dedicated instruction
18 Real Time Clock RTC_N nv dedicated instruction
19 On/Off-Delay Timer (REAL) DEL_L
TOSDIC compatible
instruction

6F8C1226
86

Important
For Integrated Controller V series, change the preset time in the timer stop state (*1).
If it is changed in the time up state (Preset time (PT) Duration (CT)), the output may change in
a controller in which "PT change support in time up state" has not been done.

PT change support in time up state Timer setting
value Not supported Supported
PT >ET
Restarts clock until ETPT; Output (Q)
changes depending on the relation
between PT and ET.
PT<ET Limits ET to PT.
Holds both Output (Q) and Duration
(ET).
New setting value (PT) becomes
effective upon restart after the timer
stops.

*1 : Timer stop state

Timer
instruction
Timer activation
command IN
TON*** FALSE(OFF)
TOF*** TRUE(ON)
TP*** FALSE(OFF)
SS*** FALSE(OFF)

OT change support in time up state version in the [Integrated Controller V series]

Version
Controller Not
supported
Supported
S2PU22/32/72 Up to V02.03 V02.04 -
S2PU22A/32A/72A/72D N/A V02.50 -V03.70 - S2
S2PU82 N/A V02.00 -V03.00 -
S3PU** Up to V02.05 V02.06 -V02.10 -
S3
S3PU**A N/A V02.50 -V03.70 -
L1 L1PU1*HLC5** Up to V02.49 V02.50 -
L2PU1* Up to V03.00 V03.10 -
L2
L2PU22 Up to V03.0D V03.10 -
L3PU11 Up to V03.00 V03.10 -
L3
L3PU21 Up to V03.0K V03.10 -
2.4 Timers
87

OnDelay Timer (0.1ms/1ms/10ms/100ms/0.1min)

Timers
OnDelay Timer
(0.1ms/1ms/10ms/100ms/0.1min)
*1
LD/FBD language
notation

TON
Instance name
Timer activation command
Preset time
Time up status
Duration PT
IN Q
ET

TON_
Instance name
Preset time
Time up status
Duration PT
IN Q
ET

TONM_P
Instance name
Preset time
Tim up status
Duration PT
IN Q
ET
*1) PCS compatible instruction
EN input Edge execution Index modification Modifier

ST language notation [Instance name] ( IN, PT );

Arguments
TON (1ms unit)

IN BOOL

Input
PT TIME
Preset time
Q BOOL Time up status
Output
ET TIME Duration

TON_TONM_P[ indicates 100us (0.1ms unit), 10ms (10ms unit) or 100ms
(100ms unit)].

IN BOOL

Input
PT DINT
Preset time
Output
ET DINT Duration

6F8C1226
88

Instance structure
TON (1ms unit)

ET TIME Duration

TON_/TONM_P[ indicates 100us (0.1ms unit), 10ms (10ms unit) or 100ms
(100ms unit)]

ET DINT Duration

Function
When timer activation command IN is TRUE(ON), time up status Q set to TRUE(ON).
Duration ET is added.
When timer activation command IN is FALSE(OFF)m duration ET is cleared to 0.
The setting range of preset time PT is as follows:
TON_100us (0.1ms timer) : 0 to 21474836470.1ms [59h39m8s364.7ms
(2.48551348day)]
TON (1ms timer) : 0 to 2147483647ms [596h31m23s647ms
(24.8551348day)]
TON_10ms (10ms timer) : 0 to 214748364710ms [5965h13m56s470ms
(248.551348day)]
TON_100ms (100ms timer) : 0 to 2147483647100ms [59652h19m24s700ms
(2485.51348day)]
TONM_P (0.1min timer) : 0 to 21474836470.1 min [3579139h24m42s
(149130.8088day)]
The data type of PT/ET is TIME for TON, and DINT for TON_100us/ TON_10ms/
TON_100ms/ TONM_P.

Output Input
IN
Action
Q ET
FALSE(OFF) Not executed FALSE(OFF) 0
Duration<Preset time FALSE(OFF)
TRUE(ON) Executed
DurationPreset time TRUE(ON)
Current ET

2.4 Timers
89

Program example

Ondelay_1
TON
IN Q

PT ET
SAMPLE1
LD

SIGNAL1

SIGNAL2
SAMPLE2
ST
SIGNAL1
SAMPLE2
SIGNAL2
SAMPLE1

Ondelay_1( SIGNAL1, SAMPLE1);
SIGNAL2 := Ondelay_1.Q;
SAMPLE2 := Ondelay_1.ET;

After SIGNAL1 becomes TRUE(ON), SIGNAL2, which is time up status, is set to
TRUE(ON) after the preset time specified with SAMPLE1 elapses. Duration is stored
to SAMPLE2
The content of duration after duration ET reaches the preset time specified with
SAMPLE1 is held as long as SIGNAL1 is TRUE(ON).
When SIGNAL1 is FALSE(OFF), duration ET is cleared, SAMPLE2 becomes 0 , and
SIGNAL2, which is time up status, is set to FALSE(OFF).

Error information
If preset time PT is less than 0, Off-Delay timer instruction takes an absolute value for
operation.
For the Integrated Controller V series L controller, the internal timer minimum unit is
100ms, so update is made in units of 100ms even if TON instruction of 1ms unit is
used.

6F8C1226
90

Off-Delay Timer (0.1ms/1ms/10ms/100ms/0.1min)

Timers Off-Delay Timer(0.1ms /1ms/10ms/100ms/0.1min) *1
LD/FBD language
notation

TOF
Instance name
Timer activation
command
Preset time
Time up status
Duration PT
IN Q
ET

TOF_
Instance name
Timer activation
command
Preset time
Time up status
Duration PT
IN Q
ET

TOFM_P
Instance name
Preset time
Time up status
Duration PT
IN Q
ET
(1*) CS-compatible
instruction
Timer activation
command


Arguments
TOF (1ms unit)

IN BOOL

Input
PT TIME
Preset time
Output
ET TIME Duration

TOF_TOFM_P[ indicates 100us(0.1ms unit), 10ms (10ms unit) or 100ms
(100ms unit)]

IN BOOL

Input
PT DINT
Preset time
Output
ET DINT Duration

2.4 Timers
91

Instance structure
TOF (1ms unit)

ET TIME Duration

TOF_/TOFM_P[ indicates 100us (0.1ms unit), 10ms (10ms unit) or 100ms
(100ms unit)]

ET DINT Duration

Function
After timer activation command IN becomes FALSE(OFF), time up status Q is set to
FALSE(OFF) after preset time elapses.
TOF_100us (0.1ms timer) : 0 to 21474836470.1ms [59h39m8s364.7ms
(2.48551348day)]
TOF (1ms timer) : 0 to 2147483647ms [596h31m23s647ms
(24.8551348day)]
TOF_10ms (10ms timer) : 0 to 214748364710ms [5965h13m56s470ms
(248.551348day)]
TOF_100ms (100ms timer) : 0 to 2147483647100ms [59652h19m24s700ms
(2485.51348day)]
TOFM_P (0.1 min timer) : 0 to 21474836470.1 min [3579139h24m42s
(149130.8088day)]
The data type of PT/ET is TIME for TOF, and DINT for TOF_100us/TOF_10ms/TOF_
100ms/TOFM_P.

Output Input
IN
Action
Q ET
Duration<Preset time TRUE(ON)
FALSE(OFF) Executed
DurationPreset time FALSE(OFF)
Current ET
TRUE(ON) Not executed TRUE(ON) 0
6F8C1226
92

Program example

Offdelay_1
TOF
IN Q

PT ET
SAMPLE1
LD

SIGNAL1

SIGNAL2
SAMPLE2
ST
SIGNAL1
SAMPLE2
SIGNAL2
SAMPLE1

Offdelay_1( SIGNAL1, SAMPLE1);
SIGNAL2 := Offdelay_1.Q;
SAMPLE2 := Offdelay_1.ET;

After SIGNAL1 becomes FALSE(OFF), SIGNAL2 is set to FALSE(OFF) after the
preset time specified with SAMPLE1 elapses. Duration is stored to SAMPLE2.
The content of duration ET after duration reaches the preset time specified with
SAMPLE1 is held as long as SIGNAL1 is FALSE(OFF).
When SIGNAL1 is TRUE(ON), duration ET is cleared, SAMPLE2 becomes 0, and
SIGNAL2, which is time up status, is set to TRUE(ON).

Error information
If preset time PT is less than 0, Pulse Timer instruction takes an absolute value for
operation.
100ms, so update is made in units of 100ms even if TOF instruction of 1ms unit is
used.

2.4 Timers
93

Pulse Timer (0.1ms/1ms/10ms/100ms)

Timers Pulse Timer (0.1ms/1ms/10ms/100ms)
LD/FBD language
notation

TP
Instance name
Preset time
Time up status
Duration PT
IN Q
ET

TP_
Instance name
Preset time
Time up status
Duration PT
IN Q
ET

[Variable name]:=[Instance name]. Q;
[Variable name]:=[Instance name]. ET;

Arguments
TP (1ms unit)

IN BOOL

Input
PT TIME
Preset time
Output
ET TIME Duration

TP_[ indicates 100us(0.1ms unit), 10ms (10ms unit) or 100ms (100ms unit)]

IN BOOL

Input
PT DINT
Preset time
Output
ET DINT Duration

6F8C1226
94

Instance structure
TP (1ms unit)

ET TIME Duration

TP_ [ indicates 100us(0.1ms unit), 10ms (10ms unit) or 100ms (100ms unit)]

ET DINT Duration

Function
After timer activation command IN becomes TRUE(ON), time up status Q is set to
TRUE(ON) until the preset time elapses.
When timer activation command becomes FALSE(OFF) after the preset time elapses,
duration ET is cleared.
TP_100us (0.1mstimer) 0 to 21474836470.1ms [59h39m8s364.7ms
(2.48551348day)]
TP (1mstimer) 0 to 2147483647ms [596h31m23s647ms
(24.8551348day)]
TP_10ms (10mstimer) 0 to 214748364710ms [5965h13m56s470ms
(248.551348day)]
TP_100ms (100mstimer) 0 to 2147483647100ms [59652h19m24s700ms
(2485.51348day)]
The data type of PT/ET is TIME for TP and DINT for TP_100us/TP_10ms/TP_100ms.

Output Input
IN
Action
Q ET
TRUE(ON) Executed
Current ET
2.4 Timers
95

Program example

Plstimer_1
TP
IN Q

PT ET
SAMPLE1
LD

SIGNAL1

SIGNAL2
SAMPLE2
ST
SIGNAL1
SAMPLE2
SIGNAL2
SAMPLE1

Plstimer_1( SIGNAL1, SAMPLE1);
SIGNAL2 := Plstimer_1.Q;
SAMPLE2 := Plstimer_1.ET;

After SIGNAL1 becomes TRUE(ON), SIGNAL2 is set to TRUE(ON) until the preset
time specified with SAMPLE1 elapses. After duration reaches the preset time,
SIGNAL2 becomes FALSE(OFF). Duration is stored to SAMPLE2.
Duration ET is still updated even if SIGNAL1 becomes FALSE(OFF) before duration
ET reaches the preset time specified with SAMPLE1.
The content of duration after duration ET reaches the preset time specified with
SAMPLE1 is held as long as SIGNAL1 is TRUE(ON). When SIGNAL1 becomes
FALSE(OFF), duration is cleared to 0 and 0 is stored to SAMPLE2 as the result.

Error information
If preset time PT is less than 0, Pulse Timer instruction takes an absolute value for
operation.
100ms, so update is made in units of 100ms even if TP instruction of 1ms unit is used.
6F8C1226
96

Timers Single Shot (100ms/0.1min)
PCS
compatible
instruction
LD/FBD language
notation
SS_P
Instance name
Preset time
Time up status
Duration PT
IN Q
ET

SSM_P
Instance name
Preset time
Time up status
Duration PT
IN Q
ET



Arguments

IN BOOL

Input
PT DINT
Preset time
Output
ET DINT Duration

Instance structure

ET DINT Duration

Function
After Timer activation command IN becomes TRUE(ON), time up status Q is set to
TRUE(ON) until preset time elapses.
If timer activation command becomes FALSE(OFF) before the timer expires, the time
up status also becomes FALSE(OFF).
After preset time has elapsed, duration ET is cleared when Timer activation command
becomes FALSE(OFF).
Single Shot (100ms/0.1min)
2.4 Timers
97

SS_P (100ms timer) 0 to 2147483647100ms [59652h19m24s700ms
(2485.51348day)]
SSM_P (0.1min timer) 0 to 21474836470.1 min [3579139h24m42s
(149130.8088day)]

Output Input
IN
Action
Q ET
TRUE(ON) Executed
Current ET

Program example

SS_1
SS_P
IN Q

PT ET
SAMPLE1
LD

SIGNAL1

SIGNAL2
SAMPLE2
ST
SIGNAL1
SAMPLE2
SIGNAL2
SAMPLE1

SS_1( SIGNAL1, SAMPLE1);
SIGNAL2 := SS_1.Q;
SAMPLE2 := SS_1.ET;

After SIGNAL1 becomes TRUE(ON), SIGNAL2 is TRUE(ON) until preset time
specified with SAMPLE1 elapses. After the duration reaches a preset time, SIGNAL2
becomes FALSE(OFF). Duration is stored in SAMPLE2.
When SIGNAL1 becomes FALSE(OFF) before duration ET reaches the preset time
specified with SAMPLE1, SAMPLE2 which is the duration becomes 0. SIGNAL2
which is the time up status also becomes FALSE(OFF).
After duration ET has reached the preset time specified with SAMPLE1, its content is
retained while SIGNAL1 is TRUE(ON). When SIGNAL1 becomes FALSE(OFF),
duration is cleared to 0 and 0 is stored in SAMPLE2.

Error information
When preset time PT is less than 0, the Pulse timer instruction operates on the
absolute value. When preset time PT=0, the time up status becomes TRUE(ON) for
just one scan.
6F8C1226
98

Real Time Clock

Timers Real Time Clock
V dedicated
instruction
LD/FBD language
notation
Instance name
RTC

Date and time of day
update command
Preset date and time of day
Output
Current date and
time of day
PDT
IN Q
CDT


ST language notation [Instance name] ( IN, PDT, CDT );

Arguments

IN BOOL

Date and time of day update
command Input
PDT DT Preset date and time of day
Q BOOL Output
Output
CDT DT Current date and time of day

Instance structure

Q BOOL Output Can be accessed from the user program.

Function
When the Date and time of day update command IN changes from FALSE(OFF) to
TRUE(ON), the calendar is updated with the specified preset date and time of day
PDT. (The millisecond part of PDT is ignored, and the calendar is updated with the
PDT value).
When Date and time of day update command IN is TRUE(ON), the current calendar
content is output to current date and time of day CDT.
The state of Date and time of day update command IN is output to Output Q.

Output Input
IN
Action
Q CDT
FALSE(OFF) Not executed FALSE(OFF) Not updated
Previous input = FALSE(OFF) :
Update calendar (PDTCDT)
TRUE(ON) Executed
Previous inputTRUE(ON) :
Current date and time of dayCDT
TRUE(ON) CDT
2.4 Timers
99

Program example

RTC_1
RTC
IN Q

PDT CDT
SAMPLE1
LD

SIGNAL1

SIGNAL2
SAMPLE2
ST

RTC_1( SIGNAL1, SAMPLE1, SAMPLE2);
SIGNAL2 := RTC_1.Q;

When SIGNAL1 changes from FALSE(OFF) to TRUE(ON), the calendar is updated
with the preset date and time of day specified with SAMPLE1.
While SIGNAL1 is TRUE(ON), the current time is output to SAMPLE2.
SIGNAL2 becomes TRUE(ON) when SIGNAL1 is TRUE(ON) and SIGNAL2 becomes
FALSE(OFF) when SIGNAL1 is FALSE(OFF).

Error information
The calendar is not updated when the content of preset date and time of day PDT is
abnormal.
6F8C1226
100

Real Time Clock

Timers Real Time Clock
nv dedicated
instruction
LD/FBD language
notation

Instance name
RTC_N

Date and time of day
update command
Preset date/time
Output complete
Current date/time PDT
IN Q
CDT


ST language notation [Instance name] ( IN, PDT, CDT );
[Variable name] : = @[Instance name]. Q;

Argument

IN BOOL

Date and time of day update
command Input
PDT DT Preset date/time
Q BOOL Output complete
Output
CDT DT Current date/time

Instance structure

Q BOOL
Output
complete

Function
When the date and time of day command IN changes from FALSE(OFF) to TRUE(ON),
the calendar is updated with the specified preset date and time of day PDT.
When the date and time of day command IN is TRUE(ON), the current calendar
content is output to the current date and time of day CDT.
When date and time of day update is complete, output Q is set to TRUE(ON).

Output Input
IN
Action
Q CDT
FALSE(OFF) Not executed FALSE(OFF)
revious input=FALSE(OFF) :
Calendar is updated
FALSE(OFF)
Not updated
TRUE(ON) Executed
Previous input=TRUE(ON) :
Current date/timeCDT
TRUE(ON) Current CDT
2.4 Timers
101

Program example

RTC_1
RTC_N
IN Q

PDT CDT
SAMPLE1
LD

SIGNAL1

SIGNAL2
SAMPLE2
ST

RTC_1( SIGNAL1, SAMPLE1, SAMPLE2);
SIGNAL2 :=@RTC_1.Q;

When SIGNAL1 changes from FALSE(OFF) to TRUE(ON), the calendar is updated
with the preset date and time of day specified with SAMPLE1. After the calendar is
updated, completion output SIGNAL2 becomes TRUE(ON).
Current day/time is output to SAMPLE2, after SIGNAL1 becomes TRUE(ON) and the
calendar is updated.

Error information
The calendar is not updated when the content of preset date and time of day PDT is
abnormal. Completion output outputs the state of Date and time of day update
command IN.
6F8C1226
102

On/Off-Delay Timer

timers On/Off-Delay Timer
TOSDIC compatible
instruction
LD/FBD language
notation

Instance name
DEL_L
Input flag
On-delay time
Result output
On-delay elapsed time H1
U1 Y
ON
Off-delay time H2 OFF Off-delay elapsed time


ST language notation [Instance name] ( U1, H1, H2 );
[Variable name] : = [Instance name]. Y;
[Variable name] : = [Instance name]. ON;
[Variable name] : = [Instance name]. OFF;

Arguments

U1 BOOL
Input flag
H1 REAL
On-delay time(0)[sec] Input

H2 REAL
Off-delay time(0)[sec]
Y BOOL Result output
ON REAL On-delay elapsed time[sec] Output
OFF REAL Off-delay elapsed time[sec]

Instance structure

Y BOOL Result output
ON REAL On-delay elapsed time[sec]
OFF REAL Off-delay elapsed time[sec]

Function
After input flag U1 becomes TRUE(ON), result output is set to TRUE(ON) after
on-delay time H1. After input flag U1 becomes FALSE(OFF), result output is set to
FALSE(OFF) after off-delay time H2.
After input flag U1 becomes TRUE(ON), result output Y is set to TRUE(ON) after
on-delay time H1.
After input flag U1 becomes FALSE(OFF), result output Y is set to FALSE(OFF) after
off-delay time H2.
2.4 Timers
103

When the input becomes OFF during on-delay, off-delay time measurement starts
while continuing on-delay.
When the input becomes ON during off-delay, off-delay is stopped, the output is
inversed, and then on-delay is started.
When the input becomes OFF during on-delay and becomes ON again during
off-delay, off-delay is stopped and on-delay is started again.
If off-delay is shorter than on-delay (off-delay is stopped during on-delay operation),
there is no output.

Time
Input U1
OutputY
On-delay time
Off-delay time
Input becomes OFF
during on-delay
Normal
operation
Input becomes ON
during off-delay
Input is changed during
on/off-delay
Off-delay is stopped
during on-delay
On/Off delay time is
measured at the same time
On-delay is
stopped output
is inversed
On-delay is started
again, off-delay is
stopped

Program example

DEL_1
DEL_L
U1 Y

H1 ON

H2 OFF
DP11LD

S1

S2
DP12LD
ON_TIME ST
OFF_TIME ST

DEL_1( S1, DP11, DP12);
S2 := DEL_1.Y;
ON_TIME := DEL_1.ON;
OFF_TIME := DEL_1.OFF;

S2, where ON change of S1 is delayed for DP11 [sec] and OFF change of S1 is
delayed for DP12 [sec], is output.

Error information
If on/off-delay time is a negative number, On/Off-Delay Timer instruction takes an
absolute value for operation.
When on/offdelay time =0, Input U1=Output Y.
If on/off-delay time is nonnumeric, nonnumeric abnormal is set to TRUE(ON), and the
instruction itself is not processed.

6F8C1226
104

2.5 Flip-Flops

1 Set Type Flip-Flop SR

2 Reset Type Flip-Flop RS

3 Semaphore SEMA

2.5 Flip-Flops
105

Set Type Flip-Flop

FlipFlops Set Type Flip-Flop
LD/FBD language
notation
Instance name
SR
Set input
Reset input
Output
R
S1 Q1

ST language notation [Instance name] ( S1, R );
[Variable name] : = [Instance name]. Q1;

Arguments

S1 BOOL
Set input
Input
R BOOL
Reset input
Output Q1 BOOL Output

Instance structure

Q1 BOOL Output Can be accessed from the user program.

Function
When set input S1 is TRUE(ON), output Q1 is set to TRUE(ON) regardless of the
input state of reset input R.
When set input S1 is FALSE(OFF) and reset input R is TRUE(ON), output Q1 is reset
to FALSE(OFF).
Output Q1 is unchanged when set input S1 and reset input R are both FALSE(OFF).

Input Output
S1 R
Action
Q1
FALSE(OFF) FALSE(OFF) Not executed
Retain
previous value
FALSE(OFF) TRUE(ON) FALSE(OFF)
TRUE(ON)
Executed
TRUE(ON)
6F8C1226
106

Program example

FF_1
SR
S1 Q1

R

SIGNAL1

SIGNAL2

SIGNAL3
SIGNAL1
SIGNAL2
SIGNAL3

FF_1 ( SIGNAL1, SIGNAL2);
SIGNAL3 := FF_1.Q1;

When SIGNAL1 is TRUE(ON), SIGNAL3 becomes TRUE(ON).
When SIGNAL1 is FALSE(OFF) and SIGNAL2 is TRUE(ON), SIGNAL3 becomes
FALSE(OFF).
When SIGNAL1 and SIGNAL2 are both FALSE(OFF), SIGNAL3 retains the previous
value.
2.5 Flip-Flops
107

Reset Type Flip-Flop

FlipFlop Reset Type Flip-Flop
LD/FBD language
notation
Instance name
RS
Set input
Reset input
Output
R1
S Q1

ST language notation [Instance name] ( S, R1 );
[Variable name] : = [Instance name] . Q1;

Argument

S BOOL
Set input
Input
R1 BOOL
Reset input
Output Q1 BOOL Output

Instance structure

Q1 BOOL Output Can be accessed from the user program.

Function
When reset input R1 is TRUE(ON), output Q1 is reset to FALSE(OFF) regardless of
the input state of set input S.
When reset input R1 is FALSE(OFF) and set input S is TRUE(ON), output Q1 is set to
TRUE(ON).
Output Q1 is unchanged when set input S and reset input R1 are both FALSE(OFF).

Input Output
S R1
Action
Q1
FALSE(OFF) FALSE(OFF) Not executed
Retains
previous value
* TRUE(ON) FALSE(OFF)
TRUE(ON) FALSE(OFF)
Executed
TRUE(ON)

6F8C1226
108

Program example

FF_1
RS
S Q1

R1

SIGNAL1

SIGNAL2

SIGNAL3
SIGNAL1
SIGNAL2
SIGNAL3

FF_1( SIGNAL1, SIGNAL2);
SIGNAL3 := FF_1.Q1;

When SIGNAL2 is TRUE(ON), SIGNAL3 is reset to FALSE(OFF).
When SIGNAL2 is FALSE(OFF) and SIGNAL1 is TRUE(ON), SIGNAL3 becomes
TRUE(ON).
When SIGNAL1 and SIGNAL2 are both FALSE(OFF), SIGNAL3 retains the previous
value.

2.5 Flip-Flops
109

Semaphore

FlipFlop Semaphore
LD/FBD language
notation

Instance name
SEMA
Test and set
command
Release command
Semaphore status
output
CLAIM
RELEASE
BUSY

ST language notation [Instance name] ( CLAIM, RELEASE );
[Variable name] := [Instance name]. BUSY;

Argument

CLAIM BOOL
Test and set command

Input
RELEASE BOOL
Release command
Output BUSY BOOL Semaphore status output

Instance structure

BUSY BOOL Semaphore status output Can be accessed from the user program.
X BOOL Internal variable
Cannot be accessed from the user
program.

Function
Initially, resets internal variable X to FALSE(OFF).
State of internal variable X is output to semaphore status output BUSY.
After internal variable X is output to semaphore status output BUSY, internal variable X
is set to TRUE(ON) when test and set command CLAIM is TRUE(ON).
When test and set command CLAIM is FALSE(OFF) and release command RELEASE
is TRUE(ON) after internal variable X is output to semaphore status output BUSY,
semaphore state output BUSY and internal variable X are reset to FALSE(OFF)

Input Output
CLAIM RELEASE
Action
BUSY
FALSE(OFF) FALSE(OFF) BUSY=Internal variable Xn1
TRUE(ON)
BUSY=Internal variable Xn1
Internal variable XnTRUE(ON)
Previous Xn1
FALSE(OFF) TRUE(ON)
Semaphore state output =
FALSE(OFF)
Internal variable Xn = FALSE(OFF)
FALSE(OFF)
6F8C1226
110

Program example

SEMA_1
SEMA
CLAIM BUSY

RELEASE

SIGNAL1

SIGNAL2
SIGNAL3
SIGNAL1
SIGNAL2
X
SEMA_1 Execution timing
SIGNAL3

SEMA_1 ( SIGNAL1, SIGNAL2);
SIGNAL3 := SEMA_1.BUSY;

The state of internal variable X after executing previous SEMA_1 is output to SIGNAL3.
Except when SIGNAL1= FALSE(OFF) and SIGNAL2 = TRUE(ON).
When SIGNAL1 is TRUE(ON), internal variable X is set to TRUE(ON).
When SIGNAL1 is FALSE(OFF) and SIGNAL2 is TRUE(ON), internal variable X and
SIGNAL3 become FALSE(OFF).

2.6 Moving
Unified Controller nv seriesIntegrated Controller V series Programming Instructions (LD/FBD/SFC/ST)
111

2.6 Moving

1 Normally Open Contact Gate
2 Normally Closed Contact Gate
3 Move Data MOVE
4 Move Table Data TMOV
5 Data Exchange XCHG
6 Initialize Table Data TINZ

6F8C1226
112

Normally Open Contact Gate

Moving Normally Open Contact Gate
LD/FBD language
notation

Inaput
Variable (BOOL)
Output

Modifier

Arguments
The following data types are supported for input and output:

Input
Input
Output
See below
Output

Input Output
INT INT
DINT DINT
UINT UINT
REAL REAL
WORD WORD
DWORD DWORD
TIME TIME
TOD TOD
DATE DATE
Input
Variable
Output

Function
Combination of Normally Open Contact Gate instruction and ST instruction or function
and function block input.
When variable (BOOL) is TRUE(ON), input data is output as the result.
When variable (BOOL) is FALSE(OFF), output is set to 0.

Variable (BOOL) Action Output
FALSE(OFF) 0
TRUE(ON)
Executed
Input data
2.6 Moving
113

Combination of Normally Open Contact Gate instruction and SET instruction
When variable (BOOL) is TRUE(ON), input data is output as the result.
When variable (BOOL) is FALSE(OFF), previous value is retained.

FALSE(OFF)
Retain
previous value
TRUE(ON)
Executed
Input data

Program example
Normally Open Contact Gate instruction + ST instruction

SIGNAL1
SAMPLE1
LD
SAMPLE2
ST

When SIGNAL1 is TRUE(ON), content of SAMPLE1 is moved to SAMPLE2.
When SIGNAL1 is FALSE(OFF), 0 is moved to SAMPLE2.

Normally Open Contact Gate instruction + SET instruction

SIGNAL1
SAMPLE1
LD
SAMPLE2
SET

When SIGNAL1 is TRUE(ON), content of SAMPLE1 is moved to SAMPLE2.
When SIGNAL1 is FALSE(OFF), SAMPLE2 retains the previous value.

Error information
When there is a boundary error due to index modification, Normally Open
Contact Gate instruction is executed with the value of variable (BOOL) reset to
FALSE(OFF) and the data boundary is exceeded.
6F8C1226
114

Normally Closed Contact Gate

Moving Normally Closed Contact Gate
LD/FBD language
notation

Input
Variable (BOOL)
Output

Modifier

Arguments
The following data types are supported for input and output:

Input
Input
Output
See below
Output

Input Output
INT INT
DINT DINT
UINT UINT
REAL REAL
WORD WORD
DWORD DWORD
TIME TIME
TOD TOD
DATE DATE

Variable
Input Output

Function
Combination of Normally Closed Contact Gate instruction and ST instruction or
function and function block input
When variable (BOOL) is FALSE(OFF), input data is output as result.
When variable (BOOL) is TRUE(ON), output is set to 0.

FALSE(OFF) Input data
TRUE(ON)
Executed
0
2.6 Moving
115

Combination of Normally Closed Contact Gate instruction and SET instruction
When variable (BOOL) is FALSE(OFF), input data is output as result.
When variable (BOOL) is TRUE(ON), previous value is retained.

FALSE(OFF) Input data
TRUE(ON)
Executed Retain
previous value

Program example
Normally Closed Contact Gate instruction + ST instruction

SIGNAL1
SAMPLE1
LD
SAMPLE2
ST

When SIGNAL1 is FALSE(OFF), content of SAMPLE1 is moved to SAMPLE2.
When SIGNAL1 is TRUE(ON), 0 is moved to SAMPLE2.
Normally Closed Contact Gate instruction + SET instruction

SIGNAL1
SAMPLE1
LD
SAMPLE2
SET

When SIGNAL1 is FALSE(OFF), content of SAMPLE1 is moved to SAMPLE2.
When SIGNAL1 is TRUE(ON), SAMPLE2 retains the previous value.
Error information
When there is a boundary error due to index modification, Normally Closed Contact
Gate instruction is executed with the value of variable (BOOL) reset to FALSE(OFF)
and the data boundary is exceeded.
6F8C1226
116

Move Data

Moving Move Data
LD/FBD language
notation Input Output MOVE_

ST language notation Output := MOVE_
( Input );

Arguments
The following data types are supported for input and output arguments and the
instruction symbol depends on the data type:

Input
Input
Output
See below
Output

Input Output
MOVE_

Input Symbol(_
) Output
INT MOVE_INT INT
DINT MOVE_DINT DINT
UINT MOVE_UINT UINT
REAL MOVE_REAL REAL
WORD MOVE_WORD WORD
DWORD MOVE_DWORD DWORD
TIME MOVE_TIME TIME
TOD MOVE_TOD TOD
DATE MOVE_DATE DATE
DT MOVE_DT DT
STRING MOVE_STRING STRING

Function
Input data is output as result.
The following variables can be specified for input and output for MOVE_DT and
MOVE_STRING instructions:

Controller Instruction Variable
Integrated Controller V series MOVE_STRING
Unified Controller nv series
MOVE_DT
MOVE_STRING
Variables other than direct I/O
variables
2.6 Moving
117

Program example

SAMPLE1
1234
LD
SAMPLE2
1234
ST
MOVE_INT

SAMPLE2 := MOVE_INT( SAMPLE1 );

Content of SAMPLE1 1234 is moved to SAMPLE2.

Error information
During MOVE_DT, MOVE_STRING instructions, if the input table or output table
exceeds the specified range, table transfer is not performed and the data boundary is
exceeded.
During MOVE_DT, MOVE_STRING instructions, table transfer is not performed if
direct I/O variable is specified for input table or output table.

Controller Instruction Variable
Integrated Controller V series MOVE_STRING
Transfer is not executed.
Error flag is set to TRUE(ON).
MOVE_DT
MOVE_STRING
Transfer is not executed.
Error flag and table operation
error flag are set to TRUE(ON).

When EN is used, ENO output is reset to FALSE(OFF) when the above error occurs.
6F8C1226
118

Move Table Data

Moving Move Table Data
LD/FBD language
notation

Input table Output table
TMOV
Transfer word
number
TBL
N


ST language notation TMOV( TBL, N, output table );

Arguments

TBL PTR Input table
Input
N UINT

Transfer word
number
1N1024
Output PTR Output table

Function
N data words starting at input table are transferred as block to output table.
One to 1024 words may be transferred. If N=0, no table transfer is performed.
When transferring 2W length data such as DINT, REAL, TIME, TOD, DATE or
DWORD, up to 512 data can be transferred by specifying transfer words 2.
Following operation is performed if input table and output table overlap.

Controller Action
S controller
The content of input table is transferred to output
table.
L controller
Overlapped data of input and output tables cannot be
transferred.
The content of input table is transferred to output
table.

Direct I/O variable cannot be specified for input table or output table.

Batch
transfer
Output table

Input table

N word N word

2.6 Moving
119

Important
Move Table Data instruction (TMOV) is to transfer memory images as block at high speed. It is
recommended to convert input table and output table to variables declared by array and
structure.

Program example

ARRAY1
LD
ARRAY2
ST
TMOV
TBL

N
8
LD
1234
2345
3456
4567
5678
6789
7890
8901
ARRAY1 ARRAY2
1234
2345
3456
4567
5678
6789
7890
8901
8 words

TMOV( ARRAY1, 8, ARRAY2);

The eight words source data starting from ARRAY1 are transferred as block to
destination starting at ARRAY2.

Error information
If the number of transfer words exceed 1024, operation is performed with 1024 as the
limit.
If the input table or output table exceeds the specified range, table transfer is not
performed and the data boundary is exceeded.
The following operation is performed if direct I/O variable is specified for input and
output tables.

Controller Action
S controller
Table transfer is not executed.
Error flag is set to TRUE(ON)
V series
L controller
Error flag and table operation error flag are set to
TRUE(ON).
TRUE(ON).

6F8C1226
120

Data Exchange

Moving Data Exchange
LD/FBD language
notation
Input 1 Output 1
XCHG_
Input 2 Output 2
Instance name
IN1
IN2
OUT1
OUT2


ST language notation [Instance name] ( IN1, IN2 );
[Variable name] : = [Instance name]. OUT1;
[Variable name] : = [Instance name]. OUT2;

Arguments

IN1
Input1
Input
IN2
Input2
OUT1 Output1
Output
OUT2
See below
Output2

Input 1,2 Symbol (_
) Output 1,2
INT XCHG_INT INT
DINT XCHG_DINT DINT
UINT XCHG_UINT UINT
REAL XCHG_REAL REAL
WORD XCHG_WORD WORD
DWORD XCHG_DWORD DWORD
TIME XCHG_TIME TIME
TOD XCHG_TOD TOD
DATE XCHG_DATE DATE

Instance structure

OUT1 See above Output1
OUT2 See above Output2
Input 1 Output 1
Input 2 Output 2
XCHG_
IN1
IN2
OUT1
OUT2
2.6 Moving
121

Function
Input data IN1 is output to OUT2 and IN2 is output to OUT1.

Input data IN1
Input data IN2
Output data OUT1
Output data OUT2

Program example

SAMPLE1
1234
LD
SAMPLE1
5678
ST
XCHG_INT

IN1 OUT1

IN2 OUT2
SAMPLE2
5678
LD
Xchg_1
SAMPLE2
1234
ST

Xchg_1( SAMPLE1, SAMPLE2);
SAMPLE1 := Xchg_1.OUT1;
SAMPLE2 := Xchg_1.OUT2;

Contents of SAMPLE1 and SAMPLE2 are exchanged.
6F8C1226
122

Initialize Table Data

Moving Initialize Table Data
LD/FBD language
notation

Initialization data Output table
TINZ_
Count
IN
N


ST language notation TINZ_
( IN, N, Output table );

Argument
The following data types are supported for input arguments and the instruction symbol
depends on the data type:

IN See below

Initialization
data

Input
N UINT
Count 1N1024

Initialization data Symbol(_
)
INT TINZ_INT
DINT TINZ_DINT
UINT TINZ_UINT
REAL TINZ_REAL
WORD TINZ_WORD
DWORD TINZ_DWORD
TIME TINZ_TIME
TOD TINZ_TOD
DATE TINZ_DATE
DT TINZ_DT
Initialization data Output table
TINZ_
IN

N
Count

Function
An N word block starting at output table is initialized with initialization data IN.
One to 1024 words may be transferred. If N=0, no table initialization is performed.
Direct I/O variable cannot be specified for output table.
2.6 Moving
123

Initi al izati on data
IN
Output table

N words

Program example

SAMPLE1
LD
ARRAY1
ST
TINZ_INT
IN

N
8
LD
1234
SAMPLE1 ARRAY1
1234
1234
1234
1234
1234
1234
1234
1234
8 words

TINZ_INT( SAMPLE1, 8, ARRAY1);

Eight words block starting at variable ARRAY1 is initialized with content of
SAMPLE1 1234.

Error information
If the number of transfer words exceed 1024, operation is performed with 1024 as the
limit.
If the input table or output table exceeds the specified range, table transfer is not
performed and the data boundary is exceeded.
The following operation is performed if direct I/O variable is specified for input and
output tables:

Controller Action
S controller
V series
L controller
TRUE(ON).
TRUE(ON).

6F8C1226
124

2.7 Comparison

1 Greater Than GT
2 Greater Than or Equal GE
3 Equal EQ
4 Less Than or Equal LE
5 Less Than LT
6 Not Equal NE
7 Comparison with Hysteresis (greater than) GT_L
TOSDIC compatible
instruction
8 Comparison with Hysteresis (less than) LT_L
TOSDIC compatible
instruction
9
(greater than or equal)
GE_L
TOSDIC compatible
instruction
10
(less than or equal)
LE_L
TOSDIC compatible
instruction

2.7 Comparison
125

Greater Than

Comparison Greater Than
LD/FBD language
notation

Input 1 Output
GT_
Input 2
Input n


ST language notation Output := GT_
( Input1, Input2, , Inputn );

Arguments

Input See below
Input1n 2n15
Output BOOL Output

Input 1n Symbol (_
)
INT GT_INT
DINT GT_DINT
UINT GT_UINT
REAL GT_REAL
WORD GT_WORD
DWORD GT_DWORD
TIME GT_TIME
TOD GT_TOD
DATE GT_DATE
DT GT_DT
Input 1 Output
GT_
Input 2
Input n

Function
Compares the value of input data and outputs the comparison result.

Input1>Input2>>Input n is satisfied TRUE(ON) Input data
Input 1Input n Input1>Input2>>Input n is not satisfied FALSE(OFF)
6F8C1226
126

Up to 15 input data are allowed.
Input1 to n must have the same data type.
The following operation is performed when the input data type is REAL:

Controller Action
Integrated Controller V series
Input data up to INF compare the magnitude relation.
NAN input data do not compare the magnitude relation.
INF and NAN input data is limited by the maximum value to
compare the magnitude relation.

Program example

SAMPLE1
7777
LD
GT_INT
SAMPLE2
6666
LD
SAMPLE3
5555
LD
SAMPLE4
4444
LD
SIGNAL1
1
ST

SIGNAL1 := GT_INT( SAMPLE1, SAMPLE2, SAMPLE3, SAMPLE4);

Compares the data in SAMPLE1 to 4 and outputs TRUE(ON) to SIGNAL1 because
the condition SAMPLE1 SAMPLE2 SAMPLE3 SAMPLE4 is satisfied.

Error information

Controller Action
Integrated Controller V series FALSE(OFF) is output as the result if NAN is input.
Unified Controller nv series NAN and INF data are limited by the maximum value.

2.7 Comparison
127

Greater Than or Equal

Comparison Greater Than or Equal
LD/FBD language
notation

Input 1 Output
GE_
Input 2
Input n


ST language notation Output := GE_

Arguments.

Input See below
Input1n 2n15
Output BOOL Output

Input 1n Symbol(_
)
INT GE_INT
DINT GE_DINT
UINT GE_UINT
REAL GE_REAL
WORD GE_WORD
DWORD GE_DWORD
TIME GE_TIME
TOD GE_TOD
DATE GE_DATE
DT GE_DT
Input 1 Output
GE_
Input 2
Input n
6F8C1226
128

Function

Input1Input2Input is satisfied TRUE(ON)
Input data
Input 1Input n
Input1Input2Input n is not
satisfied
FALSE(OFF)


Controller Action
NAN input data do not compare the magnitude
relation.
INF and NAN input data are limited by the maximum
value to compare the magnitude relation.

Program example

SAMPLE1
7777
LD
GE_INT
SAMPLE2
6666
LD
SAMPLE3
6666
LD
SAMPLE4
5555
LD
SIGNAL1
1
ST

SIGNAL1 := GE_INT( SAMPLE1, SAMPLE2, SAMPLE3, SAMPLE4);


Error information

Controller Action
NAN and INF data are limited by the maximum
value.

2.7 Comparison
129

Equal

Comparison Equal
LD/FBD language
notation

Input 1 Output
EQ_
Input 2
Input n


ST language notation Output := EQ_

Arguments

Input See below
Input1n 2n15
Output BOOL Output

Input 1n Symbol (_)
INT EQ_INT
DINT EQ_DINT
UINT EQ_UINT
REAL EQ_REAL
WORD EQ_WORD
DWORD EQ_DWORD
TIME EQ_TIME
TOD EQ_TOD
DATE EQ_DATE
DT EQ_DT
Input 1 Output
EQ_
Input 2
Input n

6F8C1226
130

Function

Input1 = Input2 == Input n is satisfied TRUE(ON) Input data
Input 1Input n Input1 = Input2 == Input n is not satisfied FALSE(OFF)


Controller Action
relation.

Program example

SAMPLE1
1234
LD
EQ_INT
SAMPLE2
1234
LD
SAMPLE3
1234
LD
SAMPLE4
1234
LD
SIGNAL1
1
ST

SIGNAL1 := EQ_INT( SAMPLE1, SAMPLE2, SAMPLE3, SAMPLE4);

Compares the data in SAMPLE1 to 4 and outputs TRUE(ON) to SIGNAL1
because the condition SAMPLE1=SAMPLE2=SAMPLE3=SAMPLE4 is
satisfied.

Error information

Controller Action

2.7 Comparison
131

Less Than or Equal

Comparison Less Than or Equal
LD/FBD language
notation

Input 1 Output
LE_
Input 2
Input n


ST language notation Output := LE_

Arguments

Input See below
Input1n 2n15
Output BOOL Output

Input 1n Symbol (_
)
INT LE_INT
DINT LE_DINT
UINT LE_UINT
REAL LE_REAL
WORD LE_WORD
DWORD LE_DWORD
TIME LE_TIME
TOD LE_TOD
DATE LE_DATE
DT LE_DT
Input 1 Output
LE_
Input 2
Input n

6F8C1226
132

Function

Input1Input2Input n is satisfied TRUE(ON)
Input data
Input 1Input n
Input1Input2Input n is not
satisfied
FALSE(OFF)


Controller Action
relation.

Program example

SAMPLE1
1111
LD
LE_INT
SAMPLE2
2222
LD
SAMPLE3
2222
LD
SAMPLE4
3333
LD
SIGNAL1
1
ST

SIGNAL1 := LE_INT (SAMPLE1, SAMPLE2, SAMPLE3, SAMPLE4);


Error information

Controller Action
Integrated Controller V series When NAN is input, the result is FALSE(OFF).
value.

2.7 Comparison
133

Less Than

Comparison Less Than
LD/FBD language
notation

Input 1 Output
LT_
Input 2
Input n


ST language notation Output := LT_

Arguments

Input See below
Input1n 2n15
Output BOOL Output

Input 1n Symbol(_
)
INT LT_INT
DINT LT_DINT
UINT LT_UINT
REAL LT_REAL
WORD LT_WORD
DWORD LT_DWORD
TIME LT_TIME
TOD LT_TOD
DATE LT_DATE
DT LT_DT
Input 1 Output
LT_
Input 2
Input n

6F8C1226
134

Function

Input1<Input2<<Input n is satisfied TRUE(ON)
Input data
Input1Inputn
Input1<Input2<<Input n is not
satisfied
FALSE(OFF)


Controller Action
relation.

Program example

SAMPLE1
1111
LD
LT_INT
SAMPLE2
2222
LD
SAMPLE3
3333
LD
SAMPLE4
4444
LD
SIGNAL1
1
ST

SIGNAL1 := LT_INT( SAMPLE1, SAMPLE2, SAMPLE3, SAMPLE4);

the condition SAMPLE1 < SAMPLE2 < SAMPLE3 < SAMPLE4 is satisfied.

Error information

Controller Action

2.7 Comparison
135

Not Equal

Comparison Not Equal
LD/FBD language
notation

Input 1 Output
NE_
Input 2


ST language notation Output := NE_
( Input1, Input2 );

Arguments

Input See below
Input1, Input2 Input number =2

Output BOOL Output

Input 1, 2 Symbol(_
)
INT NE_INT
DINT NE_DINT
UINT NE_UINT
REAL NE_REAL
WORD NE_WORD
DWORD NE_DWORD
TIME NE_TIME
TOD NE_TOD
DATE NE_DATE
DT NE_DT
Input 1 Output NE_
Input 2

Function

Input1Input2 is satisfied TRUE(ON) Input data
Input1, Input2 Input1Input2 is not satisfied FALSE(OFF)

Number of input data must be 2.
Input 1 and Input 2 must have the same data type.
6F8C1226
136


Controller Action

Program example

SAMPLE1
1111
LD
NE_INT
SAMPLE2
2222
LD
SIGNAL1
1
ST

SIGNAL1 := NE_INT( SAMPLE1, SAMPLE2);

Compares the data in SAMPLE1 and SAMPLE2 and outputs TRUE(ON) to SIGNAL1
because the condition SAMPLE1SAMPLE2 is satisfied.

Error information

Controller Action

2.7 Comparison
137

Comparison with Hysteresis (greater than)

Comparison Comparison with Hysteresis (greater than)
TOSDIC compatible
instruction
LD/FBD language
notation
Input data Output
GT_L
U1 Y

U2

H1

H2

H3
Comparison data
Coefficient
Bias
Hysteresis width
Instance name


ST language notation [Instance name] ( U1, U2, H1, H2, H3 );

Arguments

U1 REAL
Input data
U2 REAL
Comparison data
H1 REAL
Coefficient
H2 REAL
Bias
Input
H3 REAL
Hysteresis width (0)

Output BOOL Output

Instance structure

Y BOOL Result output Can be accessed from the user program.

Function
Compares the size with hysteresis and outputs the result.
When U1 is greater than U2 and the value determined by H1 to H3, the output is
TRUE(ON).
When U1>H1U2+H2: TRUE(ON)
When U1H1U2+H2-H3: FALSE(OFF)
The previous value is retained for the cases other than above (within the hysteresis
width).

6F8C1226
138

U1

H3
H1U2+H2-H3 H1U2H2
Included
Not included
TRUE(ON)
FALSE(OFF)

Program example

IND01.PV
80
LD
DP0
0
LD
DP0
0
LD
DP11
75
LD
S1
1
ST
DP12
15
LD
GT_L
U1 Y

U2

H1

H2

H3
GT_L_1
DP0=0
DP11=75
DP12=15

GT_L_1( IND01.PV, DP0, DP0, DP11, DP12);
S1 := GT_L_1.Y;

Output S1 is obtained as below by the value of IND01.PV:

IND01.PV
S1
60 75
Included
Not included
TRUE(ON)
FALSE(OFF)

Error information

Controller Action

When the hysteresis width (H3) is negative, absolute value is taken for operation.
2.7 Comparison
139

Comparison with Hysteresis (less than)

Comparison Comparison with Hysteresis (less than)
TOSDIC compatible
instruction
LD/FBD language
notation

Output
LT_L
Input data
Comparison data
Coefficient
Bias
Hysteresis width
Instance name
U1 Y
U2
H1
H2
H3



Arguments

U1 REAL
Input data
U2 REAL
Comparison data
H1 REAL
Coefficient
H2 REAL
Bias
Input
H3 REAL

Output BOOL Output

Instance structure


Function
When U1 is less than U2 and the value determined by H1 to H3, the output is
TRUE(ON).
When U1<H1U2+H2:TRUE(ON)
When U1H1U2+H2+H3:FALSE(OFF)
width).
6F8C1226
140

U1

H3
H1U2+H2 H1U2+H2+H3
Included
Not included
TRUE(ON)
FALSE(OFF)

Program example

IND01.PV
80
LD
DP0
0
LD
DP0
0
LD
DP11
75
LD
S1
1
ST
DP12
15
LD
LT_L
U1 Y

U2

H1

H2

H3
LT_L_1
DP0=0
DP11=75
DP12=15

LT_L_1( IND01.PV, DP0, DP0, DP11, DP12);
S1 := LT_L_1.Y;


60 75
Included
Not included
TRUE(ON)
FALSE(OFF)
IND01.PV
S1

Error information

Controller Action

2.7 Comparison
141

Comparison with Hysteresis (greater than or equal)

Comparison
Comparison with Hysteresis (greater than or
equal)
TOSDIC compatible
instruction
LD/FBD language
notation

Output
GE_L
Input data
Comparison data
Coefficient
Bias
Hysteresis width
Instance name
U1 Y
U2
H1
H2
H3



Arguments

U1 REAL
Input data
U2 REAL
Comparison data
H1 REAL
Coefficient
H2 REAL
Bias
Input
H3 REAL

Output BOOL Output

Instance structure


Function
When U1 is greater than or equal to U2 and the value determined by H1 to H3, the
output is TRUE(ON).
When U1H1U2+H2:TRUE(ON)
When U1<H1U2+H2-H3:FALSE(OFF)
width).
6F8C1226
142

U1
H3
H1U2H2H3 H1U2H2
Included
Not included
TRUE(ON)
FALSE(OFF)
S1

Program example

IND01.PV
80
LD
DP0
0
LD
DP0
0
LD
DP11
75
LD
S1
1
ST
DP12
15
LD
GE_L
U1 Y

U2

H1

H2

H3
GE_L_1
DP0=0
DP11=75
DP12=15

GE_L_1( IND01.PV, DP0, DP0, DP11, DP12);
S1 := GE_L_1.Y;


IND01.PV
S1
60 75
TRUE(ON)
FALSE(OFF)
Included
Not included

Error information

Controller Action

When the hysteresis width (H3) is negative absolute value is taken for operation.
2.7 Comparison
143

Comparison with Hysteresis (less than or equal)

Comparison Comparison with Hysteresis (less than or equal)
TOSDIC compatible
instruction
LD/FBD language
notation

Output
LE_L
Input data
Comparison data
Coefficient
Bias
Hysteresis width
Instance name
U1 Y
U2
H1
H2
H3



Arguments

U1 REAL
Input data
U2 REAL
Comparison data
H1 REAL
Coefficient
H2 REAL
Bias
Input
H3 REAL

Output BOOL Output

Instance structure


Function
When U1is less than or equal to U2 or the value determined by H1 to H3, the output is
TRUE(ON).
When U1H1U2+H2: TRUE(ON)
When U1>H1U2+H2+H3: FALSE(OFF)
width).
6F8C1226
144

U1

H3
H1U2+H2 H1U2+H2+H3
Not included
Included
TRUE(ON)
FALSE(OFF)

Program example

IND01.PV
80
LD
DP0
0
LD
DP0
0
LD
DP11
75
LD
S1
1
ST
DP12
15
LD
LE_L
U1 Y

U2

H1

H2

H3
LE_L_1
DP0=0
DP11=75
DP12=15

LE_L_1( IND01.PV, DP0, DP0, DP11, DP12);
S1 := LE_L_1.Y;


S1
60 75
TRUE(ON)
FALSE(OFF)
IND01.PV
Not included
Included

Error information

Controller Action


2.8 Selection
145

2.8 Selection

1 Maximum MAX
2 Maximum of Table Data MAXL
3 Minimum MIN
4 Minimum of Table Data MINL
5 Average Value AVE
6 Average of Table Data AVEL
7 Limiter LIMIT
8 Selector SEL
9 Multiplex MUX
10 Multiplex of Table Data MPX

6F8C1226
146

Maximum

Selection Maximum
LD/FBD language
notation

Input 1 Output
MAX_
Input 2
Input n


ST language notation Output := MAX_

Arguments

Input
Input1n 2n15
Output
See below
Output

Input 1n Symbol(_) Output
INT MAX_INT INT
DINT MAX_DINT DINT
UINT MAX_UINT UINT
REAL MAX_REAL REAL
WORD MAX_WORD WORD
DWORD MAX_DWORD DWORD
TIME MAX_TIME TIME
TOD MAX_TOD TOD
DATE MAX_DATE DATE
DT MAX_DT DT
Input 1 Output
MAX_
Input 2
Input n

2.8 Selection
147

Function
The maximum value of input data Input 1 to Input n is obtained and output as result.
The following operation is performed when the input data is REAL:

Controller Action
relation.

Program example

SAMPLE1
-1111
LD
MAX_INT
SAMPLE2
6666
LD
SAMPLE3
-5555
LD
SAMPLE4
4444
LD
SAMPLE5
6666
ST

SAMPLE5 := MAX_INT( SAMPLE1, SAMPLE2, SAMPLE3, SAMPLE4);

The maximum value of input data SAMPLE1 to SAMPLE4 is obtained and the
maximum value 6666 is stored in SAMPLE5

Error information

Controller Action
Integrated Controller V series If NAN data is entered as input, the result is NAN.

6F8C1226
148

Maximum of Table Data

Selection Maximum of Table Data
LD/FBD language
notation
Input table Output
MAXL_
Number
TBL
N


ST language notation Output : = MAXL_
( TBL, N );

Arguments
The following data types are supported for output arguments and the instruction
symbol depends on the data type.

TBL PTR Input table
Input
N UINT
Number 1N256
Output See below Output

Symbol(_
) Output
MAXL_INT INT
MAXL_DINT DINT
MAXL_UINT UINT
MAXL_REAL REAL
MAXL_TIME TIME
MAXL_TOD TOD
MAXL_DATE DATE
MAXL_DT DT
Input table Output
MAXL_
TBL

N Number

Function
The maximum value is obtained out of N data starting from the variable specified with
input table TBL and the result is output. Also, the table pointer of the maximum value is
output to index register XL.
The allowed range of number N is 1 N 256.
If number N=0, the top data of the input table is output as result and index register XL
is set to 0.
If there is more than one maximum, the one with the smallest table pointer No. is
output to index register XL.
2.8 Selection
149

Direct I/O variable cannot be specified for the input table.

Controller Action

Program example
[LD/FBD language notation[

2
ARRAY1

LD
MAXL_INT
TBL

N
6

LD
SAMPLE1
100
ST
ARRAY1
-98
65
23
-51
100
-125
199
100
SAMPLE1
2
Index register XL
Pointer
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
100

SAMPLE1 := MAXL_INT( ARRAY1, 6);

The maximum value is obtained from six data in input table ARRAY1 and the
maximum value 100 is stored in SAMPLE1. Also, the table pointer 2 of the
maximum value is output to index register XL.

Error information
When the input table exceeds the variable area, the maximum of table data is not
processed and the data boundary is exceeded.
If N exceeds 256, N is limited to 256.

Controller Action
value.
The following operation is performed when direct I/O variable is specified for the input
table:

Controller Action
Integrated
Controller V series
S Controller Error flag is set to TRUE(ON) and the result is 0.
TRUE(ON) and the result is 0.
6F8C1226
150

Minimum

Selection Minimum
LD/FBD language
notation

Input 1 Output
MIN_
Input 2
Input n


ST language notation Output := MIN_

Arguments

Input Input1n 2n15
Output
See below
Output

Input 1n Symbol(_
) Output
INT MIN_INT INT
DINT MIN_DINT DINT
UINT MIN_UINT UINT
REAL MIN_REAL REAL
WORD MIN_WORD WORD
DWORD MIN_DWORD DWORD
TIME MIN_TIME TIME
TOD MIN_TOD TOD
DATE MIN_DATE DATE
DT MIN_DT DT
Input 1 Output
MIN_
Input 2
Input n

Function
The minimum value of input data Input 1 to Input n is obtained and output as result.
2.8 Selection
151

Controller Action

Program example

SAMPLE1
-1111
LD
MIN_INT
SAMPLE2
6666
LD
SAMPLE3
-5555
LD
SAMPLE4
4444
LD
SAMPLE5
-5555
ST

SAMPLE5 := MIN_INT( SAMPLE1, SAMPLE2, SAMPLE3, SAMPLE4);

The minimum value of input data SAMPLE1 to SAMPLE4 is obtained and the
minimum value -5555 is stored in SAMPLE5.

Error information

Controller Action

6F8C1226
152

Minimum of Table Data

Selection Minimum of Table Data
LD/FBD language
notation
Input table Output
MINL_
Number
TBL
N


ST language notation Output := MINL_
( TBL, N );

Arguments
symbol depends on the data type:

TBL PTR Input table
Input
N UINT
Number 1N256

Symbol(_
) Output
MINL_INT INT
MINL_DINT DINT
MINL_UINT UINT
MINL_REAL REAL
MINL_TIME TIME
MINL_TOD TOD
MINL_DATE DATE
MINL_DT DT
Input table Output
MINL_
TBL

N Number

Function
The minimum value is obtained out of N data starting from the variable specified with
input table TBL and the minimum value is output as result. Also, the table pointer of the
minimum value is output to index register XL.
If number N=0, the top data of the input table is output as result and index register XL
is set to 0.
If there is more than one minimum, the one with the smallest table pointer No. is output
to index register XL.
2.8 Selection
153

Direct I/O variables cannot be specified for the input table.

Controller Action
relation.

Program example

2
ARRAY1

LD
MINL_INT
TBL

N
6

LD
SAMPLE1
-100
ST
ARRAY1
98
65
23
-51
-100
-125
199
-100
SAMPLE1
2
Index registerXL
pointer
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
-100

SAMPLE1 := MINL_INT( ARRAY1, 6);

The minimum value is obtained from six data in input table ARRAY1 and the minimum
value -100 is stored in SAMPLE1. Also, the table pointer 2 of the minimum value
is output to index register XL.

Error information
When the input table exceeds the variable area, the minimum of table data is not

Controller Action
Integrated Controller If NAN data is entered as input, the result is NAN.
table:

Controller Action
V series
6F8C1226
154

Average Value

Selection Average Value
LD/FBD language
notation

Input 1 Output
AVE_
Input 2
Input n


ST language notation Output := AVE_

Arguments

Input
Input1n 2n15
Output
See below
Output

Input 1n Symbol(_
) Output
INT AVE_INT INT
DINT AVE_DINT DINT
UINT AVE_UINT UINT
REAL AVE_REAL REAL
TIME AVE_TIME TIME
Input 1 Output
AVE_
Input 2
Input n

Function
The minimum value of input data Input 1 to Input n is obtained and output as result.

Input1 + Input2 + + Inputn
Output =
n
2.8 Selection
155

Program example

SAMPLE1
-1111
LD
AVE_INT
SAMPLE2
6666
LD
SAMPLE3
-5555
LD
SAMPLE4
4444
LD
SAMPLE5
1111
ST

SAMPLE5 := AVE_INT( SAMPLE1, SAMPLE2, SAMPLE3, SAMPLE4);

The average value of input data SAMPLE1 to SAMPLE4 is obtained and the average
value 1111 is stored in SAMPLE5.

Error information

Controller Action
If NAN data is entered as input, the result is NAN.
If INF is input or when it is INF during summation
operation, the result is INF.

6F8C1226
156

Average of Table Data

Selection Average of Table Data
LD/FBD language
notation

Input table Output
AVEL_
Number
TBL
N


ST language notation Output := AVEL_
( TBL, N );

Arguments

TBL PTR Input table
Input
N UINT
Number 1N256

Symbol(_) Output
AVEL_INT INT
AVEL_DINT DINT
AVEL_UINT UINT
AVEL_REAL REAL
AVEL_TIME TIME
Input table Output
AVEL_
TBL

N Number

Function
The average value is obtained from N data starting from the variable specified with
input table TBL and the result is output.
If number N=0, the top data of the input table is output as result.

TBL[0]+TBL[1] + + TBL[N-1]
Output =
n
2.8 Selection
157

Program example

2
ARRAY1

LD
AVEL_INT
TBL

N
6

LD
SAMPLE1
-10
ST
ARRAY1
98
65
23
-51
-100
-125
199
-10
SAMPLE1 pointer
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
-100

SAMPLE1 := AVEL_INT( ARRAY1, 6);

The average value is obtained from six data in input table ARRAY1 and the average
value -10 is stored in SAMPLE1.

Error information
When the input table exceeds the variable area, the average of table data is not

Controller Action
If INF is input or when it is INF during summation
operation, the result is INF.

table:

Controller Action
V series

6F8C1226
158

Limiter

Selection Limiter
LD/FBD language
notation

Minimum Output
LIMIT_
Input value
Maximum
MN
IN
MX


ST language notation Output := LIMIT_
( MN, IN, MX );

Arguments

MN
Minimum
IN
Input value Input

MX
Maximum
Output
See below
Output

Minimum, Input value,
Maximum
Symbol(_) Output
INT LIMIT_INT INT
DINT LIMIT_DINT DINT
UINT LIMIT_UINT UINT
REAL LIMIT_REAL REAL
WORD LIMIT_WORD WORD
DWORD LIMIT_DWORD DWORD
TIME LIMIT_TIME TIME
TOD LIMIT_TOD TOD
DATE LIMIT_DATE DATE
DT LIMIT_DT DT
Minimum Output
LIMIT_
MN

IN

MX
Input value
Maximum

2.8 Selection
159

Function
If input value IN is within maximum MX and minimum MN (minimum MN input value
IN maximum MX) the input value is output as result.
If IN is greater than maximum MX, maximum MX is output as result.
If IN is less than minimum MN, minimum MN is output as result.
When minimum MN maximum MX, maximum MX is output as result.
Input data cannot have mixed data types.

Controller Action

OUT = MIN{MAX(IN, MN), MX}

Program example

SAMPLE1
1000
LD
LIMIT_INT
MN

IN

MX
SAMPLE2
2500
LD
SAMPLE3
4000
LD
SAMPLE4
2500
ST

SAMPLE4 := LIMIT_INT (SAMPLE1, SAMPLE2, SAMPLE3);

Checks whether the input value 2500 in SAMPLE2 is between minimum 1000 in
SAMPLE1 and maximum 4000 in SAMPLE3. Because SAMPLE2 is between the
maximum and minimum, 2500 is stored in SAMPLE4 as result.

Error information

Controller Action
If NAN data is entered as input, the result is NAN (see
Important).
6F8C1226
160


Important
Error processing is updated from the following controller versions.

Controller S3 S2 S2PU82 L3 L3DS L2 L2DS L1
Version V02.75 V02.68 V02.01 V02.40

The input data IN is limited to + Infinity or - Infinity INF before LIMIT processing.
The condition is as follows:
The Input value IN is REAL type.
The value NAN or INF is set as the data MN, IN and MX.

Input data
MN, IN, MX
Hex.
Limited data
MN, IN, MX
+NAN 16#7F80_0001 to 16#7FFF_FFFF
+INF 16#7F80_0000
+ Maximum
+MAX 16#7F7F_FFFF
:
+MIN 16#0000_0001
16#0000_0000
0
16#8000_0000
-MIN 16#8000_0001
:
-MAX 16#FF7F_FFFF
Input data
-INF 16#FF80_0000
-NAN 16#FF80_0001 to 16#FFFF_FFFF
-MAX

2.8 Selection
161

Selector

Selection Selector
LD/FBD language
notation

Select input Output
SEL_
G

IN0

IN1
Input 0
Input 1


ST language notation Output := SEL_
(G, IN0, IN1 );

Arguments

G BOOL
Select input
IN0
Input0 Input
IN1
Input1
Output
See below
Output

Input 0, Input 1 Symbol(_) Output
BOOL SEL_BOOL BOOL
INT SEL_INT INT
DINT SEL_DINT DINT
UINT SEL_UINT UINT
REAL SEL_REAL REAL
WORD SEL_WORD WORD
DWORD SEL_DWORD DWORD
TIME SEL_TIME TIME
TOD SEL_TOD TOD
DATE SEL_DATE DATE
DT SEL_DT DT
Select input Output
SEL_
G

IN0

IN1
Input 0
Input 1

6F8C1226
162

Function
Input 0 or Input 1 is selected depending on the status of select input G.
When select input G = FALSE(OFF), Input 0 is selected and output as result.
When select input G = TRUE(ON), Input 1 is selected and output as result.

Program example

SIGNAL1
1
LD
SEL_INT
SAMPLE1
1000
LD
SAMPLE2
2000
LD
SAMPLE3
2000
ST
G
IN0
IN1

SAMPLE3 := SEL_INT (SIGNAL1, SAMPLE1, SAMPLE2);

Because select input SIGNAL1 is TRUE(ON), 2000 is stored in SAMPLE3 as result.
2.8 Selection
163

Multiplex

Selection Multiplex
LD/FBD language
notation
Input point Output
MUX_
K

Input 0
Input (n-1)


ST language notation Output := MUX_
( K, Input0, , Input(n1) );

Arguments

K UINT
Input point No. 0K(n-1)

Input

Input0(n-1) 1n14
Output
See below
Output

Input 0 (n-1) Symbol(_
) Output
BOOL MUX_BOOL BOOL
INT MUX_INT INT
DINT MUX_DINT DINT
UINT MUX_UINT UINT
WORD MUX_WORD WORD
DWORD MUX_DWORD DWORD
REAL MUX_REAL REAL
TIME MUX_TIME TIME
TOD MUX_TOD TOD
DATE MUX_DATE DATE
DT MUX_DT DT
Input point No. Output
MUX_
K
Input 0
Input (n-1)

6F8C1226
164

Function
Selects input data specified with input point No. K. Input 0 is selected if input point No.
K=0 and Input (n-1) is selected if input point No. K =(n-1).
Input 0 to (n-1) must have the same data type.

Program example

SAMPLE1
2
LD
MUX_INT
K
SAMPLE2
1234
LD
SAMPLE3
5678
LD
SAMPLE4
-9876
LD
SAMPLE5
-9876
ST
Input point No.
0
1
2
1234
5678
-9876
-9876
Result K=2

SAMPLE5 := MUX_INT (SAMPLE1, SAMPLE2, SAMPLE3, SAMPLE4);

Because the input point No. specified by SAMPLE1 is 2, -9876 which is the content
of SAMPLE4 is stored in SAMPLE5.

Error information
When input point No. K. Input number, operation is performed with K limited to (Input
number-1).

2.8 Selection
165

Multiplex of Table Data

Selection Multiplex of Table Data
LD/FBD language
notation

Input table Output
MPX_
TBL

K

N
Selection
Table word number


ST language notation Output := MPX_
( TBL, K, N );

Arguments

TBL PTR Input table
K UINT
Selection point No. 0K(N-1) Input

N UINT
Table word number 1N256


Symbol(_) Output
MPX_INT INT
MPX_DINT DINT
MPX_UINT UINT
MPX_WORD WORD
MPX_DWORD DWORD
MPX_REAL REAL
MPX_TIME TIME
MPX_TOD TOD
MPX_DATE DATE
MPX_DT DT
Input table Output
MPX_
TBL

K

N
Selection point N
Table word number

6F8C1226
166

Function
The K (selection pointer No.) data is selected from N word data specified with input
table TBL and result is output.
Table word number may be from one to 256. When the table word number is 0, the
result is the top data of the input table.

Pointer
0
1
2
3
4
1234
2345
3456
4567
5678
Input table
N word
N=5
Selection point
K=3
Output
4567

Program example

ARRAY1

LD
MPX_INT
TBL

K

N
SAMPLE1
2
LD
SAMPLE2
6
LD
SAMPLE3
-200
ST
Selection point No.
0
1
2
-100
100
-200
-200
Result K=2
3 200
4 -300
5 300

SAMPLE3 := MPX_INT( ARRAY1, SAMPLE1, SAMPLE2);

From the six input table specified with variable ARRAY1, -200 which is the K data
(specified by selection pointer No. K=2 in SAMPLE1) is stored in SAMPLE3.

Error information
When the input table exceeds the variable area, the multiplex of table data is not
If table word number N exceeds 256, N is limited to 256.
When selection point No. K Table word number, operation is performed with K limited
to (Table word number-1). Also, the specific register table operation error flag is set
TRUE(ON).
table:

Controller Action
Integrated
Controller V series
2.9 Type Conversion
167

2.9 Type Conversion

INT_TO_DINT
INT_TO_UINT
DINT_TO_INT
DINT_TO_UINT
UINT_TO_INT
1 Integer-Integer Conversion
UINT_TO_DINT
INT_TO_REAL
DINT_TO_REAL 2 Integer-Real Numbers Conversion
UINT_TO_REAL
INT_TO_WORD
INT_TO_DWORD
DINT_TO_WORD
DINT_TO_DWORD
UINT_TO_WORD
3 Integer-Bit String Conversion
UINT_TO_DWORD
INT_TO_BCD_WORD
INT_TO_BCD_DWORD
DINT_TO_BCD_WORD
DINT_TO_BCD_DWORD
UINT_TO_BCD_WORD
4 Integer-BCD Conversion
UINT_TO_BCD_DWORD
INT_TO_TIME
DINT_TO_TIME 5 Integer-Duration Conversion
UINT_TO_TIME
REAL_TO_INT
REAL_TO_DINT 6 Real Numbers-Integer Conversion
REAL_TO_UINT
REAL_TO_BCD_WORD
7 Real Numbers-BCD Conversion
REAL_TO_BCD_DWORD
8
Real Numbers-Duration
Conversion
REAL_TO_TIME
WORD_TO_INT
WORD_TO_DINT
WORD_TO_UINT
DWORD_TO_INT
DWORD_TO_DINT
9 Bit String-Integer Conversion
DWORD_TO_UINT
WORD_TO_DWORD
10 Bit String-Bit String Conversion
DWORD_TO_WORD
WORD_BCD_TO_INT
WORD_BCD_TO_DINT
WORD_BCD_TO_UINT
DWORD_BCD_TO_INT
DWORD_BCD_TO_DINT
11 BCD-Integer Conversion
DWORD_BCD_TO_UINT
6F8C1226
168

WORD_BCD_TO_REAL
12 BCD-Real Numbers Conversion
DWORD_BCD_TO_REAL
WORD_BCD_TO_TIME
13 BCD-Duration Conversion
DWORD_BCD_TO_TIME
TIME_TO_INT
TIME_TO_DINT 14 Duration-Integer Conversion
TIME_TO_UINT
15
Duration-Real Numbers
Conversion
TIME_TO_REAL
TIME_TO_BCD_WORD
16 Duration-BCD Conversion
TIME_TO_BCD_DWORD
17 Truncation TRUNC
18 Sign Negative NEG
19 DEG-RAD Conversion DEG_TO_RAD
20 RAD-DEG Conversion RAD_TO_DEG
BIN_INT_P
PCS compatible
instruction
21 BIN Conversion
BIN_DINT_P
PCS compatible
instruction
DT_TO_TOD
22 Time Data Type Conversion
DT_TO_DATE
23 Concatenate Time Data CONCAT_D_TOD
24 ASCII-HEX Conversion ATOH_T
T compatible
instruction
25 HEX-ASCII Conversion HTOA_T
T compatible
instruction
26 ASCII-Real Numbers Conversion ASC_TO_REAL
27 Real Numbers-ASCII Conversion REAL_TO_ASC
28
ASCII (decimal)-Double Integer
Conversion
ASCDEC_TO_DINT
29
ASCII (hexadecimal)-Double
Integer Conversion
ASCHEX_TO_DINT
30
Double Integer-ASCII (decimal)
Conversion
DINT_TO_ASCDEC
31
Double Integer-ASCII
(hexadecimal) Conversion
DINT_TO_ASCHEX
32 Array-String Conversion ARRAY_TO_STRING
33 String-Array Conversion STRING_TO_ARRAY
34 Tag Number Conversion TO_INDEX
2.9 Type Conversion
169

Integer-Integer Conversion

Type Conversion IntegerInteger Conversion
LD/FBD language
notation


ST language notation Output :=
_TO_
(Input );

Arguments

Input
Input
Output
See below
Output

Input Output
_TO_

Input Symbol(
) Output
INT INT_TO_DINT INT
INT INT_TO_UINT INT
DINT DINT_TO_INT DINT
DINT DINT_TO_UINT DINT
UNIT UINT_TO_INT UNIT
UNIT UINT_TO_DINT UNIT
Input Output
_TO_
6F8C1226
170

Function
The entered integer data is converted to specified integer data.
The conversion range and limits are shown below:

Instruction Input Output Limit
INT_TO_DINT -32768 to 32767 -32768 to 32767
0 to 32767 0 to 32767
INT_TO_UINT
Input<0 0

-32768 to 32767 -32768 to 32767
Input<-32768 -32768
DINT_TO_INT
Input>32767 32767

0 to 65535 0 to 65535
Input<0 0
DINT_TO_UINT
Input>65535 65535

0 to 32767 0 to 32767
UINT_TO_INT
Input>32767 32767

UINT_TO_DINT 0 to 65535 0 to 65535

Program example
Normal execution

SAMPLE1
1234
LD
DINT_TO_INT SAMPLE2
1234
ST

Input data -1234 in SAMPLE1 is converted to INT and the result -1234 is stored in
SAMPLE2.

Limit execution

SAMPLE1
40000
LD
DINT_TO_INT SAMPLE2
32768
ST

Because input data -40000 in SAMPLE1 exceeds the valid data range for INT, the
result -32768 is stored in SAMPLE2.

SAMPLE2 := DINT_TO_INT(SAMPLE1);

Error information
If the conversion result of the input data exceeds the valid range of the output data
type, the limit of the output data type is output.
2.9 Type Conversion
171

Integer-Real Numbers Conversion

Type Conversion Integer-Real Numbers Conversion
LD/FBD language
notation



_TO_REAL( Input );

Arguments

Input See below
Input
Output REAL Output

Input Output
_TO_REAL

Input Symbol(
_)
INT
INT_TO_REAL
DINT
DINT_TO_REAL
UINT
UINT_TO_REAL

Function
The entered integer data is converted to REAL data.
If input is DINT, integer data between 16777215 and 16777215 is converted precisely
to REAL.

Program example

SAMPLE1
1234
LD
INT_TO_REAL SAMPLE2
1234.0
ST

SAMPLE2 := INT_TO_REAL( SAMPLE1);

Input data 1234 in SAMPLE1 is converted to REAL and the result 1234.0 is stored
in SAMPLE2.
Input Output
_TO_ REAL
6F8C1226
172

Integer-Bit String Conversion

Type Conversion Integer-Bit String Conversion
LD/FBD language
notation


_TO_

( Input );

Arguments

Input Input
Output
See below
Output

Input Output
_TO_

Input Symbol(
) Output
INT
INT_TO_WORD
WORD
INT
INT_TO_DWORD
DWORD
DINT
DINT_TO_WORD
WORD
DINT
DINT_TO_DWORD
DWORD
UNIT
UINT_TO_WORD
WORD
UNIT
UINT_TO_DWORD
DWORD

Function
The entered integer data is converted to specified bit string data.

INT_TO_WORD -32768 to 32767 16#8000 to16#7FFF
INT_TO_DWORD -32768 to 32767 16#FFFF8000 to16#00007FFF
-32768 to 32767 16#8000 to16#7FFF
Input<-32768 16#8000
DINT_TO_WORD
Input>32767 16#7FFF

DINT_TO_DWORD -2147483648 to 2147483647 16#80000000 to16#7FFFFFFF
UINT_TO_WORD 0 to 65535 16#0 to16#FFFF
UINT_TO_DWORD 0 to 65535 16#0 to16#0000FFFF
Input Output
_TO_
2.9 Type Conversion
173

Program example

SAMPLE1
-1234
LD
INT_TO_WORD SAMPLE2
16#FB2E
ST

SAMPLE2 := INT_TO_WORD( SAMPLE1);

Input data -1234 in SAMPLE1 is converted to WORD and the result 16#FB2E is
stored in SAMPLE2.

Error information
6F8C1226
174

Integer-BCD Conversion

Type Conversion Integer-BCD Conversion
LD/FBD language
notation


_TO_BCD_
( Input );

Arguments

Input
Input
Output
See below
Output

Input Symbol(
) Output
INT
INT_TO_BCD_WORD
WORD
INT
INT_TO_BCD_DWORD
DWORD
DINT
DINT_TO_BCD_WORD
WORD
DINT
DINT_TO_BCD_DWORD
DWORD
UNIT
UINT_TO_BCD_WORD
WORD
UNIT
UINT_TO_BCD_DWORD
DWORD

Function
The entered integer data is converted to BCD data.

Instruction Input Output Limit BCD error
0 to 9999 16#0 to16#9999
Input<0 16#0
TRUE(ON) INT_TO_BCD_WORD
Input>9999 16#9999
TRUE(ON)
0 to 32767 16#0 to16#32767
INT_TO_BCD_DWORD
Input<0 16#0
TRUE(ON)
0 to 9999 16#0 to16#9999
Input<0 16#0
TRUE(ON) DINT_TO_BCD_WORD
Input>9999 16#9999
TRUE(ON)
Input Output
_TO_BCD_
Input Output
_TO_BCD_
2.9 Type Conversion
175

0 to 99999999 16#0 to16#99999999
Input<0 16#0
TRUE(ON) DINT_TO_BCD_DWORD
Input>99999999 16#99999999
TRUE(ON)
0 to 9999 16#0 to16#9999
UINT_TO_BCD_WORD
Input>9999 16#9999
TRUE(ON)
UINT_TO_BCD_DWORD 0 to 65535 16#0 to16#65535

Program example
Normal execution
SAMPLE1
1234
LD
UINT_TO_BCD_WORD SAMPLE2
16#1234
ST

The input data 1234 in SAMPLE1 is converted to BCD and the result 16#1234 is
stored in SAMPLE2.

Limit execution

SAMPLE1
12345
LD
UINT_TO_BCD_WORD SAMPLE2
16#9999
ST

Because input data 12345 in SAMPLE1 exceeds the valid range, the result 16#9999
is stored in SAMPLE2.

SAMPLE2 := UINT_TO_BCD_WORD( SAMPLE1);

Error information
If the BCD data after conversion exceeds the valid range of the output data, the
conversion result is limited by:
WORD: 16#0 or 16#9999
DWORD: 16#0 or 16#99999999
Also the specific register BCD error flag and error flags are set to TRUE(ON).

6F8C1226
176

Integer-Duration Conversion

Type Conversion Integer-Duration Conversion
LD/FBD language
notation


_TO_TIME( Input );

Arguments

Input See below
Input
Output TIME Output

Input Output
_TO_TIME

Input Symbol(
_)
INT INT_TO_TIME
DINT DINT_TO_TIME
UINT UINT_TO_TIME

Function
The entered integer data is converted to TIME data.
Input data is converted as ms unit.

Program example
SAMPLE1
1234
LD
INT_TO_TIME SAMPLE2
T#1234ms
ST

SAMPLE2 := INT_TO_TIME( SAMPLE1);

Input data 1234 in SAMPLE1 is converted to TIME and the result T#1234ms is
stored in SAMPLE2.
Input Output
_TO_TIME
2.9 Type Conversion
177

Real Numbers-Integer Conversion

Type Conversion Real Numbers-Integer Conversion
LD/FBD language
notation


ST language notation Output := REAL_TO_
( Input );

Arguments

Input REAL
Input

Symbol(_
) Output
REAL_TO_INT INT
REAL_TO_DINT DINT
REAL_TO_UINT UINT

Function
The entered REAL data is converted to fixed point integer data.
Fractions are rounded according to IEC60559.
2.6 3
3.4 3
-2.4 -2
The range of integer data after conversion is as follows. If the conversion result
exceeds this range, the limit of the output data type is output.
INT conversion : -32768 to 32767
DINT conversion: : -2147483648 to 2147483647
UNIT conversion : 0 to 65535

Input Output
REAL_TO_
Input Output
REAL_TO_
6F8C1226
178

Program example
Normal execution

SAMPLE1
4.567
LD
REAL_TO_INT SAMPLE2
5
ST

Input data 4.567 in SAMPLE1 is converted to INT and the result 5 is stored in
SAMPLE2.

Limit execution

SAMPLE1
54321.0
LD
REAL_TO_INT SAMPLE2
32767
ST

Input data 54321.0 in SAMPLE1 is converted to INT, but the result 32767 is stored
in SAMPLE2 because the valid data range of SAMPLE2 is exceeded.

SAMPLE2 := REAL_TO_INT( SAMPLE1);

Error information

Controller Action
When NAN is input, the result is 0.
When INF is input, the result is the maximum value.

2.9 Type Conversion
179

Real Numbers-BCD Conversion

Type Conversion Real Numbers-BCD Conversion
LD/FBD language
notation
Input Output
REAL_TO_BCD_


ST language notation Output := REAL_TO_BCD_
( Input );

Arguments

Input REAL
Input

Input Output
REAL_TO_BCD_

Symbol(_
) Output
REAL_TO_BCD_WORD WORD
REAL_TO_BCD_DWORD DWORD

Function
The entered REAL data is rounded at the first decimal place and the result is
converted to BCD data.

0.0 to 9999.0 16#0 to16#9999
Input<0.0 16#0
TRUE(ON) REAL_TO_BCD_WORD
Input>9999.0 16#9999
TRUE(ON)
0.0 to 99999995.0 16#0 to16#99999992
Input<0.0 16#0
TRUE(ON) REAL_TO_BCD_DWORD
Input>99999995.0 16#99999999
TRUE(ON)
6F8C1226
180

Program example
Normal execution
SAMPLE1
1234.0
LD
REAL_TO_BCD_WORD SAMPLE2
16#1234
ST

Converts input data 1234.0 in SAMPLE1 to BCD and stores the result 16#1234 in
SAMPLE2.

Limit execution

SAMPLE1
12345.0
LD
REAL_TO_BCD_WORD SAMPLE2
16#9999
ST

Stores the result 16#9999 in SAMPLE2 because input data 12345.0 in SAMPLE1
exceeds the valid range.

SAMPLE2 := REAL_TO_BCD_WORD(SAMPLE1);

Error information
WORD16#0 or 16#9999
DWORD16#0 or 16#99999999
Also, the special register BCD error flag and error flag are set to TRUE(ON).

Controller Action
When + INF is input the result is maximum value and
when - INF is input, the result is 0.
BCD error flag and error flag are set to TRUE(ON).
Unified Controller nv series NAN and INF data is limited by the maximum value.

2.9 Type Conversion
181

Real Numbers-Duration Conversion

Type Conversion Real Numbers-Duration Conversion
LD/FBD language
notation

Input Output
REAL_TO_TIME


ST language notation Output := REAL_TO_TIME(Input );

Arguments

Input REAL
Input
Output TIME Output

Function
The entered REAL data is rounded at the first decimal place and the result is
converted to TIME data.
After conversion, the range of duration data is from T# -2147483648ms to
T#2147483647ms. If the conversion result exceeds this range, the limit of the output
data type is output.

Program example
Normal execution

SAMPLE1
4.567
LD
REAL_TO_TIME SAMPLE2
T#5ms
ST

Input data 4.567 in SAMPLE1 is converted to elapsed time and the result T#5ms is
stored in SAMPLE2.

Limit execution

SAMPLE1
3.4E+20
LD
REAL_TO_TIME SAMPLE2
T#2147483647ms
ST

Converts input data 3.4E+20 in SAMPLE1 to elapsed time, but stores the result
T#2147483647ms in SAMPLE2 because valid data range of SAMPLE2 is exceeded.

SAMPLE2 := REAL_TO_TIME( SAMPLE1);
6F8C1226
182

Error information

Controller Action


2.9 Type Conversion
183

Bit String-Integer Conversion

Type Conversion Bit String-Integer Conversion
LD/FBD language
notation


_TO_
( Input );

Arguments

Input
Input
Output
See below
Output

Input Output
_TO_

Input Symbol(
) Output
WORD WORD_TO_INT INT
WORD WORD_TO_DINT DINT
WORD WORD_TO_UINT UINT
DWORD DWORD_TO_INT INT
DWORD DWORD_TO_DINT DINT
DWORD DWORD_TO_UINT UINT
Input Output
_TO_
6F8C1226
184

Function
The entered bit string data is converted to integer data.

16#0 to16#7FFF 0 to 32767
WORD_TO_INT
16#8000 to16#FFFF -32768 to -1
16#0 to16#7FFF 0 to 32767
WORD_TO_DINT
16#8000 to16#FFFF -32768 to -1
WORD_TO_UINT 16#0 to16#FFFF 0 to 65535
16#0 to16#7FFF 0 to 32767
16#7FFF<Input16#7FFFFFFF 32767

16#7FFFFFFF<Input<16#FFFF8000 -32768

DWORD_TO_INT
16#FFFF8000Input16#FFFFFFFF -32768 to -1
16#0 to16#7FFFFFFF 0 to 2147483647
DWORD_TO_DINT
16#80000000 to16#FFFFFFFF -2147483648 to -1
16#0 to16#FFFF 0 to 65535
DWORD_TO_UINT
Input>16#FFFF
0 to 65535
(low order word is treated as UINT
data)

Program example

SAMPLE2
1234
ST
WORD_TO_INT SAMPLE1
16#FB2E
LD

SAMPLE2 := WORD_TO_INT(SAMPLE1);

The input data 16#FB2E in SAMPLE1 is converted to INT and the result -1234 is
stored in SAMPLE2.

Error information
2.9 Type Conversion
185

Bit String-Bit-String Conversion

Type Conversion Bit String-Bit String Conversion
LD/FBD language
notation


_TO_
( Input );

Arguments

Input Input
Output
See below
Output

Input Output

Input Symbol(
) Output
WORD WORD_TO_DWORD DWORD
DWORD DWORD_TO_WORD WORD

Function
The entered bit string data is converted to specified bit string data.

WORD_TO_DWORD 16#0 to16#FFFF 16#0 to16#FFFF
16#0 to16#FFFF 16#0 to16#FFFF
DWORD_TO_WORD
Input>16#FFFF
Low order 16 bits are
output

Input Output
_TO_
_TO_
6F8C1226
186

Program example
Normal execution
SAMPLE1
16#00001234
LD
DWORD_TO_WORD SAMPLE2
16#1234
ST

The input data 16#00001234 in SAMPLE1 is converted to WORD and the result
1234 is stored in SAMPLE2.

Limit execution

SAMPLE1
16#00012345
LD
DWORD_TO_WORD SAMPLE2
16#2345
ST

Because the input data 16#00012345 in SAMPLE1 exceeds the valid data range for
WORD variable, the result 16#2345 is stored in SAMPLE2. If EN is used, ENO is

SAMPLE2 := DWORD_TO_WORD( SAMPLE1);

Error information
type, the low order 16 bits of the input data is output.

2.9 Type Conversion
187

BCD-Integer Conversion

Type Conversion BCD-Integer Conversion
LD/FBD language
notation

Input Output


_BCD_TO_
( Input );

Arguments

Input
Input
Output
See below
Output

Input Output

Input Symbol(
) Output
WORD WORD_BCD_TO_INT INT
WORD WORD_BCD_TO_DINT DINT
WORD WORD_BCD_TO_UINT UNIT
DWORD DWORD_BCD_TO_INT INT
DWORD DWORD_BCD_TO_DINT DINT
DWORD DWORD_BCD_TO_UINT UNIT

Function
The entered BCD data is converted to integer data.
Data between 16#A and 16#F is invalid in each digit of input data.
The conversion range and limits are shown below. The result is 0 if 16#A to16#F is
present in each digit.

16#0 to16#9999 0 to 9999
WORD_BCD_TO_INT
Each digit input>16#9 0 TRUE(ON)
16#0 to16#9999 0 to 9999
WORD_BCD_TO_DINT
16#0 to16#9999 0 to 9999
WORD_BCD_TO_UINT
_BCD_TO_
_BCD_TO_
6F8C1226
188

16#0 to16#32767 0 to 32767
Input>16#32767 32767
TRUE(ON) DWORD_BCD_TO_INT
16#0 to16#99999999 0 to 99999999
DWORD_BCD_TO_DINT
16#0 to16#65535 0 to 65535
Input>16#65535 65535
TRUE(ON) DWORD_BCD_TO_UINT

Program example
Normal execution
SAMPLE1
16#1234
LD
WORD_BCD_TO_UINT SAMPLE2
1234
ST

The input data 16#00001234 in SAMPLE1 is converted to WORD and the
result1234 is stored in SAMPLE2.

Invalid data input

SAMPLE1
16#1A39
LD
WORD_BCD_TO_UINT SAMPLE2
0
ST

Stores the result 0 in SAMPLE2 because the input data 16#1A39 in SAMPLE1
contains invalid data A.

SAMPLE2 := WORD_BCD_TO_UINT( SAMPLE1);

Error information
If the input BCD data contains invalid data between 16#A and 16#F, the conversion
result is 0. Also the specific register BCD error flag and error flag are set to
TRUE(ON).
2.9 Type Conversion
189

BCD-Real Numbers Conversion

Type Conversion BCD-Real Numbers Conversion
LD/FBD language
notation

Input Output


_BCD_TO_REAL( Input );

Arguments

Input See below
Input
Output REAL Output

Input Output

Input Symbol(
_)
WORD WORD_BCD_TO_REAL
DWORD DWORD_BCD_TO_REAL

Function
The entered BCD data is converted to REAL data.
The conversion range is shown below. The result is 0 if 16#A to16#F is present in each
digit.

Instruction Input Output BCD error
16#0 to16#9999 0.0 to 9999.0
WORD_BCD_TO_REAL
Each digit input>16#9 0.0 TRUE(ON)
16#0 to16#99999999 0.0 to 100000000.0
DWORD_BCD_TO_REAL
Each digit input>16#9 0.0 TRUE(ON)

_BCD_TO_REAL
_BCD_TO_REAL
6F8C1226
190

Program example
Normal execution

SAMPLE1
16#1234
LD
WORD_BCD_TO_REAL SAMPLE2
1234.0
ST

Input data 16#1234 in SAMPLE1 is converted to REAL and the result 1234.0 is
stored in SAMPLE2.

Invalid data input

SAMPLE1
16#1A39
LD
WORD_BCD_TO_REAL SAMPLE2
0.0
ST

Stores the result 0.0 in SAMPLE2 because the input data 16#1A39 in SAMPLE1

SAMPLE2 := WORD_BCD_TO_REAL( SAMPLE1);

Error information
result is 0. Also, the special register BCD error flag and error flag are set to
TRUE(ON).
2.9 Type Conversion
191

BCD-Duration Conversion

Type Conversion BCD-Duration Conversion
LD/FBD language
notation

Input Output


_BCD_TO_TIME( Input );

Arguments

Input See below
Input
Output TIME Output

Input Output

Input Symbol(
_)
WORD WORD_BCD_TO_TIME
DWORD DWORD_BCD_TO_TIME

Function
The entered BCD data is converted to TIME data.
The conversion range is shown below. The result is 0 if 16#A to 16#F is present in
each digit.

Instruction Input Output BCD error
16#0 to16#9999 T#0ms to T#9999ms
WORD_BCD_TO_TIME
Each digit input>16#9 T#0ms TRUE(ON)
16#0 to16#99999999
T#0ms to
T#99999999ms

DOWRD_BCD_TO_TIME
Each digit input>16#9 T#0ms TRUE(ON)
_BCD_TO_TIME
_BCD_TO_TIME
6F8C1226
192

Program example
Normal execution
SAMPLE1
16#1234
LD
WORD_BCD_TO_TIME SAMPLE2
T#1234ms
ST

Input data 16#1234 in SAMPLE1 is converted to elapsed time and the result
T#1234ms is stored in SAMPLE2.

Invalid data input

SAMPLE1
16#1A39
LD
WORD_BCD_TO_TIME SAMPLE2
T#0ms
ST

Stores the result T#0ms in SAMPLE2 because the input data 16#1A39 in SAMPLE1

SAMPLE2 := WORD_BCD_TO_TIME( SAMPLE1);

Error information
result is 0. Also the special register BCD error flag and error flag is set to TRUE(ON).
2.9 Type Conversion
193

Duration-Integer Conversion

Type Conversion Duration-Integer Conversion
LD/FBD language
notation

Input Output


ST language notation Output := TIME_TO_
( Input );

Arguments

Input TIME
Input

Input Output

Symbol(_
) Output
TIME_TO_INT INT
TIME_TO_DINT DINT
TIME_TO_UINT UINT

Function
The entered TIME data is converted to specified integer data.
Converts with output in ms unit.

-T#32768ms to
T#32767ms
-32768 to 32767
Input<-T#32768ms -32768

TIME_TO_INT
Input>T#32767ms 32767

TIME_TO_DINT
-T#2147483648ms to
T#2147483647ms
-2147483648 to
2147483647

T#0ms to T#65535ms 0 to 65535
Input<T#0ms 0
TIME_TO_UINT
Input>T#65535ms 65535

TIME _TO_
TIME _TO_
6F8C1226
194

Program example
Normal execution

SAMPLE1
T#1234ms
LD
TIME_TO_INT SAMPLE2
1234
ST

Converts input data -T#1234ms in SAMPLE1 to INT and stores the result -1234 in
SAMPLE2.

Limit execution

SAMPLE1
T#40000ms
LD
TIME_TO_INT SAMPLE2
32768
ST

Stores the result -32768 in SAMPLE2 because input data -T#40000ms in SAMPLE1
exceeds the valid data range for INT.

SAMPLE2 := TIME_TO_INT( SAMPLE1);

Error information
2.9 Type Conversion
195

Duration-Real Numbers Conversion

Type Conversion Duration-Real Numbers Conversion
LD/FBD language
notation

Input Output
TIME_TO_REAL


ST language notation Output := TIME_TO_REAL( Input );

Arguments

Input TIME
Input
Output REAL Output

Function
The entered TIME data is converted to REAL data.
Converts with output in ms unit.
TIME data between -T#16777215ms and T#16777215ms will be accurate when
converted to REAL.

Program example

SAMPLE1
T#1234ms
LD
TIME_TO_REAL SAMPLE2
1234.0
ST

SAMPLE2 := TIME_TO_REAL( SAMPLE1);

Input data T#1234ms in SAMPLE1 is converted to REAL and the result 1234.0 is
stored in SAMPLE2.
6F8C1226
196

Duration-BCD Conversion

Type Conversion Duration-BCD Conversion
LD/FBD language
notation

Input Output


ST language notation Output := TIME_TO_BCD_
( Input );

Arguments

Input TIME
Input

Input Output

Symbol(_
) Output
TIME_TO_BCD_WORD WORD
TIME_TO_BCD_DWORD DWORD

Function
The entered TIME data is converted to BCD data.

T#0ms toT#9999ms 16#0 to16#9999
Input<T#0ms 16#0
TRUE(ON) TIME_TO_BCD_WORD
Input>T#9999ms 16#9999
TRUE(ON)
T#0ms to
T#99999999ms
16#0 to
16#99999999

Input<T#0ms 16#0
TRUE(ON)
TIME_TO_BCD_DWORD
Input>T#99999999ms 16#99999999
TRUE(ON)

TIME _TO_BCD_
TIME _TO_BCD_
2.9 Type Conversion
197

Program example
Normal execution
SAMPLE1
T#1234ms
LD
TIME_TO_BCD_WORD SAMPLE2
16#1234
ST

Converts input data T#1234ms in SAMPLE1 to BCD and stores the result 16#1234 in
SAMPLE2.

Limit execution

SAMPLE1
T#12345ms
LD
TIME_TO_BCD_WORD SAMPLE2
16#9999
ST

Stores the result 16#9999 in SAMPLE2 because input data T#12345ms in SAMPLE1
exceeds the valid range.

SAMPLE2 := TIME_TO_BCD_WORD( SAMPLE1);

Error information
WORD 16#0 or 16#9999
DWORD 16#0 or 16#99999999
Also the special register BCD error flag and error flag are set to TRUE(ON).

6F8C1226
198

Truncation

Type Conversion Truncation
LD/FBD language
notation

Input Output
TRUNC_


ST language notation Output := TRUNC_
( Input );

Arguments

Input REAL
Input

Symbol(_) Output
TRUNC_INT INT
TRUNC_DINT DINT
TRUNC_UINT UINT
Input Output Input Output

Function
The entered REAL data is converted for fixed point integer data. Fractions are
truncated.
2.6 2
-1.5 -1
-2.4 -2
The range of integer data after conversion is as follows. If the conversion result
exceeds this range, the limit of the output data type is output.
INT conversion : -32768 to 32767
DINT conversion : -2147483648 to 2147483647
UINT conversion : 0 to 65535

TRUNC_
2.9 Type Conversion
199

Program example
Normal execution

SAMPLE1
4.567
LD
TRUNC_INT SAMPLE2
4
ST

Input data 4.567 in SAMPLE1 is converted to INT and the result 4 is stored in
SAMPLE2.

Limit execution

SAMPLE1
54321.0
LD
TRUNC_INT SAMPLE2
32767
ST

Input data 54321.0 in SAMPLE1 is converted to INT, but the result 32767 is stored in
SAMPLE2 because the valid data range of SAMPLE2 is exceeded.

SAMPLE2 := TRUNC_INT( SAMPLE1);

Error information

Controller Action

6F8C1226
200

Sign Negative

Type Conversion Sign Negative
LD/FBD language
notation

Input Output
NEG_


ST language notation Output := NEG_
( Input );

Arguments

Input
Input
Output
See below
Output

Input Symbol Output
INT NEG_INT INT
DINT NEG_DINT DINT
REAL NEG_REAL REAL
Input Output

Function
The sign of the input data is negated and the result is output.

Program example
Normal execution

SAMPLE1
1234
LD
NEG_INT SAMPLE2
1234
ST

The sign of the input data 1234 in SAMPLE1 is inverted and the result -1234 is
stored in SAMPLE2.

NEG_

2.9 Type Conversion
201

Limit execution

SAMPLE1
32768
LD
NEG_INT SAMPLE2
32767
ST

The sign of the input data -32768 in SAMPLE1 is inverted, but the result 32767 is
stored in SAMPLE2 because the valid data range of SAMPLE2 is exceeded.

SAMPLE2 := NEG_INT( SAMPLE1);

Error information

Controller Action


6F8C1226
202

DEG-RAD Conversion

Type Conversion DEG-RAD Conversion
LD/FBD language
notation

Input Output
DEG_TO_RAD


ST language notation Output := DEG_TO_RAD( Input );

Arguments

Input REAL
Input
Output REAL Output

Function
The entered angle data is converted to radian data.
Output = Angle / 180

Program example

SAMPLE1
90.0
LD
DEG_TO_RAD SAMPLE2
1.57079
ST

SAMPLE2 := DEG_TO_RAD( SAMPLE1);

The input data 90 in SAMPLE1 is converted to radian and the result 1.57079 is
stored in SAMPLE2.

Error information

Controller Action
If INF data is entered as input, the result is INF.

2.9 Type Conversion
203

RAD-DEG Conversion

Type Conversion RAD-DEG Conversion
LD/FBD language
notation

Input Output
RAD_TO_DEG


ST language notation Output := RAD_TO_DEG( Input );

Arguments

Input REAL
Input
Output REAL Output

Function
The entered radian data is converted to angle data.
Output = Radian data 180 /

Program example

SAMPLE1
1.57079
LD
RAD_TO_DEG SAMPLE2
90.0
ST

SAMPLE2 := RAD_TO_DEG( SAMPLE1);

The input data 1.57079 in SAMPLE1 is converted to angle and the result 90 is
stored in SAMPLE2.

Error information

Controller Action

6F8C1226
204

BIN Conversion

Type Conversion BIN Conversion
PCS
compatible
instruction
LD/FBD language
notation

Input Output
BIN__P


ST language notation Output := BIN_
_P( Input );

Arguments

Input
Input
Output
See below
Output

Input Output

Input Symbol(_
) Output
WORD BIN_INT_P INT
DWORD BIN_DINT_P DINT

Function
The entered BCD data is converted to INT data.
The valid range of input data and the limit of output data are as follows. Input data
between 16#A and 16#F are invalid.
BIN_INT_P : 16#0 to 16#9999
[When each digit>9; limit each digit to 9]
BIN_DINT_P : 16#0 to16#99999999
[When each digit>9; limit each digit to 9]
BIN__P
2.9 Type Conversion
205

Valid input : Each digit 16#0 to 16#9 0 to 9999
BIN_INT_P
Invalid input : Each digit > 16#9 Limit each digit: 9

Valid input : Each digit 16#0 to 16#9 0 to 99999999
BIN_DINT_P
Invalid input : Each digit > 16#9 Limit each digit: 9

Program example
Normal execution
SAMPLE1
16#1234
LD
BIN_INT_P SAMPLE2
1234
ST

The input data 16#1234 in SAMPLE1 is converted to BIN and the result 1234 is
stored in SAMPLE2.

Limit execution

SAMPLE1
16#1A39
LD
BIN_INT_P SAMPLE2
1939
ST

Stores the result 1939 in SAMPLE2 because the input data 16#1A39 in SAMPLE1

SAMPLE2 := BIN_INT_P( SAMPLE1);

Error information
If the input BCD data contains invalid data between 16#A and 16#F, the abnormal digit
is limited to 9.

6F8C1226
206

Time Data Type Conversion

Type Conversion Time Data Type Conversion
LD/FBD language
notation

Input Output
DT_TO_


ST language notation Output := DT_TO_
( Input );

Arguments

Input T
Input

Input Output

Symbol(_
) Output
DT_TO_TOD TOD
DT_TO_DATE DATE

Function
The entered DT data is converted to specified TOD data or DATE data.
Direct I/O variable cannot be specified for the input (Unified Controller nv series).

Program example
DT_TO_TOD

SAMPLE1
DT#1999-8-24-17:34:56
LD
DT_TO_TOD SAMPLE2
TOD#17:34:56
ST

SAMPLE2 := DT_TO_TOD( SAMPLE1);

The time of day data is extracted from input data DT#1999-8-24-17:34:56 in
SAMPLE1 and the result TOD#17:34:56 is stored in SAMPLE2.
DT_TO_
2.9 Type Conversion
207

DT_TO_DATE

SAMPLE1
DT#1999-8-24-17:34:56
LD
DT_TO_DATE SAMPLE2
DATE#1999-8-24
ST

SAMPLE2 := DT_TO_DATE( SAMPLE1);

The date data is extracted from input data DT#1999-8-24-17:34:56 in SAMPLE1 and
the result DATE#1999-8-24 is stored in SAMPLE2.

Error information
When the input exceeds the variable area, the time data type conversion is not
The following operation is performed if direct I/O variable is specified for the input
(Unified Controller nv series):

Controller Action

6F8C1226
208

Concatenate Time Data

Type Conversion Concatenate Time Data
LD/FBD language
notation

Input 1 Output
CONCAT_D_TOD
Input 2


ST language notation CONCAT_D_TOD ( Input1, Input2, Output );

Arguments

DATE
Input1 (Date data)

Input
TOD

Input2 (Time of day
data)

Output DT Output

Function
The date data Input 1 is concatenated with time of day data Input 2 and the result is
output.
Direct I/O variable cannot be specified for the output (Unified Controller nv series).
Program example

SAMPLE3
DT#1999-8-24-17:34:56
ST
CONCAT_D_TOD
SAMPLE2
TOD#17:34:56
LD
SAMPLE1
DATE#1999-8-24
LD

CONCAT_D_TOD ( SAMPLE1, SAMPLE2, SAMPLE3);

The date data DATE#1999-8-24 in SAMPLE1 is concatenated with time data
TOD#17:34:56 in SAMPLE2 and the result DT#1999-8-24-17:34:56 is stored in
SAMPLE3.
2.9 Type Conversion
209

Error information
When the output exceeds the variable area, concatenate time data is not processed
The following operation is performed if direct I/O variable is specified for the output-
(Unified Controller nv series):

Controller Action
Concatenation of time data is not executed.
Error flag and table operation error flag are set to TRUE (ON).


6F8C1226
210

ASCII-HEX Conversion

Type Conversion ASCII-HEX Conversion
T compatible
instruction
LD/FBD language
notation

Source table Destination table
ATOH_T
Table size
TBL
N


ST language notation ATOH_T ( TBL, N, destination table);

Arguments

TBL PTR Source table
Input
N UINT
Table size 1N64

Output PTR Destination table

Function
The N word ASCII data starting at variable specified with source table TBL is
converted to WORD and the result is stored in destination table.
Conversion is performed from low order byte of the source table and stored from the
highest digit of the destination table.
Valid ASCII data is 0(16#30) to 9(16#39) and A(16#41) to F(16#46).
If the table size is odd, only the high order byte is updated in the final data of the
destination table.
Table size N is the size of the source table and may be between 1 and 64.
If N=0, no conversion is performed.
Direct I/O variable cannot be specified for source table or destination table (Integrated
Controller, S Controller and Unified Controller).

2.9 Type Conversion
211

Program example

F 8 7 0
B (16#42) A (16#41)
1 (16#31) 0 (16#30)
3 (16#33) 2 (16#32)
5 (16#35) 4 (16#34)
7 (16#37) 6 (16#36)
9 (16#39) 8 (16#38)
F (16#46) E (16#45)
D (16#44) C (16#43)
1 (16#31) 0 (16#30)
F 0
16#0123
16#4567
16#89AB
16#CDEF
16#01
Conversion
9 words
ARRAY1
LD
SAMPLE2
9
LD
ATOH_T
TBL

N
ARRAY2
ST
Source table (ASCII data)
ARRAY1
Destination table (WORD)
ARRAY2
Because N=9, only the high order byte is
updated for the final word of the
destination table. Low order byte is
previous value.

ATOH_T ( ARRAY1, SAMPLE2, ARRAY2);

The nine words ASCII data starting at source table ARRAY1 is converted to WORD
and the result is stored in ARRAY2.
Because the table size is odd, only the top byte of the destination table ARRAY2[4] is
updated and the low order byte retains the previous value.

Error information
When the source table and destination table exceed the variable area, the ASCIIHEX
conversion is not processed and the data boundary is exceeded.
The following operation is performed when there are invalid data (ASCII codes other
than 0to9and AtoF):

Controller Action
V series
S Controller
ASCIIHEX conversion is not executed.
Error flag and ASCII data conversion error flag are
set to TRUE(ON).

If table size N exceeds 64, it is limited to N=64.
The following operation is performed when direct I/O variable is specified for the
source table or destination table:

Controller Action
V series
S Controller
set to TRUE(ON).

6F8C1226
212

HEX-ASCII Conversion

Type Conversion HEX-ASCII Conversion
T compatible
instruction
LD/FBD language
notation

Source table Destination table
HTOA_T
Table size
TBL
N


ST language notation HTOA_T ( TBL, N, destination table );

Arguments

TBL PTR Source table
Input
N UINT
Table size 1N32


Function
The N word WORD data starting at variable specified with source table TBL is
converted to ASCII data and the result is stored in destination table.
Conversion is performed from top of the source table and stored from the low order
byte of the destination table.
Table size N is the size of the source table and may be between 1 and 32.
If N=0, no conversion is performed.
Direct I/O variable cannot be specified for the source table or destination table
(Integrated Controller, S Controller, Unified Controller).

2.9 Type Conversion
213

Program example

Source table (WORD) Destination table (ASCII data)
ARRAY1 ARRAY2

F 0
16#0123
16#4567
16#89AB
16#CDEF
Conversion
F 8 7 0
B(16#42) A(16#41)
1(16#31) 0(16#30)
3(16#33) 2(16#32)
5(16#35) 4(16#34)
7(16#37) 6(16#36)
9(16#39) 8(16#38)
F(16#46) E(16#45)
D(16#44) C(16#43)
8 words
ARRAY1

LD
SAMPLE2
4
LD
HTOA_T
TBL

N
ARRAY2

ST

HTOA_T ( ARRAY1, SAMPLE2, ARRAY2);

The four words WORD data starting at source table ARRAY1 is converted to ASCII
and the result is stored in variable ARRAY2.

Error information
When the source table and destination table exceed the variable area, HEX-ASCII
If table size N exceeds 32, it is limited to N=32.
The following operation is performed if direct I/O variable is specified for the source
table or destination table:

Controller Action
V series
S Controller
HEX-ASCII conversion is not executed.
HEX-ASCII conversion is not executed.
TRUE(ON).


6F8C1226
214

ASCII-Real Numbers Conversion

Type Conversion ASCII-Real Numbers Conversion
LD/FBD language
notation

Input string Output
ASC_TO_REAL
Converted N


ST language notation Output := ASC_TO_REAL ( Input string, N );

Arguments

STRING Input string
Input
N UINT

Converted
characters
1N64
Output REAL Output

Function
N characters from the beginning of the entered input string are converted to REAL.
The input string may be expressed in numerical or exponential format.
Numerical format123.456
Exponential format-123.456E+2
The valid range of converted characters is 1 N 64. If N=0, no conversion is
performed.
The following characters may be converted. However, spaces are valid only when
they are at the beginning of the string. A space character is also counted as one
character.
+, -, 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, E, e, .(period), (space)
The entered character string is analyzed as follows:

Direct I/O variable cannot be specified for the input string (Integrated Controller, S
Controller, Unified Controller).
SP
e
+
Number
.
Number
.
E
+
Number
2.9 Type Conversion
215

Program example
When the input string is specified in numerical format:

SAMPLE3
162.25
ST
ASC_TO_REAL
SAMPLE2
6
LD
SAMPLE1
162.25
LD
N

Six characters (specified by SAMPLE2) starting from the beginning of string 162.25
in SAMPLE1 are converted to REAL and the result 162.25 is stored in SAMPLE3.

When the input string is specified in exponential format:

SAMPLE3
0.125
ST
ASC_TO_REAL
SAMPLE2
7
LD
SAMPLE1
12.5E-23
LD
N

Seven characters (specified by SAMPLE2) starting from the beginning of string
12.5E-23 in SAMPLE1 are converted to REAL and the result 0.125 is stored in
SAMPLE3.

SAMPLE3 := ASC_TO_REAL (SAMPLE1, SAMPLE2);

Error information
When the input string exceeds the variable area, ASCII-real numbers conversion is not
If there is a character code that cannot be converted within N characters from the
beginning of the input string, 0 is output as the result.
When the number of input characters is greater than the converted characters N, N is
limited to the number of entered characters.
If the converted data exceeds the range of REAL data, 0 is output as the result.
If converted characters N exceeds 64, it is limited to N=64.
The following operation is performed if direct I/O variable is specified for the input
string:

Controller Action
V series
6F8C1226
216

Real Numbers-ASCII Conversion

Type Conversion Real Numbers-ASCII Conversion
LD/FBD language
notation

Input data Output
REAL_TO_ASC
Output char SIZE
Decimal characte N


ST language notation REAL_TO_ASC (Input data, SIZE, N, Output );

Arguments

REAL
Input data
SIZE UINT
Output characters
Input0 : 0SIZE9
Input<0 : 0SIZE10 Input
N UINT

Decimal
characters
0N7
Output REAL Output

Function
The entered REAL data is converted to fixed point decimal string format specified by
SIZE and N and the result is output.
SIZE specifies the number of output characters including the decimal characters N
and the valid range depends on whether the input data is positive or negative.
Input data 0 :0 SIZE 9
Input data < 0 :0 SIZE 10
N specifies the number of decimal characters in the output string and the valid range is
0 N 7.
Largest value that can be converted: 9999999.0 (Positive: SIZE=9, N=1 specified,
Negative: SIZE=10, N=1 specified)
Smallest value that can be converted: 0.0000001 (Positive: SIZE=9, N=7 specified,
Negative: SIZE=10, N=7 specified)
If the converted result cannot be stored in the output string format specified by SIZE
and N, an error flag in the specific register is set to TRUE(ON) to indicate that
characters are truncated.
When SIZE=0, the result is NULL.

.

N
SIZE

Direct I/O variable cannot be specified for the output string (Integrated Controller, S
Controller, Unified Controller).
2.9 Type Conversion
217

Program example
Normal execution

SAMPLE4
162.2
ST
REAL_TO_ASC

SAMPLE2
5
LD
SAMPLE1
162.25
LD
SAMPLE3
1
LD
SIZE
N

REAL data 162.25 in SAMPLE1 is converted to string using output characters 5 in
SAMPLE2 and decimal characters 1 in SAMPLE3 and the result 162.2 is stored in
SAMPLE4.

Abnormal execution

SAMPLE4
-12.3
ST
REAL_TO_ASC
SAMPLE2
5
LD
SAMPLE1
-12.345
LD
SAMPLE3
2
LD
SIZE
N

REAL data -12.345 in SAMPLE1 is converted to string using output characters 5 in
SAMPLE2 and decimal characters 2 in SAMPLE3 and the result -12.3 is stored in
SAMPLE4. The error flag in specific register is set to TRUE(ON) to indicate that
characters are truncated.

REAL_TO_ASC ( SAMPLE1, SAMPLE2, SAMPLE3, SAMPLE4);

6F8C1226
218

Error information
When the output exceeds the variable area, real numbers-ASCII conversion is not
If the converted result cannot be stored within SIZE, an error flag in the specific
register is set to TRUE(ON) to indicate that characters are truncated.
No conversion is performed when SIZE is greater than the defined string size.
The following operation is performed when the input data is NAN:

Controller Action
Integrated Controller V series Not converted when NAN is input.
If SIZE and N specifying the output string format exceed the valid range, they are
limited by the maximum valid value.
When |input data| > 9999999, input data is limited to 9999999.
The following operation is performed when direct I/O variable is specified for the output
string:

Controller Action
V series
S Controller
Real Numbers-ASCII conversion is not executed.
Real Numbers-ASCII conversion is not executed.
TRUE(ON).


2.9 Type Conversion
219

ASCII (decimal)-Double Integer Conversion

Type Conversion ASCII(decimal)-Double Integer Conversion
LD/FBD language
notation

Conversion table Output
ASCDEC_TO_DINT
Table size
TBL
N


ST language notation Output := ASCDEC_TO_DINT ( TBL, N );

Arguments

TBL PTR Conversion table
Input
N UINT
Table size 1N64

Output DINT Output

Function
From conversion table TBL consisting of decimal ASCII data (including end code CR),
the number of words specified by table size N are converted to DINT and the result is
output.
Valid ASCII data are 0(16#30) to 9(16#39), -(16#2D), +(16#2B) and CR(16#0D).
The content of the conversion table that is subject to conversion starts with a number,
+ or and ends with end code CR.
Table size N is from 1 to 64. When N=0, the result is output as 0.
The range of data to be converted is from -2147483648 to 2147483647.
The data format of the conversion table is as follows:

1) 12345678
0 2 (16#32) 1 (16#31)
1 4 (16#34) 3 (16#33)
2 6 (16#36) 5 (16#35)
3 8 (16#38) 7 (16#37)
4 CR (16#0D)
5
2) -876543210
0 8 (16#38) - (16#2D)
1 6 (16#36) 7 (16#37)
2 4 (16#34) 5 (16#35)
3 2 (16#32) 3 (16#33)
4 0 (16#30) 1 (16#31)
5 CR(16#0D)
3) +135792468
0 1 (16#31) + (16#2B)
1 5 (16#35) 3 (16#33)
2 9 (16#39) 7 (16#37)
3 4 (16#34) 2 (16#32)
4 8 (16#38) 6 (16#36)
5 CR (16#0D)

Direct I/O variable cannot be specified for the conversion table (Integrated Controller,
S Controller, Unified Controller).
6F8C1226
220

Program example
Normal execution

SAMPLE2
-1234
ST
ASCDEC_TO_DINT

SAMPLE1
3
LD
TBL1

LD
TBL
N
TBL1 structure
0 "1"(16#31) "- " (16#2D)
1 "3" (16#33) "2" (16#32)
2 CR(16#0D) "4" (16#34)

Starting with conversion table TBL1, the 3 words ASCII data specified by SAMPLE1 is
converted to DINT and the result -1234 is stored in SAMPLE2.

Abnormal execution

SAMPLE2
0
ST
ASCDEC_TO_DINT

SAMPLE1
3
LD
TBL1

LD
TBL
N
TBL1 structure
0 "1" (16#31) "-" (16#2D)
1 "3" (16#33) "2" (16#32)
2 "5" (16#35) "4" (16#34)

Because no CR code is detected when converting the 3 words ASCII data specified by
SAMPLE1 starting with conversion TBL1 to DINT, the result 0 is stored in SAMPLE2
and the special register error flag is set to TRUE(ON).

SAMPLE2 := ASCDEC_TO_DINT (TBL1, SAMPLE1);

Error information
When the conversion table exceeds the variable area, ASCII (decimal) -double integer
The following operation is performed if an ASCII code other than the specified
character is present before the CR code, if + or - is present anywhere other than
the beginning of data, or if the CR code is not present.

Controller Action
V series
S Controller
Result is 0.
Result is 0.
set to TRUE(ON).
2.9 Type Conversion
221

The following operation is performed if the conversion result exceeds the maximum
value of DINT type.

Controller Action
V series
S Controller
Result is the limit value.
set to TRUE(ON).

If table size exceeds 64, it is limited to N=64.
conversion table:

Controller Action
V series

6F8C1226
222

ASCII(Hexadecimal) -Double Integer Conversion

Type Conversion ASCII (Hexadecimal) -Double Integer Conversion
LD/FBD language
notation

Conversion table Output
ASCHEX_TO_DINT
Table size
TBL
N


ST language notation Output := ASCHEX_TO_DINT ( TBL, N );

Arguments

TBL PTR Conversion table
Input
N UINT
Table size 1N64

Output DINT Output

Function
From conversion table TBL consisting of hexadecimal ASCII data (including end code
CR), the numbers of words specified by table size N are converted to DINT and the
result is output.
Valid ASCII data are as follows:
0 (16#30) to 9 (16#39), A(16#41) to F(16#46), a(16#61) to f(16#66) and
CR(16#0D)
The content of the conversion table that is subject to conversion starts with a number,
A to F, or a to f and ends with end code CR.
Table size N is from 1 to 64. When N=0, the result is output as 0.
The data to be converted is from 0 to FFFFFFFF.
The data format of the conversion table is as follows:

1) 12345678
0 2 (16#32) 1 (16#31)
1 4 (16#34) 3 (16#33)
2 6 (16#36) 5 (16#35)
3 8 (16#38) 7 (16#37)
4 CR (16#0D)
5
2) ABCDef01
0 B (16#42) A (16#41)
1 D (16#44) C (16#43)
2 f (16#66) e (16#65)
3 1 (16#31) 0 (16#30)
4 CR (16#0D)
5

Direct I/O variable cannot be specified for the conversion table (Integrated Controller,
2.9 Type Conversion
223

Program example
Normal execution

SAMPLE2
109364
ST
ASCHEX_TO_DINT

SAMPLE1
3
LD
TBL1

LD
TBL
N
TBL structure
0 "A" (16#41) "1" (16#31)
1 "3" (16#33) "B" (16#42)
2 CR(16#0D) "4" (16#34)

Starting with conversion table TBL1, the 3 words ASCII data specified by SAMPLE1 is
converted to DINT and the result 109364 is stored in SAMPLE2.

Abnormal execution

SAMPLE2
0
ST
ASCHEX_TO_DINT

SAMPLE1
3
LD
TBL1

LD
TBL
N
TBL1 structure
0 "1" (16#31) "0" (16#30)
1 "3" (16#33) "2" (16#32)
2 "5" (16#35) "4" (16#34)

Because no CR code is detected when converting the 3 words ASCII data specified by
SAMPLE1 starting with conversion TBL1 to DINT, the result 0 is stored in SAMPLE2
and the special register error flag is set to TRUE(ON).

SAMPLE2 := ASCHEX_TO_DINT( TBL1, SAMPLE1);

Error information
When the conversion table exceeds the variable area, ASCII(hexadecimal)-double
integer conversion is not processed and the data boundary is exceeded.
The following operation is performed if an ASCII code other than the specified
character is present before the CR code or if the CR code is not present:

Controller Action
V series
S Controller
Result is 0.
Result is 0.
set to TRUE(ON).

6F8C1226
224

The following operation is performed if the conversion result exceeds the maximum
value of DINT type:

Controller Action
V series
S Controller
set to TRUE(ON).

If the table size exceeds 64, it is limited to N=64.
The following operation is performed if direct I/O variable is specified for the
conversion table:

Controller Action
V series

2.9 Type Conversion
225

Double Integer-ASCII (decimal) Conversion

Type Conversion Double Integer-ASCII (decimal) Conversion
LD/FBD language
notation
Conversion Destination
DINT_TO_ASCDEC
Table size
IN
N


ST language notation DINT_TO_ASCDEC ( IN, N, Destination table );

Arguments

IN DINT Conversion data
Input
N UINT
Table size 1N64


Function
Conversion data IN is converted to decimal ASCII data and the result is output with
end code CR appended at the end of converted ASCII data. Also, the number of
converted character codes is output to index register XL. (XL contains the number of
character codes including the end code CR.
Table size N is from 1 to 64. No operation is performed when N=0.
The data format of the destination table is as follows:

1) 1234567890
0 "2" (16#32) "1" (16#31)
1 "4" (16#34) "3" (16#33)
2 "6" (16#36) "5" (16#35)
3 "8" (16#38) "7" (16#37)
4 "0" (16#30) "9" (16#39)
5 CR(16#0D)
2) -876543210
0 "8" (16#38) "-" (16#2D)
1 "6" (16#36) "7" (16#37)
2 "4" (16#34) "5" (16#35)
3 "2" (16#32) "3" (16#33)
4 "0" (16#30) "1" (16#31)
5 CR(16#0D)

Direct I/O variable cannot be specified for the destination table (Integrated Controller,
6F8C1226
226

Program example
Normal execution

TBL1

ST
DINT_TO_ASCDEC

SAMPLE2
3
LD
SAMPLE1
-1234
LD
IN
N
TBL1 structure
0 "1" (16#31) "-" (16#2D)
1 "3" (16#33) "2" (16#32)
2 CR(16#0D) "4" (16#34)

Content -1234 of conversion table SAMPLE1 is converted to ASCII (decimal) and the
result is stored in a 3 words area specified by SAMPLE2 starting from destination table
TBL1. The number of characters 6 is stored in index register XL.

Abnormal execution

TBL1

ST
DINT_TO_ASCDEC

SAMPLE2
3
LD
SAMPLE1
-12345
LD
IN
N
TBL1 structure
0 "1" (16#31) "4" (16#34)
1

CR(16#0D)
2

Content of TBL1 is unchanged.

Because the content of conversion data SAMPLE1 cannot be converted to ASCII
(decimal) and stored in 3 words area specified by SAMPLE2 and starting with
destination table TBL1 (four words are required), the contents of storage destination
table TBL1 and index register XL are unchanged. Also, the special register error flag is
set to TRUE(ON).

DINT_TO_ASCDEC ( SAMPLE1, SAMPLE2, TBL1);

2.9 Type Conversion
227

Error information
When the destination table exceeds the variable area, the double integer-ASCII
(decimal) conversion is not processed and the data boundary is exceeded.
The following operation is performed if the conversion result cannot be stored in area
with number of words specified by N:

Controller Action
V series
S Controller
Destination table and index register XL are not
updated.
updated.
set to TRUE(ON).

If table size exceeds 64, it is limited to N=64.
The following operation is performed if direct I/O is specified for the destination table:

Controller Action
V series
S Controller
Double integer-ASCII (decimal) conversion is not
executed.
Double integer-ASCII (decimal) conversion is not
executed.
TRUE(ON).


6F8C1226
228

Double Integer-ASCII (hexadecimal) Conversion

Type Conversion Double Integer-ASCII (hexadecimal) Conversion
LD/FBD language
notation
Conversion Destination
table
DINT_TO_ASCHEX
Table size
IN
N


ST language notation DINT_TO_ASCHEX ( IN, N, Destination table );

Arguments

IN DINT Conversion data
Input
N UINT
Table size 1N64


Function
Conversion data IN is converted to hexadecimal ASCII data and the result is output
with end code CR appended at the end of converted ASCII data. Also, the number of
converted character codes is output to index register XL (XL contains the number of
character codes including the end code CR).
Table size N is from 1 to 64. No operation is performed when N=0.
The data format of the storage destination table is as follows:

1) 305419896
0 "2" (16#32) "1" (16#31)
1 "4" (16#34) "3" (16#33)
2 "6" (16#36) "5" (16#35)
3 "8" (16#38) "7" (16#37)
4 0 CR(16#0D)
5
2) -87654321
0 "A" (16#41) "F" (16#46)
1 "6" (16#36) "C" (16#43)
2 "0" (16#30) "8" (16#38)
3 "F" (16#46) "4" (16#34)
4 0 CR(16#0D)
5

Direct I/O variable cannot be specified for the destination table (Integrated Controller,
2.9 Type Conversion
229

Program example
Normal execution

TBL1

ST
DINT_TO_ASCHEX

SAMPLE2
3
LD
SAMPLE1
332340
LD
IN
N
TBL1 structure
0 "1" (16#31) "5" (16#35)
1 "3" (16#33) "2" (16#32)
2 CR(16#0D) "4" (16#34)

Content 332340 of conversion table SAMPLE1 is converted to ASCII (hexadecimal)
and the result is stored in a 3 words area specified by SAMPLE2 starting from
destination table TBL1. The number of characters 6 is stored in index register XL.

Abnormal execution

TBL1

ST
DINT_TO_ASCHEX

SAMPLE2
2
LD
SAMPLE1
4660
LD
IN
N
TBL1 structure
0 "1" (16#31) "4" (16#34)
1

CR(16#0D)
2

Content of TBL1 is unchanged.

Because the content of conversion data SAMPLE1 cannot be converted to ASCII
(hexadecimal) and stored in 2 words area specified by SAMPLE2 and starting with
destination table TBL1 (three words are required), the contents of destination table
TBL1 and index register XL are unchanged. Also, the special register error flag is set
to TRUE(ON).

DINT_TO_ASCHEX ( SAMPLE1, SAMPLE2, TBL1);

Error information
When the destination table exceeds the variable area, the double integer-ASCII
(hexadecimal) conversion is not processed and the data boundary is exceeded.
The following operation is performed if the conversion result cannot be stored in area
with number of words specified by N:

Controller Action
V series
S Controller
updated.
updated.
set to TRUE(ON).
6F8C1226
230

if the table size exceeds 64, it is limited to N=64.
The following operation is performed when direct I/O is specified for the destination
table:

Controller Action
V series
S Controller
Double integer-ASCII (hexadecimal) conversion is
not executed.
Double integer-ASCII (hexadecimal) conversion is
not executed.
TRUE(ON).


2.9 Type Conversion
231

Array-String Conversion

Type Conversion Array-String Conversion
LD/FBD language
notation

Array data Destination string
variable
ARRAY_TO_STRING
Table size
IN
N

ST language notation ARRAY_TO_STRING ( IN, N, Destination string variable );

Arguments

IN PTR Array data
Input
N UINT
Table size 1N129

Output STRING
Destination string
variable

Function
An N word shift JIS character code starting from input array data IN is output as
STRING.
The data to be converted is N words starting from IN and ends with CR code (16#0D).
The table size N indicates the conversion size of the array data. No operation is
performed when N=0.
The range of table size N is from 1 to 129 (up to 256 bytes + CR code).
The data formats of the source and destination table are as follows:

0
1
2
3
4
5
2 (16#32) 1 (16#31)
4 (16#34) 3 (16#33)
6 (16#36) 5 (16#35)
8 (16#38) 7 (16#37)
CR (16#0D)

0
1
2
3
4
5
8 (16#38) - (16#2D)
6 (16#36) 7 (16#37)
4 (16#34) 5 (16#35)
2 (16#32) 3 (16#33)
CR (16#0D) 1 (16#31)

0
1
2
3
4
5
2 (16#32) 1 (16#31)
4 (16#34) 3 (16#33)
6 (16#36) 5 (16#35)
8 (16#38) 7 (16#37)
41

STRING length=8
VAR length=6
7
6
0
1 STRING length=9
VAR length=6
2
3
4
5
6
7
8 (16#38) - (16#2D)
6 (16#36) 7 (16#37)
4 (16#34) 5 (16#35)
2 (16#32) 3 (16#33)
1 (16#31)

Ex. when character string is declared as
follows
Var. Data type Dec.
A STRING [12] VAR
<Source>
<Destination>
Character code storage area word
count as STRING [12]
Number of Stored character
Stored character codes
1) 12345678 2) -87654321
N=5 N=5

Direct I/O variable cannot be specified for the input string and destination string
6F8C1226
232

Program example

SAMPLE2

ST
ARRAY_TO_STRING

SAMPLE1
3
LD
TBL1

LD
IN
N
TBL1 structure
0 "1" (16#31) "5" (16#35)
1 "3" (16#33) "2" (16#32)
2 CR(16#0D) "4" (16#34)
<Variable declaration>
SAMPLE2 STRING [12] VAR

SAMPLE2 result
0
"1" (16#31) "5" (16#35)
1
"3" (16#33) "2" (16#32)
2
"4" (16#34)
String length=5
VAR length=6
3
4
5

6
7
3 "7" (16#37) "6" (16#36)

ARRAY_TO_STRING( TBL1, SAMPLE1, SAMPLE2);

Starting with source array data TBL1, 3 words array data specified by SAMPLE1 is
stored in STRING SAMPLE2. The data up to the end code CR in the source are
converted.

Error information
When the array data and destination string exceed the variable area, the arraystring
If the source data cannot be stored in the destination STRING variable (INT((number
of character codes up to CR+1)/2) > VAR length), the result is unchanged.
If there is no CR code in the N word array starting with the source data, the result is
unchanged (data format error).
If the array data contains invalid 2 byte character code, it is replaced with ?? in the
result.
If N>129, the operation is limited to N=129.
source array and output string.

Controller Action
Integrated
Controller
V series
S Controller
Arraystring conversion is not executed.
Arraystring conversion is not executed.
TRUE(ON).

2.9 Type Conversion
233

String-Array Conversion

Type Conversion String-Array Conversion
LD/FBD language
notation

Input string Destination
array
STRING_TO_ARRAY
Converted characters
IN
L
P
Start of converted
characters


ST language notation STRING_TO_ARRAY ( IN, L, P, Destination array );

Arguments

IN STRING Input string
L UINT

Converted
characters

Input
P UINT

Start of converted
characters

Output PTR Destination array

Function
L character codes from the P character of the input string IN are stored in the specified
array.
CR code (16#0D) is appended at the end of the converted character code.
No operation is performed when L=0.
The data formats of the input string and destination are as follows:

0
1
2
3
4
5
3 (16#33) 2 (16#32)
5 (16#35) 4 (16#34)
CR (16#0D)

0
1
2
3
4
5
6 (16#36) 7 (16#37)
4 (16#34) 5 (16#35)
CR (16#0D) 3 (16#33)

0
1
2
3
4
5
2 (16#32) 1 (16#31)
4 (16#34) 3 (16#33)
6 (16#36) 5 (16#35)
8 (16#38) 7 (16#37)

STRING length=8
VAR length=6
7
6
0
1 STRING length=9
VAR length=6
2
3
4
5
6
7
8 (16#38) - (16#2D)
6 (16#36) 7 (16#37)
4 (16#34) 5 (16#35)
2 (16#32) 3 (16#33)
1 (16#31)

Ex. when string variable is declared as
follows:
Var. Data type Dec.
A STRING[12] VAR
<Input string>
<Destination array>
Character code storage area words as STRING[12]
Number of Stored character
Stored character code
1) 12345678 2) -87654321
When L=4, P=2 When L=5, P=3

Direct I/O variable cannot be specified for the input string and destination array
6F8C1226
234

Program example

TBL1

ST
STRING_TO_ARRAY

SAMPLE2
3
LD
SAMPLE1

LD
IN
L
TBL1 result
0 "1" (16#31)

1 "3" (16#33)
"2" (16#32)
2
CR(16#0D)

SAMPLE1 structure
0
"1" (16#31) "5" (16#35)
1
"3" (16#33) "2" (16#32)
2
"4" (16#34)
String length=5
VAR length=6
3
4
5
6
7
3
SAMPLE3
2
LD
P
SAMPLE1 STRING [12] VAR

STRING_TO_ARRAY ( SAMPLE1, SAMPLE2, SAMPLE3, TBL1);

In the source input string SAMPLE1, 3 characters specified by SAMPLE2 from
character start position 2 specified by SAMPLE3 are output to destination array TBL1
with end code CR appended.

Error information
When the input string and destination array exceed the variable area, the stringarray
When the conversion character position P=0, L characters from the beginning are
stored in the array.
When conversion character position P > storage character count, only CR code is
stored in the array.
string and destination array:

Controller Action
V series
S Controller
Stringarray conversion is not executed.
Stringarray conversion is not executed.
TRUE(ON).

When EN is used, ENO is reset to FALSE(OFF) when the above error occurs.
2.9 Type Conversion
235

Tag Number Conversion

Type Conversion Tag Number Conversion
LD/FBD language
notation

Tag variable Tag
TO_INDEX
Tag type
TAG
TYPE


ST language notation Tag number := TO_INDEX ( TAG, TYPE );

Arguments

TAG PTR
Tag variable
(parameter)

Input
TYPE UINT
Tag type
0 : PV 1 : LP
2 : PB 3 : SQ
Output DINT Tag number

Function
The variable specified with tag variable TAG is converted to an array number within
the type specified with tag type TYPE, and the result is output.
The range of the tag type is from 0 to 3 (from 0 to 2 for the MCS type tag controller
(model1000) because SQ is not included.
Direct I/O variable cannot be specified for the tag variable.
Array type notation (e.g. PV_PARA[0]) and Tag No. notation (e.g. FIC101) can be
specified for tag variable.
This instruction is useful when processes using tags are standardized (user FB) and
tag variables are switched. For details, refer to "Program example.

Note
For the DS type tag controller, tag numbers of PV and LP are different, so no extension
is required (e.g. FIC101. TAG). For the MCS type tag controller (model 1000), tag
numbers of PV and LP are common, so Tag No. notation without extension (e.g.
FIC101) is not interpreted correctly. Therefore, specify tag numbers with extension
(e.g. FIC101.PVP and FIC101.ALP for LP, FIC101.TAG for PV).
6F8C1226
236

Program example

User FB(TAG_FB) caller
Variable Data type Val Dec.
PV1 REAL 0 VAR
PV2 REAL 0 VAR
TAG_FB_1 TAG_FB VAR
TAG_FB_2 TAG_FB VAR
IND01.TAG: PV_PARA[0]
IND02.TAG: PV_PARA[1]
User FB(TAG_FB)
Variable Data type Val Dec.
TAG PTR VAR_INPUT
OUT REAL VAR_OUTPUT
IND01.RH=200.0 IND01.RL=0.0 IND01.PV=24.0
IND02.RH=100.0 IND02.RL=-100.0 IND02.PV=24.0
IND01.TAG

LD
TAG_FB
TAG OUT
PV1
12
ST
TAG_FB_1
IND02.TAG

LD
TAG_FB
TAG OUT
PV2
62
ST
TAG_FB_2
TAG{INT}[0]

LD
0

LD
TO_INDEX
TAG

TYPE
XI

ST
PV_DATA[XI].
PV
LD
PV_PARA[XI].
RH
LD
PCT
IN

PV_RH
OUT

ST
IND01: 0
IND02: 1
IND01: 24.0
IND02: 24.0
IND01:12.0
IND02:62.0

TAG_FB_1 ( IND01.TAG); XI := TO_INDEX ( TAG{INT}[0], 0);
PV1 := TAG_FB_1.OUT; OUT := PCT ( PV_DATA[XI].PV, PV_PARA[XI].RH);

TAG_FB_2 (IND02.TAG);
PV2 := TAG_FB_2.OUT;

The user function block (TAG_FB) that has tag No. (TAG) as an input argument is
executed twice.
If IND01.TAG is specified, XI=0 in TAG_FB. If IND02.TAG is specified, XI=1. The
specified tag variable is accessed in each case.

Error information
If anything other than 0 to 3 (0 to 2 for the MCS type tag controller (model1000)) is
specified for tag type TYPE, or if tag variable TAG is out of range, a table operation
error occurs and the result output is "-1".
The following operation is performed if direct I/O is specified for the tag variable:

Controller Action
V series
S Controller
Table operation error flag is set to TRUE(ON) and the
result is -1.
TRUE(ON) and the result is -1.

2.10 Numeric Function
237


1
Square Root SQRT
2
Exponential EXP
3
Common Logarithms LOG
4
Natural Logarithms LN
5
Absolute Value ABS
6
Sine SIN
7
Cosine COS
8
Tangent TAN
9
Arcsine ASIN
10
Arccosine ACOS
11
Arctangent ATAN

Chapter 2 LD/FBD Instruction
6F8C1226
238

Square Root

Numeric Function Square Root
LD/FBD language
notation

Input Output
SQRT


ST language notation Output := SQRT( Input );

Arguments

Input REAL
Input
Output REAL Output

Function
The square root of the input REAL data is obtained and the result is output.
input input of sign Output

Program example

SAMPLE1
3.0
LD
SQRT
SAMPLE2
1.732051
ST

SAMPLE2 := SQRT (SAMPLE1);

The square root of the input data 3 in SAMPLE1 is obtained and the result
1.732051 is stored in SAMPLE2.

Error information

Controller Action

239

Exponential

Numeric Function Exponential
LD/FBD language
notation

Input Output
EXP


ST language notation Output := EXP( Input );

Arguments

Input REAL
Input
Output REAL Output

Function
The exponential of the input REAL data is obtained and the result is output.

input exp Output

88.7228 0
1
3.40282E+38
Input data
Result output

Program example

SAMPLE1
3.0
LD
EXP
SAMPLE2
20.08553
ST

SAMPLE2 := EXP (SAMPLE1);

The exponential of the input data 3 in SAMPLE1 is obtained and the result
6F8C1226
240

Error information

Controller Action

241

Common Logarithms

Numeric Function Common Logarithms
LD/FBD language
notation

Input Output
LOG


ST language notation Output := LOG( Input );

Arguments

Input REAL
Input
Output REAL Output

Function
The common logarithm of the input REAL data is obtained and the result is output.
If the input data is 0, the result is 0.

Output=log( | input | )

0
-3.40282E+38
38.53184
Input data
Result output
3.40282E+38

Program example

SAMPLE1
3.0
LD
LOG
SAMPLE2
0.4771213
ST

SAMPLE2 := LOG( SAMPLE1);

The common logarithm of the input data 3 in SAMPLE1 is obtained and the result
6F8C1226
242

Error information

Controller Action


243

Natural Logarithms

Numeric Function Natural Logarithms
LD/FBD language
notation

Input Output
LN


ST language notation Output := LN( Input );

Arguments

Input REAL
Input
Output REAL Output

Function
The natural logarithm of the input REAL data is obtained and the result is output.
If the input data is 0, the result is 0.

Outputln ( | input | )

0
-3.40282E+38
88.7228
Input data
Result output
3.40282E+38

Program example

SAMPLE1
3.0
LD
LN
SAMPLE2
1.098612
ST

SAMPLE2 := LN( SAMPLE1);

The natural logarithm of the input data 3 in SAMPLE1 is obtained and the result
6F8C1226
244

Error information
The following operation is performed if the input data type is REAL:

Controller Action


245

Absolute Value

Numeric Function Absolute Value
LD/FBD language
notation
Input Output
ABS_


ST language notation Output := ABS_
( Input );

Arguments

Input
Input
Output
See below
Output

Input Symbol(_ ) Output
INT ABS_INT INT
DINT ABS_DINT DINT
REAL ABS_REAL REAL

Function
The absolute value of the input data is obtained and the result is output.
For INT data, the absolute value of the maximum negative value is the maximum
positive value.

Input data Result output
ABS_INT 32768 32767
ABS_DINT 2147483648 2147483647

Input Output
ABS_

6F8C1226
246

Program example

SAMPLE1
-1234
LD
ABS_INT
SAMPLE2
1234
ST

SAMPLE2 := ABS_INT (SAMPLE1);

The absolute value of the input data -1234 in SAMPLE1 is obtained and the result

Error information

Controller Action


247

Sine

Numeric Function Sine
LD/FBD language
notation Input Output
SIN


ST language notation Output := SIN( Input );

Arguments

Input REAL
Input
Output REAL Output

Function
The sine of the input REAL data is obtained and the result is output.
The input data must be in radians.

Output = Sin (input)

-4
0
Input data
Resul t output
-2 - -3 2 3 4
1.0
-1.0

Program example

SAMPLE1
1.047198
LD
SIN
SAMPLE2
0.8660254
ST

SAMPLE2 := SIN (SAMPLE1);

The sine of the input data 1.047198 in SAMPLE1 is obtained and the result
6F8C1226
248

Error information

Controller Action


249

Cosine

Numeric Function Cosine
LD/FBD language
notation
Input Output
COS


ST language notation Output := COS( Input );

Arguments

Input REAL
Input
Output REAL Output

Function
The cosine of the input REAL data is obtained and the result is output.
The input data must be in radians.

Output = Cos (input)

0
Input data
Result output
-2 - -3 2 3
1.0
-1.0

Program example

SAMPLE1
1.047198
LD
COS
SAMPLE2
0.5
ST

SAMPLE2 := COS( SAMPLE1);

The cosine of the input data 1.047198 in SAMPLE1 is obtained and the result 0.5
6F8C1226
250

Error information

Controller Action


251

Tangent

Numeric Function Tangent
LD/FBD language
notation Input Output
TAN


ST language notation Output := TAN( Input );

Arguments

Input REAL
Input
Output REAL Output

Function
The tangent of the input REAL data is obtained and the result is output.
The input data must be radians.

OutputTan (input)

0
Result output
-2 - -3 2 3 4
-Infinity

+Infinity
Input data
-4

Program example

SAMPLE1
1.047198
LD
TAN
SAMPLE2
1.732051
ST

SAMPLE2 := TAN( SAMPLE1);

The tangent of the input data 1.047198 in SAMPLE1 is obtained and the result

6F8C1226
252

Error information

Controller Action


253

Arcsine

Numeric Function Arcsine
LD/FBD language
notation
Input Output
ASIN


ST language notation Output := ASIN( Input );

Arguments

Input REAL
Input
Output REAL Output

Function
The arcsine of the input REAL data is obtained and the result is output.
The output data is in radians.
Input data must be between -1.000000 and +1.000000.
If Input data > 1.000000, Input data is assumed to be 1.000000.
If Input data < -1.000000, Input data is assumed to be -1.000000

Output = Asin (input)

-2.0
0
Input data
Result output
-1.0
-0.5
-1.5 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0
1.0
2.0
-1.0
-2.0

6F8C1226
254

Program example

SAMPLE1
0.5
LD
ASIN
SAMPLE2
0.5235988
ST

SAMPLE2 := ASIN( SAMPLE1);

The arcsine of the input data 0.5 in SAMPLE1 is obtained and the result 0.5235988

Error information

Controller Action


255

Arccosine

Numeric Function Arccosine
LD/FBD language
notation
Input Output
ACOS


ST language notation Output := ACOS( Input );

Arguments

Input REAL
Input
Output REAL Output

Function
The arccosine of the input REAL data is obtained and the result is output.
Input data must be between -1.000000 and +1.000000.
If Input data > 1.000000, Input data is assumed to be 1.000000.
If Input data < -1.000000, Input data is assumed to be -1.000000.

Output = Acos (input)

-2.0
0
Input data
Result ouput
-1.0 -0.5 -1.5 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0
3.0
4.0
2.0
1.0

6F8C1226
256

Program example

SAMPLE1
0.5
LD
ACOS
SAMPLE2
1.047198
ST

SAMPLE2 := ACOS( SAMPLE1);

The arccosine of the input data 0.5 in SAMPLE1 is obtained and the result

Error information

Controller Action


257

Arctangent

Numeric Function Arctangent
LD/FBD language
notation
Input Output
ATAN


ST language notation Output := ATAN( Input );

Arguments

Input REAL
Input
Output REAL Output

Function
The arctangent of the input REAL data is obtained and the result is output.

Output = Atan (input data)

0
Input data
Result output
1.0
2.0
-1.0
-2.0

Program example

SAMPLE1
0.5
LD
ATAN
SAMPLE2
0.4636476
ST

SAMPLE2 := ATAN( SAMPLE1);

The arctangent of the input data 0.5 in SAMPLE1 is obtained and the result

6F8C1226
258

Error information

Controller Action


2.11 Logical Operation
259


1 Bitwise Boolean AND AND
2 Bitwise Boolean AND of Table Data TAND
3 Bitwise Boolean OR OR
4 Bitwise Boolean OR of Table Data TOR
5 Bitwise Boolean NOT NOT
6 Bitwise Boolean NOT of Table Data TNOT
7 Bitwise Boolean XOR XOR
8 Bitwise Boolean XOR of Table Data TXOR
9 Bitwise Boolean NOT XOR of Table Data TXNR
10 Test TEST

6F8C1226
260

Bitwise Boolean AND

Logical Operation Bitwise Boolean AND
LD/FBD language
notation
Input 1 Output
AND_
Input 2
Input n


ST language notation Output := AND_
( Input1, Input2 , , Inputn );

Arguments

Input
Input1n 2n15
Output
See below
Output

Input 1n Symbol(_ ) Output
BOOL AND_BOOL BOOL
WORD AND_WORD WORD
DWORD AND_DWORD DWORD

Function
The Bitwise Boolean AND of input data Input 1 to Input n is obtained and the result is
output.
Input 1 to n must have the same data type.
Input 1
Output AND_
Input 2
Input n

261

Program example

SAMPLE1
16#79AF
LD
AND_WORD
SAMPLE2
16#9584
LD
SAMPLE3
16#13E6
LD
SAMPLE4
16#F2E7
LD
SAMPLE5
16#1084
ST
15 0
0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 SAMPLE1
1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 SAMPLE2
0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 SAMPLE3
0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 SAMPLE5
1 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 SAMPLE4

SAMPLE5 := AND_WORD( SAMPLE1, SAMPLE2, SAMPLE3, SAMPLE4);

The Bitwise Boolean AND of input data in SAMPLE1 to SAMPLE4 is obtained and the
result 16#1084 is stored in SAMPLE5.

6F8C1226
262

Bitwise Boolean AND of Table Data

Logical Operation Bitwise Boolean AND of Table Data
LD/FBD language
notation

Input table 1 Output table
TAND
TBL1

TBL2

N
Table word number
Input table 2


ST language notation TAND( TBL1, TBL2 , N, Output table );

Arguments

TBL1 PTR Input table 1
TBL2 PTR Input table 2 Input
N UINT


Function
The Bitwise Boolean AND of N word data starting from Input table 1 and Input table 2
is obtained and the result is stored in the specified output table.
Table word number N must be between 1 and 64.
If table word number N is 0, no operation is performed.
Direct I/O variable cannot be specified for the input table or output table.

Program example

TABLE1

LD
TAND

TABLE2

LD
TABLE3

ST
3

LD
TBL1
TBL2
N
TABLE1
16#F035
16#5555
16#00FF
0
1
2
16#236B
16#AAAA
16#0F0F
0
1
2
TABLE2
16#2021
16#00AA
16#0505
0
1
2
TABLE3

TAND (TABLE1, TABLE2, 3, TABLE3);

The Bitwise Boolean AND of 3 words data starting from input tables TABLE1 and
TABLE2 is obtained and the result is stored in output table TABLE3.
263

Error information
When the input table and output table exceed the variable area the bitwise Boolean
AND of table data is not processed and the data boundary is exceeded.
If N exceeds 64, it is limited to N=64.
table and output table:

Controller Action
V series
S Controller
Bitwise Boolean AND of table data is not executed.
Bitwise Boolean AND of table data is not executed.
TRUE(ON).


6F8C1226
264

Bitwise Boolean OR

Logical Operation Bitwise Boolean OR
LD/FBD language
notation

Input 1 Output
OR_
Input 2
Input n


ST language notation Output := OR_
( Input1, Input2 , , Inputn );

Arguments

Input
Input1 n 2n15
Output
See below
Output

Input 1n Symbol(_ ) Output
BOOL OR_BOOL BOOL
WORD OR_WORD WORD
DWORD OR_DWORD DWORD
Input 1 Output
OR_
Input 2
Input n

Function
The Bitwise Boolean OR of input data Input 1 to Input n is obtained and the result is
output.


265

Program example

SAMPLE1
16#1234
LD
OR_WORD
SAMPLE2
16#9876
LD
SAMPLE3
16#2345
LD
SAMPLE4
16#8765
LD
SAMPLE5
16#BF77
ST
15 0
0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 SAMPLE1
1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 SAMPLE2
0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 SAMPLE3
1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 SAMPLE5
1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 SAMPLE4

SAMPLE5 := OR_WORD( SAMPLE1, SAMPLE2, SAMPLE3, SAMPLE4);

The Bitwise Boolean OR of input data in SAMPLE1 to SAMPLE4 is obtained and the
result 16#BF77 is stored in SAMPLE5.

6F8C1226
266

Bitwise Boolean OR of Table Data

Logical Operation Bitwise Boolean OR of Table Data
LD/FBD language
notation
TOR
TBL1

TBL2

N
Table word number
Input table 2


ST language notation TOR( TBL1, TBL2 , N, Output table );

Arguments

TBL1 PTR Input table 1
TBL2 PTR Input table 2 Input
N UINT


Function
The Bitwise Boolean OR of N word data starting from Input table 1 and Input table 2 is
obtained and the result is stored in the specified output table.
Direct I/O variable cannot be specified for the input table or output table.

267

Program example

TABLE1

LD
TOR

TABLE2

LD
TABLE3

ST
3

LD
TBL1
TBL2
N
TABLE1
16#F035
16#5555
16#00FF
0
1
2
16#236B
16#AAAA
16#0F0F
0
1
2
TABLE2
16#F37F
16#AAFF
16#5F5F
0
1
2
TABLE3

TOR (TABLE1, TABLE2, 3, TABLE3);

The Bitwise Boolean OR of 3 words data starting from input tables TABLE1 and

Error information
When the input table and out table exceed the variable area, bitwise Boolean OR of
table data is not processed and the data boundary is exceeded.
If N exceeds 64, it is limited to N=64

Controller Action
V series
S Controller
Bitwise Boolean OR of table data is not executed.
Bitwise Boolean OR of table data is not executed.
TRUE(ON).


6F8C1226
268

Bitwise Boolean NOT

Logical Operation Bitwise Boolean NOT
LD/FBD language
notation

Input
Output
NOT_


ST language notation Output := NOT_
( Input );

Arguments

Input
Input
Output
See below
Output

BOOL NOT_BOOL BOOL
WORD NOT_WORD WORD
DWORD NOT_DWORD DWORD
Input Output
NOT_

Function
The Bitwise Boolean NOT of input data is obtained and the result is output.

Program example

SAMPLE1
16#1234
LD
NOT_WORD
SAMPLE2
16#EDCB
ST

SAMPLE2 := NOT_WORD(SAMPLE1);

The Bitwise Boolean NOT of input data 16#1234 in SAMPLE1 is obtained and the
result 16#EDCB is stored in SAMPLE2.

269

Bitwise Boolean NOT of Table Data

Logical Operation Bitwise Boolean NOT of Table Data
LD/FBD language
notation

Input table Output table
TNOT
TBL

N Table word number


ST language notation TNOT( TBL , N, Output table );

Arguments

TBL PTR Input table
Input
N UINT


Function
The Bitwise Boolean NOT of N word data starting from the input table is obtained and
the result is stored in the specified output table.

Program example

TABLE1

LD
TNOT

TABLE2

ST
3

LD
TBL
N
TABLE1
16#F035
16#5555
16#00FF
0
1
2
16#0FCA
16#FF00
16#AAAA
0
1
2
TABLE2

TNOT( TABLE1, 3, TABLE2);

The Bitwise Boolean NOT of 3 words data starting from input table TABLE1 is
obtained and the result is stored in output table TABLE2.

6F8C1226
270

Error information
When the input table and output table exceed the variable area, the bitwise Boolean
NOT of table data is not processed and the data boundary is exceeded.

Controller Action
V series
S Controller
Bitwise Boolean NOT of table data is not executed.
Bitwise Boolean NOT of table data is not executed.
TRUE(ON).


271

Bitwise Boolean XOR

Logical Operation Bitwise Boolean XOR
LD/FBD language
notation Input 1 Output
XOR_
Input 2
Input n


ST language notation Output := XOR_
( Input1, Input2 , putn );

Arguments

Input
Input1 n 2n15
Output
See below
Output

Input 1 n Symbol(_ ) Output
BOOL XOR_BOOL BOOL
WORD XOR_WORD WORD
DWORD XOR_DWORD DWORD
Input 1 Output
XOR_
Input 2
Input n

Function
The Bitwise Boolean XOR of input data Input 1 to Input n is obtained and the result is
output.


6F8C1226
272

Program example

SAMPLE1
16#1234
LD
XOR_WORD
SAMPLE2
16#9876
LD
SAMPLE3
16#2345
LD
SAMPLE4
16#8765
LD
SAMPLE5
16#2E62
ST
15 0
0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 SAMPLE1
1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 SAMPLE2
0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 SAMPLE3
0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 SAMPLE5
1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 SAMPLE4

SAMPLE5 := XOR_WORD( SAMPLE1, SAMPLE2, SAMPLE3, SAMPLE4);

The Bitwise Boolean XOR of input data in SAMPLE1 to SAMPLE4 is obtained and the
result 16#2E62 is stored in SAMPLE5.

273

Bitwise Boolean XOR of Table Data

Logical Operation Bitwise Boolean XOR of Table Data
LD/FBD language
notation

TXOR
TBL1

TBL2

N
Table word number
Input table 2


ST language notation TXOR( TBL1, TBL2, N, Output table );

Arguments

TBL1 PTR Input table1
TBL2 PTR Input table2 Input
N UINT


Function
The Bitwise Boolean XOR of N word data starting from Input table 1 and Input table 2
is obtained and the result is stored in the specified output table.

6F8C1226
274

Program example

TABLE1

LD
TXOR

TABLE2

LD
TABLE3

ST
3

LD
TBL1
TBL2
N
TABLE1
16#F035
16#5555
16#00FF
0
1
2
16#236B
16#AAAA
16#0F0F
0
1
2
TABLE2
16#D35E
16#AA55
16#5A5A
0
1
2
TABLE3

TXOR (TABLE1, TABLE2, 3, TABLE3);

The Bitwise Boolean XOR of 3 words data starting from Input table TABLE1 and

Error information
XOR of table data is not processed and the data boundary is exceeded.

Controller Action
V series
S Controller
Bitwise Boolean XOR of table data is not executed.
Bitwise Boolean XOR of table data is not executed.
TRUE(ON).


275

Bitwise Boolean NOT XOR of Table Data

Logical Operation Bitwise Boolean NOT XOR of Table Data
LD/FBD language
notation
TXNR
TBL1

TBL2

N
Table word number
Input table 2


ST language notation TXNR( TBL1, TBL2 , N, Output table );

Arguments

TBL1 PTR Input table1
TBL2 PTR Input table2 Input
N UINT


Function
The Bitwise Boolean NOT XOR of N word data starting from Input table 1 and Input
table 2 is obtained and the result is stored in the specified output table.

6F8C1226
276

Program example

TABLE1

LD
TXNR

TABLE2

LD
TABLE3

ST
3

LD
TBL1
TBL2
N
TABLE1
16#F035
16#5555
16#00FF
0
1
2
16#236B
16#AAAA
16#0F0F
0
1
2
TABLE2
16#2CA1
16#55AA
16#A5A5
0
1
2
TABLE3

TXNR( TABLE1, TABLE2, 3, TABLE3);

The Bitwise Boolean NOT XOR of 3 words data starting from Input table TABLE1 and

Error information
NOT XOR of table data is not processed and the data boundary is exceeded.
table and output table.

Controller Action
V series
S Controller
Bitwise Boolean NOT XOR of table data is not
executed.
Bitwise Boolean NOT XOR of table data is not
executed.
TRUE(ON).


277

Test

Logical Operation Test
LD/FBD language
notation

Input 1 Output TEST_
Input 2


ST language notation Output := TEST_
( Input1, Input2 );

Arguments

Input
Input1, 2 Input number=2

Output
See below
Output

Input 1,2 Symbol(_ ) output
WORD TEST_WORD
DWORD TEST_DWORD
BOOL
Input 1 Output
TEST_
Input 2

Function
The Bitwise Boolean AND of input data Input 1 and Input 2 is obtained and
FALSE(OFF) is output if the result is 0 and TRUE(ON) is output otherwise.

Program example

SAMPLE1
16#1234
LD
TEST_WORD
SAMPLE2
16#98C3
LD
SIGNAL1
1
ST

SIGNAL1 := TEST_WORD( SAMPLE1, SAMPLE2);

Input data SAMPLE1 and SAMPLE2 are tested and the result TRUE(ON) is output to
SIGNAL1.


6F8C1226
278

2.12 Bit Operation

1
Shift Bits Right SHR
2
Shift Bits Left SHL
3
Rotate Bits Right ROR
4
Rotate Bits Left ROL
5
Arithmetic Shift
SFA_WORD_P
SFA_DWORD_P
PCS compatible instruction
6
Logical Shift
SFL_WORD_P
SFL_DWORD_P
PCS compatible instruction

2.12 Bit Operation
279

Shift Bits Right

Bit Operation Shift Bits Right
LD/FBD language
notation

Input Output
SHR_
Shift number
IN
N


ST language notation Output := SHR_

( IN, N );

Arguments

IN See below
Input
Input
N UINT
Shift number

Input Symbol (_ ) Output
WORD SHR_WORD WORD
DWORD SHR_DWORD DWORD
Input Output
Shift
number
SHR_

Function
Right shifts the input data by shift number N and outputs the result.
Empty bits after shifting are padded with 0.
The bit that is shifted out last is input to the specific register carry flag.
The shift number N is as follows. The data is not shifted when shift number N=0.

Symbol Shift number
SHR_WORD MOD(N/16)
SHR_DWORD MOD(N/32)


6F8C1226
280

Program example

SAMPLE1
16#9876
LD
SHR_WORD
IN

N
SAMPLE2
18
LD
SAMPLE3
16#261D
ST
0 is entered
SAMPLE1
SAMPLE3
CF
1
F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 0
F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 0

SAMPLE3 := SHR_WORD( SAMPLE1, SAMPLE2);

Right shifts the input data 16#9876 in SAMPLE1 by shift number (=MOD(18/16))
specified by SAMPLE2 and stores the result 16#261D in SAMPLE3. The bit data
TRUE(ON) shifted out last is stored in specific register carry flag.

2.12 Bit Operation
281

Shift Bits Left

Bit Operation Shift Bits Left
LD/FBD language
notation
Input Output
SHL_
IN

N
Shift number


ST language notation Output := SHL_
( IN, N );

Arguments

IN See below
Input
Input
N UINT
Shift number

Input Symbol (_ ) Output
WORD SHL_WORD WORD
DWORD SHL_DWORD DWORD
Input Output
SHL_
IN

N
Shift
number

Function
Left shifts the input data by shift number N and outputs the result.
Empty bits after shifting are padded with 0.
The bit that is shifted out last is input to the specific register carry flag.
The shift number N is as follows. The data is not shifted when shift number N=0.

Symbol Shift number
SHL_WORD MOD(N/16)
SHL_DWORD MOD(N/32)


6F8C1226
282

Program example

SAMPLE1
16#9876
LD
SHL_WORD
IN

N
SAMPLE2
18
LD
SAMPLE3
16#61D8
ST
0 is entered
SAMPLE1
SAMPLE3
CF
0
F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 0
F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0

SAMPLE3 := SHL_WORD( SAMPLE1, SAMPLE2);

Left shifts the input data 16#9876 in SAMPLE1 by shift number (=MOD(18/16))
specified by SAMPLE2 and stores the shift result 16#61D8 in SAMPLE3. The last
shifted bit FALSE(OFF) is stored in specific register carry flag.

2.12 Bit Operation
283

Rotate Bits Right

Bit Operation Rotate Bits Right
LD/FBD language
notation

Input Output
ROR_
IN

N Rotate number


ST language notation Output := ROR_
( IN, N );

Arguments

IN See below
Input
Input
N UINT
Rotate number

WORD ROR_WORD WORD
DWORD ROR_DWORD DWORD
Input Output
ROR_
IN

N
Rotate
number

Function
Right rotates the input data by rotate number N and outputs the result.
The last bit data rotated from the least significant bit is input to the specific register
carry flag.
Rotate number N is as follows. No bit is rotated if rotate number N=0.

Symbol Rotate
number
ROR_WORD MOD(N/16)
ROR_DWORD MOD(N/32)


6F8C1226
284

Program example

SAMPLE1
16#9876
LD
ROR_WORD
IN

N
SAMPLE2
18
LD
SAMPLE3
16#A61D
ST
SAMPLE1
SAMPLE3
CF
F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 0
F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 1
CF
1

SAMPLE3 := ROR_WORD( SAMPLE1, SAMPLE2);

Right rotates the input data 16#9876 in SAMPLE1 by rotate number (=MOD(18/16))
specified by SAMPLE2 and stores the rotated result 16#A61D in SAMPLE3. The
last bit data TRUE(ON) rotated from the least significant bit is stored in specific
register carry flag.

2.12 Bit Operation
285

Rotate Bits Left

Bit Operation Rotate Bits Left
LD/FBD language
notation

Input Output
ROL_
IN

N Rotate number


ST language notation Output := ROL_
( IN, N );

Arguments

IN See below
Input
Input
N UINT
Rotate number

WORD ROL_WORD WORD
DWORD ROL_DWORD DWORD
Input Output
ROL_
IN

N
Rotate
number

Function
Rotates input data left by N bits and outputs the result.
The last bit data rotated from the most significant bit is input to specific register carry
flag.
Rotate number N is as follows. No bit is rotated if rotate number N=0.

Symbol Rotate
number
ROL_WORD MOD(N/16)
ROL_DWORD MOD(N/32)


6F8C1226
286

Program example

SAMPLE1
16#9876
LD
ROL_WORD
IN

N
SAMPLE2
18
LD
SAMPLE3
16#61DA
ST
SAMPLE1
SAMPLE3
CF
0
F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 0
F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0
CF
0

SAMPLE3 := ROL_WORD( SAMPLE1, SAMPLE2);

Left rotates the input data 16#9876 in SAMPLE1 by rotate number (=MOD(18/16))
specified by SAMPLE2 and stores the rotated result 16#61DA in SAMPLE3. The
last bit data FALSE(OFF) rotated from the most significant bit is stored in specific
register carry flag.

2.12 Bit Operation
287

Arithmetic Shift

Bit Operation Arithmetic Shift
PCS
compatible
instruction
LD/FBD language
notation
Input Output
SFA__P
IN

N Shift number


ST language notation Output := SFA_
_P( IN, N );

Arguments

IN See below
Input
Input
N INT
Shift number

WORD SFA_WORD_P WORD
DWORD SFA_DWORD_P DWORD
Input Output
SFA_ _P
IN

N
Shift
number

Function
Arithmetic shifts the input data by shift number N and outputs the result.
If shift right is specified, the most significant bit is fixed as sign and the state of the
most significant bit is inserted in most significant bit-1.
If shift left is specified, the most significant bit is fixed as sign and the bits starting from
the most significant bit-1 are shifted left.
If shift left is specified, the most significant bit is fixed as sign and the bits starting from
the most significant bit-1 are shifted left.

Symbol Shift
number
Shift direction
SFA_WORD_P MOD(N/16)
SFA_DWORD_P MOD(N/32)
N<0: Left
N>0: Right

6F8C1226
288

Program example
Shift right

SAMPLE1
16#9876
LD
SFA_WORD_P
IN

N
SAMPLE2
18
LD
SAMPLE3
16#E61D
ST
State of most significant bit is entered
SAMPLE1
SAMPLE3
F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 0
F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1
Fixed

Arithmetic shifts right input data 16#9876 in SAMPLE1 by shift number
(=MOD(18/16)) specified by SAMPLE2 and stores the shift result 16#E61D in
SAMPLE3.

Shit left

SAMPLE1
16#9876
LD
SFA_WORD_P
IN

N
SAMPLE2
-18
LD
SAMPLE3
16#E1D8
ST
0 is entered
SAMPLE1
SAMPLE3
F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 0
F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1
Fixed

Arithmetic left shifts input data 16#9876 in SAMPLE1 by shift number
(=MOD(18/16)) specified by SAMPLE2 and stores the shift result 16#E1D8 in
SAMPLE3.

SAMPLE3 := SFA_WORD_P( SAMPLE1, SAMPLE2);

2.12 Bit Operation
289

Logical Shift

Bit Operation Logical Shift
LD/FBD language
notation
Input Output
SFL__P
IN

N Shift number


ST language notation Output := SFL_
_P( IN, N );

Arguments

IN See below
Input
Input
N INT
Shift number

WORD SFL_WORD_P WORD
DWORD SFL_DWORD_P DWORD
Input Output
SFL_ _P
IN

N
Shift
number

Function
Logical shifts the input data by shift number N and outputs the result.
Shift number N specifies the shift number and shift direction. No shift is performed if shift
number=0.

Symbol Shift
number
Shift direction
SFL_WORD_P MOD(N/16)
SHL_DWORD_P MOD(N/32)
N<0: Left
N>0: Right

6F8C1226
290

Program example
Shift right
SAMPLE1
16#9876
LD
SFL_WORD_P
IN

N
SAMPLE2
18
LD
SAMPLE3
16#261D
ST
SAMPLE1
SAMPLE3
F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 0
F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 0
0 is entered

Logical shifts right input data 16#9876 in SAMPLE1 by shift number (=MOD(18/16))
specified by SAMPLE2 and stores the shift result 16#261D in SAMPLE3.

Shift left

SAMPLE1
16#9876
LD
SFL_WORD_P
IN

N
SAMPLE2
-18
LD
SAMPLE3
16#61D8
ST
0 is entered
SAMPLE1
SAMPLE3
F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 0
F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0

Logical shifts left input data 16#9876 in SAMPLE1 by shift number (=MOD(18/16))
specified by SAMPLE2 and stores the shift result 16#61D8 in SAMPLE3.

SAMPLE3 := SFL_WORD_P( SAMPLE1, SAMPLE2);

2.13 Arithmetic Operation
291


1
Add ADD
2
Add with Carry ADC
3
Subtract SUB
4
Subtract with Carry SBB
5
Multiply MUL
6
Divide DIV
7
Remainder MOD
8
Increment INC
9
Decrement DEC
10
Power EXPT
11
Add Time Data ADD
12
Subtract Time Data SUB
13
Multiply Time Data MUL
14
Divide Time Data DIV

6F8C1226
292

Add

Arithmetic Operation Add
LD/FBD language
notation
Input 1 Output
ADD_
Input 2
Input n


ST language notation Output := ADD_

Arguments

Input
Input1n 2n15
Output
See below
Output

INT ADD_INT INT
DINT ADD_DINT DINT
UINT ADD_UINT UINT
REAL ADD_REAL REAL
Input 1 Output
ADD_
Input 2
Input n

Function
Input data Input 1 to Input n are added and the result is output.
Output = Input 1 + Input 2 +...+ Input n

Important
With ADD_REAL, if the absolute value of addend and augend differ significantly (difference in
exponent 24), the result is the value of the data with larger absolute value.

293

Program example

SAMPLE1
12765
LD
ADD_INT
SAMPLE2
-32653
LD
SAMPLE3
7654
LD
SAMPLE4
11234
LD
SAMPLE5
-1000
ST

SAMPLE5 := ADD_INT( SAMPLE1, SAMPLE2, SAMPLE3, SAMPLE4);

The input data in SAMPLE1 to SAMPLE4 are added and the result -1000 is stored in
SAMPLE5.

Error information
If an overflow occurs, the limit value is output as result.

Controller Action
In case of INF input or if an overflow occurs, the
result is INF.
value.


6F8C1226
294

Add with Carry

Arithmetic Operation Add with Carry
LD/FBD language
notation

Input 1 Output
ADC_
Input 2


ST language notation Output := ADC_( Input1, Input2 );

Arguments

Input
Input1,2
Output
See below
Output

Input I, 2 Symbol(_ ) Output
INT ADC_INT INT
DINT ADC_DINT DINT
Input 1 Output
ADC_
Input 2

Function
Input data Input 1 and Input 2 are added with carry including the specific register S
register carry flag and the result is output.
The carry flag is processed as follows:
When there is carry from most significant bit (carry out): carry flag is set to TRUE
(ON)
When there is no carry from most significant bit (no carry out): carry flag is reset to FALSE
(OFF)
When EN is used, ENO output is set as follows:
Carry from most significant bit (carry out) or carry from most significant bit1 to
most significant bit: ENO output is reset to FALSE(OFF).
Input 1 and input 2 must have the same data type.
Output=Input 1+Input 2+carry flag

295

Program example
When there is no carry out (CF), or overflow (OV) and input carry flag (input CF)=
FALSE(OFF)

SAMPLE1
7856
LD
ADC_INT
SAMPLE2
2717
LD
SAMPLE3
10573
ST
SAMPLE1
SAMPLE2
)Input CF 0
0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 7856
0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 2717
0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 10573 SAMPLE3
0
0
CF
OV

The input data 7856 in SAMPLE1 and 2717 in SAMPLE2 are added with carry and
the result 10573 is stored in SAMPLE3. Also, the specific register carry flag is reset
to FALSE(OFF).

When there is carry out (CF) and overflow (OV), and input carry flag (input CF)=
FALSE(OFF)

SAMPLE1
-32768
LD
ADC_INT
SAMPLE2
-10000
LD
SAMPLE3
22768
ST
1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -32768
1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 -10000
SAMPLE1
SAMPLE2
) Input CF 0
0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 22768 SAMPLE3
1
0
CF
OV

The input data -32768 in SAMPLE1 and -10000 in SAMPLE2 are added with carry
and the result 22768 is stored in SAMPLE3. Also, the specific register carry flag is
set to TRUE(ON).

SAMPLE3 := ADC_INT( SAMPLE1, SAMPLE2);

Error information
When EN is used, ENO output is reset to FALSE(OFF) if overflow or carry occurs.

6F8C1226
296

Subtract

Arithmetic Operation Subtract
LD/FBD language
notation

Input 1 Output
SUB_
Input 2


ST language notation Output := SUB_( Input1, Input2 );

Arguments

Input Input1, 2
Output
See below
Output

Input 1,2 Symbol(_ ) Output
INT SUB_INT INT
DINT SUB_DINT DINT
UINT SUB_UINT UINT
REAL SUB_REAL REAL
Input 1 Output
SUB_
Input 2

Function
Input data of Input1 and Input2 are subtracted and the result is output.
Input1 and Input2 must have the same data type.
OutputInput1-Input2

Important
With SUB_REAL, if the absolute value of subtrahend and minuend differs significantly (difference
in exponent 24), the result is the value of the data with larger absolute value.


297

Program example

SAMPLE1
4378
LD
SUB_INT
SAMPLE2
2345
LD
SAMPLE3
2033
ST

SAMPLE3 := SUB_INT( SAMPLE1, SAMPLE2);

Input data in SAMPLE1 and SAMPLE2 are subtracted and the result 2033 is stored
in SAMPLE3.

Error information

Controller Action
In case of INF input or if an overflow occurs, the
result is INF.
value.


6F8C1226
298

Subtract with Carry

Arithmetic Operation Subtract with Carry
LD/FBD language
notation

Input 1 Output
SBB_
Input 2


ST language notation Output := SBB_( Input1, Input2 );

Arguments

Input
Input1, 2
Output
See below
Output

INT SBB_INT INT
DINT SBB_DINT DINT
Input 1 Output
SBB_
Input 2

Function
Input data Input 2 is subtracted from Input 1 with carry including the specific register
carry flag and the result is output.
Carry flag is processed as follows:
When there is borrow to the most significant bit (borrow in): carry flag is set to
TRUE(ON).
When there is no borrow to the most significant bit (no borrow in): carry flag is reset to
FALSE(OFF).
When EN is used, ENO output is set as follows:
When there is borrow to the most significant bit (borrow in) or when there is borrow
from the most significant bit to most significant bit-1: ENO output=FALSE(OFF).
Output=Input 1-Input 2-carry flag


299

Program example
When there is no borrow in (CF) or overflow (OV), and input carry flag (input CF)=
FALSE(OFF).

SAMPLE1
23648
LD
SBB_INT
SAMPLE2
10335
LD
SAMPLE3
13313
ST
0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 23648
0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 10335
SAMPLE1
SAMPLE2
-) Input CF 0
0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 13313 SAMPLE3
0
0
CF
OV

Input data 10335 in SAMPLE2 is subtracted from 23648 in SAMPLE1 with carry
and the result 13313 is stored in SAMPLE3. Also, the specific register carry flag is

When there is borrow in (CF), overflow (OV), and input carry flag (input CF)=
FALSE(OFF)

SAMPLE1
10000
LD
SBB_INT
SAMPLE2
-28000
LD
SAMPLE3
-27536
ST
0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 10000
1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 -28000
SAMPLE1
SAMPLE2
) Input CF 0
1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 -27536 SAMPLE3
1
0
CF
OV

Input data -28000 in SAMPLE2 is subtracted from 10000 in SAMPLE1 with carry
and the result -27536 is stored in SAMPLE3. Also, the specific register carry flag is
set to TRUE(ON).

SAMPLE3 := SBB_INT( SAMPLE1, SAMPLE2);

Error information
When EN is used, when borrow in or underflow occurs, ENO output is reset to
FALSE(OFF).
6F8C1226
300

Multiply

Arithmetic Operation Multiply
LD/FBD language
notation

Input 1 Output
MUL_
Input 2
Input n


ST language notation Output := MUL_( Input1, Input2, , Inputn );

Arguments
instruction symbol depends on the data type.

Input
Input1 n 2n15
Output
See below
Output

INT MUL_INT INT
DINT MUL_DINT DINT
UINT MUL_UINT UINT
REAL MUL_REAL REAL
Input 1 Output
MUL_
Input 2
Input n

Function
Input data Input 1 to Input n are multiplied and the result is output.
Output=Input 1 * Input 2 * * Input n


301

Program example

SAMPLE1
12
LD
MUL_INT
SAMPLE2
-32
LD
SAMPLE3
21
LD
SAMPLE4
3
LD
SAMPLE5
-24192
ST

SAMPLE5 := MUL_INT( SAMPLE1, SAMPLE2, SAMPLE3, SAMPLE4);

Input data in SAMPLE1 to SAMPLE4 are multiplied and the result -24192 is stored
in SAMPLE5.

Error information

Controller Action
In case of INF input or if an overflow occurs, the result is INF.


6F8C1226
302

Multiply

Arithmetic Operation Multiply
LD/FBD language
notation
Input 1
Output
MUL_INT_DINT
Input 2


ST language notation Output := MUL_INT_DINT( Input1, Input2 );

Arguments

Input INT
Input1, 2
Output DINT Output

Function
INT input data Input 1 and Input 2 are multiplied and the result is output as DINT.
The number of input data is fixed at 2.
Output=Input 1 * Input 2

Program example

SAMPLE1
129
LD
MUL_INT_DINT
SAMPLE2
-3265
LD
SAMPLE5
-421185
ST

SAMPLE5 := MUL_INT_DINT( SAMPLE1, SAMPLE2);

The input data 129 in SAMPLE1 is multiplied with 3265 in SAMPLE2 and the result
-421185 is stored in SAMPLE5.
303

Divide

Arithmetic Operation Divide
LD/FBD language
notation

Input 1 Output
DIV_
Input 2


ST language notation Output := DIV_( Input1, Input2 );

Arguments

Input
Input1, 2
Output
See below
Output

Input 1, 2 Symbol(_ ) Output
INT DIV_INT INT
DINT DIV_DINT DINT
UINT DIV_UINT UINT
REAL DIV_REAL REAL
Input 1 Output
DIV_
Input 2

Function
Input data Input 1 is divided with Input 2 and the result is output.
Output=Input 1/ Input 2

6F8C1226
304

Program example

SAMPLE1
24378
LD
DIV_INT
SAMPLE2
2345
LD
SAMPLE3
10
ST

SAMPLE3 := DIV_INT( SAMPLE1, SAMPLE2);

The input data 24378 in SAMPLE1 is divided by 2345 in SAMPLE2 and the result

Error information
If divided by 0 error occurs, the limit is output as operation result. Also error flag and
divide error flag are set to TRUE(ON).
If the operation result exceeds the valid data range, the limit value is output.
The following operation is performed when the input data type is REAL.

Controller Action


305

Remainder

Arithmetic Operation Remainder
LD/FBD language
notation
Input1 Output
MOD_
Input2


ST language notation Output := MOD_( Input1, Input2 );

Arguments

Input
Input1, 2
Output
See below
Output

INT MOD_INT INT
DINT MOD_DINT DINT
UINT MOD_UINT UINT
Input 1 Output
MOD_
Input 2

Function
Input data Input 1 is divided by Input 2 and the remainder is output.
Output=MOD (Input 1/ Input 2)


6F8C1226
306

Program example

SAMPLE1
24378
LD
MOD_INT
SAMPLE2
2345
LD
SAMPLE3
928
ST

SAMPLE3 := MOD_INT( SAMPLE1, SAMPLE2);

The input data 24378 in SAMPLE1 is divided by 2345 in SAMPLE2 and the
remainder 928 is stored in SAMPLE3.

Error information
If divided by 0 error occurs, the remainder 0 is output as operation result. Also, error
flag and divide error flag are set to TRUE(ON).
307

Increment

Arithmetic Operation Increment
LD/FBD language
notation

Output
INC_
Input_Output 1 V V Input_Output 1


ST language notation Output := INC_( V );

Arguments
The following data types are supported for input/output and output arguments and the

I/O Input/Output1
Output
See below
Output

Input_Output 1

Symbol(_ ) Output
INT INC_INT INT
DINT INC_DINT DINT
UINT INC_UINT UINT
REAL INC_REAL REAL
Input_
Output 1
Output
INC_

V V
Input_Output 1

Function
The input/output data Input_Output 1 is incremented and the result is output.
The result is not limited even if the result exceeds the data range.
Direct I/O variable cannot be specified for Input/Output 1 (Unified Controller).
Output=Input_Output 1+1


6F8C1226
308

Program example

SAMPLE1
999
LD
INC_INT

V V
SAMPLE1

ST
SAMPLE2
1000
ST

The input data 999 in SAMPLE1 is incremented and the result 1000 is stored in
SAMPLE1 and SAMPLE2.

SAMPLE1
32767
LD
INC_INT

V V
SAMPLE1

ST
SAMPLE2
-32768
ST

The input data 32767 in SAMPLE1 is incremented and the result -32768 is stored
in SAMPLE1 and SAMPLE2.

SAMPLE2 := INC_INT( SAMPLE1 );

Error information

Controller Action

Input/Output1:

Controller Action
Increment is not executed and the result is 0.
TRUE(ON).


309

Decrement

Arithmetic Operation Decrement
LD/FBD language
notation

Output
DEC_
V V Input_Output 1 Input_Output 1


ST language notation Output := DEC_( V );

Arguments
The following data types are supported for input/output and output arguments and the

Input/
Output
Input/Output1

Output
See below
Output

Input_Output 1

Symbol(_ ) Output
INT DEC_INT INT
DINT DEC_DINT DINT
UINT DEC_UINT UINT
REAL DEC_REAL REAL
Input_Output 1
Output
DEC_

V V
Input_Output 1

Function
The input/output data Input_Output 1 is decremented and the result is output.
The result is not limited even if the result exceeds the data range.
Direct I/O variable cannot be specified for the Input/Output1 (Unified Controller).
Output=Input_Output 1 - 1


6F8C1226
310

Program example

SAMPLE1
999
LD
DEC_INT

V V
SAMPLE1

ST
SAMPLE2
998
ST

The input data 999 in SAMPLE1 is decremented and the result 998 is stored in
SAMPLE1 and SAMPLE2.

SAMPLE1
-32768
LD
DEC_INT

V V
SAMPLE1

ST
SAMPLE2
32767
ST

The input data -32768 in SAMPLE1 is decremented and the result 32767 is stored
in SAMPLE1 and SAMPLE2.

SAMPLE2 := DEC_INT( SAMPLE1 );

Error information

Controller Action

Input/Output1:

Controller Action
Decrement is not executed and the result is 0.
Error flag and table operation error flag are set to TRUE(ON).


311

Power

Arithmetic Operation Power
LD/FBD language
notation

Input 1 Output
EXPT_
Input 2


ST language notation Output := EXPT_( Input1, Input2 );

Arguments

Input1 REAL
Input1
Input
Input2 See below
Input2
Output REAL Output

Input 2 Symbol(_ )
INT EXPT_INT
DINT EXPT_DINT
UINT EXPT_UINT
REAL EXPT_REAL
Input 1 Output
EXPT_
Input 2

Function
Input data Input 1 is raised to the Input 2 power and the result is output.
Output=(Input 1)
Input 2


6F8C1226
312

Program example

SAMPLE1
12.45
LD
EXPT_INT
SAMPLE2
2.5
LD
SAMPLE3
546.91946
ST

SAMPLE3 := EXPT_INT( SAMPLE1, SAMPLE2);

SAMPLE1 is raised to the SAMPLE2 power and the result 546.91946 is stored in
SAMPLE3.

Error information
If Input 1=Input 2=0, or Input1=0 and Input2<0, 0 is output as the result and the
specific register error flag is set to TRUE(ON).
If Input 1 < 0 and Input 2 has decimal fractions (example: Input 1=2, Input 2=2.5),
the result is 0 and the specific register error flag is set to TRUE(ON).

Controller Action


313

Add Time Data

Arithmetic Operation Add Time Data
LD/FBD language
notation

Input Output
ADD_
Input 2


ST language notation Output := ADD_( Input1, Input2 );

Arguments

Input
*1 Input1, 2
Output
See below
Output
Note: For constant specification of input 1, constant specification is not allowed for DT type.

Input 1 Output 2 Symbol(_ ) Output
TIME TIME ADD_T_T TIME
TOD TIME ADD_TOD_T TOD
DT TIME ADD_DT_T DT
DATE INT ADD_D_INT DATE
DATE DINT ADD_D_DINT DATE
DATE UINT ADD_D_UINT DATE
Input 1 Output
ADD_
Input 2

Function
Input data Input 1 is added and Input 2 and the result is output.
The number of input data is fixed at two.
In case of addition of DT type and integer data, integer data is assumed to be number
of days.
Output=Input1+Input2

6F8C1226
314

Program example
When TIME+TIMETIME

SAMPLE1
T#12345ms
LD
ADD_T_T
SAMPLE2
T#3456ms
LD
SAMPLE3
T#15801ms
ST

SAMPLE3 := ADD_T_T( SAMPLE1, SAMPLE2);

The input data T#12345ms in SAMPLE1 is added with T#3456ms in SAMPLE2 as
time data and the result T#15801ms is stored in SAMPLE3.

When DATE+INTDATE

SAMPLE1
D#1999-6-29
LD
ADD_D_INT
SAMPLE2
5
LD
SAMPLE3
D#1999-7-4
ST

SAMPLE3 := ADD_D_INT( SAMPLE1, SAMPLE2);

The input data D#1999-6-29 in SAMPLE1 is added to input data 5 in SAMPLE2 as
time data and the result D#1999-7-4 is stored in SAMPLE3.

Error information

315

Subtract Time Data

Arithmetic Operation Subtract Time Data
LD/FBD language
notation

Input 1 Output
SUB_
Input 2


ST language notation Output := SUB_( Input1, Input2 );

Arguments

Input
*1 Input1, 2
Output
See below
Output
* For constant specification of input 1, constant specification is not allowed for DT type.

Input 1 Input 2 Symbol(_ ) Output
TIME TIME SUB_T_T TIME
DATE DATE SUB_D_D TIME
TOD TIME SUB_TOD_T TOD
TOD TOD SUB_TOD_TOD TIME
DT TIME SUB_DT_T DATE
DT DT SUB_DT_DT TIME
DATE DATE SUB_D_D_INT INT
DATE DATE SUB_D_D_DINT DINT
DATE DATE SUB_D_D_UINT UINT
DATE INT SUB_D_INT DATE
DATE DINT SUB_D_DINT DATE
DATE UINT SUB_D_UINT DATE
Input 1 Output
SUB_
Input 2

Function
Input data Input 2 is subtracted from Input 1 and the result is output.
The number of input data is fixed at two.
For subtraction of integer type data, integer data is assumed to be number of days.
Output=Input1-Input2

6F8C1226
316

Program example
When TIME-TIMETIME

SAMPLE1
T#12345ms
LD
SUB_T_T
SAMPLE2
T#3456ms
LD
SAMPLE3
T#8889ms
ST

SAMPLE3 := SUB_T_T( SAMPLE1, SAMPLE2);

The input data T#3456ms in SAMPLE2 is subtracted from T#12345ms in
SAMPLE1 as time data and the result T#8889ms is stored in SAMPLE3.

When DATEINTDATE

SAMPLE1
D#1999-7-4
LD
SUB_D_INT
SAMPLE2
5
LD
SAMPLE3
D#1999-6-29
ST

SAMPLE3 := SUB_D_INT( SAMPLE1, SAMPLE2);

The input data 5 in SAMPLE2 is subtracted from input data D#1999-7-4 in
SAMPLE1 as time data and the result D#1999-6-29 is stored in SAMPLE3.

Error information

317

Multiply Time Data

Arithmetic Operation Multiply Time Data
LD/FBD language
notation

Input1 Output
MUL_
Input2


ST language notation Output := MUL_( Input1, Input2 );

Arguments

Input1 TIME
Input1
Input
Input2 See below
Input2
Output TIME Output

Input 2 Symbol(_ )
INT MUL_T_INT
DINT MUL_T_DINT
UINT MUL_T_UINT
Input 1 Output
MUL_
Input 2

Function
Input data Input 1 is multiplied with Input 2 as time data and the result is output.
Output=Input1Input2


6F8C1226
318

Program example

SAMPLE1
T#12345ms
LD
MUL_T_INT
SAMPLE2
3
LD
SAMPLE3
T#37035ms
ST

SAMPLE3 := MUL_T_INT( SAMPLE1, SAMPLE2);

The input data T#12345 in SAMPLE1 is multiplied with 3 in SAMPLE2 as time data
and the result T#37035ms is stored in SAMPLE3.

Error information
319

Divide Time Data

Arithmetic Operation Divide Time Data
LD/FBD language
notation

Input1 Output
DIV_
Input2


ST language notation Output := DIV_( Input1, Input2 );

Arguments

Input1 TIME
Input1
Input
Input2 See below
Input2
Output TIME Output

Input 2 Symbol(_ )
INT DIV_T_INT
DINT DIV_T_DINT
UINT DIV_T_UINT
Input 1 Output
DIV_
Input 2

Function
Input data Input 1 is divided by Input 2 as time data and the result is output.
Output=Input1/Input2


6F8C1226
320

Program example

SAMPLE1
T#12345ms
LD
DIV_T_INT
SAMPLE2
3
LD
SAMPLE3
T#4115ms
ST

SAMPLE3 := DIV_T_INT( SAMPLE1, SAMPLE2);

The input data T#12345 in SAMPLE1 is divided by Input data 3 in SAMPLE2 as time
data and the result T#4115ms is stored in SAMPLE3.

Error information
If divided by 0 error occurs, the limit is out put as operation result. Also the error flag
and divide error flag are set to TRUE(ON).
2.14 Data Processing
321


1
Set Carry
SETC
2
Reset Carry
RSTC
3
Encode
ENC
4
Decode
DEC
5
Bit Counter
BC
6
Table Bit Set
TSET
7
Table Bit Reset
TRST

6F8C1226
322

Set Carry

Data Processing Set Carry
LD/FBD language
notation

Input Output
SETC


ST language notation Output := SETC( Input );

Arguments

Input BOOL

Input
Output BOOL Output

Function
When the input is TRUE(ON), the specific register carry flag is set to TRUE(ON).
When the input is FALSE(OFF), the specific register carry flag is unchanged.
The state of the input is output as the result.

Input Action Output
FALSE(OFF)
Not executed (carry flag retains previous
value).
FALSE(OFF)
TRUE(ON) Executed (carry flag =TRUE(ON)) TRUE(ON)

Program example

SIGNAL1
1
LD
SETC

SIGNAL2
1
ST

SIGNAL2 := SETC( SIGNAL1);

When SIGNAL1 is TRUE(ON), the carry flag is set to TRUE(ON) and TRUE(ON) is
output to SIGNAL2.

323

Reset Carry

Data Processing Reset Carry
LD/FBD language
notation

Input Output
RSTC


ST language notation Output := RSTC( Input );

Arguments

Input BOOL
Input
Output BOOL Output

Function
When the input is TRUE(ON), the specific register carry flag is reset to FALSE(OFF).
When the input is FALSE(OFF), the specific register carry flag is unchanged.
The state of the input is output as the result.

Input Action Output
FALSE(OFF) Not executed (carry flag retains previous
value).
FALSE(OFF)
TRUE(ON) Executed (carry flag=FALSE(OFF)) TRUE(ON)

Program example

SIGNAL1
1
LD
RSTC

SIGNAL2
1
ST

SIGNAL2 := RSTC( SIGNAL1);

When SIGNAL1 is TRUE(ON), the carry flag is reset to FALSE(OFF) and TRUE(ON)
is output to SIGNAL2.

6F8C1226
324

Encode

Data Processing Encode
LD/FBD language
notation

Input data Bit No. output
ENC_


ST language notation Bit No. output := ENC_
( Input data );

Arguments

Input
Input data
Output
See below
Bit No. output

Input data Symbol(_ ) Bit No. output
WORD ENC_WORD_INT INT
WORD ENC_WORD_DINT DINT
DWORD ENC_DWORD_INT INT
DWORD ENC_DWORD_DINT DINT
Input data Bit No. output
ENC_

Function
Searches the input data from the most significant bit and outputs the number of the
first bit that is TRUE(ON).
he output bit number depends on the data type of the input data as follows:
WORD :0 to 15
DWORD :0 to 31
If the input data has no TRUE(ON) bit, -1 is output. The error flag and encode error
flag are set to TRUE(ON).


325

Program example

SAMPLE1
16#1234
LD
SAMPLE2
12
ST
ENC_WORD_INT Bit no.
15 12 8 4 0
0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0
WORD
Bit search direction

SAMPLE2 := ENC_WORD_INT( SAMPLE1);

Encodes the input data SAMPLE1 and stores 12 as the result in SAMPLE2.

Error information
If input data=0, an encode error occurs with -1 output as the result and the specific
register encode error flag is set to TRUE(ON).
6F8C1226
326

Decode

Data Processing Decode
LD/FBD language
notation

Bit No. input Result output
DEC_
M M Target data Target data


ST language notation Result output := DEC_
( Bit No. input, M );

Arguments

Input
Bit No. input

Output Result output
I/O M
See below
Target data

Bit no. input Target data Symbol(_ ) Result output
INT WORD DEC_INT_WORD INT
INT DWORD DEC_INT_DWORD INT
DINT WORD DEC_DINT_WORD DINT
DINT DWORD DEC_DINT_DWORD DINT
Bit No. input
Result output DEC_
M M Target data Target data

Function
Of the target data, the bit specified with bit No. input is set to TRUE(ON). The
operation result is output.
The input bit number depends on the data type of the target data as follows:
WORD: 0 to 15 Bit No. position=MOD (Bit No. input/16)
DWORD: 0 to 31 Bit No. position=MOD (Bit No. input/32))
Direct I/O variable cannot be specified for the target data (Unified Controller).


327

Program example

SAMPLE1
12
LD
SAMPLE3
16#1234
ST
DEC_INT_WORD
SAMPLE2
16#0234
LD
SAMPLE2

ST
M M
Bit No. 15 12 8 4 0
0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 WORD
Bit No. input

SAMPLE3 := DEC_INT_WORD( SAMPLE1, SAMPLE2);

Of the content 16#0234 in target data SAMPLE2, the 12th bit specified with bit No.
input SAMPLE1 is set to TRUE(ON). As the result of this decode operation, the
content of target data SAMPLE2 is 16#1234 and the result 16#1234 is stored in
SAMPLE3.

Error information
When bit No. input < 0, no decode operation is performed.
Controller Action


6F8C1226
328

Bit Counter

Data Processing Bit Counter
LD/FBD language
notation

Input data Bit count output
BC_


ST language notation Bit count output := BC_
( Input data );

Arguments

Input See below
Input data
Output INT
Bit count
output

Input data Symbol(_ )
WORD BC_WORD
DWORD BC_DWORD
Input data Bit count output
BC_

Function
Counts the number of bits in the input data that are TRUE(ON) and output the result.

Program example

Bit No. 15 12 8 4 0
0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0
WORD
SAMPLE1
16#1234
LD
SAMPLE2
5
ST
BC_WORD

SAMPLE2 := BC_WORD( SAMPLE1);

Counts the number of bits in input data SAMPLE1 and stores 5 as the result in
SAMPLE2.

329

Table Bit Set

Data Processing Table Bit Set
LD/FBD language
notation

Bit pointer Target table
TSET_
N Table size


ST language notation TSET_
( Bit pointer, N, Target Table );

Arguments

See below
Bit pointer
Input
N UINT
Table size 1N64

Output PTR Target table

Bit pointer Symbol(_ )
INT TSET_INT
DINT TSET_DINT
WORD TSET_WORD
DWOD TSET_DWORD
TSET_
N Table size

Function
The bit position specified with bit pointer in the N word table starting with the target
table is set to TRUE(ON).
The table size must be between 1 and 64 words (1024 bits).
If table size N=0, no table set is performed.
If the bit pointer points outside the target table, no table bit set is performed and the
error flag and table operation error flag are set to TRUE(ON).
Direct I/O variable cannot be specified for the target table.

6F8C1226
330

Program example

SAMPLE1
88
LD
TBL1

ST
TSET_INT
SAMPLE2
6
LD
N
0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16
95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81 80
1
5
Bit pointer=88
Set to TRUE (ON)
Target table TBL1

TSET_INT( SAMPLE1, SAMPLE2, TBL1);

In the 6 word (which is specified with table size SAMPLE2) table data starting with
target table TBL1, the bit position specified with bit pointer in input data SAMPLE1 is
set to TRUE(ON).

Error information
When the target table exceeds the variable area, the table bit set is not processed and
the data boundary is exceeded.
If the bit pointer points outside the target table, the error flag and table operation error
If table size N > 64, operation is performed with N=64.
The following operation is performed when direct I/O variable is specified for the target
table:

Controller Action
V series
S Controller
Table bit set is not executed.
Table bit set is not executed.
TRUE(ON).


331

Table Bit Reset

Data Processing Table Bit Reset
LD/FBD language
notation

TRST_
N Table size


ST language notation TRST_
( Bit pointer, N, Target table );

Arguments

See below
Bit pointer
Input
N UINT
Table size 1N64

Output PTR Target table

Bit pointer Symbol(_ )
INT TRST_INT
DINT TRST_DINT
WORD TRST_WORD
DWORD TRST_DWORD
TRST_
N Table size

Function
The bit position specified with bit pointer in the N word table starting with the target
table is reset to FALSE(OFF).
The table size must be between 1 and 64 words (1024 bits).
If table size N=0, no table reset is performed.
If the bit pointer points outside the target table, no table bit reset is performed and error
flag and table operation error flag are set to TRUE(ON).
Direct I/O variable cannot be specified for the target table.

6F8C1226
332

Program example

SAMPLE1
88
LD
TBL1

ST
TRST_INT
SAMPLE2
6
LD
N
0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16
95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81 80
1
5
Bit pointer=88
Reset to FALSE(OFF)
Target table TBL1

TRST_INT( SAMPLE1, SAMPLE2, TBL1);

In the 6 word (which is specified with table size SAMPLE2) table data starting with
target table TBL1, the bit position specified with bit pointer in input data SAMPLE1 is

Error information
When the target table exceeds the variable area, the table bit reset is not processed
If the bit pointer points outside the target table, the error flag and table operation error
If table size N > 64, operation is performed with N=64.
The following operation is performed when direct I/O variable is specified for the target
table.

Controller Action
V series
S Controller
Table bit reset is not executed.
Table bit reset is not executed.
TRUE(ON).


2.15 I/O
333

2.15 I/O

1
I/O Memory Read MREAD
V dedicated
instruction
2
I/O Memory Write MWRITE
V dedicated
instruction
3 Special Module Data Input (nv) MREAD_N
nv dedicated
instruction
4 Special Module Data Output (nv) MWRITE_N
nv dedicated
instruction
5
ASC Module String Data Input ASCREAD
V dedicated
instruction
6
ASC Module String Data Output ASCWRITE
V dedicated
instruction
7
Read State Change GET_IP_INF
8
Direct I/O IO_T
T compatible
instruction
9 I/O Node State Read GET_SIO_STS
nV dedicated
instruction
10 I/O Module State Read GET_IO_STS
nv dedicated
instruction
11 I/O Fallback Request IOFB_REQ
nv dedicated
instruction
12 I/O Fallback Recovery Request IORC_REQ
nv dedicated
instruction
13 Drive Device State Read GET_DRV_STS
nv dedicated
instruction

6F8C1226
334

I/O Memory Read

I/O I/O Memory Read
V dedicated
instruction
LD/FBD language
notation
Completion
output
Bus/Unit/Slot
Transfer word number
Transfer destination variable
Extended memory top addres
Execution enabled input
MREAD
T
N
P
TADDR
E


ST language notation Completion output:= MREAD( E, T, TADDR, P, N );

Arguments

Valid
range
E BOOL

T WORD
Bus/Unit/Slot
TADDR WORD

Extended memory top
address
0 to 7FFFH
P PTR
Transfer destination
variable

Input
N UINT
Transfer word number 1 to 256

Output BOOL Completion output

[I/O argument supplementary description]
Bus/Unit/Slot data structure

15 11 12 8
Bus Unit Slot
7 0
Range 16#00 to 16#0A
Range 16#0 to 16#7(0 in case of base unit)
Range 16#0 to 16#3(0 in case of base unit)

Extended memory top address

15
Extended memory top address(16#0000 to 16#7FFF)
0


15
Transfer word number (1 to 256)
0
2.15 I/O
335

Function
If execution enabled input E is FALSE(OFF), no data is input from the special module.
If execution enabled input E is TRUE(ON), data is transferred from special module
internal extended memory specified by the input argument to the CPU module.
Input arguments specify the transfer source (special module slot location and special
module internal extended memory top address), transfer destination (CPU module
internal variable), and transfer word number.
If an execution error is detected, the specific register error flag is set.
1 to 256 words may be transferred.
Direct I/O variable cannot be specified for the transfer destination variable.

Program example
[LD/FBD language notation[

15 0
Special module internal extended address
N=200W
16#0000
TADDR=16#0100
16#01C8
16#7FFF

N=200W
15 0
TransferdestinationvariableSAMPLE3
Transfer
IO specification : SAMPLE1
Bus : Channel 1
Unit : 1
Slot : 6
SIGNAL1
1
LD
MREAD
SIGNAL2
1
ST
E
SAMPLE1
16#1_1_06
LD
SAMPLE2
16#0100
LD
SAMPLE3
1234
LD
SAMPLE4
200
LD
T
TADDR
P
N

SIGNAL2 := MREAD( SIGNAL1, SAMPLE1, SAMPLE2, SAMPLE3, SAMPLE4);

SAMPLE1 specifies the special module slot location (Bus: Channel 1, Unit: 1, Slot: 6).
SAMPLE2 specifies the read top address of the extended memory in special module
(16#0100).
SAMPLE3 specifies the transfer destination variable.
SAMPLE4 specifies the transfer word number (specify 200).
When SIGNAL1 is TRUE(ON), the data specified with the above input argument is
transferred. Upon normal completion, SIGNAL2 is set to TRUE(ON).

6F8C1226
336

Error information
When the module cannot be accessed because the specified special module is not
installed or is abnormal.
When the specified module is not a special module.
When the transfer word number exceeds 256.
When the transfer source special module extended address is outside 0 to 7FFF.
When the range specified by the transfer destination variable exceeds the allowed
area.
When direct I/O variable is specified for transfer destination variable.
If the above error occurs, specific register error flag is set to TRUE(ON) without
performing any operation.
2.15 I/O
337

I/O Memory Write

I/O I/O Memory Write
V dedicated
instruction
LD/FBD language
notation
Completion
output
Bus/Unit/Slot
Transferred words
MWRITE
T
N
P
TADDR
E


ST language notation Completion output := MWRITE( E, T, TADDR, P, N );

Arguments

Valid
range
E BOOL

T WORD
Bus/Unit/Slot
TADDR WORD

Extended memory top
address
0 to 7FFFH
P PTR
variable

Input
N UINT
Transfer words 1 to 256


[I/O argument supplementary description]

15 11 12 8
Bus Unit Slot
7 0
Range 16#0 to 16#7 (0 in case of base unit)
Range 16#0 to 16#3 (0 in case of base unit)


15
Extended memory top address (16#0000 to 16#7FFF)
0


15
0

6F8C1226
338

Function
If execution enabled input E is FALSE(OFF), no data is output to special module.
If execution enabled input E is TRUE(ON), data is transferred from transfer source
variable in the CPU module specified by input argument to the special module internal
extended memory.
Input arguments specify the transfer source (CPU module internal variable), transfer
destination (special module slot location and special module internal extended
memory top address), and transfer word number.
1 to 256 words may be transferred.
Direct I/O variable cannot be specified for transfer source variable.

Program example

15 0
Special module internal extended address

N=200W

16#0000
TADDR=16#0100
16#01C8
16#7FFF

N=200W
15 0
Transfer source variable SAMPLE3
Transfer
Bus : Channel 1
Unit : 1
Slot : 6
SIGNAL1
1
LD
MWRITE
SIGNAL2
1
ST
E
SAMPLE1
16#1_1_06
LD
SAMPLE2
16#0100
LD
SAMPLE3
1234
LD
SAMPLE4
200
LD
T
TADDR
P
N

SIGNAL2 := MWRITE( SIGNAL1, SAMPLE1, SAMPLE2, SAMPLE3, SAMPLE4);

SAMPLE1 specifies the special module slot location (Bus: Channel 1, Unit: 1, Slot: 6).
SAMPLE2 specifies the special module internal extended memory write top address
(16#0100).
SAMPLE3 specifies the transfer source variable.
SAMPLE4 specifies the transfer word number (specify 200).
When SIGNAL1 is TRUE(ON), the data specified with the above input argument is
transferred. Upon normal completion, SIGNAL2 is set to TRUE(ON).
2.15 I/O
339

Error information
When the module cannot be accessed because the specified special module is not
When the range specified by the transfer source variable exceeds the allowed area.
When the transfer destination special module extended address is outside 0 to 7FFF.
When direct I/O variable is specified for the transfer source variable.
If the above error occurs, specific register error flag is set to TRUE(ON) without

6F8C1226
340

I/O Memory Readnv

I/O I/O Memory Read (nv)
nv dedicated
instruction
LD/FBD language
notation
Completion
output
Basic unit slot/
node/unit/slot
variable
Extended memory address
Execution request
MREAD_N
Error
Status
REQ DONE
T ERROR
TADDR STATUS
P
N
Instance name

ST language notation [Instance name] ( REQ, T, TADDR, P, N);
[Variable name]:= @[Instance name].DONE;
[Variable name]:= @[Instance name].ERROR;
[Variable name]:= @[Instance name].STATUS;

Arguments

Arg. Operand Type Const. Description Valid range
REQ BOOL
Execution request
T DWORD

Basic unit slot / node /
unit / slot

TADDR WORD
Extended memory address 0 to 32KW

P PTR Transfer destination variable
Input
N UINT

DONE BOOL Completion output
ERROR BOOL Error Output
STATUS INT Status

[Input argument supplementary description]
Basic unit slot / node / unit / slot data structure

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Slot Unit Node Basic unit slot

Setting value
Allowable
range
Valid range Remarks
Basic unit slot 0 to 255 0 0: I/O directly under the controller
Node 0 to 255 3 to 34
NX-I/O 1
Unit 0 to 255
G3-I/O 1 to 7
NX-I/O 0 to 15
Slot 0 to 255
G3-I/O 0 to 11

2.15 I/O
341

15
Extended memory address (16#0000 to 16#7FFF)
0


15
0

Instance structure

ERROR BOOL Error
STATUS INT Status
Can be accessed from the user
program.
TIMECNT DINT Time count
RESERVE DWORD Reserved
program.

Function
This function block reads data from an arbitrary memory address for the I/O module
with memory of NX-I/O and G3-I/O.
When execution request REQ changes from FALSE(OFF) to TRUE(ON), data for
transfer word number is read from extended memory address TADDR of the specified
basic unit slot / node / unit / slot to transfer destination variable P.
For transfer word number, 1 to 256 words can be specified.
When it is completed normally, completion output DONE becomes TRUE(ON) for one
scanning time.
When it is completed with an error, error ERROR becomes TRUE(ON) for one
scanning time.
When transfer is completed with or without an error, the details are output to status
STATUS.
Direct I/O variable cannot be specified for the transfer destination variable.
For MREAD_N, MWRITE_N and XMIT_N instructions, up to the maximum requests
can be made simultaneously per controller. (Maximum request number:type1=48,
type2=24)
The status values are as follows:

Completion
status
Status
STATUS
DONE ERROR
Content Description
-5000 FALSE TRUE
Extended instruction
request number exceeded
More than 48 or 24 extended instructions are requested
simultaneously.
-5001 FALSE TRUE
Instruction specification
abnormal
The number of transfer word is more than 256, or direct
I/O is specified for the transfer destination variable.
-5002 FALSE TRUE
Extended memory
specification address
abnormal
When 0Extended memory address
specification16#7FFF: (TADDR+N-1)16#8000
-5003 FALSE TRUE Boundary abnormal
The specification range of transfer destination variable
exceeds the area.
-5005 FALSE TRUE Module abnormal
I/O is installed in the specified basic unit slot/node/unit/
slot but it is in degeneration or specified as hot-swap.
-5104 FALSE TRUE I/O access abnormal Access error in the specified I/O module.
-5119 FALSE TRUE I/O uninstalled
I/O is not installed in the specified basic unit
slot/node/unit/slot.
6F8C1226
342
Program example

15 0
Extended address in special module

N=200W
16#0000
TADDR=16#0100
16#01C8
16#7FFF

N=200W
15 0
variable SAMPLE3
Transfer
IO specificationSAMPLE1
Basic unit slot0
Node3
Unit2
Slot3
SIGNAL1
1
LD
MREAD_N SIGNAL2
1
ST
REQ
SAMPLE1
16#00030203
LD
SAMPLE2
16#0100
LD
SAMPLE3
1234
LD
SAMPLE4
200
LD
T
TADDR
P
N
DONE
ERROR
STATUS
SIGNAL3
0
ST
SIGNAL5
8
ST
MREAD_N_1

MREAD_N_1( SIGNAL1, SAMPLE1, SAMPLE2, SAMPLE3, SAMPLE4);
SIGNAL2 := @MREAD_N_1.DONE;
SIGNAL3 := @MREAD_N_1.ERROR;
SIGNAL5 := @MREAD_N_1.STATUS;

The installation slot location of the special module is specified with SAMPLE1 (Basic
unit slot :0, Node :3, Unit 2, Slot :3).
The read top address of the extended memory in special module is specified with
SAMPLE2 (16#0100).
The destination variable is specified with SAMPLE3.
Transfer word number is specified with SAMPLE4 (200 specified).
When SIGNAL1 is TRUE(ON), transfer operation is performed with the data specified
in the input arguments above. When it is completed normally, SIGNAL2 becomes
TRUE(ON).

Error information
destination:

Controller Action
Special module data input is not executed.
2.15 I/O
343

I/O Memory Writenv

I/O I/O Memory Write (nv)
nv dedicated
instruction
LD/FBD language
notation
Completion output
Basic unit slot/node/unit/slot
Transfer source variable
Execution permission input
MWRITE_N
Error
Status
T
REQ DONE
ERROR
TADDR STATUS
P
N
Instance name

ST language notation [Instance name] ( REQ, T, TADDR, P, N);
[Variable name]:= @[Instance name].DONE;
[Variable name]:= @[Instance name].ERROR;
[Variable name]:= @[Instance name].STATUS;
Arguments

Valid
range
REQ BOOL
Execution permission input

T DWORD
Basic unit slot / node / unit / slot

TADDR WORD
Memory top address 0 to 32KW

P PTR Transfer source variable
Input
N UINT

STATUS INT Status
Basic unit slot / node / unit / slot data structure

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Slot Unit Node Basic unit slot

Setting value
Allowable
range
Valid range Remarks
Basic unit slot 0 to 255 0 0 : I/O directly under the controller
Node 0 to 255 3 to 34
NX-I/O 1
Unit 0 to 255
G3-I/O 1 to 7
NX-I/O 0 to 15
Slot 0 to 255
G3-I/O 0 to 11

15
Extended memory address (0 to 16#7FFF))
0

6F8C1226
344

15
0

Function
This function block writes data to an arbitrary memory address for the I/O module with
memory of NX-I/O and G3-I/O.
When execution request REQ changes from FALSE(OFF) to TRUE(ON), data for
transfer word number is written to extended memory address TADDR of the specified
basic unit slot / node / unit / slot from transfer destination variable P.
For transfer word number, 1 to 256 words can be specified.
When it is completed normally, completion output DONE becomes TRUE(ON) for one
scanning time.
scanning time.
When transfer is completed with or without an error, the details are output to status
STATUS.
For MREAD_N, MWRITE_N and XMIT_N instructions, up to the maximum requests
can be made simultaneously per controller. (Maximum request number : type1=48,
type2=24)
The status values are as follows.

Completion
status
Status
STATUS
DONE ERROR
Content Description
-5000 FALSE TRUE
Extended instruction
request number exceeded
More than 48 or 24 extended instructions are requested
simultaneously.
-5001 FALSE TRUE
Instruction specification
abnormal
The number of transfer word is more than 256, or direct I/O
is specified for the transfer destination variable.
-5002 FALSE TRUE
Extended memory
specification address
abnormal
When 0Extended memory address specification
16#7FFF:
(TADDR+N-1)16#8000
-5003 FALSE TRUE Boundary abnormal
The specification range of transfer destination variable
exceeds the area.
-5005 FALSE TRUE Module abnormal
I/O is installed in the specified basic unit slot/node/unit/slot
but it is in degeneration or specified as hot-swap.
-5104 FALSE TRUE I/O access abnormal Access error in the specified I/O module.
-5119 FALSE TRUE I/O uninstalled
I/O is not installed in the specified basic unit
slot/node/unit/slot.

Instance structure

DONE BOOL
Completion
output
ERROR BOOL Error
STATUS INT Status
program.
TIMECNT DINT Time count Cannot be accessed from the user
2.15 I/O
345
RESERVE DWORD Reserved program.

Program example

15 0
Extended address in special module

N=200W

16#0000
TADR=16#0100
16#01C8
16#7FFF

N=200W
15 0
Transfer
Channel : 0
Node : 3
Unit : 2
Slot : 3
SIGNAL1
1
LD
MWRITE_N
SIGNAL2
1
ST
REQ
SAMPLE1
16#00030203
LD
SAMPLE2
16#0100
LD
SAMPLE3
1234
LD
SAMPLE4
200
LD
T
TADDR
P
N
DONE
STATUSR
ERROR
SIGNAL3
0
ST
SIGNAL5
8
ST
MWRITE_N_1

MWRITE_N_1( SIGNAL1, SAMPLE1, SAMPLE2, SAMPLE3, SAMPLE4);
SIGNAL2 := @MWRITE_N_1.DONE;
SIGNAL3 := @MWRITE_N_1.ERROR;
SIGNAL5 := @MWRITE_N_1.STATUS;

The installation slot location of the special module is specified with SAMPLE1 (Basic
unit slot :0, Node :3, Unit 2, Slot :3).
The write top address of the extended memory in special module is specified with
SAMPLE2 (16#0100).
The transfer source variable is specified with SAMPLE3.
Transfer word number is specified with SAMPLE4 (200 specified).
When SIGNAL1 changes FALSE(OFF) to TRUE(ON), transfer operation is performed
with the data specified in the input arguments above. When it is completed normally,
SIGNAL2 becomes TRUE(ON).

Error information
transfer source:

Controller Action
Special module data output is not executed.
TRUE(ON).
6F8C1226
346

ASC Module String Data Input

I/O ASC Module String Data Input
V dedicated
instruction
LD/FBD language
notation
Completion
output
Bus/Unit/Slot
ASCREAD
E

T

TADDR

P

N

CODE
End code specification

ST language notation Completion output := ASCREAD( E, T, TADDR, P, N, CODE );

Arguments

E BOOL

T WORD
Bus/Unit/Slot
TADDR WORD

Extended memory top
address
0 to 7FFFH
P STRING
variable

N UINT

Input
CODE WORD



15 11 12 8
Bus Unit Slot
7 0
Range 16#00 to16#0A
Range 16#0 to 16#7 (0 in case of basic unit)


15
Extended memory top address (16#0000 to 16#7FFF)
0


15
0

2.15 I/O
347

Function
If execution enabled input E is FALSE(OFF), no string data is input from the ASC
module.
If execution enabled input E is TRUE(ON), data is transferred from ASC module
internal extended memory specified by the input argument to the STRING variable in
the CPU module.
The store target data is N words starting from TADDR and the data from the beginning
up to the specified end code is stored.
The low order byte (16#00 to 16#FF) of the CODE input data is used as the end code.
For input arguments, specify the transfer source (ASC module slot location and ASC
module internal extended memory top address), transfer destination (CPU module
internal variable), transfer word number, and end code.
If a double-byte code in the data read from ASC module is invalid, the invalid
double-byte code is stored in STRING variable replaced by ??.
One to 129 words may be specified for transfer word number.
Direct I/O variable cannot be specified for transfer destination variable.

Important
Specify the same code for the end code in the ASC module and the end code specification
CODE in this instruction.

Program example

SIGNAL1
1
LD
ASCREAD SIGNAL2
1
ST
E
SAMPLE1
16#1_1_06
LD
SAMPLE2
16#0080
LD
SAMPLE3

LD
SAMPLE4
5
LD
T
TADDR
P
N
15 0
Extended address in
ASC modul e

2

16#0000
TADDR=16#0080
16#0085
16#7FFF
VAR length=6
15 0
variable SAMPLE3
Transfer
Variables:
SAMPLE3 STRING[12] VAR

SAMPLE5
16#000D
LD
CODE
1
4 3
6 5
8 7
CR
2 1
4 3
6 5
8 7
Stri ng length=8
* *
* *
IO specification: SAMPLE1
Bus: Channel 1
Unit: 1
Sl ot: 6

6F8C1226
348

SIGNAL2 := ASCREAD( SIGNAL1, SAMPLE1, SAMPLE2, SAMPLE3, SAMPLE4,
SAMPLE5);

SAMPLE1 specifies the ASC module slot location. (Bus: Channel 1, Unit: 1, Slot: 6)
SAMPLE2 specifies the read top address of the extended memory in ASC module.
(16#0080)
SAMPLE3 specifies the transfer destination STRING variable.
SAMPLE4 specifies the transfer word number. (5 specified)
SAMPLE5 specifies the end code. ("CR" specified)
When variable SIGNAL1 is TRUE(ON), the content specified with the above input
argument is transferred and the character data up to the specified end code is stored
in the STRING variable. Upon normal completion, SIGNAL2 is set to TRUE(ON).

Error information
When the ASC module cannot be accessed because the specified ASC module is not
When the transfer source ASC module extended address is not between 0 and 7FFF.
When the range specified by the transfer destination variable exceeds the allowed
area.
When direct I/O variable is specified for transfer destination variable.
If the above error occurs, the specific register error flag is set to TRUE(ON) without

2.15 I/O
349

ASC Module String Data Output

I/O ASC Module String Data Output
V dedicated
instruction
LD/FBD language
notation

Completion
output
Bus/Unit/Slot
Transfer source variable
ASCWRITE
E

T

TADDR

P

N

CODE


ST language notation Completion output := ASCWRITE( E, T, TADDR, P, N, CODE );

Arguments

Valid
range
E BOOL

T WORD
Bus/Unit/Slot
TADDR WORD

Extended memory top
address
0 to 7FFFH
P STRING Transfer source variable
N UINT

Input
CODE WORD



15 11 12 8
Bus Unit Slot
7 0


15
Extended memory address (16#000016#7FFF)
0


15
Transfer word number (1 to129)
0

6F8C1226
350

Function
If execution enabled input E is FALSE(OFF), no data is output to ASC module.
If execution enabled input E is TRUE(ON), data is transferred from transfer source
variable in the CPU module specified by input argument to the ASC module internal
extended memory.
The storage target data is output with the valid character code stored in STRING
variable appended with the end code specified with end code specification CODE.
The low order byte (16#00 to 16#FF) of the CODE input data is used as the end code.
For input arguments, specify the transfer source (CPU module internal variable),
transfer destination (special module slot location and ASC module internal extended
memory top address), transfer word number, and end code.
If an execution error is detected, the specific register Error Flag is set.
One to 129 words (up to 256 bytes + end code) can be specified as transfer word
number.
Normally, the transfer word number N is specified as INT ((string declaration byte
size+2)/2). By specifying this way, the application program need not be aware of the
actual number of character code bytes stored in the STRING variable.

Important
Specify the same code for the end code in the ASC module and the end code specification
CODE in this instruction.

Program example

15 0
Transfer source variable SAMPLE3
Transfer
Bus : Channel 1
Unit : 1
Slot : 6
SIGNAL1
1
LD
SIGNAL2
1
ST
SAMPLE1
16#1_1_06
LD
SAMPLE3

LD
SAMPLE4
5
LD
SAMPLE2
16#0240
LD
SAMPLE5
16#000D
LD
ASCWRITE
E
T
P
N
TADDR
CODE
2 1
4 3
6 5
8 7

VAR length=6
String length=8
15 0
Extended address in ASC module
16#0000
TADDR=16#0240
16#0245
16#7FFF
2 1
4 3
6 5
8 7
CR
Variable :

2.15 I/O
351

SIGNAL2 := ASCWRITE (SIGNAL1, SAMPLE1, SAMPLE2, SAMPLE3, SAMPLE4,
SAMPLE5);

SAMPLE1 specifies the ASC module slot location (Bus: Channel 1, Unit: 1, Slot: 6).
SAMPLE2 specifies the ASC module internal extended memory write top address
(16#0240).
SAMPLE3 specifies the transfer source STRING variable.
SAMPLE4 specifies the transfer word number (5 specified).
SAMPLE5 specifies the end code ("CR" specified).
When SIGNAL1 is TRUE(ON), transfer is performed with the end code specified with
the above input argument appended. Upon normal completion, SIGNAL2 is set to
TRUE(ON).

Error information
When the ASC module cannot be accessed because the specified ASC module is not
When the range specified by the transfer source variable exceeds the allowed area.
When the transfer destination special module extended address is not between 0 and
7FFF.
When INT (string declaration byte size+2)/2)>N.
When direct I/O variable is specified for transfer source variable.
If the above error occurs, the specific register error flag is set to TRUE(ON) without

6F8C1226
352

State Change Detection Read

I/O State Change Detection Read
LD/FBD language
notation Destination table
GET_IP_INF


ST language notation GET_IP_INF( Destination table );

Arguments


Function
This is a dedicated instruction for I/O interruption task.
When GET_IP_INF instruction is used in the I/O interruption task, the activation factor
(I/O module (I/O), TC-net transmission module (TC-net) and START_P) of the I/O
interruption task can be obtained.
The obtained result is transferred to the specified destination table.
For destination table specification, static variable, nontracking type / static variable
(Unified Controller), temporary variable, user variable, special register (SW) or system
variable (ZW), and data register (D) are valid. If other variable is specified, state
change detection information is not read.
The structure of state change detection information varies depending on the activation
factor as shown below.

[Integrated Controller - S Controller]

State change detection information
[W]
I/O TC-net
Remarks
+0 Activation factor=0 Activation factor =1 Indicates whether IP task activation is via I/O or TN.
+1
State change
occurrence slot
TN slot to detect the state change.
+2
+3
Point No.
The number in the No. column of the V tool state change
notification tab in the TN module that detects the state
change.
+4
+5

State change bit
history
Changed bit information of the state change point of the TN
module that detects the state change.
+6
+7
State change data
TN scan memory data of the state change point of the TN
module that detects the state change.
+8
+9
IP task No. The number of IP task activated.
2.15 I/O
353


State change detection information
[W]
I/O TCnet START_P
Remarks
+0 Activation factor =0 Activation factor =1 Activation factor =2
Indicates whether IP task activation is via
I/O, TN, START_P.
+1
State change
occurrence slot
TN slot to detect the state change.
+2
+3
Point No. Point No.
The number in the No. column of the V
tool state change notification tab in the
TN module or controller that detects the
state change.
+4
+5

State change bit
history

Changed bit information of the state
change point of the TN module that
detects the state change.
+6
ON interruption
status
+7
OFF interruption
status
State change data
I/O: Change bit information of the state
change point of the I/O module that
detects the state change.
TC-net: TN scan memory data of the
state change point of the TN module
that detects the state change.
+8
+9
IP task No. IP task No. IP task No. The number of IP task activated.

Program example

I/O state
change
notification
Point No. 0
I/O-1
Word No.0
Point No.1
I/O-1
Word No.1
TC-net100
state change
notification
Point No.0
Block No.1
Word No.0
Point

No.1
Block No.2
Word

No.6
Point

No.2
Block

No.2
Word

No.8
I/O interruption
event processing
program (IP6)
Controller
I/O interruption
registration
information
I/O interruption
event processing
program (IP3)

IP0
IP1
IP2
IP3
IP4
IP5
IP6
IP15
Info
ST
/* IP6 Program */
/* When Info point No.=1*/
/* When Info point No.=2*/
Interruption processing for point No.=2
Interruption processing for point No.=1
GET_IP_INF
/* State change detection
information
Info*/
Info
ST
/* IP3 Program */
/* When Info activation factor=I/O*/
/* When Info activation factor=TC-net*/
/* State change detection
information
Info*/
Interruption processing from TC-net 100 module
Interruption processing from I/O-1 module word No.= 1
GET IP INF
6F8C1226
354

GET_IP_INF(Info);

When the same I/O interruption task (IP3) is set from the setting screen of I/O state
change notification or TC-net100 state change notification:
Using the I/O interruption program, state change detection information is read to
variable Info with GET_IP_INF instruction. Interruption processing from the I/O
module and interruption processing from TC-net100 can be programmed and
executed as different cases depending on the activation factor read.
When the same I/O interruption task (IP6) is set with multiple point number settings
from the setting screen of TCnet100 state change notification:
Using the I/O interruption program, state change detection information is read to
variable Info with GET_IP_INF instruction. Interruption processing by TC-net100
point number can be programmed and executed as different cases depending on
the point number read.

Error information
If any variable other than static variable, nontracking type / static variable (unified
controller), temporary variable, user variable, special register (SW) or system variable
(ZW), or data register (D) is specified, state change detection information is not read,
and table operation error and error flag are set to TRUE(ON).
2.15 I/O
355

Direct I/O

I/O Direct I/O
T compatible
instruction
LD/FBD language
notation

Execution
output
IO_T

N
Batch I/O specification
Word number


ST language notation Execution output:= IO_T( Batch I/O specification, N );

Arguments

PTR
Batch I/O
specification

Input
N UINT
Word number 1N64

Output BOOL Execution output

Function
Performs data I/O of N words, which is specified by a batch I/O variable or by direct
notation (%IQ), with the corresponding I/O module as follows and sets the execution
output to TRUE(ON).
(1) When the corresponding I/O module is an input module:
Stores the content input from the input module in batch output variable (Data
input).
(2) When the corresponding I/O module is an output module:
Outputs the content of the batch I/O variable to the I/O module (Data output).
Performs direct I/O with the I/O module (such as digital I/O, TL-S20, TL-F10, TC-net)
assigned to the batch I/O variable. However, model 2000 TL-F10 module supports
only synchronous mode. Only I/O synchronized with scan is performed even with this
instruction.
One to 64 words may be specified for word number N.
If N > 64: N=64 is assumed.
If N=0: Not executed
Direct I/O instruction must be specified in I/O module units. Therefore, I/O of multiple
I/O modules cannot be processed with a single direct I/O instruction. In such case, I/O
is performed only for the first module and the execution output is reset to
FALSE(OFF).
No I/O is performed if the I/O module corresponding to the specified batch I/O variable
is not installed or if there is an I/O fallback.
6F8C1226
356

Batch I/O variable

I/O
(1)

4W

I/O
(2)

4W

I/O
(3)

4W
I/O (1) 0W
I/O (1) 1W
I/O (1) 2W
I/O (1) 3W
I/O (2) 0W
I/O (2) 1W
I/O (2) 2W
I/O (2) 3W
I/O (3) 0W
I/O (3) 1W
I/O (3) 2W
I/O (3) 3W
Case 1
Case 2
Case 3
[Specification example]
Case 1: Specify 4W from beginning of I/O(1)
Normal I/O possible
Case 2: Specify 2W from I/O(1)2W
Normal I/O possible
Case 3: Specify 5W from I/O(2)2W to I/O(3)2W
I/O(2) 2-3Wnormal I/O possible
I/O(3) 0-2Wno I/O performed

Program example

IO_T SIGNAL1
1
ST
SAMPLE1
1234
LD
SAMPLE2
4
LD
N
SAMPLE14W output
module

SIGNAL1 := IO_T( SAMPLE1, SAMPLE2);

Outputs 4W from a batch I/O SAMPLE1 to a 4W output module.

Error information
No I/O is performed when anything other than batch I/O variable or direct notation
(%IQ) is used for batch I/O specification input.
When I/O of multiple I/O modules is specified with a single direction I/O instruction, I/O
is performed only for the first module.
If word number N exceeds 64, it is limited to N=64.
When I/O is specified only for the even number words of an I/O module set up scan
access 2W, I/O is performed only for the specified even number words.

2.15 I/O
357

I/O Node State Read

I/O I/O Node State Read
nv dedicated
instruction
LD/FBD language
notation

BASESLOT
NODE
I/O node state
GET_SIO_STS
Basic unit slot
I/O node number


ST language notation I/O node state := GET_SIO_STS( BASESLOT, NODE );

Arguments

BASESLOT UINT
Basic unit slot 0

Input
NODE UINT
I/O node number 3 to 34

Output BOOL I/O node state

Function
I/O node state specified with basic unit slot (BASESLOT) and I/O node number
(NODE) is read. The output (I/O node state) varies depending on the task using this
instruction.

I/O node state output value
Task
TRUE(ON) FALSE(OFF)
Event task
- I/O fallback task (EV4)
I/O node abnormal is not detected upon
EV4 startup, so it is not the target of I/O
node fallback.
(Normal, or abnormal detection has
been done)
I/O node abnormal is detected upon EV4
startup, so it is the target of I/O node fallback.
Event task
- I/O fallback recovery
task (EV6)
I/O node abnormal recovery is detected
upon EV6 startup, so it is the target of
I/O node fallback recovery.
I/O node abnormal recovery is not detected
upon EV6 startup, so it is not the target of I/O
node fallback recovery.
(Normal, or abnormal detection has been
done)
Other than above Specified I/O node state is normal. Specified I/O node state is abnormal.

Therefore, in event task - I/O fallback task (EV4), the abnormal I/O node can be
identified with this instruction and special register (SW), or system variable (ZW) I/O
fallback information.
In event task - I/O fallback recovery task (EV6), the I/O node that recovered can be
fallback recovery information.
6F8C1226
358

I/O fallback information and I/O fallback recovery information is referenced by the
following special register (SW) or system variable (ZW). See the function manuals of
controllers for data structure details.

Controller
I/O fallback information
type1 type2
TCnet I/O SW[340..346] ZW[300..306]
G3I/O SW[680..691] ZW[320..331]
TCnet I/O SW[350..356] ZW[310..316] I/O fallback recovery
information G3I/O SW[700..711] ZW[340..351]

For basic unit slot (BASESLOT), "0" (I/O directly under the controller) is specified.
For I/O node number (NODE), I/O node number (3 to 34) is specified.
2.15 I/O
359

Program example

(* Event task - I/O fallback task (EV4):[Example for type1] *)
IF S[340].B[1] AND NOT(S[340].B[3]) THEN
(* I/O node abnormal of one unit *)
ELSEIF S[340].B[1] AND S[340].B[3] THEN
(* I/O node abnormal of multiple units *)
FOR XI := 3 TO 34 BY 1 DO
Z1 := DINT_TO_UINT( XI);
Indicates the I/O node where the following information is abnormal. Describes the processing related to the node.
1) SW[345]I/O node fallback information(Main slot No.), 2) SW[346]I/O node fallback information (Node No.).

IF

S[340].B[1]

S[340].B[3]

VAL1
THEN

ELSEIF

S[340].B[1]

S[340].B[3]

VAL1
THEN

FOR_DO

INDEX
XI MIN3

MAX34 STEP 1
GET_SIO_STS
BASESLOT
NODE DINT_TO_UINT XI

0

/* I/O node abnormal of one unit*/
/*I/O node abnormal of multiple units*/
NODE_OK
END_FOR

ENDIF

NODE_OK

Describes the processing related to the I/O node No.
/*Searches for I/O node abnormal detection in nodes 3 to 34*/
Indicates the I/O node where the following information is abnormal. Describes the processing related to the node.
1) SW[355] :I/O node fallback recovery information(Main slot No.), 2) SW[356] :I/O node fallback recovery information (Node No.).
IF

S[350].B[1]

S[350].B[3]

VAL1
THEN

ELSEIF

S[350].B[1]

S[350].B[3]

VAL1
THEN

FOR_DO

INDEX XI MIN 3

MAX 34
STEP 1
GET_SIO_STS
BASESLOT
NODE DINT_TO_UINT XI

0

/* I/O node abnormal recovery of one unit*/
/*I/O node abnormal recovery of multiple units*/
NODE_OK
END_FOR

ENDIF

NODE_OK

Describes the processing related to the I/O node No.
/*Searches for I/O node abnormal recovery
Event task - I/O fallback task (EV4) : [Example for type1]
Event task - I/O fallback recovery task (EV6): [Example for type 1]
detection in nodes 3 to 34*/
6F8C1226
360

NODE_OK := GET_SIO_STS( 0, Z1)
IF NODE_OK = FALSE THEN
(* processing related to the I/O node No. *)
END_IF
END_FOR;
END_IF;
(* Event task - I/O fallback recovery task (EV6):[Example for type1] *)
(* I/O node abnormal recovery of one unit *)
(* I/O node abnormal recovery of multiple units *)

NODE_OK := GET_SIO_STS( 0, Z1)
IF NODE_OK THEN
(* processing related to the I/O node No. *)
END_IF
END_FOR;
END_IF;

Description of operation for I/O fallback task (EV4)
When I/O node fallback of multiple units is detected in I/O fallback task (EV4), it can be
determined if the specified I/O node is a target of fallback by using GET_SIO_STS
instruction in EV4 task.
GET_SIO_STS instruction output becomes FALSE(OFF) if the specified I/O node is a
target of fallback, or TRUE(ON) otherwise.
Description of operation for I/O fallback recovery task (EV6)
When I/O node fallback recovery of multiple units is detected in I/O fallback recovery
task (EV6), It can be determined if the specified I/O node is a target of fallback
recovery by using GET_SIO_STS instruction in EV6 task.
GET_SIO_STS instruction output becomes TRUE(ON) if the specified I/O node is a
target of fallback recovery, or FALSE(OFF) otherwise.
Description of operation for tasks other than I/O fallback task (EV4) / I/O fallback
recovery task (EV6)
When GET_SIO_STS instruction is used in a task other than I/O fallback task (EV4) /
I/O fallback recovery task (EV6), the specified I/O node state can be determined.
GET_SIO_STS instruction output becomes TRUE(ON) if the specified I/O node is
normal, or FALSE(OFF) otherwise.

Error information
If the specified I/O node is not registered, or if basic unit slot number or I/O node number
exceeds the specification range, the result is set to FALSE(OFF).
2.15 I/O
361

I/O Module State Read

I/O I/O Module State Read
nv dedicated
instruction
LD/FBD language
notation

I/O module state
GET_IO_STS
Basic unit slot
I/O node number
Unit number
Slot number
BASESLOT
NODE
UNIT
SLOT

ST language notation I/O module state := GET_IO_STS( BASESLOT, NODE, UNIT,
SLOT );

Arguments

Arg.
Operan
d
Type
Const
.
Description
Valid
range
BASESL
OT
UINT
Basic unit slot 0

NODE UINT

UNIT UINT
Unit number 1 to 7
Input
SLOT UINT
Slot number 0 to 15
Output BOOL I/O module state (1Normal, 0Abnormal)

Function
I/O module state specified with basic unit slot (BASESLOT), I/O node number (NODE),
unit number (UNIT), and slot number (SLOT) is read. The output (I/O module state)
varies depending on the task using this instruction.

I/O module state output value
Task
TRUE(ON) FALSE(OFF)
Event task
- I/O fallback task (EV4)
I/O abnormal is not detected upon EV4
startup, so it is not the target of I/O node
fallback.
(Normal, or abnormal detection has
been done)
I/O abnormal is detected upon EV4
startup, so it is the target of I/O fallback.
Event task
- I/O fallback recovery task
(EV6)
I/O abnormal recovery is detected upon
EV6 startup, so it is the target of I/O
fallback recovery.
I/O abnormal recovery is not detected
upon EV6 startup, so it is not the target of
I/O fallback recovery.
(Normal, or abnormal detection has been
done)
Other than above Specified I/O module state is normal.
I/O module serious failure occurred, or I/O
fallback occurred due to an I/O fallback
request.
6F8C1226
362
Therefore, in event task - I/O fallback task (EV4), the I/O module that was abnormal
this time can be identified with this instruction and special register (SW), or system
variable (ZW) I/O fallback information.
In event task - I/O fallback recovery task (EV6), the I/O node that recovered can be
fallback recovery information.
I/O fallback information and I/O fallback recovery information is referenced by the
following special register (SW) or system variable (ZW). See the function manuals of
controllers for data structure details.

Controller
type1 type2
TCnet I/O SW[340..346] ZW[300..306] I/O fallback
information G3I/O SW[680..691] ZW[320..331]
TCnet I/O SW[350..356] ZW[310..316] I/O fallback
recovery
information
G3I/O SW[700..711] ZW[340..351]
For basic unit slot (BASESLOT), "0" (I/O directly under the controller) is specified.
For unit number (UNIT), unit number (1 to 7) is specified.
For slot number (SLOT), slot number (0 to 15) is specified.

Program example

S[340].B[0] S[340].B[2] VAL1
/* Searches for I/O module abnormal detection in nodes 3 to 34
of slot 0 to 15 */
/* I/O module abnormal of one unit*/
Describes the processing related to the I/O module.
IF
THEN
ELSEIF
S[340].B[0] S[340].B[2] VAL1
THEN
FOR_DO
GET_IO_STS
BASESLOT
NODE
UNIT
SLOT
DINT_TO_UINT
END_FOR
ENDIF
IO_OK
FOR_DO
DINT_TO_UINT
END_FOR
Indicates the I/O module where the following information is abnormal. Describes the processing related to the I/O module.
1) SW[341] to SW[344]: I/O fallback information (Main slot No./node No./unit No./slot No.)
/* I/O module abnormal of multiple units */
INDEX XI MIN 3 MAX 34 STEP 1
INDEX XJ MIN 0 MAX15 STEP 1
XI
0
XJ
0
IO_OK
Event task - I/O fallback task (EV4) :[Example for type1]
2.15 I/O
363
(* Event task I/O fallback task (EV4):[Example for type1] *)
(* I/O module abnormal of one unit *)
(* I/O module abnormal of multiple units *)
FOR XJ := 0 TO 15 BY 1 DO
Z2 := DINT_TO_UINT( XJ);
IO_OK := GET_IO_STS( 0, Z1, 1, Z2)
IF IO_OK = FALSE THEN
(* processing related to the I/O module *)
END_IF
END_FOR;
END_FOR;
END_IF;


/*Searches for I/O module abnormal recovery
detection in nodes 3 to 34 of slot 0 to 15*/
/* I/O module abnormal recovery of one unit*/
Describes the processing related to the I/O module.
IF
THEN
ELSEIF
S[350].B[0] S[350].B[2] VAL1
THEN
FOR_DO
GET_IO_STS
BASESLOT
NODE
UNIT
SLOT
DINT_TO_UINT
IO_OK
END_FOR
ENDIF
IO_OK
FOR_DO
DINT_TO_UINT
END_FOR
Indicates the I/O module where the following information is abnormal recovery. Describes the processing related to the I/O module.
1)SW[351] to SW[354]: I/O fallback recovery information (Main slot No./node No./unit No./slot No.)
/* I/O module abnormal recovery of multiple units*/
S[350].B[0] S[350].B[2] VAL1
INDEX XI MIN 3 MAX34 STEP1
INDEX XJ MIN 0 MAX15 STEP1
X
0
XJ
0
Event task I/O fallback recovery task EV6:[Example for type1]
6F8C1226
364
(* Event task - I/O fallback recovery task (EV6):[Example for type1] *)
(* I/O module abnormal recovery of one unit *)
(* I/O module abnormal recovery of multiple units *)
FOR XJ := 0 TO 15 BY 1 DO
Z2 := DINT_TO_UINT( XJ);
IO_OK := GET_IO_STS( 0, Z1, 1, Z2)
IF IO_OK THEN
(* processing related to the I/O module *)
END_IF
END_FOR;
END_FOR;
END_IF;

Description of operation for I/O fallback task (EV4)
When I/O fallback of multiple units is detected in I/O fallback task (EV4), it can be
determined if the specified I/O module is a target of fallback by using GET_SIO_STS
instruction in EV4 task.
GET_SIO_STS instruction output becomes FALSE(OFF) if the specified I/O module is
a target of fallback
Description of operation for I/O fallback recovery task (EV6)
When I/O module fallback recovery of multiple units is detected in I/O fallback recovery
task (EV6), it can be determined if the specified I/O module is a target of fallback
recovery by using GET_SIO_STS instruction in EV6 task.
GET_SIO_STS instruction output becomes TRUE(ON) if the specified I/O module is a
target of fallback recovery, or FALSE(OFF) otherwise.
Description of operation for tasks other than I/O fallback task (EV4) / I/O fallback
recovery task (EV6)
When GET_SIO_STS instruction is used in a task other than I/O fallback task (EV4) /
I/O fallback recovery task (EV6), the specified I/O module state can be determined.
GET_SIO_STS instruction output becomes TRUE(ON) if the specified I/O module is
normal, or FALSE(OFF) otherwise.

Error information
If the specified I/O module is not registered, or if basic unit slot number or I/O node
number exceeds the specification range, or if unit number or slot number exceeds the
specification range, the result is set to FALSE(OFF).
2.15 I/O
365

I/O Fallback Request

I/O I/O Fallback Request
nv dedicated
instruction
LD/FBD language
notation

Execution
output
IOFB_REQ
Basic unit slot
I/O node number
Unit number
Slot number
BASESLOT
NODE
UNIT
SLOT


ST language notation Execution output := IOFB_REQ( BASESLOT, NODE, UNIT, SLOT );

Arguments

BASESLOT UINT
Basic unit slot 0

NODE UINT

UNIT UINT
Unit number 1 to 7
Input
SLOT UINT
Slot number 0 to 15

Function
A fallback request is made to the I/O module specified with basic unit slot
(BASESLOT), I/O node number (NODE), unit number (UNIT), and slot number
(SLOT).
For basic unit slot (BASESLOT), 0(I/O directly under the controller) is specified.

6F8C1226
366

Program example

IOFB_REQ
NODE
BASESLOT
SAMPLE1
0
LD
SAMPLE2
3
LD
SIGNAL1
UNIT
SAMPLE3
1
LD
SLOT
SAMPLE4
5
LD

SIGNAL1 := IOFB_REQ( SAMPLE1, SAMPLE2, SAMPLE3, SAMPLE4);

The basic unit slot CPU is specified with SAMPLE1, I/O node number =3 is specified with
SAMPLE2, unit number =1 is specified with SAMPLE3, and slot number =5 is specified with
SAMPLE4.
A fallback request of the I/O module specified with BASESLOT, NODE, UNIT, and SLOT is made.

Error information
If the specified I/O module is not registered, or if basic unit slot number or I/O node number
exceeds the specification range, or if unit number or slot number exceeds the specification
range, the result is set to FALSE(OFF).

2.15 I/O
367

I/O Fallback Recovery Request

I/O I/O Fallback Recovery Request
nv dedicated
instruction
LD/FBD language
notation

Execution
output
IORC_REQ
Basic unit slot
I/O node number
Unit number
Slot number
BASESLOT
NODE
UNIT
SLOT


ST language notation Execution output := IORC_REQ( BASESLOT, NODE, UNIT, SLOT );

Arguments

BASESLO
T
UINT
Basic unit slot

0
NODE UINT

UNIT UINT
Unit number 1 to 7
Input
SLOT UINT
Slot number 0 to 15

Function
A fallback recovery request is made to the I/O module specified with basic unit slot
(BASESLOT), I/O node number (NODE), unit number (UNIT), and slot number
(SLOT).
For basic unit slot (BASESLOT), 0(I/O directly under the controller) is specified.

6F8C1226
368

Program example

IORC_REQ
NODE
BASESLOT
SAMPLE1
0
LD
SAMPLE2
3
LD
SIGNAL1
UNIT
SAMPLE3
1
LD
SLOT
SAMPLE4
5
LD

SIGNAL1 := IORC_REQ( SAMPLE1, SAMPLE2, SAMPLE3, SAMPLE4);

The basic unit slot CPU is specified with SAMPLE1, I/O node number 3 is specified
with SAMPLE2, unit number 1 is specified with SAMPLE3, and slot number 5 is
specified with SAMPLE4.
A fallback recovery request of the I/O module specified with BASESLOT, NODE, UNIT,
and SLOT is made.

Error information
If the specified I/O module is not registered, or if basic unit slot number or I/O node
number exceeds the specification range, or if unit number or slot number exceeds the
specification range, the result is set to FALSE(OFF).
2.15 I/O
369

Drive Device State Read

I/O Drive Device State Read
nv dedicated
instruction
LD/FBD language
notation

Drive device state
GET_DRV_STS
Drive network ID
DRV


ST language notation Execution output := GET_DRV_STS(DRV);

Arguments

Input DRV UINT
Drive network ID 35 to 254

Output WORD Drive device state

Function
Reads the state of drive device specified by the drive network ID (DRV).
Numbers 35 to 254 are specified for the drive network ID (DRV).
The drive device state is as follows:
Drive device
state
Description
=16#0000 Normal
16#0000
Abnormal

0
0 0 0 0
15 5 4
Node state 0: Normal (healthy)
1: Down (unhealthy)
ALARM (minor failure) state 0:No / 1: Yes
FAULT (major failure) state 0:No / 1: Yes

14
Drive network ID specification 0:Normal / 1: Abnormal
6F8C1226
370

Program example

GET_DRV_STS
DRV
SAMPLE1
35
LD
SAMPLE2
16#0000
ST

SAMPLE2 := GET_DRV_STS( SAMPLE1 );

Reads the drive device state of the drive network ID 35 specified by SAMPLE1 and
stores in SAMPLE2.

Error information
When the drive network ID is out of range (DRV35 or DRV254) , the result is
16#8000.
When the drive device of the specified drive network ID is other than drive (loop) and
drive (bus), the result is 16#8000.

2.16 Process Operation
371


1 Dead Band DB
2 Derivative DIF2
3 Integrator INTG
4
Super Two Degrees of Freedom
PID
PID2
5 MV Calculation MVS
6 Fix MV MVF
7 Polygonal Line Function PLN
8
PLN_REAL2 nv dedicated instruction
9 Inverse Polygonal Line Function ILNL
10
ILNL_REAL2 nv dedicated instruction
11 Dead Time DT
12
Moving Average (high-speed
version)
MAV
13
Moving Average (low speed
version)
MAV_N
14 Rate Limiter DLM
15 Lag/Lead Filter LAG2
16 Engineering Unit Conversion UNT
17 Percent Conversion PCT
18 Essential Succession PID PID3
19 Estimate with Reset RSM_L
TOSDIC compatible
instruction
Parameter structure (the parameter structures allowed for function are described).

6F8C1226
372

Dead Band

Process Operation Dead Band
LD/FBD language
notation
Data input Output
DB_
Dead band width
IN
H


ST language notation Output := DB_
( IN, H);

Arguments

IN See below
Data input
Input
H See below
Dead band width


Data input, dead band width Symbol(_ ) Output
INT DB_INT INT
DINT DB_DINT DINT
REAL DB_REAL REAL
Data input Output
DB_
Dead band width

Function
For data specified with data input IN and dead band width H, if data input IN is outside
the dead band width H, the result of subtracting dead band width H from data input IN
is output.
For data specified with data input IN and dead band width H, if data input IN is inside
the dead band width H, 0 is output.

Condition Action
When data IN 0
Result=IN-|H|
|IN| > |H|
When data IN < 0
Result=IN+|H|
|IN| |H| Result=0


373

Program example

SAMPLE1
140
LD
DB_INT
IN

H
SAMPLE3
40
ST
SAMPLE2
-100
LD
Dead band width H
H H Data input IN
Resul t output

SAMPLE3 := DB_INT( SAMPLE1, SAMPLE2);

Performs dead band operation of the input data 140 in SAMPLE1 and dead band
width 100 in SAMPLE2 and stores the difference 40 between the input data and dead
band width in SAMPLE3 because the data input exceeds the dead band width.

Error information

Controller Action
value.


6F8C1226
374

Derivative

Process Operation Derivative
LD/FBD language
notation

Execution flag Output
DIF2
Data input
Rate time (S)
Instance name
E
IN
T
OUT


ST language notation [Instance name]( E, IN, T );
[Variable name]:= [Instance name]. OUT;

Arguments

E BOOL
Execution flag
IN REAL
Data input Input

T REAL
Rate time (sec)

Output OUT REAL Output

Instance structure

OUT REAL
Derivative result
output
B4X REAL Previous input(Xn-1)
B4Y REAL
Previous output
(Yn-1)
program.

Function
When execution flag E is FALSE(OFF), Output OUT becomes 0.
When execution flag E is TRUE(ON), Output OUT becomes
T1 S
1+T1 S
.
The unit of rate time T is seconds. The absolute value of the input data is used as
rate time T.
Differentiation is performed by backward difference method.

375

Execution
flag E
DIF2 instance
preprocessing
Action
FALSE(OFF)
X
n-1
= Data input IN
Yn-1 = 0
TRUE(ON)
Yn-1=T/(CT+T)-( IN-Xn-1+Yn-1)
Xn-1=IN
Result = Yn-1
CT : Control cycle
Xn-1 : Previous input
Yn-1 : Previous output

Important
The scan cycle of the task using this instruction must be in constant scan mode (Integrated
Controller and S Controller only).

Program example

DIF2 SAMPLE3
150.0
ST
SAMPLE1
1000.0
LD
SAMPLE2
0.1
LD
E
IN
T
SIGNAL1
DIF2_01
OUT

DIF2_01( SIGNAL1, SAMPLE1, SAMPLE2);
SAMPLE3 := DIF2_01.OUT;

Control cycle CT = 0.5 sec.
Instance content (DIF2_01) (before after operation)
B4X(X
n-1
)100.0 1000.0
B4Y(Y
n-1
)0.0 150.0
When the SIGNAL1 is TRUE(ON), performs differential operation using input data
1000.0 in SAMPLE1, rate time 0.1 in SAMPLE2, and instance variable DIF2_01, and
stores the differential result 150.0 in SAMPLE3.

6F8C1226
376

Error information

Controller Action
S Controller Up to V02.5*
L Controller
If NAN data is entered as input, the result is
NAN.
If INF data is entered as input, the result is
INF.
V series
S Controller After V02.60
NAN and INF data are limited by the
maximum value.

If the scan cycle of the task using this instruction is in floating scan mode, no operation
is performed and the error flag is set to TRUE(ON) (Integrated Controller and S
Controller only).

377

Integrator

Process Operation Integrator
LD/FBD language
notation

INTG
Data input
Integral time (S)
Initial value
Instance name
E OUT
IN
T
INI


ST language notation [Instance name]( E, IN, T, INI );

Arguments

E BOOL
Execution flag
IN REAL
Data input
T REAL
Integral time (sec)

Input
INI REAL
Initial value

Instance structure

OUT REAL Integral result output Can be accessed from the user program.
B4Y REAL Previous output (Yn-1)
program.

Function
When execution flag E is FALSE(OFF), initial value INI is output.
When execution flag E is TRUE(ON), integration is performed.
The unit of integral time T is seconds. The absolute value of the input data is used as
integral time T.
6F8C1226
378

Execution flag E
INTG instance
preprocessing
Action
FALSE(OFF)
Result = INI
Yn-1 = INI
TRUE(ON)
In case T=0 : Yn-1
In case T 0 : IN* CT / T + Yn-1
Result = Yn-1

CT :Control cycle
Yn-1 :Previous output

Important
The scan cycle of the task using this instruction must be in constant scan mode(Integrated

Program example

INTG SAMPLE4
50.0
ST
SAMPLE1
100.0
LD
SAMPLE2
1.0
LD
SAMPLE3
0.0
LD
E
IN
T
SIGNAL1
INI
INTG_01
OUT

INTG_01( SIGNAL1, SAMPLE1, SAMPLE2, SAMPLE3);
SAMPLE4 := INTG_01.OUT;

Control cycle CT = 0.5 sec.
Instance content(INTG_01) (beforeafter operation)
B4Y(Y
n-1
):0.0 50.0
When SIGNAL1 is TRUE(ON), performs integration operation using input data 1000.0
in SAMPLE1, integral time 1.0 in SAMPLE2, initial value 0.0 in SAMPLE3, and
instance variable INTG_01, and stores the integration result 50.0 in SAMPLE4.
379

Error information

Controller Action
L Controller
NAN.
INF.
V series
maximum value.

is performed and the error flag is set to TRUE(ON). (Integrated Controller and S
Controller only).

6F8C1226
380

Super Two Degrees of Freedom PID

Process Operation Super Two Degrees of Freedom PID
LD/FBD language
notation

Execution flag MV output
PID2
SV input
PV input
PV parameter
variable
Instance name
LP parameter
variable
E D_MV
SV
PV
PV_P
LP_P


ST language notation [Instance name]( E, SV, PV, PV_P, LP_P );
[Variable name]:= [Instance name] . D_MV;

Arguments

E BOOL
Execution flag
SV REAL
SV input[Engineering value]
PV REAL
PV input[Engineering value]
PV_P PTR PV parameter variable
Input
LP_P PTR LP parameter variable
Output D_MV REAL PID2 result output (MV)[%]

Pointers to tag table are placed in PV parameter variable and LP parameter table.
The following symbols are referenced by PV_P and LP_P. The structures of the
PV/LP parameters are described at the end of this section.

Operand Symbol Type R/W Description
RH REAL R PV range high [Engineering unit] PV_P
(PV_PARA) RL REAL R PV range low [Engineering unit]
KP REAL R Proportional gain
TI REAL R Integral time [minute]
TD REAL R Rate time [minute]
ALP REAL R 2DOF proportionality coefficient
LP_P
(LP_PARA)
CDR BOOL R Control direction (reverse=0/direct=1)
R=Read only, W=Write only, RW=Read/Write
381

Instance structure

D_MV REAL
MV difference output (AMV)[%]
program.
B4SV REAL SV previous value (SV
n-1
) [%]
SVF REAL SV calculation intermediate value [%]
B4E REAL Deviation previous value (E
n-1
) [%]
B4D REAL Differential previous value (D
n-1
) [%]
B4PV REAL PV previous value (PV
n-1
) [%]
program.

Function
When the execution flag E is FALSE(OFF), initializes the PID2 instance area.
When execution flag E is TRUE(ON), performs two degrees of freedom PID operation.
Super two degrees of freedom PID (where |=1.0 and =0) is used for PID operation.
Backward difference method is used for operation of the derivative term. (q=0.1).
The following variable can be specified for PV parameter and LP parameter:

Controller Variable
SController Variable other than direct I/O variable Integrated Controller
V series LController Tag parameter variable of PV/LP
type1 Variable other than direct I/O variable Unified Controller
nv series type2 Tag parameter variable of PV/LP

6F8C1226
382

Execution
flag E
PID2 instance
preprocessing
Action
FALSE(OFF)
Initialization
SVn-1 = SVn
SVF = SVn
en-1 = SVF-PVn
Dn-1 = 0
PVn-1 = PVn
TRUE(ON) No initialization
SVF = SVn CT/(CT+TI)+(SVnSVn-1) TI/(CT+TI)+SVFTI/(CT+TI)
MV = (SVFPVn) en-1
en = SVFPVn

When TI<>0:
MV = MV+CT en / TI

When TD<>0:
D = (PVn+PVn-1) TD/(CT+0.1TD) Dn-1CT/(CT+0.1TD)
MV = MV+D
Dn = Dn+D

When TD = 0:
Dn = 0
MV = MVKp

When CDR = 1:
MV = MV

Kp : Proportional gain
TI : Integral time
TD : Rate time
CT : Control cycle
: Two degrees of freedom coefficient
SVn : Current setting value (%)
SVn-1 : Previous setting value (%)
en : Current deviation
en-1 : Previous deviation
PVn : Current process value(%)
PVn-1 : Previous process value(%)
AMV : Output
AD : Differential term
Dn : Current differential term
Dn-1 : Previous differential term
The input setting values and process values are in engineering unit and are
converted to percent before calculation.

Important
The scan cycle of the task using this instruction must be in constant scan mode (Integrated

383

Program example

PI D2
SAMPLE4
73.61369
ST
SAMPLE1
500. 0
LD
SAMPLE2
0.0
LD
PV_PARA
[n].TAG
LD
E
SV
PV
PV_P
SIGNAL1
Control cycle CT=0.5 sec.
PID2_01
LP_PARA
[m] .TAG
LD
LP_P
D_MV

PID2_01( SIGNAL1, SAMPLE1, SAMPLE2, PV_PARA[n].TAG, LP_PARA[m].TAG);
SAMPLE4 := PID2_01.D_MV

When SIGNAL1 is TRUE(ON), performs two degrees of freedom PID operation using
SV input data 500.0 in SAMPLE1, PV input data 0.0 in SAMPLE2, PV parameter
variable PV_P, and LP parameter variable LP_P and stores the result in SAMPLE4.

Error information
When the PV parameter and LP parameter exceed the variable area, the super two
degrees of freedom PID is not processed and the data boundary is exceeded.

Controller Action
L Controller
Integrated
Controller V series
value.

If RH=RL, the divide error flag is set to TRUE(ON) and 0 is output.
The following operation is performed if the PV parameter or LP parameter specification
is invalid:

6F8C1226
384

Controller Action
S Controller
Super two degrees of freedom PID is not executed when
direct I/O variable is specified.
Error flag is set to TRUE(ON). Integrated Controller
V series
L Controller
When variables other than PV/LP tag parameters are
specified, the table operation error flag is set to
type1
Super two degrees of freedom PID is not executed when
direct I/O variable is specified.
TRUE(ON).
Unified Controller
nv series
type2
When variables other than PV/LP tag parameters are
specified, error flag and table operation error flag are set
to TRUE(ON) and the result is 0.

Controller only).

385

MV Calculation

Process Operation MV Calculation
LD/FBD language
notation
MVS
MV difference input
MV initial value
MV input
Instance name
LP parameter variable
E OUT
IN
MV0
MV
LP_P


ST language notation [Instance name]( E, IN, MV0, MV, LP_P );

Arguments

E BOOL
Execution flag
IN REAL
MV difference input (MV) [%]

MV0 REAL
MV initial value[%]
MV REAL
MV input[%]
Input
Output OUT REAL Output (MV) [%]

A pointer to tag table is placed in LP parameter variable.
The following symbols are referenced by LP_P. The structures of the LP parameters
are described at the end of this section.

DMV REAL R MV rate limit [%]
MH REAL R MV high limit [%]
LP_P
(LP_PARA)
ML REAL R MV low limit [%]
R=Read only, W=Write only, RW=Read/Write

Instance structure

OUT REAL Output (MV) [%] Can be accessed from the user program.
MVW REAL MV work [%] Cannot be accessed from the user program.

6F8C1226
386

Function
When the execution flag is FALSE(OFF), performs MV operation and outputs the result.
When the execution flag is TRUE(ON), performs tracking operation and outputs the result.
The MVS instruction does not set output in MV of LP tag data. Store instruction must be
used to set the output of the MVS instruction to MV of the LP tag data.
The following variables can be specified for the LP parameter:

Controller Variable
S Controller Variable other than direct I/O variable Integrated Controller
V series L Controller LP tag parameter variable
nv series type2 LP tag parameter variable

Execution
flag E
MVS instance
preprocessing
Action
FALSE(OFF)
MVW=MVW+IN
MV rate limit
When |MVW-MV|>DMV
When in increase direction
Work=MV+DMV
when in decrease direction
work=MV-DMV
When |MVW-MV| DMV
work=MVW
TRUE(ON)
MVW=MV0
work=MVW
MV high limit
When work<MH
work=MH
MV low limit
When work<ML
work=ML

Result output=work

ML :MV low limit
MH :MV high limit
DMV :MV rate limit
MVW :MV work
work :MV calculation work

Program example
Before operation
Instance (MVS_01)
50.0 MVW
After operation
Instance (MVS_01)
60.0 MVW
LP_DATA[m].MV
50.0
LD
MVS
LP_DATA[m].MV
60.0
ST
SIGNAL1
0
LD
SAMPLE1
10.0
LD
E
MV
IN
MV0
SAMPLE2
50.0
LD
LP_P
LP_PARA
[m].TAG
LD
MVS_01
OUT
LP parameter(LP_P)
125.0 MH
-25.0 ML
100.0 DMV

387

MVS_01( SIGNAL1, SAMPLE1, SAMPLE2, LP_DATA[m].MV, LP_PARA[m].TAG);
LP_DATA[m].MV := MVS_01.OUT

When the SIGNAL1 is FALSE(OFF), MV operation is performed against the MV
difference input 10.0 in SAMPLE1 using the MV input and LP parameter LP_P, and the
result 60.0 is stored in LP_DATA[m].MV.

Error information
When the LP parameter exceeds the variable area, the MV calculation is not

Controller Action
L Controller
NAN.
INF.
V series
maximum value.

The following operation is performed if the LP parameter specification is invalid:

Controller Action
S Controller
MV calculation is not executed when direct I/O
variable is specified.
Error flag is set to TRUE(ON). Integrated Control
V series
L Controller
When variables other than LP tag parameters are
type1
MV calculation is not executed when direct I/O
variable is specified.
TRUE(ON).
Unified Controller nv
series
type2
specifiederror flag and table operation error flag are
set to TRUE(ON) and the result is 0.
6F8C1226
388

Fix MV

Process Operation Fix MV
LD/FBD language
notation

MVF
MV fixed value
LP data variable LP data variable
E
IN
LP_D LP_D


ST language notation Output := MVF( E, IN, LP_D );

Arguments

E BOOL
Execution flag
Input
IN REAL
MV fixed value[%]
Input/O
utput
LP_D PTR
LP data variable
Output REAL Output
A pointer to tag table is placed in LP data variable.
The following symbols are referenced by LP_D. The structure of the LP data is
described at the end of this section.

MV REAL W MV value[%] LP_D
(LP_DATA) SMV BOOL W SEQ-MV operation
R : Read only, W: Write only, RW=Read/Write

Function
When execution flag E is TRUE(ON), registers the MV fixed value (set SMV flag).
When execution flag E is FALSE(OFF), unregisters the MV fixed value (reset SMV
flag).
The following variables can be specified for the LP data:

Controller Variable
S Controller Variable other than direct I/O variable Integrated Controller V
series L Controller LP tag data variable
type1 Variable other than direct I/O variable Unified Controller nv
series type2 LP tag data variable

Important
When the MVF instruction is used, the LP data variable SMV flag is used exclusively (ON when E
input is TRUE and OFF when FALSE). To use the SMV flag in other applications, the MVF
instruction must be removed or processing must be stopped by resetting EN to OFF.
389

Program example

MVF SAMPLE3
80.0
ST
SIGNAL1
0
LD
SAMPLE1
80.0
LD
E
IN
LP_DATA
[m].SV
LD
LP_DATA
[m].SV
ST
LP_D LP_D

SAMPLE3 := MVF( SIGNAL1, SAMPLE1, LP_DATA[m].SV);

When SIGNAL1 is TRUE(ON), stores the MV input 80.0 specified with SAMPLE1 in
LP data MV and sets the SMV flag. When SIGNAL1 is FALSE(OFF), the SMV flag is
reset.
Input value SAMPLE1 is output to SAMPLE3 unchanged.

Error information
When the LP data exceeds the variable area, the fix MV is not processed and the data
boundary is exceeded.

Controller Action
value.

The following operation is performed if the LP data specification is invalid:

Controller Action
S Controller
When direct I/O variable is specified, the result is 0.
V series
L Controller
type1
When direct I/O variable is specified, the error flag and
table operation error flag are set to TRUE(ON) and the
result is 0. Unified Controller nv
series
type2
specified, the error flag and table operation error flag are
set to TRUE(ON) and the result is 0.

6F8C1226
390


Process Operation Polygonal Line Function
LD/FBD language
notation
IN
TBL
Data input Output
PLN_
Polygonal line table


ST language notation Output := PLN_
( IN, TBL );

Arguments

IN See below
Data input
Input
TBL PTR Polygonal line table

INT PLN_INT INT
REAL PLN_REAL REAL
Data input Output
PLN_
IN

TBL Polygonal
line table


391

Function
With the input data IN as X axis input, outputs the Y axis approximation result using
the function table specified with the polygonal line table TBL.
The size and structure of the polygonal line table are as follows. Different table formats
are used for INT data and REAL data.

0 15
Number of points
n

X
n

Y
0

X
1

Y
1

X
n-1
Y
n-1
[PLN_INT]
Maximum points:40
Table top address:Point n
[PLN_REAL]
Maximum points:11
When less than 11 points: Add 2 end codes (H80000000)
0 31
X
0
Y
0
X
1
Y
1
When less than 11 points, end code(H80000000)
11 points
maximum
40 points
maximum
<Polygonal line table : polygonal line parameter typeP_PARA>
Integrated Controller : S2/S3/L1/L2/L3
Unified Controller : type1
<Polygonal line table : polygonal line parameter typeP_PARA_DS>
Integrated Controller : L2DS/L3DS
0 31
Y
0
Y
1
11 points
maximum
X
0
X
1
11 points
maximum

Data must be stored in the polygonal table such that X
0
< X
1
<X
n-1.

When data input IN X0, the corresponding Y value is Y
0
and when data input IN
Y
n-1
, the Y value is Y
n-1.

Direct I/O variable cannot be specified for polygonal line table.
Output= (IN - X
n-1
) - (Y
n
-Y
n-1
) / (X
n
-X
n-1
) + Y
n-1

Where X
n-1
and X
n
are values enclosing input data IN (X
n-1
IN < X
n
) and Y
n-1
and Y
n

correspond to X
n-1
and X
n.

6F8C1226
392

Program example

SAMPLE2 : Polygonal line table
X0
Y0
X1
Y1
X2
Y2
X3
Y3
X4
Y4
PLN_REAL
SAMPLE3
80
ST
SAMPLE1
40
LD
SAMPLE2
-100
LD
IN
TBL
-100
50
-50
-100
0
0
50
100
100
-100
IN
SAMPLE3:80
100
100
-100
-100
X
Y
SAMPLE1 REAL VAR
SAMPLE2 typeP_PARA VAR

SAMPLE3 := PLN_REAL( SAMPLE1, SAMPLE2);

For input data in SAMPLE1, calculates the Y corresponding to input data 40 based on
polygonal line table specified with SAMPLE2 and stores the result 80 in SAMPLE3.

Error information
When the polygonal line table exceeds the variable area, the polygonal line function is
not processed and the data boundary is exceeded.

Controller Action

polygonal line table.

Controller Action
Integrated Controller V series Error flag is set to TRUE(ON) and the result is 0.

393

Polygonal Line Function (high-speed version)

Process Operation Polygonal Line Function (high speed-version)
nv dedicated
instruction
LD/FBD language
notation
Data input Output
PLN_REAL2
Polygonal
line table
IN
TBL


ST language notation Output := PLN_REAL2 ( IN, TBL );

Arguments

IN See below
Data input
Input

Function
With the input data IN as X axis input, the Y axis approximation result is output using
The size and structure of the polygonal line table are as follows:

Polygonal line table data type
Item Data type
Point count DINT
Point data REAL

0 31
Number of pointsn
X0
Y0
X1
Y1
Xn-1
Yn-1
Maximum points:11, Table top address: Point n
11 points maximum

Data must be stored in the polygonal line table such that X
0
< X
1
<X
n-1.

When data input IN X0, the corresponding Y value is Y
0
and when data input IN
X
n-1
, the Y value is Y
n-1.

Direct I/O variable cannot be specified for the polygonal line table.
Output = (IN-X
n-1
) - (Y
n
-Y
n-1
)/(X
n
-X
n-1
)+Y
n-1

Where X
n-1
and X
n
are values enclosing input data IN (X
n-1
IN<X
n
) and Y
n-1
and Y
n

correspond to X
n-1
and X
n.

6F8C1226
394

When point count 0 is specified, Result Input data.

Program example

SAMPLE2 : Polygonal line table
PLN_REAL2
SAMPLE3
80
ST
SAMPLE1
40
LD
SAMPLE2
5
LD
IN
TBL
IN
SAMPLE3:80
100
100
-100
-100
X
Y
Structure declarationtype PLN_REAL2
Member Data type
NUM DINT
POINT typeP_PARA

SAMPLE1 REAL VAR
SAMPLE2 type PLN_REAL2 VAR

-100
50
-50
-100
0
0
50
100
100
-100
X0
Y0
X1
Y1
X2
Y2
X3
Y3
X4
Y4
NUM 5

SAMPLE3 := PLN_REAL2 ( SAMPLE1, SAMPLE2);
For input data in SAMPLE1, the Y corresponding to input data 40 is calculated based
on polygonal line table specified with SAMPLE2. The result "80" is stored to
SAMPLE3.

Error information
When the polygonal line table exceeds the variable area, polygonal line function is not

Controller Action

polygonal line table:

Controller Action

When the specified number of points exceeds 11, the point number is limited to 11.
395


Process Operation Inverse Polygonal Line Function
LD/FBD language
notation
IN
TBL
Data input Output
ILNL_
Polygonal
line table


ST language notation Output := ILNL_
( IN, TBL );

Arguments

Argu. Operand Type Const. Description
IN See below
Data input
Input

INT ILNL_INT INT
REAL ILNL_REAL REAL
Data input Output
ILNL_
IN

TBL
Polygonal
line table

Function
With the input data IN as Y axis input, outputs the X axis approximation result using

6F8C1226
396

The size and structure of the polygonal line table are as follows.

0 15
Number of points n
Xn
Y0
X1
Y1
Xn-1
Yn-1
[ILNL_INT]
Maximum points: 40
Table top address: Point n
[ILNL_REAL]
Maximum points: 11
When less than 11 points: Add 2 end codes (H80000000)
0 31
X0
Y0
X1
Y1
When less than 11 points: End code (H80000000)
11 points
maximum
40 points
maximum
<Polygonal line table: polygonal line parameter typeP_PARA>
Integrated Controller : S2/S3/L1/L2/L3
<Polygonal line table: polygonal line parameter typeP_PARA_DS>
Integrated Controller : L2DS/L3DS
0 31
Y0
Y1
11 points
maximum
X0
X1
11 points
maximum

397

Data must be stored in the polygonal table such that X
0
< X
1
< X
n-1.

If data input IN intersects the polygonal line at two or more places, the one with the
smallest X value has priority.

X
Y
a
Output

If data input IN is outside the range of Y axis on the polygonal line table, the X value for
the maximum (or minimum) Y value on the polygonal line table is output.

X
Y
(X0,Y0)
(X1,Y1)
(X2, Y2)
(X3,Y3)
(X4,Y4)
(X5,Y5)
a
b
Output X5 when input val ue is a
Output X2 when input val ue is b
X5 X2


X
n
-X
n-1

f(x)=(IN-Y
n-1
)-
Y
n
-Y
n-1

+X
n-1

Where Y
n-1
and Y
n
are values enclosing input data IN (Y
n-1
IN < Y
n
) and X
n-1
and X
n

correspond to Y
n-1
and Y
n.

6F8C1226
398

Program example

X0
Y0
X1
Y1
X2
Y2
X3
Y3
X4
Y4
ILNL_REAL SAMPLE3
40
ST
SAMPLE1
80
LD
SAMPLE2
-100
LD
IN
TBL
SAMPLE2Polygonal line table
IN
SAMPLE3:40
100
100
-100
-100
X
Y
-100
50
-50
-100
0
0
50
100
100
-100
SAMPLE1 REAL VAR
SAMPLE2 typeP_PARA VAR

SAMPLE3 := ILNL_REAL( SAMPLE1, SAMPLE2);

For input data in SAMPLE1, calculates the X corresponding to input data 80 based
on polygonal line table specified with SAMPLE2 and stores the result 40 in
SAMPLE3.

Error information
When the polygonal line table exceeds the variable area, inverse polygonal line
function is not processed and the data boundary is exceeded.

Controller Action

The following operation is performed when direct I/O is specified for the polygonal line
table:

Controller Action

399

Inverse Polygonal Line Function (high-speed version)

Process Operation
Inverse Polygonal Line Function (high-speed
version)
nv dedicated
instruction
LD/FBD language
notation

Data input Output
ILNL_REAL2
Polygonal
line table
IN
TBL


ST language notation Output := ILNL_REAL2 ( IN, TBL );

Arguments

IN See below
Data input
Input

Function
With the input data IN as Y axis input, the X axis approximation result is output using
The size and structure of the polygonal line table are as follows:

Polygonal line table data type

Item Data type
Point count DINT
Point data REAL

0 31
Number of points n
X0
Y0
X1
Y1
Xn-1
Yn-1
Maximum points: 11, Table top address: Points n
11 points maximum

Data must be stored in the polygonal line table such that X0 < X1 < X
n-1.

If data input IN intersects the polygonal line at two or more places, the one with the smallest X
value has priority.
6F8C1226
400

X
Y
a
Output

If data input IN is outside the range of Y axis on the polygonal line table, the X value for
the maximum (or minimum) Y value on the polygonal line table is output.

X
Y
(X0,Y0)
(X1,Y1)
(X2,Y2)
(X3,Y3)
(X4,Y4)
(X5,Y5)
a
b
Output X5 when input value is a
Output X2 when input value is b
X5 X2


X
n
-X
n-1

f(x)=(IN-Y
n-1
) -
Y
n
-Y
n-1

+X
n-1

Where Y
n-1
and Y
n
are values enclosing input data IN (Y
n-1
IN<Y
n
) and X
n-1
and X
n
correspond to Y
n-1
and Y
n.

When point count =0 is specified, result = Input data.
401

Program example

SAMPLE2: Polygonal line table
ILNL_REAL2
SAMPLE3
80
ST
SAMPLE1
80
LD
SAMPLE2
5
LD
IN
TBL
Structure declarationtype ILNL_REAL2
Member Data type
NUM DINT
POINT typeP_PARA

SAMPLE1 REAL VAR
SAMPLE2 type ILNL_REAL2 VAR

-100
50
-50
-100
0
0
50
100
100
-100
X0
Y0
X1
Y1
X2
Y2
X3
Y3
X4
Y4
NUM 5
IN
SAMPLE3:40
100
100
-100
-100
X
Y

SAMPLE3 := ILNL_REAL2 ( SAMPLE1, SAMPLE2);

For input data in SAMPLE1, the X corresponding to input data 80 is calculated based
on polygonal line table specified with SAMPLE2. The result 40 is stored to
SAMPLE3.

Error information
When the polygonal line table exceeds the variable area, inverse polygonal line
function is not processed and the data boundary is exceeded.

Controller Action

polygonal line table.

Controller Action

When the specified number of points exceeds 11, the point number is limited to 11.
6F8C1226
402

Dead Time

Process Operation Dead Time
LD/FBD language
notation
DT
Data input
Sample number
Sampling time
Work Work
E
IN
I
T
M M


ST language notation Output := DT( E, IN, I, T, M ) ;

Arguments

E BOOL
Execution flag
IN REAL
Data input
I INT
Sample number
Input
T INT
Sampling cycle (0.1 sec. unit)

Input/
Output
M PTR
Work (6+I-2 words)
Output REAL Output

Function
When execution fag E is FALSE(OFF), data input IN is output as the result.
When the execution flag is TRUE(ON)ON, dead time operation is performed for data
input IN and the result is output.
Sampling cycle is set in 0.1 second units.
Sampling number must be between 1 and 256.
If sampling cycle T > scan time, linear interpolation is performed between samples.
If sample number I 0, no dead time operation is performed.
If the sample number is changed during dead time operation, the result is
unpredictable.
Specify the data save area used by the DT instruction for work. The size of the work
depends on the sample number I (6+I-2 words).
Direct I/O variable cannot be specified for work.

403

0 15
Timer counter
Sample data counter
Current output
[2 words]
Previous difference
[2 words]

Sample value
(I-2 words)
Maximum number of words:
518 words (6+256-2 words)

Execution flag E Action
FALSE(OFF) Result output =Data input IN
TRUE(ON) Result output=Dead time operation result

Important
If the sample number is changed during dead time operation, the result is unpredictable.
Do not write to work, the result is unpredictable.

Program example

DT
SAMPLE4
20
ST
SIGNAL1
1
LD
SAMPLE1
160
LD
E
M
IN
I
3
LD
SAMPLE2
10
LD
SAMPLE3
5
LD
T
M
SAMPLE3

ST
Arg. declaration
Variable Data type Comment Dec.
SIGNAL1 BOOL Execution flag VAR
SAMPLE1 REAL Data input VAR
SAMPLE2 INT Sampling cycle VAR
SAMPLE3 ARRAY[0..11] OF INT Work VAR
SAMPLE4 REAL Result output VAR

6F8C1226
404

5
1
15
5
Timer counter
Sample data counter
Current output
Previous difference
<Before execution> SAMPLE3 : Work area
80
20
40
Sample value
0
2
20
10
<After execution> SAMPLE3 : Work area
80
160
40
Scan cycle
(0.5[s])
Sampling cycle
(10[0.1s])
Input X
Output Y
Dead time (number of samples =3)
Timer counter
Sample data counter
Current output
Previous difference
Sample value

SAMPLE4 := DT( SIGNAL1, SAMPLE1, 3, SAMPLE2, SAMPLE3);

When the execution flag in SIGNAL1 is TRUE(ON), dead time operation is performed
using data input in SAMPLE1, sample number 3, sampling cycle in SAMPLE2, and
work specification in SAMPLE3. The result is stored in SAMPLE4.
405

Error information
When the work exceeds the variable area, the dead time is not processed and the
data boundary is exceeded.

Controller Action
S Controller
Up to
V02.5*
L Controller
NAN.
INF.
Integrated
Controller V series
S Controller
After
V02.60
maximum value.
When the specified number of sample exceeds 256, it is limited to 256.
The following operation is performed when direct I/O variable is specified for the work:

Controller Action


6F8C1226
406

Moving Average (high-speed version)

Process Operation Moving Average (high-speed version)
LD/FBD language
notation
MAV
Data input
Sample number
Sampling cycle
Work Work
E
IN
I
T
M M


ST language notation Output := MAV( E, IN, I, T, M );

Important
Read Notes on Moving Average InstructionMAVMAV_N provided after the Moving
Average (low-speed version) section before using this instruction.
Arguments

E BOOL
Execution flag
IN REAL
Data input
I INT
Sample number
Input
T INT
Sampling cycle (0.1 sec. unit)

Input/
Output
M PTR
Work (6+I-2 words)
Output REAL Output

Function
When execution flag E is FALSE(OFF), data input IN is output as the result.
When the execution flag is TRUE(ON), moving average operation is performed for
data input IN and the result is output.
Sample number must be between 1 and 256.
When sampling cycle T > scan time, the output at sampling cycle is output once more
(retained).
When sample number I 0, no moving average operation is performed.
If the sample number is changed during moving average operation, the result is
unpredictable.
Specify the data save area used by the MAV instruction for work. The size of the
work depends on the sample number I (6+I-2 words).
Direct I/O variable cannot be specified for work variable.
407

0 15
Timer counter
Sample data counter
Current output
[2 words]
Total sample value
[2 words]

Sample value
(I-2 words)
Maximum number of words :

FALSE(OFF) Result output =Data input IN
TRUE(ON)
Result output=Moving average
operation result

Important
If the sample number is changed during moving average operation, the result is unpredictable.
Do not write to work. The result is unpredictable.

Program example

MAV
SAMPLE4
93.333
ST
SIGNAL1
1
LD
SAMPLE1
160
LD
E
M
IN
I
3
LD
SAMPLE2
10
LD
SAMPLE3
5
LD
T
M
SAMPLE3
0
ST
Arg. declaration

6F8C1226
408

5
1
46.667
140
Timer counter
Sample data counter
Current output
Total sample value
<Before execution> SAMPLE4:Work area
80
20
40
Sample value
0
2
93.333
280
<After execution> SAMPLE4 Work area
80
160
40
Output Y
((8)+(9)+(10))3
((7)+(8)+(9))3
((6)+(7)+(8))3
((5)+(6)+(7))3
((4)+(5)+(6))3
((3)+(4)+(5))3
((2)+(3)+(4))3
Scan cycle
(0.5[s])
Sampling cycle
(10[0.1s])
Input X
(2)
(10)
(9)
(8)
(7) (6)
(5)
(4)
(3)
(1)
Timer counter
Sample data counter
Current output
Total sample value
Sample value

SAMPLE4 := MAV( SIGNAL1, SAMPLE1, 3, SAMPLE2, SAMPLE3);

When the execution flag in SIGNAL1 is TRUE(ON), moving average operation is
performed using data input in SAMPLE1, sample number 3, sampling cycle in
SAMPLE2, and work specification in SAMPLE3. The result is stored in SAMPLE4.

Error information
When the work exceeds the variable area, the moving average is not processed and

Controller Action
S Controller
Up to
V02.5*
L Controller
NAN.
Integrated
Controller v series
value.

409

The following operation is performed when direct I/O variable is specified for the work.

Controller Action


6F8C1226
410

Moving Average (low-speed version)

Process Operation Moving Average (low-speed version)
LD/FBD language
notation
MAV_N
Data input
Sample number
Sampling cycle
Work Work
E
IN
I
T
M M


ST language notation Output := MAV_N( E, IN, I, T, M );

Important
Read Notes on Moving Average InstructionMAVMAV_N provided after the Moving
Average (low-speed version) section before using this instruction.

Arguments

E BOOL
Execution flag
IN REAL
Data input
I INT
Sample number
Input
T INT
Sampling cycle (0.1s unit)

Input/
Output
M PTR Work (6+I-2 words)
Output REAL Output

Function
When execution flag E is OFF, data input IN is output as the result.
When execution flag E is ON, moving average operation is performed for data input IN
and the result is output.
Sample number must be between 1 and 256.
When sampling cycle T > scan time, the output at sampling cycle is output once more
(retained).
When sample number I 0, no moving average operation is performed.
If the sample number is changed during moving average operation, the result
becomes undefined.
411
Specify the data save area used by the MAV instruction for work. The size of the
work depends on the sample number (6+I-2 words).
Direct I/O variable cannot be specified for work.

0 15
Timer counter
Sample data counter
Current output
2 words
Total sample value
2 words

Sample value
(I-2 words)
Maximum number of words:

FALSE(OFF) Result output = Data input IN
TRUE(ON) Result output = Moving average operation result

Program example

MAV_N
SAMPLE4
93.333
ST
SIGNAL1
1
LD
SAMPLE1
160
LD
E
M
IN
I
3
LD
SAMPLE2
10
LD
SAMPLE3
5
LD
T
M
SAMPLE3
0
ST
Arg. declaration

SAMPLE4 := MAV_N( SIGNAL1, SAMPLE1, 3, SAMPLE2, SAMPLE3);

When the execution flag in SIGNAL1 is TRUE(ON), moving average operation is
performed using data input in SAMPLE1, sample number 3, sampling cycle in
SAMPLE2, and work specification in SAMPLE3. The result is stored in SAMPLE4.

6F8C1226
412

Error information
When the work exceeds the variable area, the moving average is not processed and

Controller Action
NAN and INF data are limited by the maximum value.

The following operation is performed when direct I/O variable is specified for the work:

Controller Action


413

Notes on Moving Average InstructionMAV/MAV_N

The moving average instructions are available in two types moving average
(high-speed version):MAV and moving average (low-speed version): MAV_N. Notes
on using the moving average instructions are provided below. Read thoroughly before
using the moving average instructions.

Important
The moving average (low-speed version) and moving average (high-speed version) instructions differ in the
summation operation to calculate the moving average. The following table provides summation operation
algorithm, advantages and disadvantages. Take these items in consideration to use the instructions.

Moving average
(high-speed version): MAV
Moving average
(low-speed version):MAV_N
Remarks
Algorithm
<Summation formula>
Total sample value+latest sample value
(input value)-oldest sample value
<Summation formula>
(Sample value)

Advantage
Short execution time since summation
is not performed for all the samples.
Operation error is not accumulated
since all the samples are summated
every time.

Disadvantage
Operation error may be accumulated in
the total value depending on the input
value. The result may differ from the
expectation value.
Long execution time since
summation is performed for all the
samples.

Support
controller
See
below

nv series V series
Instruction Symbol
T
y
p
e
1

T
y
p
e
2

S
3

S
2

L
3

L
3
D
S

L
2

L
2
D
S

L
1

Moving average
MAV

2.50 2.53

Moving average
(low-speed version)
MAV_N
1.32/
3.10
Not supported (*1)

(*1)
Integrated Controller V series does not support moving average (low-speed version):MAV_N. If
accuracy is required for the moving average result, implement the function equivalent to the moving
average (low-speed version) with the user defined function block. The sample program of the user
defined function block [ufb_mav.fbk] equivalent to the moving average (low-speed version) can be
downloaded from Toshiba website Integrated Controller V series - FAQ.
To use the downloaded user function block [ufb_mav.fbk], read Execute import/export of library found
in the instruction manual below:
Unified Controller nv series Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 4 Basic(6F8C129)
User defined function block [ufb_mav.fbk] is a sample program and proper operation is not
guaranteed. Check the operation thoroughly before incorporating and using the sample program.
6F8C1226
414

Rate Limiter

Process Operation Rate Limiter
LD/FBD language
notation
Execution flag Outpu
DLM_
Data input
Rate limit
Instance name
E OUT
IN
D


ST language notation [Instance name]( E, IN, D );
[Variable name]:= [Instance name] . OUT;

Arguments

E BOOL
Execution flag
IN See below
Data input Input

D See below
Rate limit
Output OUT See below Output

Data input
Rate limit
Symbol(_ ) Output Instance
(OUT/B4Y)
INT DLM_INT INT INT
DINT DLM_DINT DINT DINT
REAL DLM_REAL REAL REAL
DLM_
Data input
E
IN
Rate limit D
Instance name
OUT

Instance structure

OUT See above Output Can be accessed from the user program.
B4Y See above
Previous output
(Yn-1)
program.

415

Function
When the execution flag E is TRUE(ON), the rate limit is calculated for data input IN
and the result is output.

Execution
flag E
Action
FALSE(OFF) Result output = IN
TRUE(ON)
Difference = IN - Y
n-1

When +|D| Difference |D|: Y
n
=IN
When +|D| < Difference: Y
n
= Y
n-1
+ |D|
When |D| > Difference: Y
n
= Y
n-1
- |D|

IN :Data input
Y
n-1 :
Previous output
Y
n
:Current output
D :Rate limit

Program example

<Before operation>
Instance(DLM_01)
50.0 B4Y
<After operation>
Instance(DLM_01)
100.0 B4Y
DLM_REAL SAMPLE3
100
ST
SIGNAL1
1
LD
SAMPLE1
120
LD
E
IN
D
SAMPLE2
50
LD
DLM_01
OUT

DLM_01( SIGNAL1, SAMPLE1, SAMPLE2);
SAMPLE3 := DLM_01.OUT;

When SIGNAL1 is TRUE(ON), rate limit is calculated for data input 120 in SAMPLE1
using the rate limit 50 in SAMPLE2 and previous output 50 stored in instance variable
DLM_01, and the result 100 is stored in SAMPLE3.

Error information

Controller Action
L Controller
NAN.
Integrated
Controller V series
value.
6F8C1226
416

Lag/Lead Filter

Process Operation Lag/Lead Filter
LD/FBD language
notation
LAG2
Data input
Lead time (s)
Lag time (s)
Instance name
E OUT
IN
T1
T2


ST language notation [Instance name]( E, IN, T1, T2 );
[Variable name]:=[Instance name]. OUT;

Arguments

E BOOL
Execution flag
IN REAL
Data input
T1 REAL
Lead time (second)

Input
T2 REAL
Lag time (second)


Instance structure

OUT REAL Output Can be accessed from the user program.
B4X REAL Previous input(Xn-1)
B4Y REAL
Previous output
(Yn-1)
program.

Function
When the execution flag E is TRUE(ON), (1+T1-s) -X/(1+T2-s) is calculated for data
input IN and the result is output.
The absolute values of lead time T1 and lag time T2 are used for the operation.

417

Execution
flag E
LAG2 instance
preprocessing
Action
FALSE(OFF)
Xn-1=Xn
Yn-1=Xn
TRUE(ON)
Yn= CT-Xn/(CT+T2)+T1- (Xn-Xn-1)/(CT+T2)
+T2-Yn-1/(CT+T2)

CT :Control cycle
X
n-1
:Previous input
X
n
:Current input
Y
n-1
:Previous output
Y
n
:Current output

Important

Program example

LAG2
SAMPLE4
712.0
ST
SIGNAL1
1
LD
SAMPLE1
1000.0
LD
E
IN
T1
SAMPLE2
1.0
LD
SAMPLE3
2.0
LD
T2
<Before operation>Instance (LAG2_01)
1000.0
640.0
B4X
B4Y
1000.0
712.0
B4X
B4Y
LAG2_01
<After operation>Instance (LAG2_01)
OUT

LAG2_01( SIGNAL1, SAMPLE1, SAMPLE2, SAMPLE3);
SAMPLE4 := LAG2_01.OUT;

When SIGNAL1 is TRUE(ON), lag/lead filter operation is performed for data input 1000.0 in
SAMPLE1 using the lead time 1.0 in SAMPLE2, lag time 2.0 in variable SAMPLE3, and
instance variable LAG2_01, and the result 712.0 is stored in SAMPLE4.

Error information
The following operation is performed when the input data type is REAL

Controller Action
L Controller
NAN.
Integrated
Controller V series
value.
Controller only).
6F8C1226
418

Engineering Unit Conversion

Process Operation Engineering Unit Conversion
LD/FBD language
notation
IN
PV_RH
Data input
Output
UNT
PV parameter


ST language notation Output := UNT( IN, PV_RH );

Arguments

IN REAL
Data input [%]

Input
PV_RH PTR PV parameter (RH)
Output REAL Output [Engineering unit]

Function
Converts data input IN to engineering units from range high limit (RH) and range low
limit (RL) of PV parameter table and outputs the result.
The structure of the PV parameters is described at the end of this section.
The following variables can be specified for the PV parameter

Controller Variable
V series L Controller PV tag parameter variable
nv series type2 PV tag parameter variable

Output = (RH - RL)/100-Input + RL

419

Program example

UNT SAMPLE2
60.0
ST
SAMPLE1
80.0
LD
PV_PARA[n] .RH
100.0
LD
IN
PV parameter
PV_PARA[n].RH = 100.0
PV_PARA[n].RL = -100.0
PV_RH

SAMPLE2 := UNT( SAMPLE1, PV_PARA[n].RH);

Performs engineering unit conversion of the data input 80.0 in SAMPLE1 using
RH100.0 and RL-100.0 in the PV parameter variable and stores the result 60.0 in
SAMPLE2.

Error information
When the PV parameter exceeds the variable area, the engineering unit conversion is
not processed and the data boundary is exceeded.

Controller Action

The following operation is performed if the PV parameter specification is invalid:

Controller Action
S Controller
When direct I/O variable is specified, error flag is set to
V series
L Controller
When variable other than PV tag parameter is specified,
error flag and table operation error flag are set to
type1
When direct I/O variable is specified, error flag and table
operation error flag are set to TRUE(ON) and the result
is 0. Unified Controller
nv series
type2


6F8C1226
420

Percent Conversion

Process Operation Percent Conversion
LD/FBD language
notation
IN
PV_RH
Data input Output
PCT
PV parameter


ST language notation Output := PCT( IN, PV_RH );

Arguments

IN REAL
Data input [Engineering unit]

Input
PV_RH PTR PV parameter (RH)
Output REAL Output [%]

Function
Converts data input IN to % from range high limit (RH) and range low limit (RL) of PV
parameter table and outputs the result.
The structure of the PV parameters is described at the end of this section.
The following variables can be specified for the PV parameter:

Controller Variable
V series L Controller PV tag parameter variable
type1 Variable other than direct I/O variable Unified Controller nv
series type2 PV tag parameter variable

Output = 100/(RH-RL) - (Input-RL)

Program example

PCT SAMPLE2
90.0
ST
SAMPLE1
80.0
LD
PV_PARA[n].RH
100.0
LD
IN
PV parameter
PV_PARA[n].RH = 100.0
PV_PARA[n].RL = -100.0
PV_RH

SAMPLE2 := PCT( SAMPLE1, PV_PARA[n].RH);
421

Performs reverse engineering unit conversion of the data input 90.0 in SAMPLE1
using RH100.0 and RL-100.0 in the PV parameter variable and stores the result 80.0
in SAMPLE2.

Error information
When the PV parameter exceeds the variable area the percent conversion is not

Controller Action

If RH=RL, the divide error flag is set to TRUE(ON) due to zero divide and the output is
as follows:

Controller Action
Output = (+Infinity when Input RL, -Infinity when Input
< RL)
Output = (+Maximum when Input RL, -Minimum
when Input < RL)

The following operation is performed if the PV parameter specification is invalid:

Controller Action
S Controller
When direct I/O variable is specified, error flag is set to
V series
L Controller
type1
When direct I/O variable is specified, error flag and table
operation error flag are set to TRUE(ON) and the result
is 0. Unified Controller
nv series
type2

6F8C1226
422

Essential Succession PID

Process Operation Essential Succession PID
LD/FBD language
notation
Execution control
input
Execution output
PID3
LP parameter
PV data/setting
Manipulated value
Instance name
PV data/setting
E Q
LP_P
PV_D
MV
PV_D


ST language notation [Instance name]( E, LP_P, PV_D );
[Variable name]:=[Instance name]. Q;
[Variable name]:=[Instance name]. MV;

Arguments

E BOOL
Execution control input

Input
LP_P PTR LP parameter
Q BOOL Execution output
Output
MV REAL Manipulated value
Input/
Output
PV_D PTR
PV data/setting

The structures of the PV_D and LP_P parameters are described at the end of this
section.

Parameter Structure
PV data/setting

Name Type Description Unit
PVC REAL Process measurement input (Range: 0.0 to 100.0) %
ASV REAL Auto mode setting (Range: 0.0 to 100.0) %
CSV REAL Cascade mode setting (Range: 0.0 to 100.0) %
MMV REAL Manual mode manipulated value input (Range: -25.0 to
125.0)
%
TMV REAL MV tracking input (Range: -25.0 to 125.0) %
MODE DWORD Mode setting

TR
31
MODE
2 1 0

Operation mode specification MODE: bits <1-0>
00: Manual mode
01: Auto mode
10: Cascade mode
11: (Auto mode)
Tracking specification TR: Bit <2>
0 : No
1 : Yes

423

LP parameter

Name Type Description Unit
Kp REAL Proportional gain
TI REAL Integral time min.
TD REAL Rate time min.
GP REAL Gap (Range: 0.0 to 10.0) %
ISV REAL Auto mode setting initial value (Range: 0.0 to 100.0) %
FT REAL Process input filter coefficient (Range: 0.1 to < 1)
DSV REAL Setting ASV rate-of-change limit % /At
DMMV REAL Manual mode manipulated value MMV rate-of-change limit % /At
STS DWORD Status

DR
31
IMODE
2 1 0

Initial mode specification IMODE: bits <1 to 0>
00: Manual mode
01: Auto mode
10: Cascade mode
11: (Auto mode)
Polarity D/R specification DR: bit <2>
0: Direct
1: Reverse

MH REAL Manipulated value high limit (Range: -25.0 to 125.0)
When MH < ML, MH=ML is assumed.
%
ML REAL Manipulated value low limit (Range: -25.0 to 125.0) %
DMV REAL Manipulated value rate-of-change limit %/t
N REAL Control cycle setting (Range: N 1)
PID operation is performed every N scan.
When N 0, N=1 is assumed.

Instance structure

Name Type Description Unit Remarks
Q BOOL Execution output Can be accessed from
the user program.
MV REAL Manipulated value (Range: -25.0 to 125.0) %
B4E REAL Previous error (e
n-1
)
B4D REAL Previous derivative term (D
n-1
)
B4PV REAL Previous PV (PV
n-1
)
B4SV REAL Previous SV (SV
n-1
)
MVN REAL Current manipulated value
C REAL Internal counter
Counts the number of scans.
Decrements internal counter each scan
starting from C=N. When C 0, PID operation
is performed and C is set equal to N once more.

DT0 REAL Control cycle (t) Sec.
Cannot be accessed from
the user program.
* In Function - [Algorithm], this is denoted with the symbol in parentheses in the Description column.
6F8C1226
424

Function
Performs essential succession (pre-derivative real PID algorithm) PID operation as
follows for PV data/setting stored in PV_D based on the parameter specified with
LP_P and outputs the manipulated value MV as the result.
The execution control input E and execution output Q are set as follows:

Execution
control input E
Action Execution
output Q
FALSE(OFF) Initialized FALSE(OFF)
C 0 Executed TRUE(ON)
TRUE(ON)
C>0 Not executed FALSE(OFF)

Direct I/O variables cannot be specified for PV_D data/setting and LP parameter variables.

[Operation expression]
Digital filter
1.0) FT (0.0 PV FT PVC FT) (1 PVn
1 n
< s - + =

PID
MVn = Kp (Pn+ ln +Dn) (See Gap operation and integration control)
MVn = MVn-1 MVn (Direct specification: Subtraction, Reverse specification: Addition)

where
( )
MV MV L
(fixed) 0.1
D D D
TD t
D t PV PV TD
D
N setting scan scheduled t
0) 0, TI (When
TI
t e
I
operation) Gap (See PV SV e
e e P
1 n 1 n
n 1 n n
1 n n 1 n
n
n
n
n n
1 n n n
n
=
=
+ =
- +
- -
=
- =
= =
-
=
=
=

(When Tl=0, l=0)
425
[Function block]

Gap
ope.
1
Pn
+
+
Kp
+SVn en
1
TIs
I ntegration
enable control
(Speed type)
TDs
1+TDs
1
1+Ts
PID operation
MVn=MVn-1 MVn
Dn
(=0.1) (Speed type)
PV
n

In
DSV
H / L DMV MVS
DMMV
Speed
position
convert
MVn
High
low
limit er
Rate
limiter
MVCn
Manipulated
value
MV *2
Manual mode manipulated
input MMV
Cont rol polarity DR *1
Output tracking input TMV
Output tracking command TR
Process
measurement PVC
Filter
coefficient
FT
Cascade
mode
CSV
Auto mode
ASV
MVC
n
Rate limiter
Speed type
Manual mode

*1 The control polarity D/R specification in the speed to positional format conversion specification
is performed as follows:
Direct specification: subtraction
Reverse specification: addition
*2 The switching of output polarity of manipulated valued output MV is performed with external
logic (ladder circuit).

[Gap operation and integration control]

(Gap ope) Error e
GP(%) GP(%)
(SV-PV)
Gradient=1
(Differentiation control)
When |SVn - PVn| < |GP|
MVn=0

(Integration control)
Ln=MVn - MV
when reverse is specified
Ln-1-In > 0 Integration disabled
L n-1-In s 0 Integration enabled
when direct is specified
Ln-1-In < 0 Integration disabled
L n-1-In > 0 Integration enabled

[Supplementary description]
For the initial value of the manipulated value, the final value MV up to the previous
time is output.
MV tracking
This function is valid only in auto mode and cascade mode (This specification is invalid
in manual mode).
6F8C1226
426
When tracking directive TR is 1, the high and low limits of manipulated value MV are
valid, but the differential limit of MV is invalid. In this case, the internal MV
n
is set as
MV
n
=MV.
When the tracking directive changes to 0, addition/subtraction of MV is started from
the MV
n
at that point.

Auto mode
Changing of ASV is valid in auto mode and manual mode.
When auto mode is entered, SV
n
is approached to ASV while limiting the rate-of-change.
SV
n
=SV
n-1
|DSV|
Also, MMV is equal to MV so that switching from auto mode to manual mode is
bumpless.
Therefore, MMV cannot be changed during auto mode.
Both the high/low limit and rate limiter of manipulated value MV are valid.
Cascade mode
Changing of CSV is valid in all modes.
SV
n
becomes equal to CSV when cascade mode is entered. In this case, both the
high/low limit and rate limiter of manipulated value MV are valid.
Also, ASV is equal to SV
n
and MMV is equal to MV so that switching from cascade mode
to auto mode and to manual mode is bumpless.
Therefore, ASV and MMV cannot be changed during cascade mode.
Manual mode
Changing of MMV is valid only in manual mode.
When manual mode is entered, MV is approached to MMV while limiting the
rate-of-change.
MV=MV|DMMV|
Both the high / low limit and rate limiter of manipulated value MV are invalid.
Also, MV
n
is equal to MV so that switching from manual mode to auto mode or cascade
mode is bumpless.
When switching to auto mode or cascade mode, addition/subtraction of MV is started
from the MV
n
at that point.
Direct polarity DR specification
Direct specification: MV is decreased when error (en) is increased.
MVn=MV
n-1
-MV
Reverse specification: MV is increased when error (en) is decreased.
MVn = MV
n-1
+MV
Rate limiter of manual mode manipulated value setting MMV input DMMV
MV is approached to MMV with rate-of-change DMMV.
1. When +|DMMV| (MMV-MV) -|DMMV| :MV=MMV
2. When (MMV-MV) > +|DMMV|
:MV=MV+|DMMV|
427
3. When (MMV-MV) < -|DMMV| :MV=MV-|DMMV|

Rate limiter of auto mode setting ASV input DSV
SV
n
is approached to ASV with rate-of-change DSV.
1. When +|DSV| (ASV-SV
n-1
) -|DSV| :SV
n
=ASV
2. When (ASV-SV
n-1
) > +|DSV| :SV
n
=SV
n-1
+|DSV|
3. When (ASV-SV
n-1
) < -|DSV| :SV
n
=SV
n-1
-|DSV|

High / low limit of manipulated output MH, ML
1. When MH < ML :MH=ML
If high / low limit output is MVX
n

2. When MV
n
> MH :MVX
n
=MH
3. When MV
n
< ML :MVX
n
=ML
Rate limiter of manipulated output DMV
1. When +|DMMV| (MVX
n
-MV) |DMV| MV = MVX
n

2. When (MVX
n
-MV)< + |DMV| MV = MV + |DMV|
3. When (MVX
n
-MV)< - |DMV| MV = MV - |DMV|
When instruction input is OFF
PID initialization is performed. The content is as follows:
1. Sets the operation mode MODE to mode specified by initial mode IMODE.
MODE=IMODE
2. For the initial value of the manipulated value, the final value MV up to the previous
time is output.
3. Auto mode setting is set to the value set to auto mode initial value ISV.
ASV=ISV
4. Internal data is initialized as follows:
MV
0
=MV
MMV=MV
PV
0
=PVC
SV
0
=ASV or CSV (Depends on initial mode. However, it is set to ASV in manual mode.)
D
0
=0
C=N
e
0-1
=e
0

When instruction input is ON
Performs PID operation.
Performs PID operation every N scans which is the set control cycle.
(Executes if the internal counter C is 0 or less, resets the internal counter C to N and
sets instruction output to TRUE(ON). If the internal counter is greater than 0,
decrements C and resets the instruction output to FALSE(OFF)).

2 LD/FBD
6E8C4826
428

[
M
o
d
e

d
a
t
a

r
e
l
a
t
i
o
n
s
h
i
p

t
a
b
l
e
]

S
e
t
t
i
n
g

M
a
n
i
p
u
l
a
t
e
d

v
a
l
u
e

M
a
n
i
p
u
l
a
t
e
d

v
a
l
u
e

o
u
t
p
u
t

l
i
m
i
t

A
u
t
o

m
o
d
e

s
e
t
t
i
n
g

A
S
V

C
a
s
c
a
d
e

m
o
d
e

s
e
t
t
i
n
g

C
S
V

S
e
t
t
i
n
g

S
V
n

M
a
n
u
a
l

m
o
d
e

s
e
t
t
i
n
g

m
a
n
i
p
u
l
a
t
e
d

v
a
l
u
e

M
M
V

T
r
a
c
k
i
n
g

s
e
t
t
i
n
g

m
a
n
i
p
u
l
a
t
e
d

v
a
l
u
e

T
M
V

I
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

m
a
n
i
p
u
l
a
t
e
d

v
a
l
u
e

M
V
n

H
i
g
h
/
l
o
w

L
i
m
i
t
C
h
a
n
g
e

o
f

r
a
t
e

l
i
m
i
t

L
i
m
i
t

o
u
t
p
u
t

M
V
C
n

O
u
t
p
u
t

m
a
n
i
p
u
l
a
t
e
d

v
a
l
u
e

M
V

M
a
n
u
a
l

m
o
d
e

(
C
h
a
n
g
e
a
b
l
e
)

(
C
h
a
n
g
e
a
b
l
e
)
S
V
n
-
1

(
P
r
e
v
i
o
u
s

v
a
l
u
e
)

S
e
t

M
M
V

(
C
h
a
n
g
e
a
b
l
e
)
M
V

N
o

N
o

M
V

M
M
V
M
V
n

T
r
a
c
k
i
n
g
=
F
A
L
S
E

(
O
F
F
)

(
C
h
a
n
g
e
a
b
l
e
)
P
I
D

O
p
e
r
a
t
i
o
n

r
e
s
u
l
t

Y
e
s

Y
e
s

A
u
t
o

m
o
d
e

T
r
a
c
k
i
n
g
=
T
R
U
E

(
O
N
)

S
e
t

A
S
V

(
C
h
a
n
g
e
a
b
l
e
)
A
S
V
S
V
n

S
e
t

T
M
V

M
V

Y
e
s

N
o

T
r
a
c
k
i
n
g
=
F
A
L
S
E

(
O
F
F
)

(
C
h
a
n
g
e
a
b
l
e
)
P
I
D

O
p
e
r
a
t
i
o
n

r
e
s
u
l
t

Y
e
s

Y
e
s

C
a
s
c
a
d
e

m
o
d
e

T
r
a
c
k
i
n
g
=
T
R
U
E

(
O
N
)

S
V
n

(
N
o
t

C
h
a
n
g
e
a
b
l
e
)

S
e
t

C
S
V

C
S
V

M
V

(
N
o
t

C
h
a
n
g
e
a
b
l
e
)
S
e
t

T
M
V

M
V

Y
e
s

N
o

I
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

m
a
n
i
p
u
l
a
t
e
d

v
a
l
u
e

M
V
n

O
u
t
p
u
t

l
i
m
i
t
M
V
C
n

Integrated Controller V seriesUnified Controller nv series Programming Instructions (LD/FBD/SFC/ST)
429

Important
When specifying floating scan, no operation is performed and the error flag is set to TRUE(ON).

Program example

PID3 SIGNAL2

ST
TBL2

LD
TBL1

LD
E
LP_P
PV_D
SIGNAL1
PID3_1
Q
MV
PV_D
SAMPLE1

ST
TBL1

ST

PID3_1( SIGNAL1, TBL2, TBL1);
SIGNAL2 := PID3_1.Q;
SAMPLE1 := PID3_1.MV;
When SIGNAL1 is TRUE(ON), performs essential succession PID operation with the
content of parameters specified by variables TBL1 and TBL2 and stores the result in
SAMPLE1.

Error information
When the PV data and LP parameter exceed the variable area, the essential
succession PID is not processed and the data boundary is exceeded.
The following operation is performed when PV data and LP parameters are REAL:

Controller Action
L Controller
NAN.
Integrated
Controller V series
value.
The following operation is performed when direct I/O variable is specified for the PV
data or LP parameter:

Controller Action
V series
S Controller
Essential succession PID is not executed.
Essential succession PID is not executed.
If the scan cycle of the task using this instruction is in floating scan mode, no
operation is performed and the error flag is set to TRUE(ON) (Integrated Controller
and S Controller only).
6F8C1226
430

Estimate with Reset

Process Operation Estimate with Reset
LD/FBD language
notation

Input data Estimate
value
RSM_L
Reset flag
Initial value
Unit time conversion code
Maximum estimate value
Output resolution
Instance name
U1 Y
U2
H1
H2
H3
H4


ST language notation [Instance name](U1, U2, H1, H2, H3, H4 );
[Variable name]:=[Instance name]. Y;

Arguments

U1 REAL
Input data
U2 BOOL
Reset flag
H1 REAL
Initial value
H2 INT

Unit time conversion code
(0: Sec.(K = 1)/1: Min.(K = 60) / 2: Hour(K = 3600))
H3 REAL
Maximum estimate value(0)

Input
H4 INT

Output resolution
(0:1/1:0.1/2:0.01/3:0.001/4:0.0001)
Output Y REAL Estimate value

Function
When the reset flag U2 is TRUE(ON), the reset value (initial value + 1 process cycle
value) is output.
When the reset flag is FALSE(OFF), input data U1 is estimated in consideration of the
unit time conversion code H2.
The estimate value is reset when it reaches the maximum estimate value H3. The
exceeded portion (|U1 + Yn-1||H3|) s not considered as an error since it is added to
the next count value.
Estimation can be performed without error even if the estimate value is much larger
(up to 106 times) than the input value.

431

[Formula]
When U2 = TRUE:
ZSUM = U1* (CT/K)
Y = ZSUM + H1
When U2 = FALSE:
ZSUM = ZSUM + U1* (CT/K)
if |ZSUM|> = MAX then
ZSUM = ZSUM - (ZSUM/ |ZSUM|)* MAX
if |Y|> = H3 then
Y = Y
n-1
+ (ZSUM/ |ZSUM|)* MAX - (Y
n-1
/ |Y
n-1
|)* H3
else
Y = Y
n-1
+ (ZSUM/ |ZSUM|)* MAX
endif
endif
(CT:Main scan cycle [sec], K:Unit time conversion value (1/60/3600), MAX:Output
resolution (1/0.1/0.01/0.001/0.0001)

Instance structure

Y REAL Estimate value
program.
ZSUM REAL
Internal estimate value
(estimated to the value corresponding
to the output resolution)
program.

6F8C1226
432

Program example

RSM_L output
GE output
50m
3
RSM_L
U1

U2

H1

H2

H3

H4
S1
0
ST

0
LD

0.0
LD

2
LD
DP20
50.0
LD

2
LD
PV1.PV
200.0
LD
GE

50.0
LD
RSM_L_1

RSM_L_1( PV1.PV, 0, 0.0, 2, DP20, 2);
S1 := GE( RSM_L_1.Y, 50.0);

When the PV1 measurement range is 0 to 250m/h, flag which is set to TRUE(ON)
every 50m
3
.

Error information

Controller Action
When NAN is input NAN abnormal is set to
TRUE(ON) and output is retained.

When the maximum estimate value H3 is negative, it is handled as 0.
Estimate value Y is not reset when U1>H3>0 or U1<H3<0.
When the reset flag U2 is TRUE(ON), it is output without change even if initial value
H1>maximum estimate value H3.
When the maximum estimate value H3>(Output resolution H4(1 to 0.0001)-106), the
estimate accuracy is deteriorated when the estimate value Y nears the maximum
estimate value H3.
Estimate value Y is reset when it is +H3 or -H3.
Reset flag U2 operation differs when it is changed from TRUE(ON) to FALSE(OFF)
depending on the initial value H1, input data U1 sign, and magnitude relation with the
maximum estimate value H3.
433

Parameter Structure

The following list provides the structure of parameters used in process operation. For
functions requiring parameter specification, use structures defined by @ standard
structure (L controller).typ, @ standard structure (DS).typ, and @ standard structure (S
controller).typ of Engineering tool.
The parameter structure used in process operation differs by the controller type for the
PV parameter, PV data, LP parameter and LP data.
Structures of @ standard structure (L controller) are used in process operation of
Integrated Controller S2/S3/L1/L2/L3 and Unified Controller type1.
Structures of @ standard structure (DS) are used in process operation of Integrated
Controller L2DS/L3DS and Unified Controller type2.
The parameters provided here describe the following:

Type Structure name MCS/DCS
typePV_PARA @ standard data type (MCS type L Controller) PV parameter
typePV_PARA_DS @ standard data type (DS type L Controller)
typePV_DATA @ standard data type (MCS type L Controller) PV data
typePV_DATA_DS @ standard data type (DS type L Controller)
typeLP_PARA @ standard data type (MCS type L Controller) LP parameter
typeLP_PARA_DS @ standard data type (DS type L Controller)
typeLP_DATA @ standard data type (MCS type L Controller) LP data
typeLP_DATA_DS @ standard data type (DS type L Controller)
typeP_PARA @ standard data type (MCS type L Controller) Polygonal line parameter
typeP_PARA_DS @ standard data type (DS type L Controller)
PID3 instruction PV data/setting
value
typePID3_PV_D @ standard data type (S Controller type)
PID3 instruction LP parameter typePID3_LP_P @ standard data type (S Controller type)

6F8C1226
434

PV parameter structureS2/S3/L1/L2/L3, type1

typePV_PARA STRUCT

Member Data type Initial value Comment
TAG ARRAY[0..3] OF DWORD Tag No.
IP DWORD Input hardware address
RH REAL 100.0 Indicator range high limit [EU]
RL REAL Indicator range low limit [EU]
CH INT 32000 Input count high limit
CL INT 6400 Input count low limit
SIG UINT Input signal type
LNR WORD Compensation operation type
LC INT -100 Low cut value [0.01%]
FT UINT 25 Filter constant [%]
TM UINT Temperature compensation PV No.
PM UINT Pressure compensation PV No.
TDG REAL Temperature compensation
designed temperature [C]
PDG REAL Pressure compensation designed
pressure [kPa]
PU REAL 1.0 Pulse weight coefficient [EU/pulse]
T REAL 1.0 Time conversion coefficient
K REAL 1.0 Engineering unit conversion
coefficient
D REAL 1.0 Compensation coefficient
PH REAL 90.0 PV alarm high [EU]
PL REAL 10.0 PV alarm low [EU]
PVB REAL 1.0 PV alarm high/low [EU]
DPL REAL 10.0 PV rate-of-change alarm [EU/s]
DPB REAL 1.0 PV rate-of-change alarm dead band
[EU/s]
PRD UINT PV error processing definition
SPV UINT Integral input PV No.
MAX REAL 100.0 Totalization max [EU]
SIMM UINT Simulation setting
UIL BOOL Sensor low alarm suppress
UIH BOOL Sensor high alarm suppress
DIC BOOL PV/PVC direct connection
PVC REAL PV before application compensation
Spare ARRAY[0..3] OF WORD

435

PV parameter structureL2DS/L3DS, type2

typePV_PARA_DS STRUCT

NAME ARRAY[0..7] OF DWORD Tag name
TYP UINT Tag type
MDL WORD Display pattern model No.
SCNO UINT Auto screen display No.
LOCK WORD Operation lock setting
SIGN ARRAY[0..3] OF DWORD Tagging character
ATYP WORD 1 Alarm confirm method
PRS UINT Control scan setting
SCH WORD 1 Sub schedule No.
DVRM UINT Scale divisions (for reprocessing)
MON ARRAY[0..31] OF BOOL Alarm monitor individual setting
AGRD ARRAY[0..15] OF WORD Alarm grade type
AMMT UINT Monitoring timer setting value
DCML UINT 2 Decimal point position
EU ARRAY[0..3] OF DWORD Engineering unit character
BNO WORD Input point bus No./node No.
SNO WORD Input point slot No./module No.
CNO WORD Main slot No.
IOM WORD I/O module type
ZPT UINT Cold compensation point PV No.
IPL UINT Inverse polygonal line No.
SIG UINT Input type signal
LNR UINT Input compensation operation type
PVA DWORD Input point variable name
CH INT 4000 Input count high limit
CL INT 800 Input count low limit
LC REAL -1.0 Low cut value [0.01%]
FT REAL 0.25 Filter coefficient [%]
RH REAL 100.0 Indicator range high limit [EU]
RL REAL Indicator range low limit [EU]
PHH REAL 100.0 PV alarm high high [EU]
PH REAL 90.0 PV alarm high [EU]
PL REAL 10.0 PV alarm low [EU]
PLL REAL PV alarm low low [EU]
PVB REAL 1.0 PV alarm high low dead band [EU]
DPL REAL 10.0 PV rate-of-change alarm [EU/s]
DPB REAL 1.0 PV rate-of-change alarm dead band
[EU/s]
6F8C1226
436

TM UINT Temperature compensation PV No.
PM UINT Pressure compensation PV No.
TDG REAL Temperature compensation design
temperature [C]
PDG REAL Pressure compensation design
pressure[kPa]
PRD UINT PV error process definition
SPV UINT Integration input PV No.
PU REAL 1.0 Pulse weight coefficient [EU/pulse]
T REAL 1.0 Time conversion coefficient
K REAL 1.0 Unit conversion coefficient
D REAL 1.0 Compensation coefficient
MAX REAL 100.0 Integration high limit value [EU]
PSET REAL Integration setting value [EU]
FONO UINT Startup button No.
PBNO UINT Startup button PB No.
SPLT REAL 50.0 PV split range position [EU]
PVPT REAL 50.0 PV friction pointer position [EU]
DMAX REAL Integration rate-of-change setting
value [EU/h]
PLN UINT Polygonal line No.
SGDR WORD Power factor signal direction setting
SENS ARRAY[0..3] OF DWORD Input device name
V0 REAL Draught free judgment value
PVP UINT Wind direction PV No.
UIL BOOL PV low sensor error suppress setting
UIH BOOL PV high sensor error suppress
setting
DIC BOOL PV/PVC direct connection
PVIR BOOL PV update setting for sensor error
UBS BOOL Unipolar/bipolar setting (for nv)
DCH DINT 64000 Input count high limit (for nv)
DCL DINT 12800 Input count low limit (for nv)
SPARE ARRAY[0..11] OF WORD
437

PV data structureS2/S3/L1/L2/L3, type1

typePV_DATA STRUCT

Member Data type Comment
PV REAL PV value [EU]
SCN BOOL Scan off
SIM BOOL Simulation
SPR BOOL Alarm suppress
RST BOOL Totalizor reset
DEU BOOL Device error unconfirmed
VIU BOOL Sensor error unconfirmed
PRU BOOL PV processing error unconfirmed
VHU BOOL PV alarm high unconfirmed
VLU BOOL PV alarm low unconfirmed
VDU BOOL PV rate-of-change alarm
unconfirmed
PDE BOOL Device error
PVI BOOL Sensor error
PRE BOOL PV processing error
PVH BOOL PV upper limit alarm
PVL BOOL PV lower limit alarm
PVD BOOL PV change rate alarm

6F8C1226
438

PV data structureL2DS/L3DS, type2

typePV_DATA_DS STRUCT

B0_0 BOOL
B0_1 BOOL
B0_2 BOOL
B0_3 BOOL
B0_4 BOOL
B0_5 BOOL
B0_6 BOOL
B0_7 BOOL
B0_8 BOOL
B0_9 BOOL
B0_10 BOOL
INOP BOOL Sensor error
DU BOOL SDIN card error
B0_13 BOOL
B0_14 BOOL
B0_15 BOOL
PVIH BOOL PV sensor upper limit alarm
PVIL BOOL PV sensor lower limit alarm
PVHH BOOL Upper limit alarm above PV
PVLL BOOL Lower limit alarm below PV
UP BOOL State of integration setting value
reached
TTE BOOL Integration rate-of-change alarm
B1_11 BOOL
B1_12 BOOL
B1_13 BOOL
B1_14 BOOL
B1_15 BOOL
STIT ARRAY[0..31] OF BOOL Alarm display condition
FLIT ARRAY[0..31] OF BOOL Alarm conf condition
B6_0 BOOL
B6_1 BOOL
B6_2 BOOL
B6_3 BOOL
439

MSR BOOL Measuring mode (for
reprocessing)
WAT BOOL Wait mode (for reprocessing)
TST BOOL Test mode (for reprocessing)
PRF BOOL Proofread mode(for reprocessing)
TRC BOOL Tracking
ZER BOOL Zero adjustment mode (for
reprocessing)
B6_10 BOOL
B6_11 BOOL
B6_12 BOOL
B6_13 BOOL
B6_14 BOOL
MHLD BOOL MELSECNET input stop
SCN BOOL Scan setting
SIM BOOL Simulation setting
SPR BOOL Alarm suppress setting
BSIM BOOL Batch simulation setting
RCNF BOOL Alarm confirm request
RLO BOOL LO request
B7_6 BOOL
B7_7 BOOL
RST BOOL Integration reset setting
B7_9 BOOL
B7_10 BOOL
B7_11 BOOL
B7_12 BOOL
SPR1 BOOL Alarm suppress limit setting
HLD BOOL Input stop (for nv)
B7_15 BOOL
SINW INT Simulation input value
DRC UINT Wind direction
PVC REAL PV before application
compensation
W14 WORD
W15 WORD
W16 WORD
W17 WORD
RAW INT Raw count value
W19 WORD
BSPR ARRAY[0..31] OF BOOL Alarm suppress flag
PVPC REAL PV [% unit]
PVCPC REAL PVC [% unit]
6F8C1226
440

PVI BOOL Sensor alarm
B26_1 BOOL
B26_2 BOOL
B26_3 BOOL
B26_4 BOOL
B26_5 BOOL
B26_6 BOOL
B26_7 BOOL
B26_8 BOOL
B26_9 BOOL
B26_10 BOOL
B26_11 BOOL
B26_12 BOOL
B26_13 BOOL
B26_14 BOOL
B26_15 BOOL
W27 WORD
DRAW DINT Raw count value (for nv)

441

LP parameter structureS2/S3/L1/L2/L3, type1

typeLP_PARA STRUCT

Member Data type Initial
value
Comment
OA DWORD Output hardware address
PVP UINT Controlled PV No
MSIG UINT Output signal type
CTL WORD 16#0001 Control operation type
CDR BOOL Control operation direction
dum1 BOOL
dum2 BOOL
dum3 BOOL
dum4 BOOL
dum5 BOOL
dum6 BOOL
dum7 BOOL
MDR BOOL MV output direction
dum9 BOOL
dum10 BOOL
dum11 BOOL
dum12 BOOL
dum13 BOOL
dum14 BOOL
dum15 BOOL
KP REAL 0.8 Proportional gain
TI REAL 0.1 Integral time [min]
TD REAL 0.0 Differential time [min]
ETA REAL 0.1 Rate gain
ALP REAL 0.4 2 DOF proportionality
coefficient/SV high value
BET REAL 1.35 2 DOF integration coefficient/SV
low value
GAM REAL 1.25 2 DOF differential coefficient
GP REAL 0.0 Gap [%]
GG REAL 1.0 Gap gain
DMV REAL 100.0 MV rate limiter [%/scan]
MH REAL 100.0 MV high limit value [%]
ML REAL -5.0 MV low limit value [%]
FP REAL Full stroke pulse count/time [s]
BL REAL Backlash
HT REAL Hold time
PLB REAL Pulse dead band [s]
DL REAL 10.0 Deviation alarm value [EU]
DVB REAL 1.0 Deviation alarm dead band [EU]

6F8C1226
442

value
Comment
MHA REAL 90.0 MV alarm high [%]
MLA REAL 10.0 MV alarm low [%]
MVB REAL 1.0 MV alarm high/low limit dead band
[%]
VP UINT Valve position PV No.
DT0 UINT 1 Control cycle [scan]
T0 UINT 5 Sample time [0.1s]
T1 UINT 5 Control time [0.1s]
CLD UINT Control stop definition
LDU WORD 16#0001 LDU Setting
MDT REAL 0.0 Dead time [min] (for model driven
PID)
MKF REAL 0.0 PD comp. Gain (for model driven
PID)
MTF REAL 0.0 PD comp. Differential time [min] (for
model driven PID)
CMD UINT 0 Control Mode Setting
POR BOOL 0 Pulse Output Request
SVS BOOL 0 SV Setting at A Mode
FS0 BOOL 0 SV major tracking
FS1 BOOL 0 Cascade value kind
B61_4 BOOL
B61_5 BOOL
B61_6 BOOL
B61_7 BOOL
B61_8 BOOL
B61_9 BOOL
B61_10 BOOL
B61_11 BOOL
B61_12 BOOL
B61_13 BOOL
B61_14 BOOL
B61_15 BOOL
PMV REAL Pulse Output
443

LP parameter structure(L2DS/L3DS, type2)

typeLP_PARA_DS STRUCT

value
Comment
NAME ARRAY[0..7] OF DWORD Tag name
TYP UINT Tag type
MDL WORD Display pattern model No.
SCNO UINT Auto screen display No..
LOCK WORD Operation lock setting
SIGN ARRAY[0..3] OF DWORD Tagging character
ATYP WORD 1 Alarm confirm method
PRS UINT Control scan setting
SCH WORD 1 Sub schedule No.
W39 WORD
MON ARRAY[0..31] OF BOOL Alarm monitor individual setting
AGRD ARRAY[0..15] OF WORD Alarm grade type
PVP UINT Indicator PV No.
VP UINT Valve position PV No.
MDR BOOL MV Output direction setting
B60_1 BOOL
B60_2 BOOL
B60_3 BOOL
B60_4 BOOL
B60_5 BOOL
B60_6 BOOL
B60_7 BOOL
CDR BOOL Control operation direction
B60_9 BOOL
B60_10 BOOL
B60_11 BOOL
B60_12 BOOL
B60_13 BOOL
B60_14 BOOL
B60_15 BOOL
MDSP WORD MV display direction setting
MSPL REAL 50.0 MV split range position
MVPT REAL 50.0 MV friction pointer position
MSIG WORD Output signal type
SIMM WORD Simulation method
MUNO WORD Output point unit No.
MPNO WORD Output point No.
MVA DWORD Output point variable name
DMV REAL 100.0 MV rate-of-change limit [%/scan]
MH REAL 100.0 MV high limit value [%]
6F8C1226
444

value
Comment
ML REAL MV low limit value [%]
MHA REAL 90.0 MV alarm high [%]
MLA REAL 10.0 MV alarm low [%]
MVB REAL 1.0 MV alarm dead band [%]
CLD UINT Control stop type
CMD UINT Control mode setting
SVS UINT A mode SV setting
DT0 UINT 1 Control cycle
T0 UINT 5 Sample time [scan]
T1 UINT 5 Control time [scan]
KP REAL 0.8 Proportional gain
TI REAL 0.1 Integral time [min]
TD REAL Differential time [min]
ETA REAL 0.1 Rate gain
ALP REAL 0.4 2 DOF proportionality
coefficient/SV high value
BET REAL 1.35 2 DOF integration coefficient/SV
low value
GAM REAL 1.25 2 DOF differential coefficient
GP REAL Gap [%]
GG REAL 1.0 Gap gain
GAIN REAL Proportional gain
BIAS REAL Proportional bias
FP REAL Full stroke time/pulse count
BL REAL Backlash
HT REAL Hold time
PLB REAL Pulse dead band [s]
PDL REAL 10.0 Positive deviation alarm value
NDL REAL 10.0 Negative deviation alarm value
DVB REAL 1.0 Deviation alarm dead band [EU]
SH REAL 100.0 Proportional range high limit value
SL REAL Proportional range low limit value
SVEU ARRAY[0..3] OF DWORD Proportional engineering unit
character
MVEU ARRAY[0..3] OF DWORD Proportional operation value
engineering unit character
SVDM UINT 2 Proportional decimal point position
MVDM UINT 2 Proportional operation value
decimal point position
KF REAL 1.0 MV gain
DFF REAL MV bias
MVP REAL MV ramp target value
MVK REAL MV ramp incremental value
MVT REAL MV ramp time coefficient
SVP REAL SV ramp target value
SVK REAL SV ramp incremental value
SVT REAL SV ramp time coefficient
TR REAL MV tracking value
445

value
Comment
ACTS ARRAY[0..3] OF DWORD Output device name
W174 WORD
POIP UINT 1 Inching pulse width
FS0 BOOL 0 SV measure tracking designation
FS1 BOOL 0 Cascade value type
B176_2 BOOL
B176_3 BOOL
B176_4 BOOL
B176_5 BOOL
B176_6 BOOL
B176_7 BOOL
B176_8 BOOL
B176_9 BOOL
B176_10 BOOL
B176_11 BOOL
B176_12 BOOL
B176_13 BOOL
B176_14 BOOL
B176_15 BOOL
W177 WORD
MDT REAL 0.0 Dead time [min] (for model driving
PID)
MKF REAL 0.0 PD compensator gainfor model driving
PID
MTF REAL 0.0 PD compensator differential time [min] (for
model driving PID)
VMHC UINT MV direction character display (for
reprocessing)

6F8C1226
446

LP data structureS2/S3/L1/L2/L3, type1

typeLP_DATA STRUCT

SV REAL SV value [EU]
MV REAL MV value [%]
MODE UINT Control mode
MVT BOOL MV tracking
SIM BOOL Simulation
LSP BOOL Alarm suppress
M BOOL Mode M
A BOOL Mode A
C BOOL Mode C
RM BOOL Mode RM
LS_7 BOOL
LS_8 BOOL
LS_9 BOOL
MVE BOOL MV error
CLI BOOL Control stop
MVH BOOL MV alarm high
MVL BOOL MV alarm low
DVE BOOL Deviation alarm value
VPI BOOL Valve position error
SSV BOOL SEQ-SV ope.
CSV BOOL CMP-SV involvement condition
SMV BOOL SEQ-MV involvement condition
CMV BOOL CMP-MV ope.
CMP BOOL CMP operation
SEQ BOOL SEQ operation
CC BOOL Cascade
dum7 BOOL
dum8 BOOL
dum9 BOOL
MEU BOOL MV error unconfirmed
CLU BOOL Control stop unconfirmed
MHU BOOL MV alarm high unconfirmed
MLU BOOL MV alarm low unconfirmed
DVU BOOL Deviation alarm unconfirmed
VPU BOOL Valve position error unconfirmed

447

LP data structure(L2DS/L3DS, type2)

typeLP_DATA_DS STRUCT

CLI BOOL Control inactive
MVE BOOL MV error
MVH BOOL MV alarm high
MVL BOOL MV alarm low
PDV BOOL Positive deviation alarm
NDV BOOL Negative deviation alarm
VPI BOOL Valve position error
B0_7 BOOL
B0_8 BOOL
B0_9 BOOL
B0_10 BOOL
B0_11 BOOL
B0_12 BOOL
B0_13 BOOL
B0_14 BOOL
B0_15 BOOL
PVIH BOOL PV sensor upper limit alarm
PVIL BOOL PV sensor lower limit alarm
PVHH BOOL Upper limit alarm above PV
PVLL BOOL Lower limit alarm below PV
B1_9 BOOL
B1_10 BOOL
B1_11 BOOL
B1_12 BOOL
B1_13 BOOL
B1_14 BOOL
B1_15 BOOL
STIT ARRAY[0..31] OF BOOL Alarm display condition
FLIT ARRAY[0..31] OF BOOL Alarm conf condition
SSV BOOL SEQ-SV ope.
CSV BOOL CMP-SV involvement condition
SMV BOOL SEQ-MV involvement condition
CMV BOOL CMP-MV ope.
6F8C1226
448

M BOOL Mode M
A BOOL Mode A
C BOOL Mode C
RM BOOL Mode RM
TRC BOOL MV tracking state
B6_9 BOOL
POR BOOL Pulse output request
IOPN BOOL Pulse inching request (OPEN)
ICLS BOOL Pulse inching request (CLOSE)
B6_13 BOOL
B6_14 BOOL
B6_15 BOOL
SCN BOOL Scan setting
SIM BOOL Simulation setting
SPR BOOL Alarm suppress setting
BSIM BOOL Batch simulation setting
RCNF BOOL Alarm confirm request
RLO BOOL LO request
B7_6 BOOL
B7_7 BOOL
RST BOOL Integration reset setting
B7_9 BOOL
B7_10 BOOL
B7_11 BOOL
B7_12 BOOL
SPR1 BOOL Alarm suppress limit setting
HLD BOOL Input stop (for nv)
B7_15 BOOL
SV REAL SV value [EU]
MV REAL MV value [%]
MODE UINT Control mode
W15 WORD
PMV REAL Pulse output MV
RAW INT Raw count value
W19 WORD
TR REAL MV tracking value
RPLS REAL PO user area1
POWK DWORD PO user area 2
BSPR ARRAY[0..31] OF BOOL Alarm suppress flag
PVPC REAL PV [% unit]
PVCPC REAL PVC [% unit]
SVPC REAL SV [% unit]
449

PVI BOOL Sensor alarm
CMP BOOL Computer flag
MCH BOOL M mode set
ACH BOOL A mode set
CCH BOOL C mode set
MDCH BOOL Mode change
MRM BOOL M/RM mode
DVE BOOL Deviation alarm
B34_8 BOOL MRM previous memory
B34_9 BOOL A mode previous memory
B34_10 BOOL C mode previous memory
B34_11 BOOL M mode request
B34_12 BOOL A mode request
B34_13 BOOL C mode request
B34_14 BOOL
B34_15 BOOL
W35 WORD
MVOVER REAL
DRAW DINT Raw count (for nv)

Polygonal line parameter structure(S2/S3/L1/L2/L3, type1)

typeP_PARA STRUCT

VAL ARRAY[0..11] OF typeXY

typeXY STRUCT

X REAL X value
Y REAL Y value

Polygonal line parameter structure(L2DS/L3DS, type2)

typeP_PARA_DS STRUCT

X ARRAY[0..11] OF REAL X value
Y ARRAY[0..11] OF REAL Y value

6F8C1226
450

For PID3 instruction (PV data/setting structure):

typePID3_PV_D STRUCT

PVC REAL Process measurement input [%]
ASV REAL Auto mode setting value[%]
CSV REAL Cascade mode setting value[%]
MMV REAL Manual mode manipulated value input [%]
TMV REAL Manipulated value tracking input [%]
MODE DWORD Mode setting

For PID 3 instruction (LP parameter)

typePID3_LP_P STRUCT

KP REAL Proportional gain
TI REAL Integral time [min]
TD REAL Rate time [min]
GP REAL Control dead band [%]
ISV REAL Auto mode setting initial value [%]
FT REAL Process input filter
DSV REAL Setting ASV rate limiter [%/At]
DMMV REAL Manual mode manipulated value MMV differential
limit [%/At]
STS DWORD Status
MH REAL Manipulated value high limit [%]
ML REAL Manipulated value low limit [%]
DMV REAL Manipulated value differential limit [%/At]
N REAL Control cycle setting value

2.17 Program Control
451


1 Return RETURN
2 User Defined Function
3 User Defined Function Block
4 Program Enable EN_P
5 Program Disable DIS_P
6 Event Program Startup START_P
7 Interrupt Enable EI_T T compatible instruction
8 Interrupt Disable DI_T T compatible instruction

6F8C1226
452

Return

Program Control Return
LD/FBD language
notation

RETURN Input

ST language notation RETURN

Function
When the input state is TRUE(ON), program, user defined function, and user defined
function block are terminated and control returns to the instruction following the
corresponding CALL instruction.
If connected directly to left power rail, program, user defined function, and user defined
function block are terminated unconditionally and control returns to the instruction
following the corresponding CALL instruction.

Input Action Output
FALSE(OFF) Return not executed
TRUE(ON) Return executed

This instruction is not necessary in order to return to the instruction following the
corresponding CALL instruction at the end of program, user defined function, or user
defined function block. Use the Return instruction when it is necessary to return to
the instruction following the corresponding CALL instruction in the middle of a
program.

Program example

SIGNAL2
RETURN
SIGNAL1

IF SIGNAL1 AND SIGNAL2 THEN
RETURN;
END_IF;

Returns only when the state of SIGNAL1 and SIGNAL2 is TRUE(ON).
453


Program Control User Defined Function
LD/FBD language
notation

Function name Input argument 1
Input argument 2
Input argument 3
Input argument n
Output


ST language notation Output := Function name( Input argument 1, Input argument 2, Input
argument 3, , Input argument n );

Function
Executes the user defined function.
Up to 15 Input argument including function value may be defined.
User defined function and user defined function block may be nested up to 6 levels.

Program example

USERFUN
IN0

IN1

IN2

IN3
SAMPLE1
SAMPLE2
SAMPLE3
SAMPLE4
SAMPLE5
ADD_INT
IN0
IN1
IN2
SUB_INT
IN3
MUL_INT
USERFUN
User defined function content

SAMPLE5 := USERFUN( SAMPLE1, SAMPLE2, SAMPLE3, SAMPLE4);

(User defined function content)
USERFUN := ( IN0 + IN1 IN2 ) * IN3

Executes the content of user defined function using SAMPLE1 to 4 as input argument
and stores the result in SAMPLE5.
6F8C1226
454


Program Control User Defined Function Block
LD/FBD language
notation
Function name Input argument 1
Input argument 2
Input argument 3
Input argument n
Output 1
Output 2
Output 3
Output n
Instance name


ST language
notation
[Instance name](Input argument1, Input argument2, Input argument3, ,
Input argument n );
[Variable name]:=[Instance name]. Output argument1;
:
[Variable name]:=[Instance name]. Output argument n;

Function
Executes the user defined function block.
Up to 15 input and output arguments may be defined.
User defined function and user defined function block may be nested up to 6 levels.

Program example

ADD_INT
IN0
IN1
IN2
SUB_INT
IN3
MUL_INT
OUT1
User defined function block content
ADD_INT
IN0
IN1
IN2
SUB_INT
IN3
DIV_INT
OUT2
USERFB
IN0 OUT1

IN1 OUT2

IN2

IN3
SAMPLE1
SAMPLE2
SAMPLE3
SAMPLE4
SAMPLE5
SAMPLE6
USERFB_1

455

USERFB_1( SAMPLE1, SAMPLE2, SAMPLE3, SAMPLE4);
SAMPLE5 := USERFB_1.OUT1;
SAMPLE6 := USERFB_1.OUT2;

(User defined function block content)
OUT1 := ( IN0 + IN1 IN2 ) * IN3
OUT2 := ( IN0 + IN1 IN2 ) / IN3

Executes the content of user defined function block using SAMPLE1 to 4 as input
arguments and stores the result in SAMPLE5 and SAMPLE6.

6F8C1226
456

Program Enable

Program Control Program Enable
LD/FBD language
notation

Execution control input Output
EN_P
E
TASK
NO
Task entry No.
Task type


ST language notation Output := EN_P( E, TASK, NO);

Arguments

E BOOL

Execution control
input

TASK UINT
Task type

Input
NO UINT
Task entry No.

Output BOOL Output

Function
When the execution control input E is FALSE (OFF), FALSE (OFF) is output without
When the execution control input E is TRUE(ON), execution of the program specified
by task type and task entry No. is enabled and TRUE(ON) is output as the result.
The range of task type TASK is as follows.
The range of task entry No. depends on the controller model. Refer to the instruction
manual for details.

Unified Controller Integrated Controller Task type
TASK
Task name
type1 type2 S3 S2 L3 L3DS L2 L2DS L1
0 Event task EV

1
Super
highspeed task
SS

2 Interrupt task IP

3 Highspeed task HS

4 Main task MS

5 Background task BG

Execution
control input
Action Output
TRUE(ON) Enables execution of the specified program. TRUE(ON)
457

Program example

SIGNAL1
1
LD
EN_P

4
LD
SIGNAL2
1
ST

10
LD
E
TASK
NO
Main task
000
001
010
009 P_2059
P_2051
P_2050
P_2060
Disabledenabled

SIGNAL2 := EN_P( SIGNAL1, 4, 10);

When execution control input SIGNAL1 is TRUE(ON), execution of program P_2060
registered in entry No. 010 of main task specified by task type TASK and task entry No.
NO is enabled.

Error information
No operation is performed if an unregistered program, invalid task type, or invalid task
entry No. is specified.

6F8C1226
458

Program Disable

Program Control Program Disable
LD/FBD language
notation

DIS_P
E
TASK
NO
Task entry No.
Task type

ST language notation Output := DIS_P( E, TASK, NO);

Arguments

E BOOL

Execution control
input

TASK UINT
Task type

Input
NO UINT
Task entry No.

Output BOOL Output

Function
When the execution control input E is FALSE(OFF), FALSE(OFF) is output without
When the execution control input E is TRUE(ON), execution of the program specified
by task type and task entry No. is disabled and TRUE(ON) is output as the result.
The range of task type TASK is as follows. The range of task entry No. depends on the
controller model. Refer to the instruction manual for details.

TASK
Task name
0 Event task EV

1
Super high
speed task
SS

2 Interrupt task IP

3
Highspeed
task
HS

4 Main task MS

5
Background
task
BG

Execution
control input
Action Output
TRUE(ON) Disables execution of the specified program. TRUE(ON)
459

Program example

SIGNAL1
1
LD
DIS_P

4
LD
SIGNAL2
1
ST

10
LD
E
TASK
NO
Main task
000
001
010
009 P_2059
P_2051
P_2050
P_2060 EnabledDisabled

SIGNAL2 := DIS_P( SIGNAL1, 4, 10);

When execution control input SIGNAL1 is TRUE(ON), execution of program P_2060
registered in entry No. 10 of main task specified by task type TASK and task entry No.
NO is disabled.

Error information

6F8C1226
460

Event Program Startup

Program Control Event Program Startup
LD/FBD language
notation
START_P
E
TASK
NO
Task entry No.
Task type

ST language notation Output := START_P( E, TASK, NO );

Arguments

E BOOL

Execution control
input

TASK UINT
Task type

Input
NO UINT
Task entry No.

Output BOOL Output

Function
When the execution control input E is TRUE(ON), the program specified by task type
and task entry No. is executed and TRUE(ON) is output as the result.
In Unified Controllers, a specified program may not be registered for startup. If the
program cannot be registered, start the next scan again to set output to FALSE (OFF).
The range of task type TASK is as follows. However, super high speed task (SS),
high speed task (HS), and main task (MS) which performs scan cannot be set.

TASK
Task name
0 Event task EV

1
Super
high-speed task
SS
2 Interrupt task IP

3 High-speed task HS
4 Main task MS
5 Background task BG

461


Execution
control input E
Action Output
TRUE(ON) Starts the specified event program. TRUE(ON)


Execution
control input E
Action Output
Executed TRUE(ON)
TRUE(ON) Starts the specified event program.
Not executed FALSE(OFF)

Program example


START_P
TASK
E
IP1_REQ
2
NO 1
IP1_DONE
START_P
TASK
E
IP2_REQ
2
NO 2
IP2_DONE
Indicates IP1 is
enabled and output
is set to TRUE(ON)
Interrupt task
0
1
2
15
P_2050
P_2051
P_2052
P_2065
Startup
Startup
Main task(MS)
Interrupt task(IP)
MS_001
MS_001
IP_001

Indicates IP2 is
enabled and output
is set to TRUE (ON)
IP_002

IP1_DONE := START_P( IP1_REQ, 2, 1);
IP2_DONE := START_P( IP2_REQ, 2, 2);

When execution control input IP1_REQ is TRUE(ON), the event program IP1 specified
by the task type TASK and task entry No. NO is started up to start up program P_2051.
When execution control input IP2_REQ is TRUE(ON), the event program IP2 specified
by the task type TASK and task entry No. NO is started up to start up program P_2052,
as with the same scan of IP1 startup.
6F8C1226
462



START_P
TASK
E
IP1_REQ
2
NO 1
R
IP1_REQ START_P
TASK
E
IP2_REQ
2
NO 2
R
IP2_REQ
Indicates IP1 is
executed and startup
request is reset with
reset coil instruction.
Interrupt task
0
1
2
15
P_2050
P_2051
P_2052
P_2065
Startup
Startup
Main task(MS)
Interrupt task (IP)
MS_001 MS_001
IP_001

Indicates IP2 is not
executed and startup
request is made again
by the next scan.
MS_001
IP_002

Since ST language does not support the notation equivalent to LD language, it cannot
describe data hold types such as -(R) - and - (S) - or change detection types such as
-|P|- and -|N|-. Therefore the program example is omitted.

When execution control input IP1_REQ is TRUE(ON), event program IP1 specified by
the task type TASK and task entry No. starts up to activate program P_2051.
Startup request for event program IP2 by the same scan as IP1 is made but denied
when execution control input IP2_REQ is TRUE(ON). Therefore, IP2 startup request
should be made again in the next scan.

Error information

463

Interrupt Enable

Program Control Interrupt Enable
LD/FBD language
notation

Execution control input Result
EI_T


ST language notation Result := EI_T(Execution control input );

Arguments

Input BOOL

Execution
control input

Output BOOL Result

Function
When the input is FALSE(OFF), outputs FALSE(OFF) without performing operation.
When the input is TRUE(ON), execution of task with higher priority than the executing
task is enabled and TRUE(ON) is output as the result.
Interrupt events that occur while execution is disabled are held until interrupt enable
instruction is executed and the held task is executed after execution is enabled.

Important
If interrupt is disabled, it must be enabled within the same POU.

Program example

DI_T
Circuit A
Circuit B
EI_T
I/O
Interrupt
factor
IP task
Execution
disabled
IP task
Execute
Interrupt factor
held
SIGNAL2
SIGNAL1

SIGNAL3 := DI_T( SIGNAL1);
SIGNAL4 := EI_T( SIGNAL2);

Disables interrupt when the SIGNAL1 is TRUE(ON). This interrupt is disabled while
circuit A is executing. Enables interrupt when the SIGNAL2 is TRUE(ON). Then the
interrupt task (IP) is started up by the suspended I/O interrupt.
6F8C1226
464

Interrupt Disable

Program Control Interrupt Disable
LD/FBD language
notation

Execution control input Result
DI_T


ST language notation Result := DI_T( Execution control input );

Arguments

Input BOOL

Execution control
input

Output BOOL Result

Function
When the input is FALSE(OFF), outputs FALSE(OFF) without performing operation.
When the input is TRUE(ON), execution of task with higher priority than the executing
task is disabled and TRUE(ON) is output as the result.
Interrupt events that occur while execution is disabled are held until interrupt enable
instruction is executed and the held task is executed after execution is enabled.

Important
If interrupt is disabled, it must be enabled within the same POU.

Program example

DI_T
Circuit A
Circuit B
EI_T
I/O
Interrupt
factor
IP task
Execution
disabled
IP task
Execute
Interrupt factor
held
SIGNAL2
SIGNAL1
SIGNAL3 := DI_T( SIGNAL1);
SIGNAL4 := EI_T( SIGNAL2);

Disables interrupt when the SIGNAL1 is TRUE(ON). This interrupt is disabled while
circuit A is executing. Enables interrupt when the SIGNAL2 is TRUE(ON). Then the
interrupt task (IP) is invoked by the suspended I/O interrupt.

2.18 String Processing
465


1 String Length LEN
2 Leftmost Extract String LEFT
3 Rightmost Extract String RIGHT
4 Extract String MID
5 Concatenate String CONCAT_STRING
6 Insert String INSERT
7 Delete String DELETE
8 Replace String REPLACE
9 Find String FIND
10 Define String DEF_STRING

6F8C1226
466

String Length

String Processing String Length
LD/FBD language
notation

Input string Output
LEN


ST language notation Output := LEN(Input string );

Arguments

Input STRING Input string
Output UINT Output

Function
Calculates the length of the input string and outputs the result.
Direct I/O variable cannot be specified for the input variable.

Program example

SAMPLE1

LD
LEN SAMPLE2
7
ST
Input string String length
7 B C D E F G A

SAMPLE2 := LEN( SAMPLE1);

Calculates the length of string "ABCDEFG" in input data SAMPLE1 and stores the
result "7" in SAMPLE2.

Error information
When the input variable exceeds the variable area, the string length is not processed
variable:

Controller Action
Result=0.
Result=0.
467

Leftmost Extract String

String Processing Leftmost Extract String
LD/FBD language
notation

Input string Output
LEFT
IN

L
Extraction character length


ST language notation LEFT( IN, L, Output);

Arguments

Input
L UINT

Extraction
character
length

Output STRING Output

Function
Extracts the string specified by extraction character length L from the left end of the
input string IN and outputs the result.
Direct I/O variable cannot be specified for the input string variable and output variable.

Program example

SAMPLE1

LD
LEFT
IN

L
SAMPLE3

ST
Input string Extracted string
ABC
SAMPLE2
3
LD
Extraction character count
3
B C D E F G A

LEFT( SAMPLE1, SAMPLE2, SAMPLE3);

Extracts the number of characters specified by extraction character length "3" in
SAMPLE2 from the left end of the string "ABCDEFG" in SAMPLE1and stores the
result "ABC" in SAMPLE3.

6F8C1226
468

Error information
When the input string variable and output variable exceed the variable area, the
leftmost extract string is not processed and the data boundary is exceeded.
string variable and output variable:

Controller Action
Leftmost extract string is not executed.
Leftmost extract string is not executed.
TRUE(ON).

When EN is used ENO output is reset to FALSE(OFF) when the above error occurs.
469

Rightmost Extract String

String Processing Rightmost Extract String
LD/FBD language
notation
Input string Output
RIGHT
IN

L


ST language notation RIGHT( IN, L, Output );

Arguments

Input
L UINT

Extraction
character
length


Function
Extracts the number of characters specified by extraction character length L from the
right end of the input string IN and outputs the result.
Direct I/O variable cannot be specified for input string variable and output variable.

Program example

SAMPLE1
LD
RIGHT
IN
L
SAMPLE3
ST
EFG
SAMPLE2
3
LD
3
B C D E F G A

RIGHT( SAMPLE1, SAMPLE2, SAMPLE3);

SAMPLE2 from the right end of the string "ABCDEFG" in SAMPLE1and stores the
result "EFG" in SAMPLE3.

6F8C1226
470

Error information
When the input string variable and output variable exceed the variable area, rightmost
extract string is not processed and the data boundary is exceeded.

Controller Action
Rightmost extract string is not executed.
Rightmost extract string is not executed.


471

Extract String

String Processing Extract String
LD/FBD language
notation

Input string Output
MID
IN

L

P
Extracted string top position


ST language notation MID( IN, L, P, Output );

Arguments


L UINT

Input
P UINT
Extraction character top position


Function
Extracts the number of characters specified by extraction character length L starting
from the Extraction character top position P of the input string IN and outputs the
result.

Program example

SAMPLE1

LD
MID
IN

L

P
SAMPLE4

ST
BCD
SAMPLE2
3
LD
3
SAMPLE3
2
LD
B C D E F G A
Extracted string position
2

MID( SAMPLE1, SAMPLE2, SAMPLE3, SAMPLE4);

SAMPLE2, starting from extraction character top position "2" in SAMPLE3 of the string
"ABCDEFG" in SAMPLE1 and stores the result "BCD" in SAMPLE3.
6F8C1226
472

Error information
When input string variable and output variable exceed the variable area, the extract
string is not processed and the data boundary is exceeded.
If number of characters from Extraction character top position P is less than the
Extraction character length, the entire string starting at position P is output.
If Extraction character top position P is greater than the Input string length, the result is
a null string.

Controller Action
Extract string is not executed.
Extract string is not executed.
TRUE(ON).

When EN is used, ENO output is reset to FALSE(OFF).

473

Concatenate String

String Processing Concatenate String
LD/FBD language
notation
Input string 1 Output
CONCAT_STRING
IN1

IN2
Input string 2


ST language notation CONCAT_STRING( IN1, IN2, Output );

Arguments

IN1 STRING
Input string 1

Input
IN2 STRING
Input string 2

Output STRING
Output

Function
Concatenates input string 1 with input string 2 and outputs the result.

Program example

SAMPLE1

LD
CONCAT_STRING
IN1

IN2
SAMPLE3

ST
Input string 1
Output string
SAMPLE2

LD
Input string 2
+
E F G
B C D A
B C D E F G A

CONCAT_STRING( SAMPLE1, SAMPLE2, SAMPLE3);

Concatenates the string "ABCD" in SAMPLE1 with extraction string "EFG" in
SAMPLE2 and stores the result "ABCDEFG" in SAMPLE3.

6F8C1226
474

Error information
concatenate string is not processed and the data boundary is exceeded.
If the string length after concatenation exceeds the output string variable size, the result is
unchanged.

Controller Action
Concatenate string is not executed.
Concatenate string is not executed.
TRUE(ON).

When EN is used ENO output is reset to FALSE(OFF) when the above error occurs.

475

Insert String

String Processing Insert String
LD/FBD language
notation
Input string Output
INSERT
IN1

IN2

P
Insertion character string
Insert position

ST language notation INSERT( IN1, IN2, P, Output );

Arguments

IN1 STRING Input string

IN2 STRING
Insertion
character
string

Input
P UINT

Insertion
position


Function
Inserts the insertion string IN2 at insertion position P of the input string IN1 and outputs
the result.

Program example

SAMPLE1

LD
INSERT
IN

L

P
SAMPLE4

ST
Input string Inserted string
SAMPLE2
3
LD
Insert string
SAMPLE3
1
LD
D E F G
B C A
1
Insert position
B C A D E F G

INSERT( SAMPLE1, SAMPLE2, SAMPLE3, SAMPLE4);

6F8C1226
476
Inserts the insertion character string "DEFG" in SAMPLE2 into string "ABC" in
SAMPLE1 at insertion position "1" specified by SAMPLE3 and stores the result
"ADEFGBC" in SAMPLE4.

Error information
When the input string variable and output variable exceed the variable area, the insert
If number of characters in insertion string IN1 is less than Insertion position P, insertion string is
inserted at the end of the input string IN1.
If the insertion position P is "0", IN2 is inserted at the start of the input string IN1.
If the string length after insertion exceeds the output string variable size, the result is
unchanged.

Controller Action
Insert string is not executed.
Insert string is not executed.
TRUE(ON).

When EN is used, ENO output is reset to FALSE(OFF) only when the string size is
exceeded or when the string variable is specified as direct I/O.

477

Delete String

String Processing Delete String
LD/FBD language
notation

Input string Output
DELETE
IN

L

P
Deletion character length
Delete position

ST language notation DELETE( IN, L, P, Output );

Arguments


L UINT

Deletion
character
length

Input
P UINT
Delete position


Function
Deletes a string of length L from the deletion position P of the input string IN and
outputs the result.

Program example

SAMPLE1

LD
DELETE
IN

L

P
SAMPLE4

ST
Input string Deleted string
SAMPLE2
4
LD
SAMPLE3
3
LD
B G A
3
Delete position
F G A B C D E
4
Deletion character length

DELETE( SAMPLE1, SAMPLE2, SAMPLE3, SAMPLE4);

Deletes the number of characters specified by deletion character length "4" in
SAMPLE2 from string "ABCDEFG" in SAMPLE1 starting from delete position "3"
specified by SAMPLE3 and stores the result "ABG" in SAMPLE4.
6F8C1226
478

Error information
When the input string variable and output variable exceed the variable area, the delete
If number of characters from delete position P is less than deletion character length, the entire
string starting at position P is deleted.
If Input string length is less than delete position P, the input string is output unchanged.

Controller Action
Delete string is not executed.
When EN is used, ENO output is reset to
FALSE(OFF).
Delete string is not executed.
TRUE(ON).

When EN is used, ENO output is reset to FALSE(OFF).
479

Replace String

String Processing Replace String
LD/FBD language
notation

Input string Output
REPLACE
IN1

IN2

L

P
Replacement character string
Replacement character length
Replacement position


ST language notation REPLACE( IN1, IN2, L, P, Output );

Arguments


IN2 STRING
Replacement
character
string

L UINT

Replacement
character
length
Input
P UINT

Replacement
position


Function
Replaces a string of length L starting at replacement position P of the input string IN1
with replacement character string IN2 and outputs the result.

Program example

SAMPLE1

LD
REPLACE SAMPLE5

ST
Input string Replaced string
SAMPLE2

LD
SAMPLE3
4
LD
Y Z X
3
Replace position
F G A B C D E
4
Replacement character length
IN1
IN2
L
SAMPLE4
3
LD
P
Replace character string
G A B X Y Z

6F8C1226
480

REPLACE( SAMPLE1, SAMPLE2, SAMPLE3, SAMPLE4, SAMPLE5);

For string "ABCDEFG" specified by SAMPLE1, replaces the number of characters
specified by replacement character length in SAMPLE3 starting at Replacement
position 3 specified by SAMPLE4 with the replacement string "XYZ" specified by
SAMPLE2 and stores the result "ABXYZG" in SAMPLE5.

Error information
replace string is not processed and the data boundary is exceeded.
If Input string length is less than replacement position P, the replacement string is output
following the Input string.
If the string length after replacement exceeds the output string variable size, the result is
unchanged.

Controller Action
V series
Replace string is not executed.
Replace string is not executed.
Error flag and table operation error are set to TRUE(ON).

When EN is used, ENO output is reset to FALSE(OFF) only when the string size is
exceeded or when the string variable is specified as direct I/O.

481

Find String

String Processing Find String
LD/FBD language
notation

Input string Output
FIND
IN1

IN2 Search character string

ST language notation Output := FIND( IN1, IN2 );

Arguments

Input
IN2 STRING
Search
character
string

Output UINT Output

Function
Searches the search character string IN2 from the input string IN1 and outputs the first
found string position.
If a matching string cannot be found, 0 is output.
Direct I/O variable cannot be specified for the input string variable.

Program example

SAMPLE1

LD
FIND
IN1

IN2
SAMPLE3
3
ST
Input string Search result
SAMPLE2

LD
Search string
3 B C D E F G A
C D

SAMPLE3 := FIND( SAMPLE1, SAMPLE2);

Searches the string "CD" specified by SAMPLE2 from the string "ABCDEFG" in
SAMPLE1 and stores the result 3 in SAMPLE3.

6F8C1226
482

Error information
When the input string variable exceeds the variable area, the find string is not
string variable:

Controller Action
Result=0.
Result=0.
TRUE(ON).


483

Define String

String Processing Define String
LD/FBD language
notation
String byte count input Output
DEF_STRING

ST language notation DEF_STRING( String byte count input, Output );

Arguments

Input UINT
String byte count input


Function
Reserves a STRING data variable area of string byte count specified with input.

Variable name Data type Dec.
VAR_STRING STRING[8] VAR

In this case, a value from 1 to 8 is set as the string byte count input.
The STRING variable contains the number of string bytes (word size) that can be used
in the variable. However, if STRING is used for a static variable, the above string byte
count information is cleared at run time. Therefore, the STRING type can only be used in
a global variable with retain specification.
Therefore, in order to use STRING variable in a variable scope outside this restriction,
this instruction must be used under the following condition:
To use the string variable in a variable scope that will be initialized, this Define String
instruction must be executed.
Local variable, global variable, SW/D register, IQ register: Must be executed during
run time.
Temporary variable: Must be executed each time POU execution is performed.
Set the string byte count within the string size specified in the variable declaration.
(String size when declaring 1 input STRING)
Updates the word size of the STRING body of the STRING data.
VAR length INT((input+1) / 2)
The string variable can be initialized by using it in combination with Array-String
Conversion (ARRAY_TO_STRING) instruction.
Direct I/O variable cannot be specified for the output variable.
6F8C1226
484

<String data structure>

VAR LENGTH
STRING LENGTH

STRING BODY

1W
1W
Up to 128W
VAR LENGTH Word size of STRIN body
STRING LENGTH Stored byte count
STRING BODY Character code

Important
Specify input within string size of STRING [A] declared in the variable declaration.
If a value greater than this is specified, a boundary error occurs or the content of variable
allocated after STRING [A] will be destroyed. Be very careful when setting the string byte count
input value to be input.

Program example

SAMPLE1
12
LD
DEF_STRING SAMPLE2

ST
SAMPLE2 data structure
STRING LENGTH
STRING BODY
VAR LENGTH=6

DEF_STRING( SAMPLE1, SAMPLE2);

Executes define string instruction with declaration character count "12" in SAMPLE1 in
order to use STRING SAMPLE2 with variable scope=static variable, This declares the
use of a 6 word area in VAR length of STRING SAMPLE2.

Error information
f string byte count input > 256, an abnormal input is assumed and the VAR LENGTH of
the specified STRING is set to 0.
The following operation is performed when direct I/O variable is specified for the output
variable:

Controller Action
Define string is not executed.
Define string is not executed.
TRUE(ON).

2.19 Control Statements
485


1 IF IF
2 THEN THEN
3 ELSE (IF statement) ELSE
4 ELSEIF ELSEIF
5 END_IF END_IF
6 CASE CASE
7 : :
8 . . : . .
9 : , : ,
10 . . , . . ,
11 ELSE (CASE statement) ELSE
12 END_CASE END_CASE
13 FOR_DO FOR_DO
14 EXIT (FOR statement) EXIT
15 END_FOR END_FOR
16 WHILE WHILE
17 DO DO
18 EXIT (WHILE statement) EXIT
19 END_WHILE END_WHILE
20 REPEAT REPEAT
21 UNTIL UNTIL
22 EXIT (REPEAT statement) EXIT
23 END_REPEAT END_REPEAT

6F8C1226
486

IF

Control Statements IF
LD/FBD language
notation

IF

ST language notation IF

Function
Indicates the start of IF statement.
A condition expression is described between IF and THEN. If the condition
expression is TRUE(ON), the code following THEN is executed. If the condition
expression is FALSE(OFF), the code following THEN is skipped and the code
following ELSE is executed.
The condition expression following IF must be instructions that outputs BOOL type
result (such as bit sequence instructions, compare instructions, or logical operation
instructions).

Program example

IF
THEN
ELSE
END_IF

ADD_INT
SAMPLE1
SAMPLE2
SAMPLE3
SUB_INT
SAMPLE1
SAMPLE2
SAMPLE3

Condition expression
Process 1
Process 2

SAMPLE3 := ADD_INT( SAMPLE1, SAMPLE2);
ELSE
END_IF;
487

Process 1 Process 2
Condition
expression
TRUE
FALSE

If the states of condition expression SIGNAL1 and SIGNAL2 are both TRUE(ON),
Process 1 (addition) is performed. Otherwise, Process 2 (subtraction) is performed.
6F8C1226
488

THEN

Control Statements THEN
LD/FBD language
notation

THEN

ST language notation THEN

Function
The following table shows the processing when the condition expression in an IF
statement is satisfied:

Condition Action
Condition expression is
satisfied(TRUE(ON))
Executes the process following
THEN.
Condition expression is not
satisfied (FALSE(OFF))
Does not execute the process
following THEN.

Program example

IF
THEN
ELSE
END_IF

ADD_INT
SAMPLE1
SAMPLE2
SAMPLE3
SUB_INT
SAMPLE1
SAMPLE2
SAMPLE3

Process 1
Process 2

ELSE
END_IF;

489

Process 1 Process 2
Condition
expression
TRUE
FALSE

Process 1 (addition) following THEN is performed. Otherwise, Process 2
(subtraction) following ELSE is performed.
6F8C1226
490

ELSE (IF statement)

Control Statements ELSE (IF statement)
LD/FBD language
notation

ELSE

ST language notation ELSE

Function
The following table shows the processing when the condition expression in an IF statement is
not satisfied:

Condition Action
Condition expression is satisfied
(TRUE(ON))
Does not execute the process
following ELSE.
Executes the process following
ELSE.

Program example

IF
THEN
ELSE
END_IF

ADD_INT
SAMPLE1
SAMPLE2
SAMPLE3
SUB_INT
SAMPLE1
SAMPLE2
SAMPLE3

Process 1
Process 2

ELSE
END_IF;
491

Process 1 Process 2
Condition
expression
TRUE
FALSE

Process 1 (addition) following THEN is performed. Otherwise, Process 2
(subtraction) following ELSE is performed.
6F8C1226
492

ELSEIF

Control Statements ELSEIF
LD/FBD language
notation

ELSEIF

ST language notation ELSEIF

Function
Indicates the start of ELSEIF statement.
A condition expression is described between ELSEIF and THEN. If the condition
expression is TRUE(ON), the code following THEN is executed. If the condition
expression is FALSE(OFF), the code following THEN is skipped and the code
following ELSE is executed.
The condition expression following ELSEIF must be instructions that outputs BOOL
type result (such as syntax instructions, compare instructions, or logical operation
instructions).

Program example

ELSE
END_IF
MUL_INT
SAMPLE1
SAMPLE2
SAMPLE3
Process 3

IF

Condition expression 1
THEN
ADD_INT
SAMPLE1
SAMPLE2
SAMPLE3
Process 1

ELSEIF

Condition expression 2
THEN
SUB_INT
SAMPLE1
SAMPLE2
SAMPLE3
Process 2

493

ELSEIF SIGNAL3 AND SIGNAL4 THEN
ELSE
SAMPLE3 := MUL_INT( SAMPLE1, SAMPLE2);
END_IF;

Process 1 Process 2
Condition
expression 1
TRUE
FALSE
Condition
expression 2
TRUE
FALSE
Process 3

If the states of conditional expression 1 SIGNAL1 and SIGNAL2 are both TRUE(ON),
Process 1 (addition) is performed and if the states of condition expression 2 SIGNAL3
and SIGNAL4 are both TRUE(ON), Process 2 (subtraction) is performed.
Otherwise, Process 3 (multiply) following ELSE is performed.

6F8C1226
494

END_IF

Control Statements END_IF
LD/FBD language
notation
END_IF

ST language notation END_IF

Function
Indicates the end of IF statement.

Program example

IF
THEN
ELSE
END_IF

ADD_INT
SAMPLE1
SAMPLE2
SAMPLE3
SUB_INT
SAMPLE1
SAMPLE2
SAMPLE3

Process 1
Process 2

ELSE
END_IF;

If the states of condition expression
SIGNAL1 and SIGNAL2 are both
TRUE(ON), Process 1 (addition)
following THEN is performed.
Otherwise, Process 2 (subtraction)
following ELSE is performed.

Process 1 Process 2
Condition
expression
TRUE
FALSE
495

CASE

Control Statements CASE
LD/FBD language
notation

CASE
INDEX


ST language notation CASE ( INDEX ) OF

Arguments

Remar
ks
Input INDEX DINT
Index register specification
(condition value)

Function
Specifies the index register used as the start of CASE statement and condition value.
Index registers XIXJXKXLXMXNXPand XQ may be used.

Program example

CASE
END_CASE
ADD_INT
SAMPLE1
SAMPLE2
SAMPLE3
Process 1
SUB_INT
SAMPLE1
SAMPLE2
SAMPLE3
Process 2
INDEX XI
.. :
20 30
:
10

CASE XI OF
10:
20..30:
END_CASE;
6F8C1226
496

Process 1
Process 2
XI10?
FALSE
TRUE
20XI30?
FALSE
TRUE

If the content of index register XI, which is the condition value is "10" Process 1
(addition) is performed and if the content of index register XI is greater than or equal
to "20" and less than or equal to "30" Process 2 (subtraction) is performed.

497

:

:
LD/FBD language
notation

Comparison dat


ST language notation (Comparison data ) :

Arguments

Input DINT
Comparison data

Function
If the content of index register specified with the CASE statement and the content of
comparison data are equal, the code following the[ : ]instruction is executed.
The CASE condition is not evaluated after executing the code following
the[ : ]instruction. (This is equivalent to the C language break statement.)
The comparison data may be specified using variables or constants.

Condition Action
Index register=Comparison data Executes the code following:
Index registerComparison data Does not execute the code following:

Program example

CASE
END_CASE
ADD_INT
SAMPLE2
SAMPLE3
SAMPLE4
Process 1
SUB_INT
SAMPLE2
SAMPLE3
SAMPLE4
Process 2
INDEX XI
.. :
20 30
:
SAMPLE1

6F8C1226
498

CASE XI OF
SAMPLE1:
20..30:
END_CASE;

Process 1
Process 2
XI=SAMPLE1?
FALSE
TRUE
20XI30?
FALSE
TRUE

If the content of index register XI, which is the condition value, is equal to the content
of SAMPLE1, Process 1 (addition) is performed and if the content of index register XI
is between "20" and "30" Process 2 (subtraction) is performed.

499

.. :

Control Statements .. :
LD/FBD language
notation
.. :
Comparison data 1 Comparison data 2


ST language notation (Comparison data 1 ) .. (Comparison data 2 ) :

Arguments

DINT
Comparison data 1

Input
DINT
Comparison data 2

Function
When the content of index register specified with the CASE statement is between
Comparison Data 1 and Comparison Data 2, the code following the[ .. : ]instruction is
executed. The CASE condition is not evaluated after executing the code following
the[ .. : ]instruction. (This is equivalent to the C language break statement.)
Comparison Data 1 and Comparison Data 2 may be specified using variables or
constants.

Condition Action
Index register is between Comparison Data 1 and Comparison
Data 2
Executes the code
following .. :
Index register is outside Comparison Data 1 and Comparison
Data 2
Does not execute the
code following .. :

6F8C1226
500

Program example

CASE
END_CASE
ADD_INT
SAMPLE2
SAMPLE3
SAMPLE4
Process 1
SUB_INT
SAMPLE2
SAMPLE3
SAMPLE4
Process 2
INDEX XI
.. :
20 30
:
SAMPLE1

CASE XI OF
SAMPLE1:
20..30:
END_CASE;

Process 1
Process 2
XI=SAMPLE1?
FALSE
TRUE
20XI30?
FALSE
TRUE

is greater than or equal to "20" and less than or equal to "30," Process 2 (subtraction)
is performed.

501

,

Control Statements ,
LD/FBD language
notation
,
Comparison data


ST language notation ( Comparison data ) , (Comparison data ) :

Arguments

Input DINT
Comparison data

Function
Used to enumerate comparison data in CASE statement.
If the content of index register specified in the CASE statement is equal to the
comparison data or if the subsequent condition is satisfied, the code following the [ ,]
instruction is executed.
The CASE condition is not evaluated after executing the code following the [ ,]
instruction (This is equivalent to the C language break statement).
The comparison data may be specified using variables or constants.

Condition Action
Index register=Comparison data Executes the code following ,
Index registerComparison data Compare the following comparison data

Program example

CASE
END_CASE
ADD_INT
SAMPLE3
SAMPLE4
SAMPLE5
Process 1
SUB_INT
SAMPLE3
SAMPLE4
SAMPLE5
Process 2
INDEX XI
.. :
20 30
,
SAMPLE1
:
SAMPLE2

6F8C1226
502

CASE XI OF
SAMPLE1, SAMPLE2:
SAMPLE5 := ADD_INT( SAMPLE3 , SAMPLE4);
20..30:
SAMPLE5 := SUB_INT( SAMPLE3 , SAMPLE4);
END_CASE;

Process 1
Process 2
XI=SAMPLE1?
FALSE
TRUE
20XI30?
FALSE
TRUE
XI=SAMPLE2?
FALSE
TRUE

of SAMPLE1 or equal to SAMPLE2, Process 1 (addition) is performed and if the
content of index register XI is greater than or equal to "20" and less than or equal to
"30," Process 2 (subtraction) is performed.

503

.. ,

Control Statements .. ,
LD/FBD language
notation
.. ,
Comparison data 1 Comparison data 2


ST language notation (Comparison data 1 ) .. (Comparison data 2 ) , (Comparison data) :

Arguments

DINT
Comparison data 1
Input
DINT
Comparison data 2

Function
Used to enumerate comparison data in CASE statement.
If the content of index register specified in the CASE statement is between
Comparison Data 1 and Comparison Data 2 or if the subsequent condition is satisfied,
the code following the[ .., ]instruction is executed.
The CASE condition is not evaluated after executing the code following the[ .. ,]
instruction (This is equivalent to the C language break statement).
Comparison Data 1 and Comparison Data 2 may be specified using variables or
constants.

Condition Action
Index register is between Comparison Data 1 and Comparison Data 2
Executes the code
following .. ,
Index register is outside Comparison Data 1 and Comparison Data 2
Compare the following
comparison data

6F8C1226
504

Program example

CASE
END_CASE
ADD_INT
SAMPLE3
SAMPLE4
SAMPLE5
Process 1
SUB_INT
SAMPLE3
SAMPLE4
SAMPLE5
Process 2
INDEX XI
.. ,
20 30
:
SAMPLE2
:
SAMPLE1

CASE XI OF
SAMPLE1:
20..30, SAMPLE2:
END_CASE;

Process1
Process 2
XI=SAMPLE1?
FALSE
TRUE
20XI30?
FALSE
TRUE
XI=SAMPLE2?
FALSE
TRUE

is greater than or equal to "20" and less than or equal to "30" or equal to variable
SAMPLE2, Process 2 (subtraction) is performed.
505

ELSE (CASE statement)

Control Statements ELSE (CASE statement)
LD/FBD language
notation

ELSE

ST language notation ELSE

Function
If the content of the index register in the CASE statement does not satisfy any of the
specified conditions, the code following the ELSE statement is executed (This is
equivalent to the C language default statement).

Condition Action
Index register satisfies the condition with the previous
comparison data
Does not execute the code
following ELSE.
Index register does not satisfy the condition with the previous
comparison data
Executes the code following
ELSE.

Program example

CASE
ELSE
ADD_INT
SAMPLE3
SAMPLE4
SAMPLE5
Process 1

SUB_INT
SAMPLE3
SAMPLE4
SAMPLE5
Process 2
INDEX XI
.. ,
20 30
:
SAMPLE2
:
SAMPLE1
END_CASE
MUL_INT
SAMPLE3
SAMPLE4
SAMPLE5
Process 3

6F8C1226
506

CASE XI OF
SAMPLE1:
20..30, SAMPLE2:
ELSE
SAMPLE5 := MUL_INT( SAMPLE3, SAMPLE4);
END_CASE;

Process 1
Process 2
XI=SAMPLE1?
FALSE
TRUE
20XI30?
FALSE
TRUE
XI=SAMPLE2?
FALSE
TRUE
Process 3

of SAMPLE1, Process 1 (addition) is performed and if the content of Index Register XI
is greater than or equal to "20" and less than or equal to "30" or equal to SAMPLE2,
Process 2 (subtraction) is performed. Otherwise, Process 3 (multiplication) is
performed.

507

END_CASE

Control Statements END_CASE
LD/FBD language
notation

END_CASE

ST language notation END_CASE

Function
Indicates the end of CASE statement.

Program example

CASE
END_CASE
ADD_INT
SAMPLE1
SAMPLE2
SAMPLE3
Process 1
SUB_INT
SAMPLE1
SAMPLE2
SAMPLE3
Process 2
INDEX XI
.. :
20 30
:
10

CASE XI OF
10:
20..30:
END_CASE;

6F8C1226
508

Process 1
Process 2
XI=10?
FALSE
TRUE
20XI30?
FALSE
TRUE

If the content of index register XI, which is the condition value, is "10," Process 1
(addition) is performed and if the content of index register XI is greater than or equal
to "20" and less than or equal to "30," Process 2 (subtraction) is performed.
509

FOR_DO

Control Statements FOR_DO
LD/FBD language
notation

FOR_DO
INDEX MIN MAX STEP


ST language notation FOR ( INDEX ) := ( MIN ) TO ( MAX ) BY ( STEP ) DO

Arguments

Rem
arks
INDEX DINT Index register specification (repeat count)

MIN DINT
Initial value input

MAX DINT
Final value input

Input
STEP DINT
Increment input

Function
Indicates the start of FOR statement and sets the loop condition.
The instructions between FOR_DO and END_FOR are repeated until the loop count in
index register reaches the final value.
The loop condition is specified using the index register, which specifies the loop count
INDEX, and variables or constants specifying the initial value MIN, final value MAX,
and increment STEP.

Condition Action
Index register content > Final value End repetition
Index register content Final value Repeats instruction between FOR_DO and
END_FOR

Program example

FOR_DO
END_FOR
ADD_INT
SAMPLE1
SAMPLE2
SAMPLE3
Process 1

END_FOR;
6F8C1226
510

XI=XI+1
Process 1
XI9?
FALSE
TRUE
XI =0

Process 1 (addition) is repeated until the loop count in index register XI exceeds "9".

511

EXIT (FOR statement)

Control Statements EXIT (FOR statement)
LD/FBD language
notation

EXIT

ST language notation EXIT

Function
Forces end of FOR statement.

Program example

SIGNAL2

FOR_DO
ADD_INT
EN ENO
SAMPLE1
SAMPLE2
SAMPLE3
Process 1
SIGNAL1

END_FOR
IF
SIGNAL3

THEN
EXIT
END_IF
Process 2
SIGNAL2

IF SIGNAL2 THEN
EXIT;
END_IF;
END_FOR;

6F8C1226
512

XI=XI+1
Process 1
XI9?
FALSE
TRUE
SIGNAL2?
FALSE
TRUE
XI =0

Process 1 (addition) is repeated until the loop count in index register XI exceeds"9",
but the FOR statement is terminated if the SIGNAL2 in the IF statement is TRUE(ON).
513

END_FOR

Control Statements END_FOR
LD/FBD language
notation

END_FOR

ST language notation END_FOR

Function
Indicates the end of FOR statement.

Program example

FOR_DO
END_FOR
ADD_INT
SAMPLE1
SAMPLE2
SAMPLE3
Process 1

END_FOR;

XI=XI+1
Process 1
XI9?
FALSE
TRUE
XI =0

Process 1 (addition) is repeated until the loop count in index register XI exceeds "9".

6F8C1226
514

WHILE

Control Statements WHILE
LD/FBD language
notation

WHILE

ST language notation WHILE

Function
Indicates the start of WHILE statement.
A condition expression is described between WHILE and DO. The code between DO
and END_WHILE is executed while the condition expression is TRUE(ON) and jumps
to code following END_WHILE when the condition expression becomes FALSE(OFF).
The condition expression following WHILE must contain instruction that outputs BOOL
type result such as bit sequence instructions, compare instructions, or logical
operation instructions).

Program example

WHILE
DO
END_WHILE

ADD_INT
SAMPLE1
SAMPLE2
SAMPLE3
Process 1

WHILE SIGNAL1 AND SIGNAL2 DO
END_WHILE;

Process 1 (addition) is repeated if the states of
SIGNAL1 and SIGNAL2, which are the
condition expression, are both TRUE(ON).
Otherwise, jumps to the code following the
END_WHILE statement.

Process 1
Condition
expression
TRUE
FALSE
515

DO

Control Statements DO
LD/FBD language
notation

DO

ST language notation DO

Function
The following table shows the processing when the condition expression in a WHILE
statement is satisfied:

Condition Action
(TRUE(ON))
Executes the code between DO and
END_WHILE
Does not execute the code between DO
and END_WHILE

Program example

WHILE
DO
END_WHILE

ADD_INT
SAMPLE1
SAMPLE2
SAMPLE3
Process 1

END_WHILE;

SIGNAL1 and SIGNAL2, which are the
condition expression, are both TRUE(ON).
Otherwise, jumps to the code following the
END_WHILE statement.

Process 1
Condition
expression
TRUE
FALSE
6F8C1226
516

EXIT (WHILE statement)

Control Statements EXIT (WHILE statement)
LD/FBD language
notation

EXIT


Function
Forces end of WHILE statement.

Program example

WHILE
SIGNAL4

ADD_INT
EN ENO
SAMPLE1
SAMPLE2
SAMPLE3
Process 1
SIGNAL3
END_WHILE
IF
THEN
EXIT
END_IF
Process 2
SIGNAL5

SIGNAL4
DO
SIGNAL2

SIGNAL1

WHILE SIGNAL1 DO
IF SIGNAL4 THEN
EXIT;
END_IF;
END_WHILE;

517

Process 1
SIGNAL1?
TRUE
FALSE
SIGNAL4?
FALSE
TRUE

Process 1 (addition) is repeated while SIGNAL1, which is the condition expression, is
TRUE(ON), but if the SIGNAL4 in the IF statement is TRUE(ON), termination of the
WHILE statement is forced and jumps to the code following the END_WHILE
statement.
6F8C1226
518

END_WHILE

Control Statements END_WHILE
LD/FBD language
notation

END_WHILE

ST language notation END_WHILE

Function
Indicates the end of WHILE statement.

Program example

WHILE
DO
END_WHILE

ADD_INT
SAMPLE1
SAMPLE2
SAMPLE3
Process 1

END_WHILE;

Process 1
Condition
expression
TRUE
FALSE

Process 1 (addition) is repeated if the states of SIGNAL1 and SIGNAL2, which are the
condition expression, are both TRUE(ON). Otherwise, jumps to the code following
the END_WHILE statement.
519

REPEAT

Control Statements REPEAT
LD/FBD language
notation

REPEAT

ST language notation REPEAT

Function
Indicates the start of REPEAT statement.
Processing is described between REPEAT and UNTIL. The code between REPEAT
and UNTIL is executed while the condition expression following UNTIL is FALSE(OFF)
and jumps to code following END_REPEAT when it becomes TRUE(ON).
The condition expression following UNTIL must contain instruction that outputs BOOL
type result (such as bit sequence instructions, compare instructions, or logical
operation instructions).

Program example

REPEAT
UNTIL
END_REPEAT

ADD_INT
SAMPLE1
SAMPLE2
SAMPLE3
Process 1

REPEAT
UNTIL SIGNAL1 AND SIGNAL2
END_REPEAT;

Process 1
Condition
expression
TRUE
FALSE
SIGNAL1 and SIGNAL2, which are the condition
expression, are not both TRUE(ON). If the states
of SIGNAL1 and SIGNAL2 are both TRUE(ON),
jumps to the code following the END_REPEAT
statement without looping.
6F8C1226
520

UNTIL

Control Statements UNTIL
LD/FBD language
notation

UNTIL

ST language notation UNTIL

Function
Indicates the start of the condition expression of REPEAT statement.

Condition Action
TRUE(ON)
Ends REPEAT - UNTIL loop
satisfied FALSE(OFF)
Executes the code between
REPEAT and UNTIL

Program example

REPEAT
UNTIL
END_REPEAT

Condition
expression
ADD_INT
SAMPLE1
SAMPLE2
SAMPLE3
Process 1

REPEAT
END_REPEAT;

SIGNAL1 and SIGNAL2, which are the condition
expression, are not both TRUE(ON). If the
states of SIGNAL1 and SIGNAL2 are both
TRUE(ON), jumps to the code following the
END_REPEAT statement without looping.

Process 1
Condition
expression
TRUE
FALSE
521

EXIT (REPEAT statement)

Control Statements EXIT (REPEAT statement)
LD/FBD language
notation

EXIT


Function
Forces end of REPEAT statement.

Program example

REPEAT
END_REPEAT
SIGNAL4

ADD_INT
EN ENO
SAMPLE1
SAMPLE2
SAMPLE3
Process 1
SIGNAL3
IF
THEN
EXIT
END_IF
Process 2
SIGNAL5

SIGNAL4
UNTIL
SIGNAL2

SIGNAL1

REPEAT
IF SIGNAL4 THEN
EXIT;
END_IF;
UNTIL SIGNAL1
END_REPEAT;

6F8C1226
522

Process 1
SIGNAL1?
FALSE
TRUE
SIGNAL4?
FALSE
TRUE

Process 1 (addition) is repeated while SIGNAL1, which is the condition expression, is
FALSE(OFF), but if the SIGNAL4 in the IF statement is TRUE(ON), termination of the
REPEAT statement is forced and jumps to the code following the END_REPEAT
statement.
523

END_REPEAT

Control Statements END_REPEAT
LD/FBD language
notation

END_REPEAT

ST language notation END_REPEAT

Function
Indicates the end of REPEAT statement.

Program example

REPEAT
UNTIL
END_REPEAT

Condition
expression
ADD_INT
SAMPLE1
SAMPLE2
SAMPLE3
Process 1

REPEAT
END_REPEAT;

Process 1
Condition
expression
TRUE
FALSE

Process 1 (addition) is repeated if the states of SIGNAL1 and SIGNAL2, which are the
condition expression, are not both TRUE(ON). If the states of SIGNAL1 and
SIGNAL2 are both TRUE(ON), jumps to the code following the END_REPEAT
statement without looping.

6F8C1226
524

2.20 Communication

1
Socket Communication Send
USEND_T V dedicated instruction
2 Socket Communication Send USEND_N nv dedicated instruction
3
Socket Communication Receive
URCV_T V dedicated instruction
4 Socket Communication Receive URCV_N nv dedicated instruction
5
Communication FB (XMIT_T) XMIT_T V dedicated instruction
6 Communication FB (XMIT_N) XMIT_N nv dedicated instruction

Note
Socket communication instruction for Integrated Controller is USEND_T/URCV_T and socket
communication instruction for Unified Controller is USEND_N/URCV_N.
When using an Integrated Controller user application for Unified Controller, the socket
communication instructions and commands must be changed.
The following items must be remembered to change USEND_T/URCV_T into
USEND_N/URCV_N.
Change in socket communication instruction
Socket communication send: USEND_TUSEND_N
Socket communication receive: URCV_TURCV_N
Instruction instances are stored in different areas:
USEND_T/URCV_T instance: static variable area
USEND_N/URCV_N instance: nontracking type, static variable area
Since the referential description of the output argument differs, refer to the [ST language
notation]of the instruction manual.
When using socket communication with duplex system, see Notes for duplex system in this
section.
Integrated Controller: application of EN7** to Unified Controller EN8**
For EN7** and EN8**, the instructions and referential description of the output arguments
must be changed.
Integrated Controller: application of EN311 to Unified Controller EN911
For EN311 and EN911, the socket communication instructions, command contents (command
structure, command number) and referential description of the output arguments must be
changed.

2.20 Communication
525


Communication Socket Communication Send
V dedicated
instruction
LD/FBD language
notation

Completion output
Send command
Send data word number
Send data
Execution request
USEND_T
REQ

CMD

P

N
Error
Socket no. or error status
Instance name
DONE
ERROR
STATUS

ST language notation [Instance name]( REQ, CMD, P, N );
[Variable name]:=[Instance name]. DONE;
[Variable name]:=[Instance name]. ERROR;
[Variable name]:=[Instance name]. STATUS;

Arguments

REQ BOOL

Execution request
CMD PTR Send command
P PTR Send data
Send data word number
(Send word command)
1 to 1000 words
Input
N UINT

Send data bytes number
(Send bytes command)
1 to 2000 bytes
STATUS INT Socket No. or error status

Send command data structure

15 0
Requested Ethernet module slot no.
Socket service command
Requested parameter
(See below for details)

6F8C1226
526

Instance structure

ERROR BOOL Error
program.
Cannot be accessed from the
user program.

Restrictions

Item
S3 S2 L3 L2 L1
# of Ethernet modules/stations 4 1
# of sockets/Ethernet modules 12
Single bus Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
TCP/IP
Duplex bus No No Yes Yes No
Protocol
UDP/IP
Duplex bus Yes Yes Yes Yes No
Transferred text size/socket
Send word command: 1000 words
Send bytes command: 2000 bytes

Function
This is a function block that communicates with TCP/IP or UDP/IP protocol using the
Ethernet module.
When the execution request REQ changes from FALSE(OFF) to TRUE(ON), N words
starting from send data P are sent with the content of the specified send command
CMD.
Word send command: send data word number is 1 to 1000, byte send command: can
be specified from 1 to 2000 bytes.
When data transfer completes, completion output DONE is kept TRUE(ON) for one
scan time.
If an error occurs, ERROR is kept TRUE(ON) for one scan time.
When transfer completes successfully or unsuccessfully, Socket No. or error status
STATUS contains the detailed completion information.
The instruction completes successfully (DONE=ON) starting from the second scan
after execution request (REQ=ON). Therefore, depending on how the control cycle is
set and application program is created, it may take several seconds before normal
completion.
The request command differs according to Ethernet module. Following sections
describe request commands. Also, a list of error status codes is included after the
URCV_T instruction (Error Status Code List).
Notes on using this communication function block instruction in a duplex system are
included after the Error Status Code List (Notes for duplex system).
2.20 Communication
527
Ethernet module type and request command type

Model
Module execution
location
Bus type Module name Request command type*
Single EN711, EN731, EN751* Single bus request command
Main unit
Duplex
EN721, EN741, EN761
FN711*
Single bus request command and
duplex bus request command
3000
Parallel I/O unit Single EN311 EN311 request command
2000 Main unit
Duplex
EN621/EB621,
EN641/EB641, EN661
FN611
1000 Main unit Single EN531* Single bus request command
Notes on request command type
Both the single bus request command and duplex bus request command may be used for duplex bus
(EN721, EN741, EN761, FN711*, EN621/EB621, EN641/EB641, EN661, FN611), but the duplex bus
request command cannot be used for single bus (EN711, EN731, EN751, EN611, EN631, EN651*, EN531*).
Be sure to use a single bus request command.
When the destination is single bus, use a single bus request command even if the source Ethernet module
is duplex bus.

Single bus request command

: Available /: Unavailable
Command description Command S3 S2 L3 L2 L1
Reset request 16#0011

Other station confirmed request 16#0014

Socket batch close request 16#001B

UDP open request 16#0031

UDP send request / broadcast 16#0032

UDP close request 16#0034

TCP open request 16#0035

TCP send request 16#0037

TCP close request 16#0039

UDP bytes send request 16#0042

TCP bytes send request 16#0047


6F8C1226
528

Duplex bus request command

: Available/: Unavailable






EN311 request command


Parameter setting request 16#0312

Operation mode control request 16#0313


Time setting request 16#0318

Router IP address setting request 16#0319

PC link (register write request) 16#0321







Single bus/duplex bus request command
The single bus request command and duplex bus request command have different command
numbers, but their structure is the same. They will be described together.
Reset request
Resets the Ethernet module from the user program.
The request command and error status are as follows:

15 0
Requested Ethernet module slot No.
Command (16#0011)
<Request command>
<Error status>
15 0
=0: Normal complete, 0: Error status
2.20 Communication
529

Remote station verification request
Verifies the existence of the specified station (Equivalent to Ping).
The structure of the request command and the socket No. or error status are as
follows:

Notes on duplex bus Ethernet module: The "Other station confirmed request" is not a
duplex bus request command. Make the request by specifying the IP address for
both Ethernet A and B systems. Program according to the system request
specification (such as the command is successful if either A or B is successful/the
command is successful if both A and B are successful).

Socket batch close request
The source controller closes all the opening sockets for the Ethernet module specified
by the requested Ethernet module slot No.
This command is supported by the following versions of S3 Controller.

S3 Controller Support version
S3PU55/S3PU55/S3PU65 (Single/Duplex) V02.7J and following versions
S3PU65 (Duplex reliability improvement version) V03.7E and following versions

The request command structure and error status are as follows:

15 0
Command (16#001B)
<Request command>
<Error status>
15 0
=0: Normal completer, 0: Error status
15 0
Command (16#0014)
<Request command>
<Error status>
15 0
D-IP address
D-IP address : Destination IP address to be verified

6F8C1226
530

UDP open request
Opens the requested socket.
Communication protocol: UDP/IP

Socket No. is set in STATUS when UDP completes successfully (DONE=ON). This
socket No. is used to obtain the send, receive, close, and EN board control socket
identifier.

15 0
Command (16#0031)/Duplex (16#0231)
<Request command>
<Socket No. or error status>
15 0
Socket No. (0 to 11), error status
UDPPort No. : UDP port No. of the specified source socket (1024 to 65535)
UDPPort No.
2.20 Communication
531

UDP send request/broadcast send request
Sends source data using the opened UDP socket.
Number of transferred data words: 1 to 1000

UDP close request
Ends the opened UDP sockets. Also cancels receive requests (unlimited wait state).

15 0
Command (16#0034)/Duplex (16#0234)
<Request command>
<Error status>
15 0
0: Normal complete, 0: Error status
Socket No. :Socket ID (0 to 11) (identifier obtained with UDP open)
Socket No.
15 0
Command (16#0032)/Duplex (16#0232)
<Request command>
<Error status>
15 0
Socket No. :Socket ID (0 to 11) (identifier obtained with UDP open)
D-IP address :Destination IP address
Specifying 255.255.255.255 as the destination IP address results in
broadcast send.
D-UDPPort No. :Destination socket UDP port No.
Socket No.
D-IP address
D-UDPPort No.

6F8C1226
532

TCP open request
Opens (active/passive) the requested port.
Communication protocol: TCP/IP

Socket No. is set in STATUS when TCP completes successfully (DONE=ON). This
socket No. is used to obtain the send, receive, close, and EN board control socket identifier.

TCP send request
Sends the source data using the opened TCP connection.
Send data word number: 1 to 1000 words

15 0
Command (16#0035)/Duplex (16#0235)
<Request command>
15 0
Type
D-IP address
D-TCPPor tNo.
S-TCPPort No.
TimeCnt
Type :Open type (1/2)
1=Active open - client
2=Passive open - server
D-IP address :Destination IP address (valid only for active open)
D-UDPPort No. :Destination socket TCP port No. (valid only for active open)
S-TCPPort No. :Source specified socket TCP port No.
TimeCnt :Receive wait timeout interval (1 to 65535: 0.1 second unit, 0:
unlimited)
(valid only for passive open)
15 0
Command (16#0037)/Duplex (16#0237)
<Request command>
<Error status>
15 0
Socket No. :Socket ID (0 to 11) (identifier obtained by TCP open)
Socket No.
2.20 Communication
533

TCP close request
Ends an opened TCP connection and closes the socket.
Also cancels open/receive requests (unlimited wait state).

UDP byte send request
Number of transferred data bytes: 1 to 2000 bytes

15 0
Command (16#0042)
<Request command>
<Error status>
15 0
Socket No. :Socket ID (0 to 11) (identifier obtained by UDP open)
D-IP address : Destination IP address
Specifying 255.255.255.255 as the destination IP address results
in broadcast send.
D-UDPPort No. : Destination socket UDP port No.
Socket No.
D-IP address
D-UDPPort No.
15 0
Command (16#0039)/Duplex (16#0239)
<Request command>
<Error status>
15 0
Socket No.

6F8C1226
534

TCP byte send request
Send data word number: 1 to 2000 bytes

15 0
Command (16#0047)
<Request command>
<Error status>
15 0
Socket No.
2.20 Communication
535

EN311 request commands
Reset request
Resets EN311 from the user program.

<Request command>

Error status:

Command (16#0311)
15 0
15 0
Bus Requested Ethernet module sl ot No. Unit Slot
12 8

Error status 16#EC** (-50**) indicates that the error was detected by the CPU module
and 16#B** indicates that it was detected by the EN311 (* is any number).

Parameter setting request
Sets EN311 parameters for a standy mode EN311 from a user program.
<Request command>

S-IP address :Source IP address
UDPPort No. :UDP port No. (1024 to 65535)

<Error status>

Command (16#0312)
S-IP address
15 0
=0: Normal complete 0: Error status
UDPPort No.
15 0
Bus Requested Ethernet module slot No. Unit Slot
12 8

6F8C1226
536

Operation mode control request
Controls the operation of EN311 from the user program.
<Request command>

Specified information
Bit13:Changes EN311 from run mode to standby mode.
Bit12:Changes EN311 from standby mode to run mode.
Bit5 :Message transmission 1:Enabled, 0:Disabled
Bit4 :Socket transmission 1:Enabled, 0:Disabled
<Error status>

Command (16#0313)
Specified information
15 0
15 0
12 8

Remote station verification request
Verifies the existence of the specified station (Equivalent to Ping).
<Request command>

D-IP address :Destination IP address to be verified
Error status:

Command (16#0314)
D-IP address
15 0
=0: Normal completion 0: Error status
15 0
12 8

Time setting request
Sets the EN311 internal clock from the user program.
<Request command>

<Error status>

Command (16#0318)
Month
15 0
=0: Normal completion 0: Error status
15 0
12 8
Year
Hour Date
Second Minute

2.20 Communication
537

Router IP address setting request
Sets the router IP address of a standby mode EN311 from the user program.
The request command structure and Error status are as follows:
<Request command>

<Error status>

Command (16#0319)
Router IP address
15 0
15 0
12 8

PC link register write request
Writes the data in specified source register into the specified destination register.

15 0
Requested Ethernet module slot
No.
Command (16#0321)
<Request command>
<Error status>
15 0
Bus Slot Unit
12 8
DRID
Dreg No.
TimeCnt
D-IP address
D-UDPPort No.
DRID :Destination register type code
(Only register D can be specified when the destination is S3).
0=XW/YW
1=W
2=LW
3=RW
4=D
5=F (0 to 32767)
6=F (0 to 65535)
7=T
8=C
9=SW
DRegNo. :Destination register No.
TimeCnt :Timeout interval 1 to 32767 (0.1 second unit) when bit 15=0
Defaults to 30 seconds when bit15=1
D-UDPPort No. : Destination UDP port No.

6F8C1226
538

UDP open request
<Request command>

Socket No. :Socket ID (1 to 8)
UDPPort No. :UDP port No. of the specified source socket (1024 to 65535)


Command (16#0331)
Socket no.
15 0
Socket No. , error status
15 0
Bus
Unit Slot
12 8
UDPPort No.

UDP send request / broadcast send request
Number of transferred data words: 1 to 1000 words

15 0
Command (16#0332)
<Request command>
<Error status>
15 0
Bus Slot Unit
12 8
Socket No.
D-UDPPort No.
Socket No. : Socket ID (1 to 8)
Specifying 255.255.255.255 as the destination IP address results in
broadcast send.
D-IP address
2.20 Communication
539

UDP close request

TCP open request
<Request command>

Type :Open type (1/2)
1=Active open - client
2=Passive open - server
D-TCPPortNo. :Destination socket TCP port No.
S-TCPPortNo. :Source specified socket TCP port No.
TimeCnt :Receive wait timeout interval (1 to 65535: 0.1 second unit, 0: unlimited)
Socket No. or error status:
Command (16#0335)
Socket No.
15 0
Socket No. ( 1 to 8), error status
15 0
12 8
Type
S-TCPPortNo.
D-TCPPortNo.
D-IP address
TimeCnt

15 0
Requested Ethernet module slot
No.
Command (16#0334)
<Request command>
<Error status>
15 0
Bus Slot Unit
12 8
Socket No. (1 to 8)

6F8C1226
540

TCP send request
<Request command>


<Error status>

Command (16#0337)
Socket No.
15 0
15 0
Bus
Unit Slot
12 8

TCP close request
<Request command>


< Error status>

Command (16#0339)
Socket No.
15 0
15 0
Bus
Unit Slot
12 8

=0 : Normal complete, 0 : Error status
=0 : Normal complete, 0 : Error status
2.20 Communication
541

Program example
SIGNAL1
1
LD
USEND_T
SIGNAL2

ST
REQ
SAMPLE1

LD
SAMPLE2

LD
SAMPLE3
50
LD
CMD
P
N
Request command SAMPLE1
2
16#0031
8080
Slot No.
UDP open request
Source station UDP port No.
DONE
ERROR
STATUS
SIGNAL3

ST
SAMPLE5

ST
USEND_T_1

USEND_T_1( SIGNAL1, SAMPLE1, SAMPLE2, SAMPLE3);
SIGNAL2 := USEND_T_1.DONE;
SIGNAL3 := USEND_T_1.ERROR;
SAMPLE5 := USEND_T_1.STATUS;

The request command (slot No.=2, Command=16#0031, Source UDP port No.=8080)
is specified with SAMPLE1.
UDP open request specified with the request command is made at the rise of
SIGNAL1 from FALSE(OFF) to TRUE(ON).
When UDP open completes normally, the completion output SIGNAL2 is kept
TRUE(ON) for one scan time. The socket ID is stored in status output SAMPLE5.
When UDP open is unsuccessful, the error output SIGNAL3 is kept TRUE(ON) for one
scan time. The error status is stored in status output SAMPLE5.


6F8C1226
542


Communication Socket Communication Send
nv dedicated
instruction
LD/FBD language
notation

Completion output
Request command
Send data word no.
Send data
Execution request
USEND_N
Error
Socket no. or error
status
Instance name
ERROR
STATUS
DONE
CMD
N
P
REQ

[Variable name]:= @[Instance name]. DONE;
[Variable name]:= @[Instance name]. ERROR;
[Variable name]:= @[Instance name]. STATUS;

Arguments

REQ BOOL
Execution request
CMD PTR Request command
P PTR Send data
EN8**send data word No.
(for word send command)
1 to1000 words
EN8**send data bytes No.
(for bytes send command)
1 to 2000 bytes
EN9**send data word No.
(for word send command)
1 to 700 words
Input
N UINT

EN9**send data bytes No.
(for bytes send command)
1 to 1400 bytes

2.20 Communication
543

Request command data structure

Instance structure

ERROR BOOL Error
program.
Cannot be accessed from the
user program.

Restrictions

Item
type1 type2
Ethernet modules/stations 4
EN8** 48 (Max.48/controller) Sockets /Ethernet
modules (Note) EN9** 12 (Max.48/controller)
Single bus Yes Yes
TCP/IP
Duplex bus No Yes
Single bus Yes Yes
Protocol
UDP/IP
Duplex bus No Yes
EN8**
For word send command: 1000 words
For byte send command: 2000 bytes Transmission text
size/socket
EN9**
For word send command: 700 words
For byte send command:1400 bytes
EN9** support Yes No
(Note) The total number of sockets using multiple Ethernets modules (e.g. EN8 and EN9) are
max.48/Controller.
<EN8**> <EN9**>
15 0
Request parameter
15 0
ID code (16#F001)
Requested Ethernet module
Request parameter
<Requested Ethernet module Basic unit slot/node/unit/slot>
15 0
Unit
8 7
Slot
Basic unit slot Node

6F8C1226
544

Function
This is a function block for the Unified Controller nv series that communicates with
TCP/IP or UDP/IP protocol using the Ethernet module.
When execution request REQ changes from FALSE(OFF) to TRUE(ON), N words
starting from send data P are sent with the content of the specified request command
CMD.
The send data word number varies depending on the Ethernet module.
For EN8**word send command, send data word number is 1 to 1000 words. For byte
send command, it is one to 2000 bytes.
For EN9**word send command, send data word number is 1 to 700 words. For byte
send command, it is 1 to 1400 bytes.
When transfer is completed normally, completion output DONE becomes TRUE(ON)
for one scanning time.
scanning time.
When transfer is completed with or without an error, the details are output to socket No.
or error status STATUS.
The instruction completes normally (DONE=ON) starting from the second scan after
execution request (REQ=ON). Therefore, depending on how the control cycle is set
and application program is created, it may take several seconds before normal
completion.
Direct I/O variable cannot be specified for send data.
The request commands vary depending on the Ethernet module. The request
commands are described below. Also, a list of error status codes is included after the
URCV_N instruction (Error Status Code List).
2.20 Communication
545

Ethernet module type and request command type:

Type
Module installation
location
Single EN811 Single bus request command
Main unit
Duplex
type1
TC-net I/O unit Single EN911 EN911 request command
type2 Main unit
Duplex FN812
Both the single bus request command and duplex bus request command may be used
for duplex bus (FN812), but the duplex bus request command cannot be used for
single bus (EN811). Be sure to use a single bus request command.
When the destination is single bus, use a single bus request command even if the
source Ethernet module is duplex bus.

: Available : Unavailable
Command description Command type1 type2



UDP send request/broadcast 16#0032





UDP byte send request 16#0042

TCP byte send request 16#0047

Duplex bus request command (In development)







6F8C1226
546

: Available / : Unavailable








UDP byte send request 16#0942

TCP byte send request 16#0947

The single bus request command and duplex bus request command have different
command numbers, but their structure is the same. They will be described together.

Reset request
Resets the Ethernet module from the user program.
The request command and Error status are as follows:

15 0
Command (16#0011)
<Request command>
<Error status>
15 0
2.20 Communication
547

Other station confirmed request
Verifies the existence of the specified other station (Equivalent to Ping).
The request command and Error status are as follows.

Notes on duplex bus Ethernet module: The "Other station confirmed request" is not a
duplex bus request command. Make the request by specifying the IP address for
both Ethernet A and B systems. Program according to the system request
specification (such as the command is successful if either A or B is successful/the
command is successful if both A and B are successful).

UDP open request

socket No. is used to obtain the send, receive, close, and EN board control socket
identifier.
15 0
Command (16#0031)/Duplex (16#0231)
<Request command>
15 0
Socket No. (0 to47), error status
UDPPort No. : UDP port No of the specified source socket (1024 to 65535)
UDPPort No.
15 0
Command (16#0014)
<Request command>
<Error status>
15 0
D-IP address
D-IP address : Destination IP address to be verified.

6F8C1226
548

Number of transferred data words: 1 to 1000 words.

UDP close request

15 0
Command (16#0034)/Duplex (16#0234)
<Request command>
<Error status>
15 0
Socket No. : Socket ID(0 to 47)
(identifier obtained by UDP open)
Socket No.
15 0
Command (16#0032)/Duplex (16#0232)
<Request command>
<Error status>
15 0
Socket No. : Socket ID (0 to 47) (identifier obtained with UDP open)
Destination IP address: Destination IP address
in broadcast send.

Socket No.
D-IP address
D-UDPPort No.
2.20 Communication
549

TCP open request

Socket No. is used to obtain the send, receive, close, and EN board control socket
identifier.

TCP send request

15 0
Command (16#0037)/Duplex (16#0237)
<Request command>
<Error status>
15 0
(identifier obtained by TCP open)
Socket No.
15 0
Command (16#0035)/Duplex (16#0235)
<Request command>
15 0
Type
D-IP address
D-TCPPort No.
S-TCPPort No.
TimeCnt
Type : Open type (1/2)
1= Active open - client
2= Passive open - server
D-IP address : Destination IP address (valid only for active open)
D-TCPPort No. : Destination socket TCP port no. (valid only for active open)
S-TCPPort No. : Source specified socket TCP port No.
TimeCnt : Receive wait timeout interval (1 to 65535: 0.1 second unit, 0:
unlimited)

6F8C1226
550

TCP close request


15 0
Command (16#0042)
<Request command>
<Error status>
15 0
in broadcast send.
Socket No.
D-IP address
D-UDPPort No.
15 0
Command (16#0039)/Duplex (16#0239)
<Request command>
<Error status>
15 0
Socket No.
2.20 Communication
551


15 0
Command (16#0047)
<Request command>
<Error status>
15 0
Socket No.

6F8C1226
552

EN911 request command differs from the EN8** in the request command format. There
is an identification code (16#F001) at the top of the request command. The specified
format (2 words) of the requested Ethernet module is also different. The contents
following the command are the same although the numbers are different.

Reset request
Resets the Ethernet module from the user program. The reset request is valid then
EN9**, which issues the reset request, is specified for I/O fallback.

Other station confirmed request
Verifies the existence of the specified other station. (Equivalent to Ping)
The request command and error status are as follows:

15 0
ID code (16#F001)
<Request command>
<Error status>
15 0
D-IP address : Destination IP address to be verified
Command (16#0914)
D-IP address
15 0
ID code (16#F001)
Command (16#0911)
<Request command>
<Error status>
15 0
2.20 Communication
553

UDP open request
Opens requested sockets.

socket No. is used to obtain the send, receive, close and EN board control socket
identifier.

Number of transferred data words: 1 to 700 words

15 0
ID code (16#F001)
<Request command>
<Error status>
15 0
Socket No. : Socket ID (0 to 47) (identifier obtained by UDP open)
in broadcast send.
Socket No.
Command (16#0932)
D-IP address
D-UDPPort No.
15 0
ID code (16#F001)
<Request command>
15 0
UDPPort No. : UDP port No. of the specified source socket (1024 to 65535)
Command (16#0931)
UDPPort No.

6F8C1226
554

UDP close request
Ends the opened UDP sockets. Also cancels receive request (unlimited wait state).

TCP open request
Opens (active/passive) the requested port. ,

socket No. is used to obtain the send, receive, close and En board control socket
identifier.
15 0
ID code (16#F001)
Command (16#0935)
<Request command>
15 0
Type
D-IP address
D-TCPPort No.
S-TCPPort No.
TimeCnt
Type : Open type (1/2)
1= Active open - client
2= Passive open - server
D-IP address : Destination IP address (valid only for active open)
D-TCPPort No. : Destination socket TCP port no. (valid only for active open)
S-TCPPort No. : Source specified socket TCP port No.
unlimited)
15 0
ID code (16#F001)
<Request command>
<Error status>
15 0
Command (16#0934)
Socket No.
2.20 Communication
555

TCP send request

TCP close request

15 0
ID code (16#F001)
Command (16#0939)
<Request command>
<Error status>
15 0
Socket No. : Socket ID (0 to 47) (identifier obtained by TCP open)
Socket No.
15 0
ID code (16#F001)
Command (16#0937)
<Request command>
<Error status>
15 0
Socket No.

6F8C1226
556



15 0
ID code (16#F001)
Command (16#0947)
<Request command>
<Error status>
15 0
Socket No.
15 0
ID code (16#F001)
Command (16#0942)
<Request command>
<Error status>
15 0
Socket no. : Socket ID (0 to 47) (identifier obtained by UDP open)
in broadcast send.
Socket No.
D-IP address
D-UDPPortn No.
2.20 Communication
557

Program example

USEND_N_1( SIGNAL1, SAMPLE1, SAMPLE2, SAMPLE3);
SIGNAL2 := @USEND_N_1.DONE;
SIGNAL3 := @USEND_N_1.ERROR;
SAMPLE4 := @USEND_N_1.STATUS;

The request command (slot No.=2, Command=16#0031, Source UDP port No.=5000)
is specified with SAMPLE1.
UDP open request specified with the request command is made at the rise of
When UDP open completes normally, the completion output SIGNAL2 is kept
TRUE(ON) for one scan time. The socket ID is stored in status output SAMPLE4.
scan time. The error status is stored in status output SAMPLE4.

Error information
When the specified range of the send data exceeds the area, the socket
communication send is not processed and the data boundary is exceeded.
The following operation is performed when direct I/O variable is specified for the send
data:

Controller Action
Socket communication send is not executed.
TRUE(ON).

USEND_N
REQ
CMD
P
N
DONE
ERROR
STATUS
SAMPLE1
LD
SIGNAL1
SAMPLE2
LD
SAMPLE3
0
LD
SIGNAL2
SIGNAL3
SAMPLE4
ST
16#0031
5000
Slot No.
UDP open request
Source station UDP port No.
2
USEND_N_1

6F8C1226
558


Communication Socket Communication Receive
V dedicated
instruction
LD/FBD language
notation
Completion output
Request command
Receive data word count
Receive data
Execution request
URCV_T
REQ DONE

CMD ERROR

P STATUS

N
Error
Status
Instance name


Arguments

REQ BOOL
Execution request
P PTR Receive data
Receive data word No.
(for word receive command)
1 to 1001 words Input
N UINT

Receive data byte No.
(for byte receive command)
2 to 2002 bytes
STATUS INT Status

Instance structure

ERROR BOOL Error
STATUS INT Status

Cannot be accessed from the user program.
15 0
Request parameter
(See below for details)
2.20 Communication
559

Restrictions

Item S3 S2 L3 L2 L1
Ethernet modules/stations 4 1
Sockets/Ethernet modules 12
TCP/IP
Duplex bus No No Yes Yes No
Protocol
UDP/IP
Duplex bus Yes Yes Yes Yes No
Transferred text size/sockets
For word receive command: 1001 words
For byte receive command: 2002 bytes

Function
This is a function block for Integrated Controller V series that communicates with
TCP/IP or UDP/IP procedure using the Ethernet module.
When the Execution request REQ changes from FALSE(OFF) to TRUE(ON), N words
starting from Receive data P are received with the content of the specified Receive
command CMD.
Word receive command: receive data word number may be from 1 to 1001 words,
byte receive command: receive data byte number may be from 2 to 2002.
When data receive completes, Completion output DONE is kept to TRUE(ON) for one
scan time.
If an error occurs, ERROR is kept to TRUE(ON) for one scan time.
The detail status is output to STATUS when receive completes normally or abnormally.
completion.
Request commands differ by the Ethernet module. Each request command is
described from the following pages. Also, a list of error status codes is included after
the URCV_T instruction (Error Status Code List).


6F8C1226
560


Model
Module installation
location
Single EN711,EN731,EN751* Single bus request command
Main unit
Duplex
EN721,EN741,EN761
FN711*
3000
Parallel I/O unit Single EN311 EN311 request command
2000 Main unit
Duplex
EN621/EB621,
EN641/EB641, EN661
FN611
1000 Main unit Single EN531* Single bus request command
Both the single bus request command and duplex bus request command may be
used for duplex bus (EN721, EN741, EN761, FN711*, EN621/EB621, EN641/EB641,
EN661, FN611), but the duplex bus request command cannot be used for single bus
(EN711, EN731, EN751, EN611, EN631, EN651*, EN531*). Be sure to use a single
bus request command.
When the destination is single bus, use a single bus request command even if the
source Ethernet module is duplex bus.

Get EN board management socket
identifier
16#0016

En board management socket number

acquisition request
16#001A

UDP receive request/broadcast 16#0033

TCP receive request 16#0038

UDP byte receive request 16#0043

TCP byte receive request 16#0048

Duplex bus request command


RAS information read 16#0315

PC link (register read request) 16#0321



2.20 Communication
561


EN board management socket identifier acquisition
This command is used to refer detailed information of Ethernet module sockets.
En board management socket identifier is obtained from opened socket identifier.

The socket No. obtained by UDP/TCP open command is a number controlled by the
communication function block instruction and is different from the real socket No.
obtained by the Ethernet module. Send, receive, or close can be performed using the
socket No. obtained with an open command. However, the detailed information for
each socket controlled by Ethernet module cannot be accessed. Therefore, use this
command to obtain the socket No. controlled by the Ethernet module and access the
socket information using that value as offset.
The information for each socket controlled by the Ethernet module is available as
station global. Register a station global variable or use direct instruction word notation
(%MW13.offset address) to access it from the user application program.
The information for each socket is organized as follows:

15 0
Command (16#0016)
<Request command>
15 0
Socket No. : Socket ID (0 to11) (identifier obtained by UDP open)
Socket No.

6F8C1226
562

Ethernet module detailed information for each socket
Overall structure:

Socket 0
Socket 1
:
Socket 63
Socket information
for single bus request
command
(1 word x 64 sockets)
TCP
F
UDP
E
AOP
D
POP
C
CON
B
RCV
A
RCL
9
Reserved
8 0
The structure of each slot is the same.
Socket 0
Socket 1
:
Socket 63
Socket information
for single bus request
command
(1 word x 64 sockets)

Top offset
address
+64

Bit description:

Name Description Set condition Reset condition
TCP Using TCP During TCP open During socket close request
UDP Using UDP During UDP open During socket close request
AOP Active open During TCP active open During socket close request
POP Passive open During TCP passive open During socket close request
CON Connecting During TCP connection
During socket close request
or when RCL is ON
RCV Receive data When there is receive data No receive data
RCL Disconnected
When closed by opposite
party when connecting

2.20 Communication
563

Top offset address:

Model Slot Top offset address
0 130944
1 655232
2 1179520
3 1703808
4 2228096
5 2752384
6 3276672
2000/3000
7 3800960
1000 1 65280

(Ex.) Socket 4 information of single bus request command installed in slot 3 for model 3000

Direct notation
%MW13.1703811
LD ST
SOCKET_INF3 [4]
LD ST

Station variables (Slot3)

Variable Data type Word No. Bit No.
SOCKET_INF3 Array[0..63] OF WORD 1703808 0

EN board management socket number acquisition request
The number of socket information for the source Controller, which is managed by
Ethernet module specified by the requested Ethernet module slot No. is obtained.
This command is supported by the versions after S3 Controller.
S3Controller Support version
S3PU55/S3PU55/S3PU65 (Single/Duplex) V02.7J and following versions
S3PU65 (Duplex reliability improvement version) V03.7E and following versions

15 0
Command (16#001A)
<Request command>
<Status>
15 0
Management socket No.

6F8C1226
564

UDP receive request/broadcast receive request
Receives data from opened UDP socket.
Receive data word number: 1 to 1001 (number of words including the received bytes
(1W))

TCP receive request
Receives data from opened TCP socket.
Receive data word number: 1 to 1001 words (number of words including the received
bytes (1W))

15 0
Command (16#0038)/Duplex (16#0238)
<Request command>
<Error status>
15 0
TimeCnt :Receive wait timeout interval (1 to 65535: 0.1 second unit, 0:
unlimited)
Socket No.
TimeCnt
15 0
Command (16#0033)/Duplex (16#0233)
<Request command>
<Error status>
15 0
D-IP address : Source IP address
Specifying 0.0.0.0 as the source IP address results in broadcast
receive.
D-UDPPort No. : Source socket UDP port No.
Do not check the source port when the command is duplex
(16#0233) or UDP port No. is "0".
unlimited)
Socket No.
D-IP address
D-UDPPort No.
TimeCnt
2.20 Communication
565

UDP byte receive request
Receive data word number: 2 to 2002 bytes (including the storage area for receive
byte count (2 bytes))

TCP byte receive request

15 0
Command (16#0048)
<Request command>
<Error status>
15 0
TimeCnt : Receive wait time out interval (1 to 65535: 0.1 sec. unit, 0: unlimited)
Socket No.
TimeCnt
15 0
Command (16#0043)
<Request command>
<Error status>
15 0
Socket No. : Socket ID (0 to11) (identifier obtained by UDP open)
receive.
TimeCnt : Receive wait time out interval (1 to 65535: 0.1 sec. unit, 0: unlimited)
Socket No.
D-IP address
D-UDPPort No.
TimeCnt

6F8C1226
566

Read RAS information request
Reads EN311 RAS information (internal error information and event log) from the user
program.
The request command structure and Error status are as follows:

Error status 16#EC** (-50**) indicates that the error was detected by the CPU module
and 16#B** indicates that it was detected by the EN311 (* is any number).

15 0
Command (16#0315)
<Request command>
<Error status>
15 0
RAS request type :Specify the type of RAS information to be read.
1=RAS counter
2=MIB information
3=Maintenance data (this data cannot be used)
4=Event trace information
5=RAS information area
Start position : Valid only when the read request type is 2 (MIB
information) or 4 (trace information).
MIB information
0=MIB_IF
1=MIB_IP
2=MIB_TCP
3=MIB_UDP
4=MIB_ICMP
Trace information : Read position (0 to 160), 0 is the latest information
Read number : Valid only when the read request type is 4 (event trace
information).
1 to 30.
RAS request type
Start position
Read number
Requested Ethernet module slot No. Bus Slot Unit
2.20 Communication
567

PC link register read request
Reads the data in the specified destination register to the specified source register.

15 0
Command (16#0321)
<Request command>
<Error status>
15 0
Bus Slot Unit
12 8
DRID
Dreg No.
TimeCnt
D-IP address
D-UDPPort No.
DRID : Destination register type code
(Only register D/SW can be specified when the destination is S3.)
0=XW/YW
1=W
2=LW
3=RW
4=D
5=F (0 to 32767)
6=F (0 to 65535)
7=T
8=C
9=SW
Dreg No : Destination register No.
TimeCnt : Time out interval 1 to 32767 (0.1 second unit) when bit 15=0
Defaults to 30 seconds when bit15=1
D-UDPPort No. : Destination UDP port No.

6F8C1226
568

bytes (1W))

TCP receive request
bytes (1W))

15 0
Requested Ethernet module slot No
Command (16#0338)
<Request command>
<Error status>
15 0
Bus Slot Unit
12 8
Socket No.
TimeCnt : Receive timeout interval (1 to 65535: 0.1 second unit, 0: unlimited)
TimeCnt
15 0
Command (16#0333)
<Request command>
<Error status>
15 0
Bus Slot Unit
12 8
Socket No.
D-UDPPort No.
Specifying 0.0.0.0 as the source IP address results in broadcast receive.
D-UDPPort No. : Source socket UDP port no.
TimeCnt : Receive wait timeout interval (1 to 65535: 0.1 second unit, 0: unlimited)
D-IP address
TimeCnt
2.20 Communication
569

Program example

SIGNAL1
1
LD
URCV_T SIGNAL2

ST
REQ
SAMPLE1

LD
SAMPLE2

LD
SAMPLE3
50
LD
CMD
P
N
2
16#0033
11
Slot No.
UDP receive request
UDP socket No.
DONE
ERROR
STATUS
SIGNAL3

ST
SAMPLE5

ST
16#12_34_56_78
8080
300
Send source IP address
Send source target socket UDP No.
Receive wait timeout
URCV_T_1

URCV_T_1( SIGNAL1, SAMPLE1, SAMPLE2, SAMPLE3);
SIGNAL2 := URCV_T_1.DONE;
SIGNAL3 := URCV_T_1.ERROR;
SAMPLE5 := URCV_T_1.STATUS;

The request command (Slot No.=2, Command=16#0033, UDP socket No.=11, Source
IP address=16#12_34_56_78, Source socket UDP No.=8080, Receive timeout
inteval=30 seconds) is specified with SAMPLE1.
UDP receive request specified with the request command is made at the rise of
When UDP receive completes normally, the completion output SIGNAL2 is kept
TRUE(ON) for one scan time. "0" is stored in status output SAMPLE5.
When UDP receive request is unsuccessful, the error output SIGNAL3 is kept
TRUE(ON) for one scan time. The error status is stored in status output SAMPLE5.

6F8C1226
570


Communication Socket Communication Receive
nv dedicated
instruction
LD/FBD language
notation

Completion
output
URCV_N
Error
Status
Instance name
CMD
N
P
REQ
ERROR
STATUS
DONE
Execution request
Request command
Receive data
Receive data word
count



Arguments

REQ BOOL
Execution request
P PTR Receive data
EN8**receive data word No.
(For word receive command)
1 to 1001 words
EN8** receive data word No.
2 to 2002 bytes
1 to 701
Input
N UINT

2 to 1402 bytes
STATUS INT Status

2.20 Communication
571


Instance structure

DONE BOOL
Completion
output
ERROR BOOL Error
STATUS INT Status
program.

Restrictions

Item type1 type2
Ethernet modules/stations 4
EN8** 48 (Max.48/Controller) Sockets /Ethernet
modules (Note) EN9** 12 (Max.48/Controller)
Single bus Yes Yes
TCP/IP
Duplex bus No No
Single bus Yes Yes
Protocol
UDP/IP
Duplex bus No Yes
EN8**
For word receive command:1001 words
For byte receive command:2002 bytes Transferred text
size/sockets
EN9**
For word receive command:701 words
For byte receive command:1402 bytes
EN9** support Yes No
(Note) The total number of sockets using multiple Ethernets modules (e.g. EN8** and
EN9**) are max.48/Controller.

<EN8**> <EN9**>
15 0
Request parameter
15 0
ID code (16#F001)
Request parameter
<Requested Ethernet module Basic unit slot/node/unit/slot>
15 0
Unit
8 7
Slot
Basic unit slot Node

6F8C1226
572

Function
This is a function block that communicates with TCP/IP or UDP/IP procedure using the
Ethernet module.
When execution request REQ changes from FALSE(OFF) to TRUR(ON), N words
starting from receive data P are received with the content of the specified request
command CMD.
Receive data word numbers differ by the Ethernet modules. For EN8** word receive
command, receive data number is 1 to 1001 words and for byte receive command,
receive data byte number is 2 to 2002 bytes.
For EN9** word receive command, receive data word number is 1 to 701 words and
for byte receive command, receive byte number is 2 to 1402.
When receive is completed normally, completion output DONE becomes TRUE(ON)
for one scanning time.
scanning time.
When receive is completed with or without an error, the details are output to status
STATUS.
completion.
Direct I/O variable cannot be specified for receive data.
The request commands and error codes vary depending on the Ethernet module.

2.20 Communication
573


Type
Module installation
location
Bus type Module name Request command type *
Main unit
Duplex
type1
TC-net I/O unit Single EN911 EN911 request command
type2 Main unit
Duplex FN812
Both the single bus request command and duplex bus request command may be used for
duplex bus (FN812), but the duplex bus request command cannot be used for single bus
(EN811). Be sure to use a single bus request command.
When the destination is single bus, use a single bus request command even if the source
Ethernet module is duplex bus.

Single bus request command (In development)

EN board management socket identifier
acquisition
16#0016





Duplex bus request command (In development)




EN board management socket identifier
acquisition
16#0916






6F8C1226
574


Used to refer to the detailed information of each socket of the Ethernet module.
Obtains the EN board management socket identifier from the opened socket identifier.
The request command and Error status are as follows:

Relation between socket No. obtained with the open command and socket No.
obtained with this command.
obtained by the Ethernet module. Send, receive, or close can be performed using
the socket No. obtained with an open command. However, the detailed information
for each socket controlled by Ethernet module cannot be accessed. Therefore, use
this command to obtain the Socket No. controlled by the Ethernet module and access
the socket information using that value as offset.
station global. Register a station global variable or use direct instruction word
notation (%MW13.offset address) to access it from the user application program.

15 0
Command (16#0016)
<Request command>
15 0
Socket No.
(identifier obtained by UDP/TCP open)
2.20 Communication
575

Ethernet module detailed information for each socket
Overall structure:

Bit description:

Name description Set condition Reset condition
TCP Using TCP During TCP open
During socket close
request
UDP Using UDP During UDP open
During socket close
request
AOP Active open During TCP active open
During socket close
request
POP Passive open During TCP passive open
During socket close
request
During socket close
request or when RCL is ON
RCL Disconnected
When closed by opposite
party when connecting
During socket close
request
NOA TCP timeout
Response from opposite
party is interrupted during
connection
During socket close
request

Socket information
for single bus
request command
(1 word64
sockets)
Tope offset
address
Socket information
for single bus
request command
(1 word64
sockets)
+64
Socket 0
Socket 1
Socket 63
UDP TCP AOP POP CON RCV RCL Reserve
E F D C B A 9 8 0

:
Socket0
Socket 1
Socket 63

:
NOA
7

6F8C1226
576

Top offset address:

Type Slot Top offset address
0 130944
2 2228096
3 3276672
4 4325248
5 5373824
6 6422400
type1/2
7 7470976

(Ex.) Socket 4 information of single bus request command installed in slot 3 for type 1.

Direct notation
%MW13.3276672
LD ST
SOCKET_INF3 [4]
LD ST

Station global variable (Slot3)

SOCKET_INF3 Array[0..63] OF WORD 3276672 0

2.20 Communication
577

Receive data word number: 1 to 1001 words (including the storage area for receive
byte count (1W))

TCP receive request
Receive data word number: 1 to 1001 words (including the storage area for receive
byte count (1W)).

15 0
Command (16#0038)/Duplex (16#0238)
<Request command>
<Error status>
15 0
unlimited)
Socket No.
TimeCnt
15 0
Command (16#0033)/Duplex (16#0233)
<Request command>
<Error status>
15 0
receive.
Do not check the source port when the command is duplex (16#0233)
or UDP port No. is 0.

Socket No.
D-IP address
D-UDPPort No.
TimeCnt

6F8C1226
578



15 0
Command (16#0048)
<Request command>
<Error status>
15 0
TimeCnt : Receive timeout interval (1 to 65535: 0.1 second unit, 0: unlimited)
Socket No.
TimeCnt
15 0
Command (16#0043)
<Request command>
<Error status>
15 0
receive.
D-UDPPort No. : Source socket UDP port no.
unlimited)
Socket No.
D-IP address
D-UDPPort No.
TimeCnt
2.20 Communication
579

EN911 request command differs from the EN8** in the request command format. There
is an identification code (16#F001) at the top of the request command. The specified
format (2 words) of the requested Ethernet module is also different. The contents
following the command are the same although the numbers are different.

Used to refer to the detailed information of each socket of the Ethernet module.
Obtains the EN board management socket identifier from the opened socket identifier.

Relationship between the socket No. obtained by open command and socket No.
obtained by this command
obtained by the Ethernet module. Send, receive, or close can be performed using the
socket No. obtained with an open command. However, the detailed information for
each socket controlled by Ethernet module cannot be accessed. Therefore, use this
command to obtain the socket No. controlled by the Ethernet module and access the
socket information using that value as offset.
station global. Register a station global variable or use direct instruction word notation
(%MW13.offset address) to access it from the user application program.

15 0
Command (16#0916)
<Request command>
15 0
Socket No.
(identifier obtained by UDP/TCP open)
ID code (16#F001)

6F8C1226
580

Detailed information for each socket of Ethernet module
Overall structure:

Bit description:

Name Description Set condition Reset condition
TCP Using TCP During TCP open During socket close request
UDP Using UDP During UDP open During socket close request
AOP Active open During TCP active open During socket close request
POP Passive open During TCP passive open During socket close request
During socket close request or
when RCL is ON
RCL Disconnected
When closed by opposite party
when connecting
NOA TCP timeout
Response from opposite party is
interrupted during connection

I/O variable (standard variable)

EN9_SOCK_M_NN_SS (Note) ARRAY [0..11] OF WORD 33 0
(Note) Where variable name: EN9_SOCK_M_NN_SS:
M : Main slot No.
NN : TCnet I/O loop node No.
SS : TCnet I/O slot No.
A unique variable name is registered for each EN911 module.

(Ex.)
Information of TC-net I/O loop node No.=3 connected to the Controller and EN9119 socket 4
installed in TC-net I/O slot No.=5:

TC-net I/O loop block
(Node no.3)*16+96
Word no.=33 Socket 0
Socket 1
Socket 11
UDP TCP AOP POP CON RCV RCL Reserve
E F D C B A 9 8 0

:
Socket
information for
EN911 request
command
(1 word*12
sockets)
NOA
7
EN9_SOCK_0_03_05[4]

LD
TEMP

ST
2.20 Communication
581

bytes (1W).

TCP receive request
Received data word number: 1 to 701 words (number of words including the received
bytes (1W)).

15 0
Command (16#0938)
<Request
<Error status>
15 0
TimeCnt : Receive wait timeout interval (1 to 65535: 0.1 sec unit, 0: unlimited)
Socket No.
TimeCnt
ID code (16#F001)
15 0
Command (16#0933)
<Request command>
<Error status>
15 0
Specifying 0.0.0.0 as the source IP address results in
broadcast receive.
Socket No.
D-IP address
D-UDPPort No.
TimeCnt
ID code (16#F001)

6F8C1226
582


Receive data word number : 2 to 1402 bytes (including the storage area for receive

15 0
Command (16#0948)
<Request command>
<Error status>
15 0
TimeCnt : Receive wait timeout interval1 to 65535: 0.1 sec unit, 0: unlimited)
Socket No.
TimeCnt
ID code (16#F001)
15 0
Command (16#0943)
<Request command>
<Error status>
15 0
Specifying 0.0.0.0 as the source IP address results in
broadcast receive.
Socket No.
D-IP address
D-UDPPort No.
TimeCnt
ID code (16#F001)
2.20 Communication
583

Program example

URCV_N_1( SIGNAL1, SAMPLE1, SAMPLE2, SAMPLE3);
SIGNAL2 := @URCV_N_1.DONE;
SIGNAL3 := @URCV_N_1.ERROR;
SAMPLE4 := @URCV_N_1.STATUS;

The request command (Slot No.=2, Command=16#0033, UDP socket No.=11, Source
IP address=172.16.64.5, Source socket UDP No.=5000, Receive timeout interval=30
seconds) is specified with SAMPLE1.
UDP receive request specified with the request command is made at the rise of
When UDP receive completes normally, the completion output SIGNAL2 is kept
TRUE(ON) for one scanning time. "0" is stored in status output SAMPLE4.
scanning time. The error status is stored in status output SAMPLE4.
Error information
When the specified range of receive data exceeds the area, the socket communication
receive is not processed and the data boundary is exceeded.
receive data.

Controller Action
Socket communication receive is not executed.
URCV_N_1
URCV_N
REQ
CMD
P
N
DONE
ERROR
STATUS
SAMPLE1
LD
SIGNAL1
SAMPLE2
LD
SAMPLE3
50
LD
SIGNAL2
SIGNAL3
SAMPLE4
ST
16#0033
11
Slot No.
UDP receive request
2
UDP socket No.
Source IP address
172.16.64.5
5000
Source target socket UDP No.
300
Receive timeout
16#AC_10_
40_5

6F8C1226
584

Error Status Code List

EN7: When using EN7**/EN6**/EN8**/EN9**module
EN3: When using EN3** module
EN9: When using EN9** module (Error status unique to EN9**)
Error
code
Error description Request type
2819 Source standby EN3: UDP/TCP send / receive
2848
Timeout occurred
EN3: Other station verification, PC link register R/W
TCP open, UDP receive
2864 Length abnormal EN3: UDP/TCP send
2880 Station mode abnormal EN3: Router IP address setting
2896
MAC/IP not set
EN3: Operation mode control, router IP address
setting
2912 Transmission prohibited state EN3: UDP/TCP open/close, UDP/TCP send
Port No. abnormal EN3: Parameter setting
2929
IP address abnormal Router IP address setting
2931 Time setting error (year) EN3: Time setting request
2932 Time setting error (month) EN3: Time setting request
2933 Time setting error (day) EN3: Time setting request
2934 Time setting error (hour) EN3: Time setting request
2935 Time setting error (minute) EN3: Time setting request
2936 Time setting error (second) EN3: Time setting request
2944 Already opened EN3: UDP/TCP open
2945 Socket not open EN3: UDP/TCP send / receive, UDP/TCP close
2947 Invalid control request specification EN3: Operation mode control
3008 Resource shortage error EN3: UDP send
3009
Receive request from CPU (word count)
abnormal
EN3: UDP/TCP receive
3011 Send buffer full EN3: TCP send
3012 Destination window size small EN3: TCP send
Invalid connection destination IP address EN7: TCP open
-11
Unable to send to specified destination EN7: UDP/TCP send
Timeout. Connection does not complete within
prescribed time
EN7: TCP open
-12
Timeout UDP/TCP receive
-14 Connection broken on the local system EN7: UDP/TCP send / receive
Resource shortage EN7: TCP open
Resource reservation failure EN7: UDP/TCP send, TCP close
-15
Unable to create socket because there is no
buffer area
EN7: UDP/TCP open
Not a valid socket identifier EN7: UDP/TCP open/close, UDP/TCP send/receive
-16
One of the socket identifier specified with bit
mask is invalid
EN7: TCP open
Argument (addr or addr length) not in valid
area within user address space
EN7: UDP/TCP open
-17
Invalid argument (buffer pointer) pointer UDP/TCP send/receive
2.20 Communication
585

Error
code
Socket is set to asynchronous I/O mode and
there is none waiting connection
EN7: TCP open
No receive data EN7: UDP/TCP receive
-8
Send request not accepted EN7: UDP/TCP send
-19 Invalid message size EN7: UDP/TCP send
Bind already complete EN7: TCP open
-22
Invalid parameter EN7: TCP open
Connection is broken EN7: UDP/TCP receive
-32
Attempt was made to send to disconnected
socket
EN7: UDP/TCP send, TCP close
Invalid argument (name, name length) EN7: TCP open
-50
Invalid destination address specification EN7: UDP/TCP send
-54 Specified protocol not supported EN7: UDP/TCP open
-55
Specified socket type not supported in address
family
EN7: UDP/TCP open
Specified socket is not SOCK_STREAM type EN7: TCP open
Socket is not a type supporting listen EN7: TCP open
-56
Specified operation not supported with that
socket
EN7: UDP/TCP receive
Specified address family is currently
unsupported
EN7: UDP/TCP open
-58
Specified address family cannot be used with
that socket
EN7: UDP/TCP send
-59 Given address is already used EN7: UDP/TCP open
-60 Given address cannot be used in this system EN7: UDP/TCP open
-67 The socket is already connected EN7: TCP open
-69 Shutdown is issued EN7: UDP/TCP send
-71 Protocol error EN7: TCP open
-1001 Corresponding socket is busy EN7: All requests
-1002 Corresponding socket not generated EN7: All requests
-1005 PING timeout EN7: Other station verification
-1006 PING busy EN7: Other station verification
-1010 Socket type abnormal EN7: All requests
-1101 Receive memory block shortage EN7: Receive related requests
-2001 Communication request count exceeded EN7: All requests
-2002 Request buffer count exceeded EN7: All requests
-2005 Corresponding socket not open EN7: All requests
-2006 Used port count exceeded EN7: All requests
-2007 Reply timeout EN7: All requests
-2008 Buffer resource reservation failure EN7: All requests
-2009 EN board reset in progress EN7: All requests
-2201 Interrupt accept wait timeout EN7: All requests
-2202 Verification/specification response wait timeout EN7: All requests

6F8C1226
586

Error
code
-5000
Communication instruction request count
exceeded
EN7: Reset, other station verification, UDP/TCP open
-5001 Command type abnormal EN7/EN3: All requests
-5002 Receive timeout EN7: All requests
-5003 Socket in use or not open EN7: UDP/TCP send/receive
-5004 Outside slot socket No. range EN7/EN3: All requests
-5005
Socket not open EN7: UDP/TCP send/receive, close
EN3: Socket No. retrieval
-5006 Duplicate port No. EN7: UDP/TCP open
-5007 Destination busy or disconnected EN7: TCP open send/receive
-5030 Invalid reset request EN9: Reset request
-5050 Reset in progress EN3: All except reset request
-5051 Register error (source) EN3: PC link register R/W
-5052 Response timeout (source) EN3: PC link register R/W
-5054 Memory write protect (source) EN3: PC link register R/W
-5056 Request count exceeded EN3: All requests
-5060 Boundary error (source) EN3: PC link register R/W
-5071 Register error (destination) EN3: PC link register R/W
-5072 Response timeout (destination) EN3: PC link register R/W
-5074 Memory write protect (destination) EN3: PC link register R/W
-5076 Send completion timeout (destination) EN3: PC link register R/W
-5080 Boundary error (destination) EN3: PC link register R/W
-5099 Other errors EN7: UDP/TCP send / receive

2.20 Communication
587

Notes for Duplex System
In a duplex system, the station bus transmission modules are separate modules in the
primary side and secondary side. Therefore, management information for transmission
modules is different (different resources).
For the control of the station bus transmission modules (e.g. socket generation), there is
a difference of whether to perform tracking of instance data of communication instruction
between the communication instruction for the integrated controller (USEND_T/URCV_T)
and communication instruction for the unified controller (USEND_N/URCV_N).
Therefore, in a user application program using communication instructions, information
must be initialized at duplex switching so that the operation starts from the initialization
state (socket open processing) again.
Refer to the overview of processing at duplex switching and user application examples
below, and make sure that the operation starts from the initialization state.
USEND_T/URCV_T/USEND_N/ URCV_N instruction does not operate unless this
operation is done.


6F8C1226
588

Overview of processing
1) Detect online upgrade with duplex switching event task (EV3).
Set the flag indicating that duplex switching occurs to TRUE(ON) ([Example (1)]).
(Example: DUPLEX_CHG_REQ=TRUE(ON))
2) In each of the programs using communication, initialize the instance data of
USEND_T/URCV_T instruction at duplex switching. Also, initialize information so
that the operation starts from the initialization state (socket open processing) again.
Initialization program ([Example (2)])

Important
Reset the flag that indicates that duplex switching set to TRUE(ON) in 1) occurs to FALSE(OFF)
when the initialization of all the related USEND_T/URCV_T instructions for all programs are
completed (initialization is performed only for the first scan after duplex switching).

Change the description to P equivalent circuit ([Example (3)]) if the REQ command
is input to USEND_T/URCV_T/USEND_N/URCV_N instruction using the
differentiation instruction (e.g. P).
Perform normal programming of USEND_T/URCV_T/USEND_N/URCV_N instruction
after implementing 2).

Controller
Communication
instruction
Tracking of
instruction
instance data
Instruction
instance data
initialize
Equivalent circuit of REQ
command to
communication instruction
Send USEND_T Integrated Controller
V series Receive URCV_T
Yes Required
Send USEND_N Unified Controller
nv series Receive URCV_N
No Not required
Required

2.20 Communication
589

Program example
[[Example (1)]: Program that detects online upgrade in EV3

[Example (2)]: Initialization program

DUPLEX_
CHG_REQ
TINZ_WORD
4

LD
16#0000

LD
N
USEND_T_1

ST
(** Initialize USEND_T_1 instance **)
B4_REQ_CMD B4_REQ_CMD REQ_CMD REQ_CMD (** Initialization of derivative contact
equivalent circuit variable of
USEND_T REQ command **)
DUPLEX_
CHG_REQ
DUPLEX_
CHG_REQ (** Duplex switch flag is reset. However, execute
flag when initialization of all USEND_T/URCV_T is
completed. **)
(R) (R)
(R)

[Example (3)]: P equivalent circuit and USEND_T instruction program

The ST language does not support the equivalent notations as the LD language, so data
hold types such as -(R)- and -(S)- or change detection types such as -|P|- and -|N|-
cannot be described. Therefore, program examples are omitted here.
REQ_CMD REQUEST B4_REQ_CMD REQ_CMD B4_REQ_CMD
(** USEND_T program **)
REQUEST
USEND_T
REQ
USEND_T_1
CMD
P
N
P
LD
CMD
LD
N
LD
DONE
ERROR
STATUS
DONE
ST
ERROR
ST
STATUS
ST
REQ_CMD REQUEST
Circuit when |P| is used
REQUEST
P
(** P input equivalent circuit to REQ command of USEND_T**)
DUPLEX_
CHG_REQ
DUPLEX_
CHG_REQ

6F8C1226
590

Communication FB (XMIT_T)

Communication Communication FB(XMIT_)
V dedicated
instruction
LD/FBD language
notation

Completion
output
Bus / Unit / Slot / Node no.
Send/receive data
Request command
Execution request
XMIT_T
REQ DONE

PRM ERROR

CMD STATUS

DATA
Error
Status
Instance

ST language notation [Instance name]( REQ, PRM, CMD, DATA );

Arguments

REQ BOOL
Execution request
PRM PTR
Bus / Unit / Slot / Node No.

Input
DATA PTR Send/receive data
STATUS INT Status

Instance structure

ERROR BOOL Error
STATUS INT Status
RESERVE ARRAY 3W reserved Cannot be accessed from the user program.

Function
Function block that communicates with FL-net custom procedure using FL-net
module.
Send / receive is performed with the content of the specified request command CMD
at the rise of execution request REQ.
The format of the bus / unit / slot / node No. PRM is as follows:

15
Unit Bus Slot
8 12 0
Node No.

2.20 Communication
591

Refer to the FL-net User's Guide for the detail of the request command CMD.
The table data specified with DATA is sent during send and the received data is stored
in table specified with DATA during receive.
Completion output Q and ERROR are set to TRUE(ON) for one scan only.
The STATUS contains the completion code if normal completion and error status if
abnormal completion.
Refer to the FL-net User's Guide for the detail of the code No.

Program example

SIGNAL1
1
LD
XMIT_T SIGNAL2

ST
REQ
SAMPLE1

LD
SAMPLE2

LD
SAMPLE3

LD
PRM
CMD
DATA
Bus / Unit / Slot / Node No.: SAMPLE1
16#000A
1
1
Bus/Unit/Slot
Node No.
Command No.
DONE
ERROR
STATUS
SAMPLE3

ST
SAMPLE5

ST
0
0
10
Area specification
Offset H
XMIT_T_1
Request command: SAMPLE2
4 Offset L
Read word size

XMIT_T_1( SIGNAL1, SAMPLE1, SAMPLE2, SAMPLE3);
SIGNAL2 := XMIT_T_1.DONE;
SIGNAL3 := XMIT_T_1.ERROR;
SAMPLE5 := XMIT_T_1.STATUS;

Bus / Unit / Slot / Node No. (basic unit/slot 10, node No. 1) is specified with SAMPLE1.
Request command (Command=cyclic data read, Area=area1, Offset address=4, Read
word count=10 words) is specified with SAMPLE2.
The cyclic data read request specified with request command is made at the rise of
When cyclic data read request completes normally, the completion output SIGNAL2 is
set to TRUE(ON) for one scanning time. Also, the normal completion code is stored
in SAMPLE5, which is the status output.
When cyclic data read request is unsuccessful, the error output SIGNAL3 is set to
TRUE(ON) for one scanning time. Also, the error status is stored in SAMPLE5,
which is the status output.

6F8C1226
592

Communication FB (XMIT_N)

Communication Communication FB(XMIT_N)
nv dedicated
instruction
LD/FBD language
notation
Completion
output
Basic unit slot/node/unit/
slot/node No.
Send/receive data
Request command
Execution request
XMIT_N
Error
Status
Instance name
REQ DONE
PRM ERROR
CMD STATUS
DATA


ST language notation [Instance name]( REQ, PRM, CMD, DATA );

Arguments

Valid
range
REQ BOOL

Execution request
PRM PTR Basic unit slot / node / unit / slot / node No.
Input
DATA PTR Send/receive data
STATUS INT Status

Instance structure

ERROR BOOL Error
STATUS INT Status
RESERVE ARRAY 3W Reserved Cannot be accessed from the user program.

Function
This function block communicates with FL-net custom procedure using FL-net module.
Send/receive is performed with the content of the specified request command CMD at
the rise of execution request REQ.
The format of basic unit slot / node / unit / slot / node No. RM is as follows:

15 8 7 0
Node No.
Slot
Unit
Node Basic unit slot

2.21 Duplex Control
593
For details on request command CMD, refer to "FL-net Operation Manual."
The table data specified with DATA is sent during send and the received data is stored
in table specified with DATA during receive.
Completion output Q and ERROR are set to TRUE(ON) for one scan only.
The STATUS contains the completion code if normal completion and error status if
abnormal completion.
For details on code number, refer to "FL-net Operation Manual."
For MREAD_N, MWRITE_N, XMIT_N instructions, up to the maximum requests can
be made simultaneously per controller. (Maximum request number : type1=48,
type2=24)

Program example

Basic unit slot/node/unit/slot/node No.:
SAMPLE1
65005
16#010A Unit/Slot
16#0003 Basic unit slot/node
Command No.
16#8000
10
Virtual address (L)
Read word size
SIGNAL1
1
LD
XMIT_N SIGNAL2

ST
REQ
SAMPLE1

LD
SAMPLE2

LD
SAMPLE3

LD
PRM
CMD
DATA
DONE
ERROR
STATUS
SIGNAL3

ST
SAMPLE5

ST
XMIT_N_1
Request command: SAMPLE2
16#0001 Virtual address (H)
1 Node No.

XMIT_T_1( SIGNAL1, SAMPLE1, SAMPLE2, SAMPLE3);
SIGNAL2 := @XMIT_T_1.DONE;
SIGNAL3 := @XMIT_T_1.ERROR;
SAMPLE5 := @XMIT_T_1.STATUS;
Basic unit slot / node / unit / slot / node No. (builtin, node 3, unit 1, slot 10, node No.
1) is specified with SAMPLE1.
Request command (command word block read, virtual address =16#0001_8000,
read word count =10 words) is specified with SAMPLE2.
The word block read request specified with request command is made at the rise of
When the word block read request is completed normally, the completion output
SIGNAL2 becomes TRUE(ON) for one scanning time. Also, the normal completion
code is stored in SAMPLE5, which is the status output.
When the word block read request is not completed normally, the error output
SIGNAL3 becomes TRUE(ON) for one scanning time. Also, the error status is stored
in SAMPLE5, which is the status output.
6F8C1226
594

2.21 Duplex Control

1
Duplex OnlineStandby Change DUPLEX_CHG
2
Duplex SelfSystem Down DUPLEX_DOWN
3
Partial Equalizer (variable specification) EQUALIZE_VAR
V dedicated
instruction
4
Partial Equalizer (address specification) EQUALIZE_ADDR
V dedicated
instruction

2.21 Duplex Control
595

Duplex OnlineStandby Change

Duplex Control Duplex OnlineStandby Change
LD/FBD language
notation

DUPLEX_CHG


ST language notation Output := DUPLEX_CHG(Execution control input);

Arguments

Input BOOL

Execution
control input

Output BOOL Output

Function
If the execution control input is FALSE(OFF), FALSE(OFF) is output without
If the execution control input is TRUE(ON), online and standby are changed and
TRUE(ON) is output.

Execution
control input
Action Output
TRUE(ON) Executed TRUE(ON)

Program example

SIGNAL2 := DUPLEX_CHG( SIGNAL1);

Online and standby are changed when the execution control input SIGNAL1 is
TRUE(ON).
SIGNAL2
1
ST
DUPLEX_CHG SIGNAL1
1
ST
6F8C1226
596

PS IF PU PS IF PU
DUPLEX_CHG
Online Standby
Before instruction execution:
PS IF PU PS IF PU
Online Standby
After instruction execution:

Error information
This instruction has no affect on non-duplex system.
If the target system is not in standby state, no switching is performed.
2.21 Duplex Control
597

Duplex SelfSystem Down

Duplex Control Duplex SelfSystem Down
LD/FBD language
notation

DUPLEX_DOWN


S T language notation Output := DUPLEX_DOWN(Execution control input);

Arguments

Input BOOL

Execution
control input

Output BOOL Output

Function
If the execution control input is FALSE(OFF), FALSE(OFF) is output without
If the execution control input is TRUE(ON), shutdown of self system is forced and
TRUE(ON) is output.

Execution
control input
Action Output
TRUE(ON) Executed TRUE(ON)

Program example

SIGNAL1
1
LD
DUPLEX_DOWN

SIGNAL2
1
ST

SIGNAL2 := DUPLEX_DOWN( SIGNAL1);

When the execution control input SIGNAL1 is TRUE(ON), shutdown of the self system
is forced.
6F8C1226
598

PS IF PU PS IF PU
DUPLEX_DOWN
Online Standby
Before instruction execution:
PS IF PU PS IF PU
Online Down
After instruction execution:

Error information
This instruction has no affect on non-duplex system.
When the target system is not in standby state, the self system is not shutdown.
2.21 Duplex Control
599

Partial Equalizer (variable specification)

Duplex Control Partial Equalizer (variable specification)
V dedicated
instruction
LD/FBD language
notation

Variable
specification
Parameter normal/abnormal
output
EQUALIZE_VAR
Equalizer size N

ST language notation Parameter normal/abnormal output := EQUALIZE_VAR(variable
specification, N );

Arguments

PTR Variable specification
Input
N UINT
Equalizer size 1 N 1024

Output BOOL
Parameter
normal/abnormal output
Normal: TRUE(ON)
Abnormal:
FALSE(OFF)

Function
Equalizes an N word area starting from the variable specified with the variable
specification.
Variables for which partial equalization can be specified are DW register and user
variables.
One to 1024 words may be specified for equalizer size N.
If N>1024, operation is performed assuming N=1024 and output is reset to
FALSE(OFF) to indicate a parameter error.
If N=0, no operation is performed.
If the specified variable is not a DW register or user variable, or if variable
specification+size exceeds the area of the variable, output is reset to FALSE(OFF) to
indicate a parameter error.
Up to eight partial equalize (variable specification, address specification) requests are
possible within the same single scan.
Subsequent equalize requests are not executed and output is reset to FALSE(OFF) to

6F8C1226
600

Program example

SIGNAL1 := EQUALIZE_VAR( SAMPLE1, SAMPLE2);

Partially equalizes a 100 words area starting from user SAMPLE1.

Error information
When this instruction is used on nonduplex system, no operation is performed and
parameter error occurs.
If the destination system is in standby, partial equalize is not performed.

SIGNAL1
1
ST
EQUALIZE_VAR SAMPLE1

LD
SAMPLE2
100
LD
N
User variable

100W
SAMPLE1
Equalize 100W starting from
SAMPLE 1
2.21 Duplex Control
601

Partial Equalizer (address specification)

Duplex Control Partial Equalizer (address specification)
V dedicated
instruction
LD/FBD language
notation

Variable type specification Parameter
EQUALIZE_ADDR
Top address specification
ADDR
SCOPE
N Equalize size

ST language notation Parameter normal/abnormal output := EQUALIZE_ADDR( SCOPE,
ADDR, N );

Arguments

SCOPE UINT

Variable type specification
3: DW register
4: User variable
ADDR DINT
Top address specification ADDR 0

Input
N UINT
Equalize size 1 N 1024

Output BOOL
Parameter
Normal: TRUE(ON)
Abnormal:
FALSE(OFF)

Function
In the variable SCOPE specified with variable type, equalizes an N word area starting
from the top address ADDR.
Variables for which partial equalization can be specified are DW register (=3) and user
variables (=4).
One to 1024 words may be specified for equalizer size N.
If N > 1024, operation is performed assuming N=1024 and output is reset to
FALSE(OFF) to indicate a parameter error.
If N=0, no operation is performed.
If the specified variable is not a DW register (=3) or user variable (=4), or if top
address+size exceeds the area of the variable, output is reset to FALSE(OFF) to
Up to eight partial equalize (variable specification, address specification) requests are
possible within the same single scan.
Subsequent equalize requests are not executed and output is reset to FALSE(OFF) to
6F8C1226
602

Program example

SIGNAL1 := EQUALIZE_ADDR( SAMPLE1, SAMPLE2, SAMPLE3);

Partially equalizes a 100 word area starting from user variable address 200.

Error information
When this instruction is used on nonduplex system, no operation is performed and
parameter error occurs.
If the destination system is in standby, partial equalize is not performed.

SIGNAL1
1
ST
EQUALIZE_ADDR SAMPLE1
4
LD
SAMPLE2
200
LD
ADDR
User variable

100W
200
Equalizes 100W starting from user
variable address 200.
SCOPE
N
SAMPLE3
100
LD
2.22 Process Control
603


1
Current Output PID PID_P
2
Current Output Sample PI SPI_P
3
Pulse Output PID PIDP_P
4
Pulse Output Sample PI SPIP_P
5
Feed Forward FFD_P
6
Double Cross Limit DCL_P
6F8C1226
604

PID algorithm
The PID algorithm for current output PID, current output sample PI, pulse output PID,
and pulse output sample PI is as described in the figure below (pulse output is MV
output, but the algorithm is as shown below for all).

1-

1
1+Tis
Tds
1+Tds
1
Tis
1

Kp
+
-
+
-
+
+
+
+
-
+
+
PV
SV MV

Features
This is equivalent to hyper PID implemented in the small-scale system (MCS) and
CIEMAC-DS (PCS-DS).
An improved bilinear transformation is used for derivative calculation.
A hyper PID unique method is used for anti-reset-windup (AR/W) function. As AR/W
function, the integrating term is restricted (only in the decreasing direction of output
restriction) when restricting the MV output (when the internal totalized value does not
match the actual output).
The 2 degrees of freedom operation is filter format and can use three parameters: , ,
and .

Coefficient PID algorithm

1 1 1 General PID (deviation PID)
1 1 0 PI-D (PV derivative type PID)
0 1 0 I-PD
1 0 2 degrees of freedom for P term only
1 2 degrees of freedom for PD term only
0 2 degrees of freedom for PI term only
2 degrees of freedom for all

A gap function is used as a non-linear function. Depending on the amount of deviation,
the non-linear element defined by gap width and gap gain is reflected to the size of the
rate limiter.

605

Current Output PID

Process Control Current Output PID
LD/FBD language
notation

Result output (MV)
PID_P
SV MV

PV

GAN

FFS

FFD

TR

MVT

LP_D

LP_P
Instance name
SV input
PV input
Feed forward gain
Feed forward static characteristic
Feed forward dynamic characteristic
Tracking MV input
Tracking request flag
LP data variable

ST language notation [Instance name]( SV, PV, GAN, FFS, FFD, TR, MVT, LP_D, LP_P );

Arguments

SV REAL

SV input [Engineering value]
PV REAL
PV input [Engineering value]

GAN
REAL

Feed forward gain
PID proportional gain compensation
Specify 1.0 when feed forward is not used
FFS
REAL

Feed forward static characteristic [%]
FFD
REAL

Feed forward dynamic characteristic [%]
TR
REAL

Tracking MV input [%]
When tracking, % value used as MV initial
value during initialization
MVT BOOL

LP_D PTR LP data variable
Input
Output MV REAL Result output (MV) [%] (positional type)

6F8C1226
606

Pointers to tag table are placed in LP data variable and LP parameter variable.
A setup example is shown below.
Array No.=0, tag No.=FIC100 are assumed for the used adjuster tag.

Tag symbol
Notation
Operand
Array
MCS
connection
version
(L1, L2, L3)
DS connection version
(L2DS, L3DS) (Type2)
LP_D LP_DATA[0] FIC100.SV FIC100.CLI
LP_P LP_PARA[0] FIC100.OA FIC100.TAG[0]

The following tag symbols are referenced by this instruction.

RH
REAL
R
PV range high [Engineering unit]
Used for percent conversion of SV/PV
Referenced
by LP_P.PVP
RL
REAL
R
PV range low [Engineering unit]
MODE
UINT
R
Control mode: Used for control operation execution,
reset condition
CLI
BOOL
R
Control stop alarm Used for control operation reset
condition
MVE BOOL R MV error
SMV BOOL R Sequence MV
LP_D
(LP_DATA)
CMV BOOL R Computer MV
PVP UINT R Indicator PV No.
DT0 UINT R Scan time (number indicating multiple of scan time)
KP REAL R Proportional gain Used as PID gain
TI REAL R Integral time [min] Used as PID integral time
TD REAL R Rate time [min] Used as PID rate time
ETA REAL R Rate gain Used as PID rate gain parameter
ALP
REAL
R
2 degrees of freedom parameter SV filter
parameter
BET
REAL
R
parameter
GAM
REAL
R
parameter
GAP
REAL
R
Gap: Used as rate limiter condition in non-linear
operation
GG
REAL
R
Gap gain: Used as rate limiter coefficient in
non-linear operation
MH REAL R MV high limit value[%]
ML REAL R MV low limit value[%]
DMV REAL R MV rate limiter[%/scan time]
LP_P
(LP_PARA)
CDR BOOL R Control direction Used as sign of PID operation
R/W: R=Read only, W=Write only, R/W=Read/Write

607

Instance structure

MV
REAL Result output (MV) [%] (positional type)
Can be accessed from
the user program.
B4MODE
UINT
Control mode previous value (initial value:
M) Used to detect change in control
mode
CT
REAL
Actual time totalization (initial value: Main
scan cycle) Used for scan time
measurement
B4E
REAL
P term previous value (initial value:
SV-PV)
During speed type operation, this is used
to calculate the speed component from
difference with previous value
B4D
REAL
SV filter differential term input previous
value (initial value: SV-PV)
Used to calculate change in input in
differential approximation operation
B5D
REAL
SV filter differential term input next to
previous value (initial value: SV-PV)
Used for exact differential term in
improved bilinear transformation
B4D1
REAL
SV filter differential term (initial value: 0)
SV filter term
B4D2
REAL
SV filter proportional/integral term (initial
value: (1-)SV) term of SV filter
B4MV
REAL
MV totalization limit previous value (initial
value: TR)
High/low rate limiter previous MV
totalization value (proportional/differential
term assurance)
B4FFD
REAL
difference calculation previous value
(initial value: FFD)
Previous value for adding dynamic
characteristic by difference
Cannot be accessed
from the user program.
Function
here is no execution flag. This instruction is always executed. If the operation must be
reset, set MVT as initialization request. In this case, TR is also necessary in order to
initialize MV.
The result of executing the feed forward instruction (FFD_P) can be used as input
(GAN, FFS, FFD) to feed forward. If feed forward is not used, use fixed values
(GAN=1, FFS=0, FFD=0).
The PV parameter variable is referenced with the indicator PV No. (PVP) of the LP
parameter variable.
The following variables can be specified for the LP data variables and LP data
parameters:

Controller Variable
Integrated Controller V series L controller LP tag data/parameter variable
Unified Controller nv series type2 LP tag data/parameter variable
6F8C1226
608

Control operation function
Hyper PID is used for control operation. Output is the high/low rate limited positional
type MV value.
SV filter:
An SV filter with super 2 degrees of freedom PID is implemented. Hyper PID adds a
delay filter to SV in order to reduce the change in MV even when SV changes
suddenly. This SV filter is not related to change in PV and PV change (disturbance)
characteristic is unchanged. When tuning PID, set the parameters to be appropriate
for the disturbance. Under this condition, the filter status can be optimized for the
step change of SV.
The 2 degrees of freedom parameters (, , ) of hyper PID are semi-fixed values.
Under normal condition, the initial values can be used without change.
The SV filter includes differential operation. This differential operation uses an
improved bilinear transformation that is an improved version of the bilinear
transformation which is a popular digital operation. Under normal condition, bilinear
transformation is used and a switch is made to exact differential when the rate time
setting is relatively shorter than the scan time. The rate time can be changed during
control operation without problem.
The SV filter operation is performed during each scan cycle. Control operation is
performed based on the specified control cycle (DT0).
Anti-reset windup:
An anti-reset windup (AR/W) function is added to cancel the excessive saturation of
the integrating term. The method used here suppresses the change in the saturating
direction of the integrating term when MV is saturated at high/low limit. Also, the
internal MV totalization is high/low limited by high limit (MH+MV rate limiter) and low
limit (ML-MV rate limiter).
Although the AR/W function is provided, a slight reset windup condition occurs. This
is designed to prevent MV from changing when there is a minute change in
disturbance (change in PV) and SV when MV is saturated. Therefore, if SV is
reversed when MV is saturated, tracking by MV may be delayed. In such case,
handle this from the application program by changing the control mode to M mode
and tracking manually, or temporarily switching to non-PID control operation and
using batch processing control for example.
Non-linear processing:
A gap function is incorporated as non-linear PID. When the deviation is within the
gap width, the change in MV output is suppressed by multiplying the rate limiter by
gap gain.
609

Program example

PID_P FIC100.MV

ST
FIC100.PV

LD
1

LD
PV
GAN
FFS
PID_01
0

LD
FFD
MV
0

LD
FIC100.MV

LD
TR
0

LD
MVT
FIC100.SV

LD
LP_D
FIC100.SV

LD
SV
FIC100.OA

LD
LP_P
Variable :
PID_01 PID_P VAR
Controller variable:
Variable Data type
!FIC100 typeLP_PARA
!FIC100 typeLP_DATA
!FIC100 typePV_DATA

In case of L1

PID_01( FIC100.SV, FIC100.PV, 1, 0, 0, FIC100.MV, 0, FIC100.SV, FIC100.OA);
FIC100.MV := PID_01.MV;

Performs PID operation of adjuster tag (FIC100).
This example uses basic PID (feed forward not used). For advanced PID, see the
program example for the feed forward instruction (feed forward used).

Error information

Controller Action
V series
L controller
value.

6F8C1226
610

If RH=RL, the error flag and divide error flag are set to TRUE(ON) and the previous value is held
in output.
The following operation is performed if the LP data or LP parameter specification is invalid:

Controller Action
V series
L controller
When variable other than LP tag data/parameter is
specified, table operation error is set to TRUE(ON)
and output is the previous value.
specified, error flag and table operation error are set
to TRUE(ON) and output is the previous value.

Notes
When MV output when control is stopped
When PID operation is stopped because of tracking request or control stop warning,
the output is as follows depending on the condition for stopping:

Stop condition MV output
Tracking request flag (TR)=ON Tracking MV input (TR)
Mode=M or RM Tracking MV input (TR)
When mode changes Previous MV (held)
Control stop warning (CLI)=ON or MV error (MVE)=ON Previous MV (held)
Setting MV (SMV=ON or CMV=ON) Tracking MV input (held)

611

Operation during sensor error
The command executes the basic functions of PID and does not issue the control halt
instruction (CLI) to the PID command or carry out mode demotion. Handle the errors
as below according to the system status. Refer also to the add-in software New
instrumentation FB library of the engineering tool.

Example of sensor error judgment program
FIC100.MODE
> SET
In case of L1

FIC100.A
FIC100.CLD
LD
EQ_UINT

Reflect
judgment result
in CLI

0
LD

tmpQ1

FIC100.C

FIC100.PRE
FIC100.MVE
FIC100.VPI
FIC100.CL
I

tmpQ1

tmpQ2

0
LD

tmpQ2
Demote to M mode on
detecting the first error
Reflect in
BOOL mode
FIC100.M

tmpQ2
FIC100.A
R
FIC100.RM
R
FIC100.C
R
CLD=0
(Execute only to
detect errors)
Set error judgment
condition required by
the system
PV process error
(Sensor error)
MV error
Valve position error

6F8C1226
612

Current Output Sample PI

Process Control Current Output Sample PI
LD/FBD language
notation

Result output (MV)
SPI_P
SV MV

PV

GAN

FFS

FFD

TR

MVT

LP_D

LP_P
Instance name
SV input
PV input
Feed forward gain
Feed forward static characteristic
Tracking MV input
LP data variable

ST language notation [Instance name]( SV, PV, GAN, FFS, FFD, TR, MVT, LP_D, LP_P );

Arguments

SV REAL

PV REAL

GAN
REAL

Feed forward gain
FFS
REAL

FFD
REAL

Feed forward dynamic characteristic [%]
TR
REAL

Tracking MV input [%]
When tracking, % value used as MV initial value
during initialization
MVT BOOL

Input
Output MV REAL Result output (MV) [%] (positional type)

613


Tag symbol
Notation
Operand
Array
MCS
connection
version
(L1, L2, L3)
The following tag symbols are referenced by this instruction:

RH
REAL
R
Referenced
by LP_P.PVP
RL
REAL
R
MODE
UINT
R
control mode:Used for control operation execution,
reset condition
CLI
BOOL
R
condition
MVE BOOL R MV error Used for control operation reset condition
SMV
BOOL
R
Sequence MV Used for control operation reset
condition
LP_D
(LP_DATA)
CMV
BOOL
R
Computer MV Used for control operation reset
condition
ALP
REAL
R
parameter
BET
REAL
R
parameter
GAM
REAL
R
parameter
GAP
REAL
R
Gap:Used as rate limiter condition in non-linear
operation
GG
REAL
R
Gap gain:Used as rate limiter coefficient in non-linear
operation
T0
UINT
R
Sample PI sample cycle
(A number indicating integral multiple of scan time)
LP_P
(LP_PARA)
T1
UINT
R
Sample PI control time
6F8C1226
614

Instance structure

MV REAL Result output (MV) [%] (positional type)
the user program
B4MODE
UINT
Control mode previous value (initial value: M)
Used to detect change in control mode
CT
REAL
Actual time totalization (initial value: Main scan
cycle) Used for scan time measurement
B4E
REAL
P term previous value (initial value: SV-PV)
During speed type operation, this is used to
calculate the speed component from difference
with previous value
B4D
REAL
SV filter differential term input previous value
(initial value:SV-PV)
Used to calculate change in input in differential
approximation operation
B5D
REAL
SV filter differential term input next to previous
value (initial value: SV-PV)
Used for exact differential term in improved
bilinear primary transformation
B4D1
REAL
SV filter differential term (initial value: 0) SV filter
term
B4D2
REAL
SV filter proportional/integral term (initial value:
(1-)SV) term of SV filter
B4MV
REAL
MV totalization limit previous value (initial value:
TR)
High/low rate limiter previous MV totalization value
(proportional/differential term assurance)
B4FFD
REAL
Feed forward dynamic characteristic difference
calculation previous value (initial value: FFD)
Previous value for adding dynamic characteristic
by difference
Cannot be accessed
from the user program

Function
There is no execution flag. This instruction is always executed. If the operation
must be reset, set MVT as initialization request. In this case, TR is also necessary in
order to initialize MV.
(GAN, FFS, FFD) to feed forward. If feed forward is not used, use fixed values
(GAN=1, FFS=0, FFD=0).
parameter variable.
The following variables can be specified for the LP data variables and LP parameter
variables:
615

Controller Variable
Integrated Controller V series L controller LP tag data / parameter variable
Unified Controller nv series type2 LP tag data / parameter variable

Hyper PID is used for control operation. Output is the high/low rate limited positional
type MV value.
SV filter:
An SV filter with super 2 degrees of freedom PID is implemented. Hyper PID adds
a delay filter to SV in order to reduce the change in MV even when SV changes
suddenly. This SV filter is not related to change in PV and PV change
(disturbance) characteristic is unchanged. When tuning PID, set the parameters to
be appropriate for the disturbance. Under this condition, the filter status can be
optimized for the step change of SV.
transformation which is a popular digital operation. Under normal condition,
bilinear transformation is used and a switch is made to exact differential when the
rate time setting is relatively shorter than the scan time. The rate time can be
changed during control operation without problem.
performed based on the specified control cycle (T0, T1).
Anti-reset windup:
An anti-reset windup (AR/W) function is added to cancel the excessive saturation of
the integrating term. The method used here suppresses the change in the saturating
direction of the integrating term when MV is saturated at high/low limit. Also, the
internal MV totalization is high/low limited by high limit (MH+MV rate limiter) and low
limit (ML-MV rate limiter).
Although the AR/W function is provided, a slight reset windup condition occurs. This
is designed to prevent MV from changing when there is a minute change in
disturbance (change in PV) and SV when MV is saturated. Therefore, if SV is
reversed when MV is saturated, tracking by MV may be delayed. In such case,
handle this from the application program by changing the control mode to M mode
and tracking manually, or temporarily switching to non-PID control operation and
using batch processing control for example.
A gap function is incorporated as non-linear PID. When the deviation is within the
gap width, the change in MV output is suppressed by multiplying the rate limiter by
gap gain.
6F8C1226
616

Sampling and control:
The sample PI adjusts the time where control is intermittent in the control cycle of the
PID operation.
Output is updated during the control time (T1) at the front half of the sample time (T0).

CL
MV
Control time
T1
Sample time T0

In sample PI, control operation is executed continuously during T1. Unlike intermittent
control withT of PID, the operation cycle is always the scan cycle. Therefore, the
continuity of the proportional term and differential term is broken. This discontinuity is
handled by initializing the proportional term and differential term each time control
execution is started (beginning of T1).
The SV filter section is calculated during each cycle irrelevant of T0 and T1.

Program example

SPI_P FIC100.MV

ST
FIC100.PV

LD
1

LD
PV
GAN
FFS
PID_01
0

LD
FFD
MV
0

LD
FIC100.MV

LD
TR
0

LD
MVT
FIC100.SV

LD
LP_D
FIC100.SV

LD
SV
FIC100.OA

LD
LP_P
Variables:
PID_01 SPI_P VAR
Controller Variables:
Variable Data type
!FIC100 typeLP_PARA
!FIC100 typeLP_DATA
!FIC100 typePV_DATA
In case of L1
Scan cycle: 0.5s
Sample time (T0): 20
Control time (T1): 5

617


Performs sample PI operation of adjuster tag (FIC100) (Sample time: 10s, control
time: 2.5s).
program example (assuming PID_P as SPI_P) for the feed forward instruction (feed
forward used).

Error information

Controller Action
V series
L controller

If RH=RL, the divide error flag is set to TRUE(ON) and the previous value is held in
output.
The following operation is performed if the LP data or LP parameter specification is
invalid:

Controller Action
V series
L controller
specified, table operation error is set to TRUE(ON) and
output is previous value.
specified, error flag and table operation error are set to
TRUE(ON) and output is previous value.

Notes
MV output when control is stopped
When PID operation is stopped because of tracking request or control stop warning,
the output is as follows depending on the condition for stopping.

Stop condition MV output
Tracking request flag (TR)=ON Tracking MV input (TR)
Mode=M or RM Tracking MV input (TR)
When mode changes Previous MV (held)
Control stop warning (CLI)=ON or MV error (MVE)=ON Previous MV (held)
Setting MV (SMV=ON or CMV=ON) Tracking MV input (held)
6F8C1226
618

Pulse Output PID

Process Control Pulse Output PID
LD/FBD language
notation

Result output (MV)
PIDP_P
SV DMV

PV CL

GAN

FFS

MVT

LP_D

LP_P
Instance name
SV input
PV input
Feed forward gain
Feed forward static characteristi c
LP data variable
Output request

ST language notation [Instance name]( SV, PV, GAN, FFS, MVT, LP_D, LP_P );
[Variable name]:=[Instance name]. DMV;
[Variable name]:=[Instance name]. CL;

Arguments

SV REAL

PV REAL

GAN
REAL

Feed forward gain
FFS
REAL

MVT BOOL

Input
DMV REAL Result output (MV) [%] (speed type)
Output
CL BOOL Output request Pulse output update request


Tag symbol
Notation
Operand
Array MCS connection
version (L1, L2, L3)
619


RH
REAL
R
Referenced
by LP_P.PVP
RL
REAL
R
MODE
UINT
R
control mode:Used for control operation execution, reset
condition
CLI
BOOL
R
condition
SMV BOOL R Sequence MV Used for control operation reset condition
CMV BOOL R Computer MV Used for control operation reset condition
LP_D
(LP_DATA)
VPI
BOOL
R
Valve position input error Used as MV high/low limit
condition
DT0 UINT R Scan time (number indicating multiple of scan time)
ALP REAL R 2 degrees of freedom parameter SV filter parameter
BET REAL R 2 degrees of freedom parameter SV filter parameter
GAM REAL R 2 degrees of freedom parameter SV filter parameter
GAP REAL R Gap:Used as rate limiter condition in non-linear operation
GG
REAL
R
operation
LP_P
(LP_PARA)
VP
UINT
R
Valve position input PV No.
Used as the presence of valve position input which is the
basis of pulse output high/low limit
6F8C1226
620

Instance structure

Can be accessed
from the user
program.
B4MODE
UINT
Control mode previous value (initial value: M) Used to
detect change in control mode
CT
REAL
Actual time totalization (initial value: Main scan cycle)
Used for scan time measurement
B4E
REAL
During speed type operation, this is used to calculate the
speed component from difference with previous value
B4D
REAL
SV filter differential term input previous value (initial value:
SV-PV)
B5D
REAL
SV filter differential term input next to previous value
(initial value: SV-PV)
Used for exact differential term in improved bilinear
primary transformation
B4D1
REAL
term
B4D2
REAL
SV filter proportional/integral term (initial value: (1-)SV)
term of SV filter
Cannot be accessed
from the user
program.

Function
must be reset, set MVT as initialization request.
(GAN, FFS) to feed forward. If feed forward is not used, use fixed values (GAN=1,
FFS=0).
parameter variable.
variables.

Controller Variable

Hyper PID is used for control operation.
Output is the high/low rate limited positional type MV value.
SV filter:
An SV filter with super 2 degrees of freedom PID is implemented.
621
Hyper PID adds a delay filter to SV in order to reduce the change in MV even when SV
changes suddenly. This SV filter is not related to change in PV and PV change
performed based on the specified control cycle (DT0).
A gap function is incorporated as non-linear PID.
When the deviation is within the gap width, the change in MV output is suppressed by
multiplying the rate limiter by gap gain.

Program example

PIDP_P
FIC100.PV

LD
1

LD
PV
GAN
FFS
PID_01
FIC100.PMV

ST
DMV
0

LD
0

LD
MVT
FIC100.SV

LD
LP_D
FIC100.SV

LD
SV
FIC100.OA

LD
LP_P
Variables:
PID_01 PIDP_P VAR
Variable Data type
!FIC100 typeLP_PARA
!FIC100 typeLP_DATA
!FIC100 typePV_DATA
In case of L1
FIC100.POR

ST
CL

PID_01( FIC100.SV, FIC100.PV, 1, 0, 0, FIC100.SV, FIC100.OA);
FIC100.PMV := PID_01.DMV;
FIC100.POR := PID_01.CL;

6F8C1226
622
Performs PID operation of adjuster tag (FIC100).
This example directly outputs to pulse output MV (PMV) and pulse output request
(POR) of the adjuster tag.
program example for the feed forward instruction (feed forward used).

Error information

Controller Action
V series
L controller
value.

If RH=RL, the divide error flag is set to TRUE(ON) and the previous value is held in
output.
invalid:

Controller Action
V series
L controller
and output is previous value.
to TRUE(ON) and output is previous value.

623

Pulse Output Sample PI

Process Control Pulse Output Sample PI
LD/FBD language
notation

Result output (MV)
SPIP_P
SV DMV

PV CL

GAN

FFS

MVT

LP_D

LP_P
Instance name
SV input
PV input
Feed forward gain
Feed forward stati c characteri stic
Tracking request fl ag
LP data vari able
LP parameter vari able
Output request

ST language notation [Instance name]( SV, PV, GAN, FFS, MVT, LP_D, LP_P );
[Variable name]:=[Instance name]. DMV;
[Variable name]:=[Instance name]. CL;

Arguments

SV REAL

PV REAL

GAN
REAL

Feed forward gain
FFS
REAL

MVT BOOL

Input
Output


Tag symbol
Notation
Operand
Array
MCS
connection version
(L1, L2, L3)
DS
connection version
6F8C1226
624


RH
REAL R
Referenced
by LP_P.PVP
RL
REAL R
MODE
UINT R
control mode:Used for control operation execution, reset
condition
CLI
BOOL R
condition
SMV
BOOL R
Sequence MV Used for control operation reset
condition
CMV
BOOL R
Computer MV Used for control operation reset
condition
LP_D
(LP_DATA)
VPI
BOOL R
Valve position input error Used as MV high/low limit
condition
ALP REAL R 2 degrees of freedom parameter SV filter parameter
BET REAL R 2 degrees of freedom parameter SV filter parameter
GAM REAL R 2 degrees of freedom parameter SV filter parameter
GAP
REAL R
Gap:Used as rate limiter condition in non-linear
operation
GG
REAL R
operation
T0
UINT R
Sample PI sample cycle
T1
UINT R
Sample PI control time
LP_P
(LP_PARA)
VP
UINT R
Valve position input PV No. Used as the presence of
valve position input which is the basis of pulse output
high/low limit
625

Instance structure

Can be accessed
from the user
program.
B4MODE
UINT
Control mode previous value (initial value: M) Used
to detect change in control mode
CT
REAL
Actual time totalization (initial value: Main scan cycle)
Used for scan time measurement
B4E
REAL
During speed type operation, this is used to calculate
the speed component from difference with previous
value
B4D
REAL
SV filter differential term input previous value (initial
value: SV-PV)
B5D
REAL
SV filter differential term input next to previous value
(initial value: SV-PV)
Used for exact differential term in improved bilinear
primary transformation
B4D1
REAL
term
B4D2
REAL
SV filter proportional/integral term (initial value:
(1-)SV) term of SV filter
Cannot be
accessed from
the user program.

Function
must be reset, set MVT as initialization request.
(GAN, FFS) to feed forward. If feed forward is not used, use fixed values (GAN=1,
FFS=0).
parameter variable.
variables:

Controller Variable

Hyper PID is used for control operation.
The high/low rate limited speed type MV value and output request flag indicating the
pulse update timing are output.
SV filter:
An SV filter with super 2 degrees of freedom PID is implemented.
6F8C1226
626
Hyper PID adds a delay filter to SV in order to reduce the change in MV even when SV
changes suddenly. This SV filter is not related to change in PV and PV change
performed based on the specified control cycle (T0, T1).
A gap function is incorporated as non-linear PID.
When the deviation is within the gap width, the change in MV output is suppressed by
multiplying the rate limiter by gap gain.
Sampling and control:
The sample PI adjusts the time where control is intermittent in the control cycle of the
PID operation.
Output is updated during the control time (T1) at the front half of the sample time (T0).

CL
MV
Control time T1
Sample time T0

In sample PI, control operation is executed continuously during T1. Unlike
intermittent control with T of PID, the operation cycle is always the scan cycle.
Therefore, the continuity of the proportional term and differential term is broken. This
discontinuity is handled by initializing the proportional term and differential term each
time control execution is started (beginning of T1).
The SV filter section is calculated during each cycle irrelevant of T0 and T1.
627

Program example

SPIP_P
FIC100.PV

LD
1

LD
PV
GAN
FFS
PID_01
FIC100.PMV

ST
DMV
0

LD
0

LD
MVT
FIC100.SV

LD
LP_D
FIC100.SV

LD
SV
FIC100.OA

LD
LP_P
Variables:
PID_01 SPIP_P VAR
Variable Data type
!FIC100 typeLP_PARA
!FIC100 typeLP_DATA
!FIC100 typePV_DATA
In case of L1
FIC100.POR

ST
CL
Scan cycle: 0.5s
Sample time (T0): 20
Control time (T1): 5

PID_01( FIC100.SV, FIC100.PV, 1, 0, 0, FIC100.SV, FIC100.OA);
FIC100.PMV := PID_01.DMV;
FIC100.POR := PID_01.CL;

Performs sample PI operation of adjuster tag (FIC100) (Sample time: 10s, control
time: 2.5s).
This example outputs directly to adjuster tag pulse output MV (PVM) and pulse
output request (POR).
program example (assuming PIDP_P as SPIP_P) for the feed forward instruction
(feed forward used).

Error information

Controller Action
V series
L controller
6F8C1226
628

If RH=RL, the error flag and divide error flag are set to TRUE(ON) and the previous
value is held in output.
invalid:

Controller Action
V series
L controller
to TRUE(ON) and output is previous value.

629

Feed Forward

Process Control Feed Forward
LD/FBD language
notation

Feed forward static characteristi c
Feed forward dynamic characteristi c
MV gain
FFD_P

Instance name
Input vari able
Feed forward parameter
LP data vari able
X

FF_P

LP_D
GAN
FFS
FFD

ST language notation [Instance name]( X, FF_P, LP_D );
[Variable name]:=[Instance name]. GAN;
[Variable name]:=[Instance name]. FFS;
[Variable name]:=[Instance name]. FFD;

Arguments

X REAL
Input variable [Engineering value]

FF_P PTR Feed forward parameter variable
Input
GAN REAL Feed forward gain
FFS REAL Feed forward static characteristic [%]
Output
FFD REAL Feed forward dynamic characteristic [%]

Tag symbol
Notation
Operand
Array
MCS
connection version
(L1, L2, L3)
DS
connection version

MODE UINT R
Control mode
Used for control operation execution, reset condition
CLI BOOL R
Control stop alarm
Used for control operation reset condition
MVE BOOL R
MV error
SMV BOOL R
Sequence MV
LP_D
(LP_DATA)
CMV
BOOL
R
Computer MV
6F8C1226
630

Feed forward parameter structure

Name Type Description
K REAL Gain
K0 REAL Supplementary gain
H REAL Gain high limit
L REAL Gain low limit
X0 REAL MV standard value
C REAL MV coefficient
TP REAL Process time constant
TD REAL Disturbance time constant
DB REAL Output dead band

The feed forward parameters are created from a combination of user defined structures
and user variables.

Instance structure

Remarks
GAN REAL Feed forward gain
FFS REAL Feed forward static characteristic [%]
FFD REAL Feed forward dynamic characteristic [%]
the user program
B4MODE
UINT
Control mode previous value (initial
value: M) Used to detect change in
control mode
B4D
REAL
input value
B4Y
REAL
temporary delay
Cannot be accessed
from the user program

Function
There is no execution flag. This instruction is always executed.
The following variables can be specified for the LP data variables and FF parameter
variables:

Controller Variable
V series
L controller LP tag data/FF parameter variable
Unified Controller nv series type2 LP tag data/FF parameter variable

Three types of output, gain compensation (GAN), static characteristic compensation
(FFS), and dynamic characteristic compensation (FFD) are calculated as gain
scheduling type feed forward.
631

K

K0

HL
limit

Non-linearize
X
+
-
Difference
FFD FFS GAN

1 + (Dn - X0) C / X0
1 + TPS
1 + TDS

Program example

Variables:
PID_01 PID_P VAR
FFD_1 FFD_P VAR
Variable Data type
!FIC100 typeLP_PARA
!FIC100 typeLP_DATA
!FIC100 typePV_DATA
!IND100 typePV_DATA
FF_P typeFFD_PARA
In case of L1
PID_P
FIC100.PV

LD
PV
FFS
PID_01
GAN
FFD
FIC100.MV

ST
MV
FIC100.MV

LD
TR
0

LD
MVT
FIC100.SV

LD
LP_D
FIC100.SV

LD
SV
FIC100.OA

LD
LP_P
FFD_P
FF_P

LD
FF_P
FFD_1
FIC100.SV

LD
LP_D
IND100.PV

LD
X GAN
FFS
FFD
User defined structure
typeFFD_PARA:
Member Data type
K Real
K0 Real
H Real
L Real
X0 Real
C Real
TP Real
TD Real
DB Real
FFD_1(IND100.PV, FF_P, FIC100.SV);
PID_01( FIC100.SV, FIC100.PV, FFD_1.GAN, FFD_1.FFS, FFD_1.FFD, FIC100.MV,
0, FIC100.SV, FIC100.OA);

Performs PID operation of adjuster tag (FIC100) with feed forward of disturbance
element (IND100.PV) added.
6F8C1226
632

Error information

Controller Action
V series
L controller
value.

The following operation is performed if the LP or FF parameter specification is invalid:

Controller Action
V series
L controller
When variable other than LP tag data /FF parameter
is specified, table operation error is set to TRUE(ON)
When variable other than LP tag data /FF parameter
is specified, error flag and table operation error are
set to TRUE(ON) and output is previous value.

633

Double Cross Limit

Process Control Double Cross Limit
LD/FBD language
notation

Fuel adjuster SV
DCL_P
PV FSV
AIR ASV
FUEL
FTR
ATR
DCL_P
LP_FD
LP_FP
LP_AD
LP_AP
Instance name
Master input variable
Air flow
Fuel flow
Fuel MV tracking value
Air MV tracking value
Fuel LP data variable
Fuel LP parameter variable
Air adjuster SV
Air LP data variable
Air LP parameter variable
Double cross limit parameter

ST language notation [Instance name]( PV, AIR, FUEL, FTR, ATR, DCL_P, LP_FD, LP_FP,
LP_AD, LP_AP );
[Variable name]:=[Instance name]. FSV;
[Variable name]:=[Instance name]. ASV;

Arguments

PV REAL
Master input variable [%]

AIR REAL
Air flow [Engineering value]

FUEL REAL
Fuel flow [Engineering value]

FTR REAL
Fuel MV tracking value [Engineering value]

ATR REAL
Air MV tracking value [Engineering value]

DCL_P PTR Double cross limit parameter table
LP_FD PTR Fuel LP data variable
LP_FP PTR Fuel LP parameter variable
LP_AD PTR Air LP data variable
Input
LP_AP PTR Air LP parameter variable
FSV REAL Fuel adjuster SV [Engineering value]
Output
ASV REAL Air adjuster SV [Engineering value]

6F8C1226
634

A setup example is shown below. Array No.=0, tag No.=FIC100 are assumed for the
used adjuster tag.

Tag symbol
Notation
Operand
Array
MCS
connection
version
(L1, L2, L3)
DS
connection version
LP_FD, LP_AD LP_DATA[0] FIC100.SV FIC100.CLI
LP_FP, LP_AP LP_PARA[0] FIC100.OA FIC100.TAG[0]
The following tag symbols are referenced by this instruction.

RH
REAL R
Used for percent conversion of AIR/FUEL
Referenced by
LP_FP/AP.PV
(PV_PARA) RL
REAL R
Used for percent conversion of AIR/FUEL
LP_FP/AP
(LP_PARA)
PVP
UINT R Indicator PV No.

Double cross limit parameter structure

K1 REAL Smoke emitting limit when load is increasing [%]
K2 REAL Smoke emitting limit when load is decreasing [%]
K3 REAL Air excess limit when load is decreasing [%]
K4 REAL Air excess limit when load is increasing [%]
BETA REAL Transform coefficient ( > 0)
MU REAL Air excess rate ( > 0)
L REAL Air low limit [%]
ADV REAL (Not used)
FDV REAL (Not used)
The double cross limit parameters are created from a combination of user defined
structures and user variables.

Instance structure

FSV REAL Air flow SV [Engineering value]
ASV REAL Fuel flow SV [Engineering value]
Can be accessed from the
user program
B4FMODE UINT (Not used)
B4AMODE UINT (Not used)
PD1 REAL (Not used)
PD2 REAL (Not used)
DLM1 REAL (Not used)
DLM2 REAL (Not used)
the user program
635

Function
There is no execution flag. This instruction is always executed.
The following variables can be specified for the LP data variables, LP parameter
variables and DCL parameter variables:

Controller Variable
V series
L controller
LP tag data /parameter variable
DCL parameter variable
Unified Controller nv
series
type2
LP tag data /parameter variable
DCL parameter variable

The fuel and air settings are calculated using combustion control as a model.

UNIT
MED

%
100-K3
100
100+K1
100

UNIT
low
limit
MED
Master input
AIR.PV F

%

A FUEL.PV
100+K4
100
100-K2
100

6F8C1226
636

Program example

Variables:
PID_01 PID_P VAR
PID_02 PID_P VAR
PID_03 PID_P VAR
DCL_01 typeDCL_PARA VAR

Controller variable:
Variable Data type
!DIC100 typeLP_PARA
!DIC100 typeLP_DATA
!DIC100 typePV_DATA
!FIC100 typeLP_PARA
!FIC100 typeLP_DATA
!FIC100 typePV_DATA
!AIC100 typeLP_PARA
!AIC100 typeLP_DATA
!AIC100 typePV_DATA

In case of L1
User defined structure
typeDCL_PARA
Member Data type
K1 Real
K2 Real
K3 Real
K4 Real
BETA Real
MU Real
L Real
ADV Real
FDV Real

PID_P

DIC100.PV
LD
PV
FFS
PID_01
GAN
FFD

DIC100.MV
ST
MV

DIC100.MV
LD
TR

0
LD
MVT

DIC100.SV
LD
LP_D

DIC100.SV
LD
SV

DIC100.OA
LD
LP_P

LD

0
LD

0
LD
PID_P

FIC100.PV
LD
PV
FFS
PID_02
GAN
FFD

FIC100.MV
ST
MV

FIC100.MV
LD
TR

0
LD
MVT

FIC100.SV
LD
LP_D

FIC100.SV
LD
SV

FIC100.OA
LD
LP_P

LD

0
LD

0
LD
PID_P

AIC100.PV
LD
PV
FFS
PID_03
GAN
FFD

AIC100.MV
ST
MV

AIC100.MV
LD
TR

0
LD
MVT

AIC100.SV
LD
LP_D

AIC100.SV
LD
SV

AIC100.OA
LD
LP_P

LD

0
LD

0
LD
DCL_P

AIC100.PV
LD
AIR
FTR
DCL_01
FUEL
ATR

DCL_P
LD
DCL_P

DIC100.MV
LD
PV

FIC100.SV
LD
LP_FD

FIC100.OA
LD
LP_FP

FIC100.PV
LD

FIC100.MV
LD

AIC100.MV
LD

AIC100.SV
LD
LP_AD

AIC100.OA
LD
LP_AP

FIC100.SV
ST
FSV

AIC100.SV
ST
ASV
DCL control Master PID
Fuel flow PID Air flow PID

637

(* Master PID *)
PID_01( DIC100.SV, DIC100.PV, 1, 0, 0, DIC100.MV, 0, DIC100.SV, DIC100.OA);
DIC100.MV := PID_01.MV;

(* DCL control *)
DCL_01( DIC100.MV, AIC100.PV, FIC100.PV, FIC100.MV, AIC100.MV, DCL_P,
FIC100.SV, FIC100.OA, AIC100.SV, AIC100.OA);
FIC100.SV := DCL_01.FSV;
AIC100.SV := DCL_01.ASV;

(* Fuel flow PID *)

(* Air flow PID *)
PID_03( AIC100.SV, AIC100.PV, 1, 0, 0, AIC100.MV, 0, AIC100.SV, AIC100.OA);
AIC100.MV := PID_03.MV;

Performs double cross limit control with master PID (DIC100) result output (MV) as
master input, gives that result to fuel flow PID(FIC100) and air flow PID(AIC100), and
optimizes the fuel flow and air flow.

Error information

Controller Action
V series
L controller
value.

The fuel flow and air flow are calculated with % value as input when the respective
indicator is RH=RL.
The following operation is performed when the LP data, LP parameter or DCL
parameter specification is invalid:

Controller Action
V series
L controller
When variable other than LP tag data/parameter,
DCL parameter is specified, table operation error is
set to TRUE(ON) and output is previous value.
When variable other than LP tag data/parameter,
DCL parameter is specified, error flag and table
operation error are set to TRUE(ON) and output is
previous value.

6F8C1226
638

2.23 Tag Operation

1 Change Adjuster Mode CMLP_P Changes the adjuster tag mode.
2
Change Push Button
Mode
CMPB_P Changes the push button mode.
3
Change Sequence
Mode
CMSQ_P Changes the sequence tag mode.
4 Set SV SSV_P
Changes the SV value of the adjuster tag at
constant rate.
Used together with Reset SV.
5 Reset SV RSV_P
Resets the change in SV value (Set SV) of the
adjuster tag. Used together with Set SV.
6 Set MV SMV_P
Changes the MV value of the adjuster tag at
constant rate.
Used together with Reset MV.
7 Reset MV RMV_P
Resets the change in MV value (Set MV) of the
adjuster tag. Used together with Set MV.
8 Shut CV SCV_P
Sets the MV value of the adjuster tag to constant
value and changes the mode. Used together with
Reset MV.
9 Push Button ON PB_P
Sets the push button tag button in pushed state
for 1 processing cycle.
10 Push Button Lock LB_P Sets the push button tag button in pushed state.
11 Action Timer ACT_P
Performs timer action using the timer tag. The
timer execution status can be
monitored/manipulated easily from OIS.
12 Action Counter ACC_P
Counts the program event every process cycle.
The counter execution status can be
monitored/manipulated easily from OIS.
13 Self Step Jump SJ_P
Jumps the current active location of the SFC
allocated to the sequence tag.
14 Reset Jump RJ_P
Resets all active locations of SFC allocated to the
sequence tag and jumps to a certain location.
15 Reset jump 2 RJ_P2
Resets all active locations of SFC allocated to the
sequence tag and jumps to a certain location
(corresponds with phase step 2).
16 SFC initialize INI_STEP
Clears all SFC steps including the specified initial
steps and activates the initial step.

The instructions of the Tag Operation are directives for the tags. Therefore it is important
to understand the tag structure and operation to use the instructions. Refer to the
following materials for description of the tags:
Integrated Controller V series model 3000/2000 Loop Controller L2/L3 Users Manual-
Functions 6F8C0885
2.23 Tag Operation
639

Change Adjuster Mode

Tag Operation Change Adjuster Mode
LD/FBD language
notation

CMLP_P
E

MODE

LP_D LP data variable
Mode

ST language notation Output := CMLP_P( E, MODE, LP_D );

Arguments

E BOOL

MODE UINT
Mode (0:M, 1:A, 2:C, 3:RM) Input

Output BOOL Output


Notation
Operand
Array Tag symbol
LP_D LP_DATA[0] FIC100.CLI


LP_D
(LP_DATA)
MODE UINT W Control mode

Function
When the execution control input E is TRUE(ON), the mode of the LP data variable
specified with LP_D is set to the value specified with MODE and TRUE(ON) is output
as the result.
6F8C1226
640


Controller Variable
V series
L controller LP tag data variable
Unified Controller
nv series
type2 LP tag data variable

Execution
control input
Action Output
TRUE(ON) Sets the mode of the specified LP data variable. TRUE(ON)

Program example

SIGNAL1
1
LD
CMLP_P

1
LD
SIGNAL2
1
ST

FIC100.SV
LD
E
MODE
LP_D

SIGNAL2 := CMLP_P( SIGNAL1, 1, FIC100.SV);

When the execution control input SIGNAL1 is TRUE(ON,) sets the adjuster tag
(FIC100) mode to A.

Error information
The following operation is performed when the LP parameter specification is invalid:

Controller Action
V series
L controller
When variable other than LP tag parameter is
and the result is FALSE(OFF).
When variable other than LP tag parameter is
to TRUE(ON) and the result is FALSE(OFF).

If the mode is out of range (four or greater) the instruction is treated as no process.
2.23 Tag Operation
641

Change Push Button Mode

Tag Operation Change Push Button Mode
LD/FBD language
notation

CMPB_P
E

MODE

PB_D PB data variable
Mode

ST language notation Output := CMPB_P( E, MODE, PB_D );

Arguments

E BOOL

MODE UINT
Mode (0:M, 1:A, 2:C, 3:RM) Input

PB_D PTR PB data variable
Output BOOL Output

The C mode is valid only when tag type is 2PC in DC connection version. Otherwise, the
mode is M/A/RM.
A pointer to tag table is placed in PB data variable.
Array No.=0, tag No.=XV100 are assumed for the used push button tag.

Notation
Operand
Array Tag symbol
PB_D PB_DATA[0] XV100.ASA


PB_D
(PB_DATA)
MODE
UINT W Control mode
Referenced by
PB_D
(PB_PARA)
TYPE
UINT R
Tag type (used only in DS connection
version only)
(SOV/MOT/MOV/PB4/PB8/PB2/2PC)
6F8C1226
642

Function
When the execution control input E is TRUE(ON), the mode of the PB data variable
specified with PB_D is set to the value specified with MODE and TRUE(ON) is output
as the result.
The following variables can be specified for the PB data:

Controller Variable
Integrated Controller V series L controller PB tag data variable
Unified Controller nv series type2 PB tag data variable

Execution
control input
Action Output
TRUE(ON) Sets the mode of the specified PB data variable TRUE(ON)

Program example

SIGNAL1
1
LD
CMPB_P

1
LD
SIGNAL2
1
ST

XV100.SCN
LD
E
MODE
LP_D

SIGNAL2 := CMPB_P( SIGNAL1, 1, XV100.SCN);

When the execution control input SIGNAL1 is TRUE(ON), sets the push button tag
(XV100) mode to A.

Error information
The following operation is performed when invalid variable is specified for the PB
parameter:

Controller Action
V series
L controller
When variable other than PB tag parameter is
When variable other than PB tag parameter is
2.23 Tag Operation
643

Change Sequence Mode

Tag Operation Change Sequence Mode
LD/FBD language
notation
CMSQ_P
E

MODE

SQ_D SQ data variable
Mode

ST language notation Output := CMSQ_P( E, MODE, SQ_D );

Arguments

E BOOL

MODE UINT
Mode (0:M,1:A, 2:C, 3:RM) Input

SQ_D PTR SQ data variable
Output BOOL Output

A pointer to tag table is placed in SQ data variable.
Array No.=0, tag No.=SEQ100 are assumed for the used sequence tag.

Notation
Operand
Array Tag symbol
SQ_D SQ_DATA[0] SEQ100.STA


SQ_D
(SQ_DATA)
MODE UINT W Control mode

Function
When the execution control input E is TRUE(ON), the mode of the SQ data variable
specified with SQ_D is set to the value specified with MODE and TRUE(ON) is output
as the result.

6F8C1226
644
The following variables can be specified for the SQ data:
Controller Variable
V series
L controller SQ tag data variable
Unified Controller
nv series
type2 SQ tag data variable

Execution
control input
Action Output
TRUE(ON) Sets the mode of the specified SQ data variable TRUE(ON)

Program example

SIGNAL1
1
LD
CMSQ_P

1
LD
SIGNAL2
1
ST

SEQ100.STA
LD
E
MODE
SQ_D

SIGNAL2 := CMSQ_P( SIGNAL1, 1, SEQ100.STA);

When the execution control input SIGNAL1 is TRUE(ON), sets the sequence tag
(SEQ100) mode to A.

Error information
The following operation is performed when invalid variable is specified for the SQ
parameter:

Controller Action
V series
L controller
When variable other than SQ tag parameter is
When variable other than SQ tag parameter is

When EN is used, ENO output is reset to OFF when the above error occurs.
2.23 Tag Operation
645

Set SV

Tag Operation Set SV
LD/FBD language
notation

SSV_P
E

SVP

SVK

SVT

LP_P

LP_D
Tilt
Target value
Tilt unit
LP data variable


ST language notation Output := SSV_P( E, SVP, SVK, SVT, LP_P, LP_D );

Arguments

E BOOL

SVP REAL
Target value
SVK REAL
Tilt
SVT REAL
Tilt unit (1: sec./60:min./3600: hr)

Input
Output BOOL Output

Pointers to tag table are placed in LP parameter variable and LP data variable.

Notation
Operand
Array Tag symbol
LP_P LP_PARA[0] FIC100.TAG[0]


SVP REAL R/W SV ramp target value
SVK REAL R/W SV ramp increment
LP_P
(LP_PARA)
SVT REAL R/W SV ramp time coefficient
LP_D
(LP_DATA)
SSV
BOOL W SEQ-SV intervention status
R/W: R=Read only, W=Write only, RW=Read/Write
6F8C1226
646

Function
When the execution control input E is TRUE(ON), sets the setup information (SVP,
SVK, SVT) of the LP parameter variable specified by LP_P to the value specified with
input argument, sets the SSV of LP data variable specified by LP_D to TRUE(ON),
and output TRUE(ON) as the result. (Start of Set SV directive)
This instruction provides the setup information (SVP, SVK, SVT) and directive (SSV) to
perform ramp SV action, but does not perform the actual ramp SV action. A separate
program must be created to perform the ramp SV action. (See program example).
This instruction is used together with the Reset SV (RSV_P) instruction.
The following variables can be specified for the LP data/parameter:

Controller Variable
V series
L controller LP tag data/parameter variable
Unified Controller
nv series
type2 LP tag data/parameter variable

Execution
control input
Action Output
FALSE(OFF) No process FALSE(OFF)
TRUE(ON) Starts the Set SV directive of the specified LP
variable
TRUE(ON)

Error information

Controller Action
V series
L controller
When NAN is input, the result is FALSE(OFF) and
NAN input error flag is set to TRUE(ON).
When INF is input the result is FALSE(OFF).
value.
The following operation is performed when the LP data or LP parameter specification
is invalid:

Controller Action
V series
L controller
specified, error flag and table operation error are
set to TRUE(ON) and the result is FALSE(OFF).
2.23 Tag Operation
647

Program example

SSV_P

SIGNAL1

ST
E

5
LD
SVK

80
LD
SVP
FIC100.
TAG[0]
LD
LP_P

1
LD
SVT
FIC100.CLI

LD
LP_D
SSV_REQ

RSV_P

SIGNAL2

ST
E
FIC100.CLI

LD
LP_D
SSV_REQ
control section
Instrumentati on FB section
FIC100.MV

ST
FIC100.PV

LD

1
LD

0
LD

0
LD
FIC100.MV

LD

0
LD
FIC100.CLI

LD
FIC100.SV

LD
FIC100.
TAG[0]
LD
PID_P
PV
GAN
FFS
PID_01
SV
FFD
TR
MVT
LP_D
LP_P
MV
executi on section
FIC100.MVE

FIC100.CLI
FIC100.SSV

SSV_EXEC
( )
FIC100.SV

LD
SSV_EXEC

FIC100.SVP

LD
SEL_REAL
G
IN0
IN1
DIV_REAL

1000
LD

ZF[23]

LD

FIC100.SVK

LD

DIV_REAL

FIC100.SVT

LD

MUL_REAL

FIC100.SV

SET
SSV_EXEC

DLM_REAL
E
IN
D
SSV_EXEC

LD
In case of L3DS
DLM_01
OUT

Variables:
SSV_REQ BOOL VAR
SSV_EXEC BOOL VAR
SIGNAL1 BOOL VAR
SIGNAL2 BOOL VAR
PID_01 PID_P VAR
DLM_01 DLM_REAL VAR
6F8C1226
648

Controller variables:

Variable Data type
!FIC100 typeLP_PARA_DS
!FIC100 typeLP_DATA_DS
ZF ARRAY[0..4095] OF REAL

(* SSV control section *)
SIGNAL1 := SSV_P( SSV_REQ, 80, 5, 1, FIC100.TAG[0], FIL100.CLI);
SIGNAL2 := RSV_P( SSV_REQ, FIL100.CLI);

*Positive transitionsensing contact (SSV_REQ) and negative transitionsensing
contact (SSV_REQ) do not perform the same operation as LD/FBD because they are
not supported by the ST language.

(* Instrumentation FB section *)
PID_01( FIC100.SV, FIC100.PV, 1, 0, 0, FIC100.MV, 0, FIC100.CLI, FIC100.TAG[0]);

(* SSV execution section *)
SSV_EXEC := NOT(FIC100.MVE) AND NOT(FIC100.CLI) AND FIC100.SSV;
Z2 := SEL_REAL(SSV_EXEC, FIC100.SV, FIC100.SVP);
Z3 := ZF[23] / 1000 * FIC100.SVK / FIC100.SVT;
DLM_01(SSV_EXEC, Z2, Z3);
FIC100.SV := DLM_01.OUT;

SSV control section
At the rise of SSV request (SSV_REQ), requests Set SV directive (target value: 80, tilt:
5/s) to the adjuster tag (FIC100). At the fall of SSV, resets the Set SV directive.
Instrumentation FB section
Executes current output PID against the adjuster tag (FIC100).
SSV execution section
When the adjuster tag (FIC100) Set SV condition is satisfied (MVE=FALSE and
CLI=FALSE and SSV=TRUE), changes SV according to the requested content (SVP,
SVK, SVT). When the Set SV condition is not satisfied, SV holds the previous value.
2.23 Tag Operation
649

Reset SV

Tag Operation Reset SV
LD/FBD language
notation

Execution control inp
t
Output
RSV_P
LP data variable
E
LP_D


ST language notation Output := RSV_P( E, LP_D );

Arguments

E BOOL

Input
Output BOOL Output


Notation
Operand
Array Tag symbol


LP_D
(LP_DATA)
SSV BOOL W SEQSV intervention status

Function
When the execution control input E is TRUE(ON), the SSV of the LP data variable
specified with LP_D is reset to FALSE(OFF) and TRUE(ON) is output as the result.
(Resetting Set SV directive).
This instruction is used together with the Set SV (SSV_P) instruction.
6F8C1226
650


Controller Variable
V series
Unified Controller
nv series

Execution
control input
Action Output
TRUE(ON) Resets the Set SV directive of the specified LP
variable
TRUE(ON)

Program example
Refer to the program example of the Set SV (SSV_P) instruction.

Error information
The following operation is performed when invalid variable is specified for the LP data:

Controller Action
V series
L controller
When variable other than LP tag data is specified,
table operation error is set to TRUE(ON) and the
result is FALSE(OFF).
When variable other than LP tag data is specified,
error flag and table operation error are set to
TRUE(ON) and the result is FALSE(OFF).

When EN IS used, ENO output is reset to FALSE(OFF) when the above error occurs.
2.23 Tag Operation
651

Set MV

Tag Operation Set MV
LD/FBD language
notation

SMV_P
E

MVP

MVK

MVT

LP_P

LP_D
Tilt
Target value
Tilt unit
LP data variable


ST language notation Output := SMV_P( E, MVP, MVK, MVT, LP_P, LP_D );

Arguments

E BOOL

MVP REAL
Target value
MVK REAL
Tilt
MVT REAL
Tilt unit (1: sec./60:min./3600: hr)

Input
Output BOOL Output


Notation
Operand
Array Tag symbol


MVP REAL R/W MV ramp target value
MVK REAL R/W MV ramp increment
LP_P
(LP_PARA)
MVT REAL R/W MV ramp time coefficient
LP_D
(LP_DATA)
SMV
BOOL W SEQ-MV intervention status
6F8C1226
652

Function
When the execution control input E is TRUE(ON), sets the setup information (MVP,
MVK, MVT) of the LP parameter variable specified by LP_P to the value specified with
input argument, sets the SMV of LP data variable specified by LP_D to TRUE(ON),
and output TRUE(ON) as the result. (Start of Set MV directive)
This instruction provides the setup information (MVP, MVK, MVT) and directive (SMV)
to perform ramp MV action, but does not perform the actual ramp MV action. A
separate program must be created to perform the ramp MV action. (See program
example)
This instruction is used together with the Reset MV (RMV_P) instruction.
The following variables can be specified for the LP data/parameter:

Controller Variable
V series
L controller LP tag data/parameter variable
Unified Controller
nv series
type2 LP tag data/parameter variable

Execution
control input
Action Output
TRUE(ON)
Starts the Set MV directive of the specified LP
variable
TRUE(ON)

Error information
Controller Action
V series
L controller
When NAN is input, the result is FALSE(OFF) and
NAN input error flag is set to TRUE(ON).
When INF is input the result is FALSE(OFF)
value.
is invalid:

Controller Action
V series
L controller
2.23 Tag Operation
653

Program example

FIC100.MV

SET
SMV_EXEC

SMV_P

SIGNAL1

ST
E

5
LD
SVK

80
LD
SVP
FIC100.
TAG[0]
LD
LP_P

1
LD
SVT
FIC100.CLI

LD
LP_D
SMV_REQ

RMV_P

SIGNAL2

ST
E
FIC100.CLI

LD
LP_D
SMV_REQ
control section
FIC100.MV

ST
FIC100.PV

LD

1
LD

0
LD

0
LD
FIC100.MV

LD

0
LD
FIC100.CLI

LD
FIC100.SV

LD
FIC100.
TAG[0]
LD
PID_P
PV
GAN
FFS
PID_01
SV
FFD
TR
MVT
LP_D
LP_P
MV
execution section
FIC100.MVE

FIC100.CLI
FIC100.SMV SMV_EXEC
( )
FIC100.MV

LD
SMV_EXEC

FIC100.MVP

LD
SEL_REAL
G
IN0
IN1
DIV_REAL

1000
LD

ZF[23]

LD

FIC100.MVK

LD

DIV_REAL

FIC100.MVT

LD

MUL_REAL

DLM_REAL

E
IN
D
SMV_EXEC

LD
Variables:
Vari able Data type Dec.
SMV_REQ BOOL VAR
SMV_EXEC BOOL VAR
SIGNAL1 BOOL VAR
SIGNAL2 BOOL VAR
PID_01 PID_P VAR
DLM_01 DLM_REAL VAR
Controller vari ables:
Vari able Data type
In case of L3DS
DLM_01
OUT

6F8C1226
654

(* SMV control section *)
SIGNAL1 := SMV_P( SMV_REQ, 80, 5, 1, FIC100.TAG[0], FIL100.CLI);
SIGNAL2 := RMV_P( SMV_REQ, FIL100.CLI);

*Positive transition-sensing contact (SMV_REQ) and negative transition-sensing
contact (SMV_REQ) do not perform the same operation as LD/FBD because they are


(* SMV execution section *)
SMV_EXEC := NOT(FIC100.MVE) AND NOT(FIC100.CLI) AND FIC100.SMV;
Z2 := SEL_REAL(SMV_EXEC, FIC100.MV, FIC100.MVP);
Z3 := ZF[23] / 1000 * FIC100.MVK / FIC100.MVT;
DLM_01(SMV_EXEC, Z2, Z3);
FIC100.MV := DLM_01.OUT;

SMV control section
At the rise of SMV request (SMV_REQ), requests Set MV directive (target value: 80,
tilt: 5/s) to the adjuster tag (FIC100). At the fall of SMV, resets the Set MV directive.
SMV execution section
When the adjuster tag (FIC100) Set MV condition is satisfied (MVE=FALSE and
CLI=FALSE and SMV=TRUE), changes MV according to the requested content (MVP,
MVK, MVT). When the Set MV condition is not satisfied, MV holds the previous value.
2.23 Tag Operation
655

Reset MV

Tag Operation Reset MV
LD/FBD language
notation

RMV_P
E

LP_D
LP data variable


ST language notation Output := RMV_P( E, LP_D );

Arguments

E
BOOL

Execution control
input

Input
Output BOOL Output


Notation
Operand
Array Tag symbol


LP_D
(LP_DATA)
SMV BOOL W SEQ-MV intervention status

Function
When the execution control input E is TRUE(ON), the SMV of the LP data variable
specified with LP_D is reset to FALSE(OFF) and TRUE(ON) is output as the result.
(Resetting Set MV directive).
This instruction is used together with the Set MV (SMV_P) instruction.
6F8C1226
656


Controller Variable
V series
Unified Controller
nv series

Execution
control input
Action Output
TRUE(ON) Resets the Set MV directive of the specified LP
variable
TRUE(ON)

Program example
Refer to the program example of the Set MV (SMV_P) instruction.

Error information
The following operation is performed when invalid variable is specified for the LP data:

Controller Action
V series
L controller
When variable other than LP tag data is specified
When variable other than LP tag data is specified


2.23 Tag Operation
657

Shut CV

Tag Operation Shut CV
LD/FBD language
notation

SCV_P
E

MOD

MV

LP_P

LP_D
MV value
Mode
LP data variable


ST language notation Output := SCV_P( E, MOD, MV, LP_P, LP_D );

Arguments

E BOOL

MOD UINT
Mode (0:M,1:A,2:C,3:RM)
MV REAL
MV value[%]
Input
Output BOOL Output


Notation
Operand
Array Tag symbol


MVP REAL R/W MV ramp target value
MVK REAL R/W MV ramp increment
LP_P
(LP_PARA)
MVT REAL R/W MV ramp time coefficient
LP_D
(LP_DATA)
SMV
BOOL W SEQ-MV intervention status
6F8C1226
658

Function
When the execution control input E is TRUE(ON), the MV value is set immediately to
the specified value and the mode is set to the specified mode.
Sets setup information of the LP parameter variable specified with LP_P to the value
specified with the input argument (MVP=input argument MV, MVK=2000, MVT=1),
sets the SMV of LP data variable specified by LP_D to TRUE(ON), sets the mode to
the mode specified with the input argument, and outputs TRUE(ON) as the result.
(Start of Set MV directive, the actual action is step action (change immediately to
specified MV value) because the tilt is set large).
This instruction provides the setup information (MVP, MVK, MVT) and directive (SMV)
to perform ramp MV action, but does not perform the actual ramp MV action. A
separate program must be created to perform the ramp MV action (See program
example).
This instruction is used together with the Reset MV (RMV_P) instruction.
The following variables can be specified for the LP data/parameter.

Controller Variable

Execution
control input
Action Output
TRUE(ON) Starts the Set MV directive of the specified LP variable TRUE(ON)

Error information

Controller Action
V series
L controller
When NAN is input, the result is FALSE(OFF) and NAN
input error flag is set to TRUE(ON).
When INF is input the result is FALSE(OFF).
is invalid:

Controller Action
V series
L controller
the result is FALSE(OFF).
2.23 Tag Operation
659

Program example

FIC100.MV

SET
SCV_EXEC

SCV_P

SIGNAL1

ST
E

10
LD
MV

0
LD
MOD
FIC100.
TAG[0]
LD
LP_P
FIC100.CLI

LD
LP_D
SCV_REQ

RMV_P

SIGNAL2

ST
E
FIC100.CLI

LD
LP_D
SCV_REQ
control
i
FIC100.MV

ST
FIC100.PV

LD

1
LD

0
LD

0
LD
FIC100.MV

LD

0
LD
FIC100.CLI

LD
FIC100.SV

LD
FIC100.
TAG[0]
LD
PID_P
PV
GAN
FFS
PID_01
SV
FFD
TR
MVT
LP_D
LP_P
MV
C execution section
FIC100.MVE
FIC100.CLI
FIC100.SMV SCV_EXEC
( )
FIC100.MV

LD
SCV_EXEC
FIC100.MVP

LD
SEL_REAL
G
IN0
IN1
DIV_REAL

1000
LD
ZF[23]

LD

FIC100.MVK

LD
DIV_REAL
FIC100.MVT

LD
MUL_REAL

DLM_REAL
E
IN
D
SCV_EXEC

LD
Variabl es:
SCV _REQ BOOL VAR
SCV_EXEC BOOL VAR
SIGNAL1 BOOL VAR
SIGNAL2 BOOL VAR
PID_01 PID_P VAR
DLM_01 DLM_REAL VAR
Control ler variables:
Variable Data type
In case of L3DS
DLM_01
OUT

6F8C1226
660

(* SCV control section *)
SIGNAL1 := SCV_P( SCV_REQ, 0, 10, FIC100.TAG[0], FIL100.CLI);
SIGNAL2 := RMV_P( SCV_REQ, FIL100.CLI);

*Positive transitionsensing contact (SCV_REQ) and negative transitionsensing
contact (SCV_REQ) do not perform the same operation as LD/FBD because they are


(* SCV execution section *)
SCV_EXEC := NOT(FIC100.MVE) AND NOT(FIC100.CLI) AND FIC100.SMV;
Z2 := SEL_REAL(SCV_EXEC, FIC100.MV, FIC100.MVP);
Z3 := ZF[23] / 1000 * FIC100.MVK / FIC100.MVT;
DLM_01(SCV_EXEC, Z2, Z3);
FIC100.MV := DLM_01.OUT;

SCV control section
At the rise of SCV request (SCV_REQ), requests Set MV directive (MV value:10) to
the adjuster tag (FIC 100) and sets the mode to M. At the fall of SCV, resets the Set
MV directive.
SCV execution section
When the adjuster tag (FIC100) Set MV condition is satisfied (MVE=FALSE and
CLI=FALSE and SMV=TRUE), changes MV according to the requested content (MVP,
MVK, MVT) (resulting in MV=10 immediately after the rise of SCV_REQ). When the
Set MV condition is not satisfied, MV holds the previous value.

2.23 Tag Operation
661

Push Button ON

Tag Operation Push Button ON
LD/FBD language
notation

Executi on control i nput Output
PB_P
E

BNO

PB_P

PB_D
Mode
PB parameter variable
PB data variable


ST language notation Output := PB_P( E, BNO, PB_P, PB_D );

Arguments

E BOOL

BNO UINT
Push button No. (1 to 8)

PB_P PTR PB parameter variable
Input
Output BOOL Output

Pointers to tag table are placed in PB parameter variable and PB data variable.
Array No.=0, tag No.=FIC100 are assumed for the used push button tag.

Notation
Operand
Array Tag symbol
PB_P PB_PARA[0] XV100.TAG[0]


PB_P
(PB_PARA)
MODS
UINT R Mode usage setting
MODE UINT R Mode (0:M, 1:A, 2:C, 3:RM)
PB_D
(PB_DATA) RFO[n]
BOOL W
Button ON request (n=0: button 1 to 7:
button 8)
6F8C1226
662

Function
When the execution control input E is TRUE(ON), sets the specified push button ON.
When the button manipulation enable condition (PB_P.MODS="Not used" or
(PB_P.MODS="Use" and PB_D.MODE=A mode)) is satisfied, sets the corresponding
bit of the RFO of the PB data variable specified with PB_D to TRUE(ON) and outputs
TRUE(ON) as the result. (Button ON directive).
This instruction sets the button ON (RFO). The content of RFO is reflected in FO by
standard output process. Therefore, the result of this instruction is not reflected when
FO is accessed immediately after executing this instruction (in that control cycle). The
reflected result can be accessed on the next cycle.
The following variables can be specified for the PB data/parameter:

Controller Variable
V series
L controller PB tag data/parameter variable
Unified Controller
nv series
type2 PB tag data/parameter variable

Execution
control input
Action Output
TRUE(ON)
Executes button ON directive of the specified PB
variable
TRUE(ON)

Program example

PB_P

SIGNAL1

ST
E

2
LD
BNO
XV100.
TAG[0]
LD
PB_P
XV100.ASA

LD
PB_D
PB_REQ

Variabl es:
Variabl e Data type Dec.
PB_REQ BOOL VAR
SIGNAL1 BOOL VAR
Control ler variables:
Variabl e Data type
!XV100 typePB_PARA_DS
!XV100 typePB_DATA_DS

In case of L3DS

SIGNAL1 := PB_P( PB_REQ, 2, XV100.TAG[0], XV100.ASA);

At the rise of PB request (PB_REQ), issues a button 2ON directive for the push button
tag (XV100).
2.23 Tag Operation
663

Error information
The following operation is performed when invalid variable is specified for the PB data
and PB parameter:

Controller Action
V series
L controller
When variable other than PB tag data/parameter is
When variable other than PB tag data/parameter is

If the push button On (BNO) is out of range (not 1 to 8), the instruction is treated as no
process.

6F8C1226
664

Push Button Lock

Tag Operation Push Button Lock
LD/FBD language
notation

LB_P
E

BNO

PB_D
Mode
PB data vari able


ST language notation Output := LB_P( E, BNO, PB_D );

Arguments

E BOOL

BNO
UINT

Push button No. (0: Reset, 1
to 8: button No.)

Input
Output BOOL Output
A pointer to tag table is placed in PB data variable.
Array No.=0, tag No.=FIC100 are assumed for the used push button tag.

Notation
Operand
Array Tag symbol

PB_D
(PB_DATA)
IFO[n] BOOL W
Button lock request (n=0: button 1 to 7: button 8)
(corresponding button locked when 1, unlocked
when all bits are 0)
Function
When the execution control input E is TRUE(ON), the specified push button is locked.
When the push button No. (BNO) is between 1 and 8, the corresponding button is
locked. If the push button No. is 0, the button is unlocked.
Sets the corresponding bit of the IFO of the PB data variable specified by PB_D to
TRUE(ON) (or resets all bits to FALSE(OFF)) and outputs TRUE(ON) as the result
(Button lock directive).
2.23 Tag Operation
665
This instruction locks the button (IFO). The content of IFO is reflected in FO by
standard output process. Therefore, the result of this instruction is not reflected when
FO is accessed immediately after executing this instruction (in that control cycle). The
reflected result can be accessed on the next cycle.
The following parameters can be specified for the PB data:

Controller Variable
V series
L controller PB tag data variable
Unified Controller
nv series
type2 PB tag data variable

Execution
control input
Action Output
TRUE(ON)
Executes button lock directive of the specified PB
variable
TRUE(ON)

Program example

LB_P

SIGNAL1

ST
E

2
LD
BNO
XV100.ASA

LD
PB_D
LB_REQ
P
Variables:
LB_REQ BOOL VAR
SIGNAL1 BOOL VAR
SIGNAL2 BOOL VAR
Variable Data type
!XV100 typePB_PARA_DS
!XV100 typePB_DATA_DS
In case of L3DS
LB_P

SIGNAL2

ST
E

0
LD
BNO
XV100.ASA

LD
PB_D
LB_REQ
N

SIGNAL1 := LB_P( LB_REQ, 2, XV100.ASA);
SIGNAL2 := LB_P( LB_REQ, 0, XV100.ASA);
At the rise of LB request (LB_REQ), issues a button 2 lock directive for the push button
tag (XV100). At the fall of LB request, unlocks the lock.
Error information
The following operation is performed when invalid variable is specified for the PB data:

Controller Action
V series
L controller
When variable other than PB tag data is specified,
When variable other than PB tag data is specified,
If the push button on (BNO) is out of range (not 0 to 8), the instruction is treated as no
process.
6F8C1226
666

Action Timer

Tag Operation Action Timer
LD/FBD language
notation

ACT_P
E

STATE

T_D
Directive to timer
T data variable


ST language notation Output := ACT_P( E, STATE, T_D );

Arguments

E BOOL

STATE
UINT

Directive to timer
(0: Start/1: Stop/2: Reset)

Input
T_D PTR T data variable
Output BOOL Output

A pointer to tag table is placed in T data variable.
The timer tag to be used will be array No.=0.
T_DATA[0]

STAT BOOL W Start
STOP BOOL W Stop
T_D
(T_DATA)
RST BOOL W Reset

The following symbols can be accessed to check the execution status of the timer tag:

T_PARA SET INT R/W Set value (target value)
VAL INT R/W Clock value (current value)
STAT BOOL R Start
STOP BOOL R Stop
RST BOOL R Reset
T_DATA
UP BOOL R Timeout
2.23 Tag Operation
667

For the timer tag, the unit of SET and VAL is different between the first half and second
half of the array.

Array No. Unit Clock range Accuracy (error)
0 to 255 0.1 s 0.0[s] to 3276.7[s]
0.1 [s] max. or main scan cycle
(whichever is greater)
256 to 511 0.1 min
0.0[min] to 3276.7[min]
(0.0[s] to 196602[s])
0.1 [min] max.(6[s]) or main scan cycle
(whichever is greater)

Function
When the execution control input E is TRUE(ON), the specified timer tag is activated.
Manipulates the STAT, STOP, RST of the T data variable specified by T_D and outputs
ON as the result (timer manipulation directive). The relationships between the directive
(STATE) to the timer and STAT, STOP, RST are as shown below and either STAT,
STOP, or RST is set to ON.

Manipulation Directive to
timer
STATE
STAT STOP RST
0Start ON OFF OFF
1Stop OFF ON OFF
2Reset OFF OFF ON
When the clock value (VAL) of the timer tag reaches the set value (SET), judgment
can be made with UP status (UP).
When the set value (SET) of the timer tag is set to "0", UP status becomes ON
regardless of the timer operation status.
Even when the clock value (VAL) of the timer tag reaches the set value (SET), clocking
is continued up to the maximum value (32767).
The timer operates only in the increasing direction.
The following variables can be specified for the T data:

Controller Variable
V series
L controller T tag data variable
Unified Controller
nv series
type2 T tag data variable

Execution
control input
Action Output
TRUE(ON)
Executes timer manipulation directive of the
specified T variable
TRUE(ON)
6F8C1226
668

Timing chart

T_DATA[nA].VAL
Timer maximum(32767)
Timer initial value (0)
T_DATA[n].STAT
T_DATA[n].STOP
T_DATA[n].RST
T_DATA[n].UP
t
T_PARA[n].SET
Start Stop Reset
Start
Reset
Start

Error information
If the T data specification is incorrect (such as specifying variable other than T tag
data), the table operation error is set to TRUE(ON) and the instruction itself is treated
as no process.
The following operation is performed when invalid variable is specified for the T data:

Controller Action
V series
L controller
When variable other than T tag data is specified,
When variable other than T tag data is specified,

If the directive to the timer (STATE) is out of range (not 0 to 2), the instruction is treated
as no process.

Notes
This instruction executes a timer manipulation directive (STAT, STOP, RST). The timer
tag clocking (updating current value, timeout judgment) is synchronized with the main
scan process and is performed before program execution. Therefore, the result of this
instruction is not reflected when UP status is accessed immediately after executing
this instruction (in that control cycle). The reflected result can be accessed on the next
cycle. Also, when using this instruction in a high-speed scan process, caution is
necessary because the actual timer tag clocking is synchronized with the scan
process.
2.23 Tag Operation
669
The timer accuracy (tolerance) is affected by the scan process cycle because the timer
clocking is synchronized with the main scan process. At maximum, the offset is equal
to the main scan process cycle.
If this instruction is executed for the same timer tag more than once in the same
process cycle, the instruction (directive) executed last is effective and other
instructions are not reflected (either start, stop, or reset action per process cycle).
Only the timer tag (T_PARA(DATA)) can be used with this instruction. Clock or count
down (TC_PARA(DATA)) cannot be used.

Program example

ACT_P

SIGNAL1

ST
E

0
LD
STATE
T_DATA[0]

LD
T_D
STAT_REQ

Variables:
STAT_REQ BOOL VAR
STOP_REQ BOOL VAR
RST_REQ BOOL VAR
SIGNAL1 BOOL VAR
SIGNAL2 BOOL VAR
SIGNAL3 BOOL VAR
Variable Data type
T_PARA ARRAY[0..511] OF typeT_PARA_DS
T_DATA ARRAY[0..511] OF typeT_DATA_DS
In case of L3DS
ACT_P

SIGNAL2

ST
E

1
LD
STATE
T_DATA[0]

LD
T_D
STOP_REQ
ACT_P

SIGNAL3

ST
E

2
LD
STATE
T_DATA[0]

LD
T_D
RST_REQ
T_DATA[0].UP

UP time
process

SIGNAL1 := ACT_P( STAT_REQ, 0, T_DATA[0]);
SIGNAL2 := ACT_P( STOP_REQ, 1, T_DATA[0]);
SIGNAL3 := ACT_P( RST_REQ, 2, T_DATA[0]);

At the rise of start request (STAT_REQ), issues a start directive to the timer tag (T_DATA[0]).
At the rise of stop request (STOP_REQ), issues a stop directive to the timer tag (T_DATA[0]).
At the rise of reset request (RST_REQ), issues a reset directive to the timer tag (T_DATA[0]).
At time-up (T_DATA[0].UP=ON), executes the UP time process.
6F8C1226
670

Action Counter

Tag Operation Action Counter
LD/FBD language
notation
Execution control
i
Output
ACC_P
E

STATE

C_D
Directive to counter
C data variable


ST language notation Output := ACC_P( E, STATE, C_D );

Arguments

E BOOL

STATE
UINT

Directive to counter
0: Increment, 1: Decrement, 2: Reset

Input
C_D PTR C data variable
Output BOOL Output

A pointer to tag table is placed in C data variable.
The timer tag to be used will be array No.=0.
C_DATA[0]

INC BOOL W Increment
DEC BOOL W Decrement
C_D
(C_DATA)
RST BOOL W Reset

The following symbols can be accessed to check the execution status of the counter tag:

C_PARA SET INT R/W Set value (target value)
VAL INT R/W Clock value (current value)
STAT BOOL R Start
STOP BOOL R Stop
RST BOOL R Reset
UP BOOL R Count up
C_DATA
DOWN BOOL R Count down
2.23 Tag Operation
671

Function
When the execution control input E is TRUE(ON), the specified counter tag is
activated.
Manipulates the INC, DEC, RST of the C data variable specified by C_D and outputs
TRUE(ON) as the result (timer manipulation directive). The relationships between the
directive (STATE) to the counter and INC, DEC, RST are as shown below and either
INC, DEC, or RST is set to ON.

Manipulation Directive to counter
STATE INC DEC RST
0:Increment ON OFF OFF
1:Decrement OFF ON OFF
2:Reset OFF OFF ON

The UP status (UP) and DOWN status (DOWN) operate (judged) as follows according to
the relationship between the current value (VAL) and set value (SET) of the counter tag.

Relationship between current
value and set value
UP DOWN
Current value Set value ON OFF
Current value -Set value OFF ON
Current value = Set value = 0 ON ON

Even when the current value (VAL) reaches the set value (SET), clocking is continued
up to the maximum value (32767) or minimum value (-32768).
The counter is incremented by Increment (INC) and decremented by Decrement
(DEC).
The following variables can be specified for the C data:

Controller Variable
V series
L controller C tag data variable
Unified Controlle
nv series
type2 C tag data variable

Execution
control input
Action Output
TRUE(ON) Executes counter manipulation directive of the
specified C variable
TRUE(ON)
6F8C1226
672

Timing chart

Counter maximum(32767)
Counter initial value(0)
-C_PARA[n].SET
C_DATA[n].UP
C_DATA[n].DOWN
t
Counter minimum(-32768)
C_PARA[n].SET
C_DATA[n].VAL
Increment
Decrement Reset Decrement
Set value=0
Reset
Increment

Error information
The following operation is performed when invalid variable is specified for the C data:
Controller Action
V series
L controller
When variable other than C tag data/parameter is
When variable other than C tag data/parameter is

If the directive (STATE) to the counter is out of range (not 0 to 2), the instruction is
treated as no process.

Notes
This instruction executes a counter manipulation directive (INC, DEC, RST). The
updating of the counter tag (current value count, up judgment) is synchronized with the
main scan process and is performed before program execution. Therefore, the result
of this instruction is not reflected when UP status is accessed immediately after
executing this instruction (in that control cycle). The reflected result can be accessed
on the next cycle. Also, when using this instruction in a high-speed scan process,
caution is necessary because the actual counter tag update is synchronized with the
scan process.
If this instruction is executed for the same counter tag more than once in the same
process cycle, the instruction (directive) executed last is effective and other
instructions are not reflected (only 1 count changes per process cycle).
Only the counter tag (C_PARA(DATA)) can be used with this instruction. Clock or
count down (TC_PARA(DATA)) cannot be used.
2.23 Tag Operation
673

Program example

ACC_P

SIGNAL1

ST
E

0
LD
STAT
E
C? DATA[0]

LD
C_D
INC_REQ
P
Variables:
INC_REQ BOOL VAR
DEC_REQ BOOL VAR
RST_REQ BOOL VAR
SIGNAL1 BOOL VAR
SIGNAL2 BOOL VAR
SIGNAL3 BOOL VAR
Variable Data type
C_PARA ARRAY[0..511] OF typeC_PARA_DS
C_DATA ARRAY[0..511] OF typeC_DATA_DS

In case of L3DS
ACC_P

SIGNAL2

ST
E

1
LD
STAT
E
C? DATA[0]

LD
C_D
DEC_REQ
P
ACC_P

SIGNAL3

ST
E
2
LD
STAT
E
C? DATA[0]

LD
C_D
RST_REQ
P
C_DATA[0].UP

UP time
process
DOWN time
process
C_DATA[0].DOWN

SIGNAL1 := ACC_P( INC_REQ, 0, C_DATA[0]);
SIGNAL2 := ACC_P( DEC_REQ, 1, C_DATA[0]);
SIGNAL3 := ACC_P( RST_REQ, 2, C_DATA[0]);

At the rise of increment request (INC_REQ), issues an increment directive to the
counter tag (C_DATA[0]). At the rise of decrement request (DEC_REQ), issues a
decrement directive to the counter tag (C_DATA[0]). At the rise of reset request
(RST_REQ), issues a reset directive to the counter tag (C_DATA[0]).
At count up (C_DATA[0].UP=ON), executes the UP time process.
At count down (C_DATA[0].DOWN=ON), executes the DOWN time process.
6F8C1226
674

Self Step Jump

Tag Operation Self Step Jump
LD/FBD language
notation

SJ_P
E

STEP
Jump destination step


ST language notation Output := SJ_P( E, STEP );

Arguments

E BOOL

Input
STEP PTR Jump destination step instance
Output BOOL Output

Function
When the execution control input E is TRUE(ON), the step activation location is
changed and TRUE(ON) is output as the result.
Deactivates the step to which this instruction is connected and activates the step
specified by jump destination step (STEP).

Execution
control input
Action Output
TRUE(ON) Changes the activation location to the specified step. TRUE(ON)

Error information
If a variable other than a step is specified for the jump destination step (STEP) or if the
connected destination of the execution control input (E) of this instruction is not a step
type instruction (Step, Answer Step, Phase End Step), boundary error is set to
TRUE(ON) and this instruction is treated as no process.
2.23 Tag Operation
675

Program example

SJ_P

SIGNAL1

ST
E

PHASE1
LD
STEP
CONTINUE

Variables:
CONTINUE BOOL VAR
T1 BOOL VAR
T2 BOOL VAR
T3 BOOL VAR
T4 BOOL VAR
SIGNAL1 BOOL VAR
Variable Data type
!SEQ001 typeSQ_PARA_DS
!SEQ001 typeSQ_DATA_DS

In case of L3DS
T1
INI
SEQ001
SEQ
T2
1 PHASE1
Time#10s
T3
2 PHASE2
Time#10s
T4
S1

SIGNAL1 := SJ_P( CONTINUE, PHASE1);

If the PHASE 1, 2 repeat condition (CONTINUE) is TRUE(ON), self step jump (SJ_P)
occurs and the active location changes from S1 to PHASE1 when execution of
PHASE1 and PHASE2 completes and S1 becomes active (repeats execution of
PHASE1 and PHASE2).
When the repeat condition (CONTINUE) is reset to FALSE(OFF), self step jump is not
performed when S1 becomes active and continues to the next step when T4 is set to
TRUE(ON).

Restriction
This instruction cannot be connected to non-SFC network (normal LD circuit). If it is
connected to normal LD circuit, unrelated step instruction (step instruction just before
the SJ_P instruction in the execution sequence) will be deactivated or a boundary
error may occur. A BOOL type LD/FBD circuit may be inserted between the Step
instruction (or Answer Step instruction, Phase End instruction) and SJ_P instruction.

SEQ instruction to which SFC network is connected
T12
S11
S12
SJ_P

SIGNAL1

ST
E

S11
LD
STEP
Enabled
Disabled
TON

IN

Time#10s
LD
STEP
Q
TON_1
COND1
SJ_P

SIGNAL2

ST
E

S11
LD
STEP

6F8C1226
676

A variable other than a step name cannot be specified as the jump destination step
(STEP) of a SJ_P instruction. If a variable other than a step name is specified, a
boundary error may occur and SJ_P instruction is treated as no process.
Only the inside of the level (operation and phase) to which the SJ_P instruction is
connected to may be specified. Jump to other level is not possible.

Operation
T1
INI
SEQ001
SEQ
T2
1 PHASE1
Time#10s
T3
2 PHASE2
Time#10s
T4
S1
SJ_P

SIGNAL1

ST
E

PHASE1
LD
STEP
COND1

T4
S2
SJ_P

SIGNAL2

ST
E

P23
LD
STEP
COND2

Phase 1
T11
P11
T12
P12
T13
P13
P14
PhaseEnd
SJ_P

SIGNAL3

ST
E
P11
LD
STEP
COND3
Enabled
Phase 2
T21
P21
T22
P22
T23
P23
P24
PhaseEnd
SJ_P

SIGNAL4

ST
E

P11
LD
STEP
COND4
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled

In the case of parallel processing, jump to other parallel process, outside the parallel
processes, or into the parallel process is not possible.

T12
S11
S12
SJ_P

SIGNAL1

ST
E

S13
LD
STEP
COND1

Disabled

T13
SJ_P

SIGNAL2

ST
E

S13
LD
STEP
COND2
S13
S14
Enabled

2.23 Tag Operation
677

T12
S11
S12
SJ_P

SIGNAL1

ST
E

S13
LD
STEP
COND1
Disabled

T13
S13
S14
S1
T1
T2
S2
SJ_P

SIGNAL1

ST
E

S14
LD
STEP
COND1
Disabled

The SJ_P instruction cannot connect to a Phase Step instruction. Connection is
allowed to Step instruction, Answer Step instruction, and Phase End Step instruction. If
a SJ_P instruction is connected to a Phase Step instruction, the Phase Step instruction
itself may be inactive, but the inside of the phase is not inactive.

S11
T12
Enabled
Disabled
1 PHASE1
Time#10s
T13
S13
SJ_P

SIGNAL1

ST
E

S11
LD
STEP
COND1

SJ_P

SIGNAL2

ST
E

S12
LD
STEP
COND2
T12
S12

6F8C1226
678

Reset Jump

Tag Operation Reset Jump
LD/FBD language
notation

RJ_P
E

SQ_P

STEP
SQ parameter variable
Jump destination step


ST language notation Output := RJ_P( E, SQ_P, STEP );

Arguments

E BOOL

SQ_P PTR SQ parameter variable Input
STEP PTR Jump destination step instance
Output BOOL Output

A pointer to tag table is placed in SQ parameter variable.
Array No.=0, tag No.=SEQ100 are assumed for the used sequence tag.

Notation
Operand
Array Tag symbol
SQ_P SQ_PARA[0] SEQ100.TAG[0]


ALIT[0..31] BOOL ARRAY W Alarm bit (all bits are cleared when RJ is executed)
PHNO[0..31] BOOL ARRAY W Active phase map (all bits are cleared when RJ is executed)
ALNO[0..31] BOOL ARRAY W Alarm phase map (all bits are cleared when RJ is executed)
CNNO[0..31]
BOOL ARRAY W
Confirm wait phase map (all bits are cleared when RJ is
executed)
Referenced
by SQ_P

(SQ_DATA)
APNO UINT W Active phase no. setting (cleared when RJ is executed)

2.23 Tag Operation
679

Function
When the execution control input E is TRUE(ON), resets the sequence tag information
specified by the SQ parameter variable (SQ_P), activates the step specified by jump
destination step (STEP, and outputs TRUE(ON) as the result.

Execution
control input
Action Output

Error information
If the jump destination step (STEP) is specified incorrectly, boundary error is set to
TRUE(ON) and the instruction is treated as no process.

Program example

Variables:
RJ_REQ BOOL VAR
T1 BOOL VAR
T2 BOOL VAR
T3 BOOL VAR
T4 BOOL VAR
SIGNAL1 BOOL VAR
Variable Data type

In case of L3DS
T1
INI
SEQ001
SEQ
T2
1 PHASE1
Time#10s
T3
2 PHASE2
Time#10s
T4
S1
RJ_P

SIGNAL1

ST
E

SEQ001
LD
SQ_P

INI
LD
STEP
RJ_REQ

PHASE1

SIGNAL1 := RJ_P( RJ_REQ, SEQ001, INI);

When the reset jump condition (RJ_REQ) is OFF, PHASE1, PHASE2, and S1 are
repeatedly executed in sequence.
When the reset jump condition (RJ_REQ) is TRUE(ON), all active information and
alarm information of sequence tag (SEQ001) are reset and INI is activated regardless
of the current active location.
6F8C1226
680

Restriction
The sequence that may be specified with the RJ_P instruction can only specify within
the same program. Specification from other task or user defined function block and
phase level is not possible (compile error will occur). To specify from another task
(program), use a global variable.
Example that will result in compile error:

Program(MS_001)
Operation
T1
INI
SEQ001
SEQ
T2
1 PHASE1
Time#10s
Phase
T11
P11
T12
P12
T13
P13
P14
PhaseEnd
RJ_P

SIGNAL2

ST
E

SEQ001
LD
SQ_P

INI
LD
STEP
RJ_REQ2
P
User FB(USER_FB)
RJ_P

SIGNAL4

ST
E

SEQ001
LD
SQ_P

INI
LD
STEP
RJ_REQ4
P
USER_FB

FB_1
Program (MS_002)
RJ_P

SIGNAL1

ST
E

SEQ001
LD
SQ_P

INI
LD
STEP
RJ_REQ1
P

Normal example (using global variable)

Program (MS_001)
Operation
T1
INI
SEQ001
SEQ
T2
1 PHASE1
Time#10s
User FB(USER_FB)
USER_FB
FB_1
Program (MS_002)
Phase 1
T11
P11
T12
P12
T13
P13
P14
PhaseEnd
RJ_REQ2
P
Global_RJ
( ) S
RJ_REQ1
P
Global_RJ
( ) S
RJ_P
E

SEQ001
LD
SQ_P

INI
LD
STEP
Global_RJ
P
Global_RJ
( ) R
RJ_REQ1
P
Global_RJ
( ) S
RJ_REQ4
P
Global_RJ
( ) S
2.23 Tag Operation
681

Only operation step can specify RJ_P instruction. Phase step cannot specify RJ_P
instruction. If RJ_P is used in a phase, a boundary error will occur and the RJ_P
instruction will be treated as no process.

Program (MS_001)
Operation
T1
INI
SEQ001
SEQ
T2
1 PHASE1
Time#10s
T3
2 PHASE2
Time#10s
Phase 1
T11
P11
T12
P12
T13
P13
P14
PhaseEnd
RJ_P

SIGNAL1

ST
E

SEQ001
LD
SQ_P

INI
LD
STEP
RJ_REQ1
P
RJ_P

SIGNAL3

ST
E

SEQ001
LD
SQ_P

P11
LD
STEP
RJ_REQ3
P
Normal
Boundary error

No variable other than a step name can be specified as the jump destination step
(STEP) of a RJ_P instruction. If a variable other than a step name is specified, a
boundary error may occur and RJ_P instruction is treated as a no process.
A step in a parallel process cannot be specified as the jump destination step (STEP) of
a RJ_P instruction (activation location cannot be changed within a parallel process). If
a step in a parallel process is specified, steps are executed in sequence from that
location and holds at the end of the parallel process (waiting for other parallel process
to end). In such case, the reactivation location must be switched.

T12
S11
S12
T13
S13
S14
RJ_P

SIGNAL1

ST
E

SEQ001
LD
SQ_P

S13
LD
STEP
RJ_REQ1
P

T12
S11
S12
T13
S13
S14
Hold

RJ destination
cannot be specified.

6F8C1226
682

Reset Jump 2

Tag operation Reset Jump
LD/FBD language
notation

RJ_P2
SQ parameter variable
Jump destination phase
E
SQ_P
PHNO


ST language notation Output := RJ_P2 ( E, SQ_P, PHNO );

Arguments

E BOOL

SQ_P PTR SQ parameter variable Input
PHNO UINT
Jump destination phase number 1-32

Output BOOL Output

A pointer to tag table is placed in SQ parameter variable.
A setup example is shown below. Array number is 0 and tag number is SEQ 100 for the
sequence tag used.

Notation
operand
Array Tag symbol
SQ_P SQ_PARA[0] SEQ100.TAG[0]

ALIT[0..31] BOOL ARRAY W Alarm bit (all bits are cleared when RJ is executed)
PHNO[0..31] BOOL ARRAY W Active phase map (all bits are cleared when RJ is executed)
ALNO[0..31] BOOL ARRAY W Alarm phase map (all bits are cleared when RJ is executed)
CNNO[0..31] BOOL ARRAY W
Confirm wait phase map (all bits are cleared when RJ is
executed)
Referenced
by SQ_P
(SQ_DATA)
APNO UINT W Active phase no. setting (cleared when RJ is executed)
R/WR = Read only, W = Write only, R/W = Read/Write

Function
When the execution control input E is TRUE(ON), resets the sequence tag information
specified by the SQ parameter variable (SQ_P), activates the step specified by the
jump destination phase number (PHNO) and outputs TRUE(ON) as the result.
2.23 Tag Operation
683

Execution
control input
Action Output

Error information
If the sequence parameter variable (SQ_P) is out of the range, the table operation
error is set to TRUE(ON) and the instruction is treated as no process.
When a phase number that does not exist in the PHNO argument is specified for
STEP, RJ instruction is treated as no process.

Program example

Variable:
RJ_REQ BOOL VAR
T1 BOOL VAR
T2 BOOL VAR
T3 BOOL VAR
T4 BOOL VAR
SIGNAL1 BOOL VAR
Variable Data type

RJ_P2

SIGNAL1

ST
E

SEQ001
LD
SQ_P

LD
PHNO
RJ_REQ

T1
INI
SEQ001
SEQ
T2
1 PHASE1
Time#10s
T3
2 PHASE2
Time#10s
T4
S1
PHASE1
MS001 MS010

SIGNAL1 := RJ_P2( RJ_REQ, SEQ001, 2);

[Description of operation]
When the reset jump condition (RJ_REQ) is FALSE(OFF), PHASE1, PHASE2, and S1
are executed repeatedly in sequence.
When the reset jump condition (RJ_REQ) is TRUE(ON), all active information and
alarm information of the sequence tag (SEQ001) are reset and PHASE2 is activated
regardless of the current active location.

Restriction
The phase that may be specified by the RJ_P2 instruction is the phase step 2
instruction.
Do not specify the normal phase step or the machine may not operate correctly.
6F8C1226
684

SFC Initialize

Tag operation SFC Initialize
LD/FBD language
notation

Execution control input Complete status
INI_STEP
Initial step
E
STEP

ST language notation Output := INI_STEP( E, STEP );

Argument

E BOOL

Input
STEP PTR Initial step instance
Output BOOL Complete status

Function
process.
When the execution control input E is TRUE(ON), all SFC steps including the specified
initial step are cleared and the initial step is activated.
TRUE(ON) is output as the result.

Execution
control input
Action Output
TRUE(ON) All SFC steps including the specified initial step are
cleared.
Initial step is activated.
TRUE(ON)

Note
Be sure to use the initial step name to specify STEP.
2.23 Tag Operation
685

Program example

Variables:
INI_REQ BOOL VAR
INI PTR VAR
SIGNAL BOOL VAR
T1
INI
SEQ001
SEQ
T2
1 PHASE1
Time#10s
T3
2 PHASE2
Time#10s
T4
S1
INI_STEP

SIGNAL1

ST
E
INI
LD
STEP
INI_REQ
PHASE1

SIGNAL1 := INI_STEP( INI_REQ, INI);

[Description of operation]
When the initial condition (INI_REQ) is FALSE(OFF), PHASE1, PHASE2, and S1 are
executed repeatedly in sequence.
When the initial condition (INI_REQ) is TRUE(ON), all SFC steps including the
specified initial step are cleared and the initial step is activated regardless of the
current active location.

Error information
Specify the initial step name for STEP, otherwise the machine may not operate
correctly.

6F8C1226
686

2.24 RAS

1
Cyclic Trace
DATALOGC
2 Calendar Data Acquisition GET_CLND nv dedicated instruction
3 Interlock Diagnosis DIAG_D
4
Interlock Diagnosis with First
Fault Diagnosis Permission Input
DIAG_D2
2.24 RAS
687

Cyclic Trace

RAS Cyclic Trace
LD/FBD language
notation

DATALOGC
Instance name


ST language notation [Instance name] ( );

Instance structure

NAME WORD ARRAY [0 to 24] Trace variable name
POINTER DINT Trace variable pointer
DATATYPE DINT Trace data type
RH DINT Range high limit
RL DINT Range low limit
EU DINT Unit
COMMENT WORD ARRAY [0 to 7] Comment
INDEX DINT Link buffer pointer
DATA DINT ARRAY [0 to 55] Link buffer
NOTINIT DINT Initialization flag
the user program.

Function
A function block to perform cyclic trace that is written within a program.
A single variable can be traced with a single function block description.
Periodically traces static variable and temporary variable, or global variable used
within a program (when the cycle time is less than 50ms, the cyclic trace data is
lacking by the transmission load).
Specify the task to trace, the trace FB name to use, and variable name from [Product
view] - [View] - [Data trace] of the V engineering tool. Refer to the V Engineering Tool
User's Guide for details.

Important
Do not specify direct output variable as the variable name to perform cyclic trace. Correct value
cannot be traced.
In this case, perform cycle trace specifying a batch output variable rather than a direct output
variable.

6F8C1226
688

Program example

DATALOGC
DATALOGC_1
DATALOGC
DATALOGC_2

DATALOGC_1( );
DATALOGC_2( );

Performs cyclic trace of two variables VAR_BOOL and VAR_REAL specified from the
V engineering tool.

[Data log trace screen]
The following data log trace screen shows an example of programming two
DATALOGC within a program and tracing variables VAR_BOOL and VAR_REAL:

2.24 RAS
689

Calendar Data Acquisition

RAS Calendar Data Acquisition
nv dedicated
instruction
LD/FBD language
notation
Execution control
input
Data storage
destination
specification
GET_CLND
E

TYPE
Calendar data type
specification


ST language notation GET_CLND( E, TYPE, Data storage destination specification);

Arguments

E BOOL Execution control input

Input
TYPE UINT
Calendar data type
specification

Output PTR
Data storage destination
specification

Function
When execution control input E is FALSE(OFF), calendar data acquisition is not
executed.
When execution control input E is TRUE(ON), calendar data in the format specified
with calendar data type specification is obtained, and output to the variable specified
with data storage destination.
The calendar data type and calendar format are as follows:

Calendar data type Calendar format
1 BCD code

15 8 7 0
0 Year
0 Month
0 Day
0 Hour
0 Minute
0 Second
01 : Year 2001 or later
00 : Year 2097

2 DT type

15 0
Year
Day Month
TOD type

Other than above Invalid
2 LD/FBD
6F8C1226
690

Program example

REQ
BCD_DAT
GET_CLND
E

TYPE
1
Stores calendar data in the
BCD data format.

GET_CLND( REQ, 1, BCD_DAT);

When execution control input REQ is TRUE(ON), calendar data in the format specified
with calendar data type specification TYPE is obtained, and stored to the specified
variable BCD_DAT.

Error information
No processing is performed unless calendar data type specification TYPE is valid
specification.
2.24 RAS
691

Interlock Diagnosis

RAS Interlock Diagnosis
LD/FBD language
notation

Interlock circuit
input
Interlock circuit
output
DIAG_D
Interlock circuit
diagnosis permission
Interlock circuit
screen permission
Interlock group
number
Instance name
BI BO
ENA
DSP
GRP


ST language notation [Instance name]( BI, ENA, DSP, GRP );
[Variable name]:=[Instance name]. BO;

Arguments

BI BOOL Interlock circuit input

ENA BOOL

Interlock circuit diagnosis
permission
1 : Permitted,
0 : Prohibited
DSP BOOL
*1
Interlock circuit screen
permission
1 : Permitted,
0 : Prohibited
Input
GRP UINT
*1 Interlock group number

1 to 32
Output BO BOOL Interlock circuit output

*1 : Only constants can be specified.

Instance structure

BO BOOL Interlock circuit output
program.
RESERVE Reserved (79W)
program.

Function
This function block creates, monitors, and diagnoses the interlock signals of the entire
system.
It can display the diagnosis result for the interlock signals of the entire system by using
the V Engineering Tool's add-in software, "Interlock Diagnosis Package." For details,
refer to "Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 2 Permissive Fault Diagnosis
Package Users Manual (6F8C1117)."
2 LD/FBD
6F8C1226
692
LD circuit that consists of a contact, b contact, contact force, left bus, and
horizontal/vertical connection lines is input to interlock circuit input BI. The number of
available contacts is 1 to 32.
Only coils (normal coils) can be connected to interlock circuit output BO.
Interlock circuit diagnosis permission ENA can be specified with constants and
variables. Interlock diagnosis is performed when ENA is TRUE(ON), or stopped
when it is FALSE(OFF).
When ENA=FALSE(OFF), the interlock circuit is not disconnected because interlock
circuit output BO= interlock circuit input BI.
Interlock circuit screen permission DSP can be specified only with constants. The
interlock diagnosis screen is displayed when it is TRUE(ON), or not displayed when it
is FALSE(OFF).
When the interlock circuit consists of the main circuit and other sub circuits, only
relevant interlock signals can be displayed on the interlock diagnosis screen by setting
DSP=TRUE(ON) for the main circuit and DSP=FALSE(OFF) for the sub circuits.
Interlock group number GRP is a number for grouping the interlock signals of the
entire system by plant monitoring section for efficient diagnosis and monitoring. It
can be specified to 1 to 32 using only constants.
Function block DIAG_D can be used only in programs of the POU type (excluding
programs within user defined action). Also, DIAG_D is used in conditions where it
operates in every cycle in the scan system tasks (mains task (MS), high-speed task
(HS), ultra-high speed task (SS)) (e.g. there are cycles not executed due to the IF
statement).
The group specified with interlock group number GRP must use the interlock circuit in
the same task.

Restriction
I/O variable, index modification, non-pointer BOOL cannot be specified directly for the
variable specified for contacts of the interlock circuit.
Interlock group number GRP must use the interlock circuit in the same task.
Correct example Group number is used in MS010, MS100, and MS250.
Wrong example Group number is used in MS010 and HS050.
Function block DIAG_D cannot be used in functions or function blocks for the POU
type.
The number of DIAG_D used in one program is 64.
2.24 RAS
693

Note
Do not combine DIAG_D and DIAG_D2 in the Controller. Use either DIAG_D or
DIAG_D2.

Program example

DIAG_D
BI
ENA
DSP
GRP
BO
1
LD
X1 X2
X3
X4
X5
1
LD
30
LD
Y0
Only normal coil can
be connected
Interlock circuit
DIAG_D_1

Z1 := X1 AND X2;
Z2 := X3 AND NOT(X4);
Z3 := ( Z1 OR Z2) AND X5;
DIAG_D_1( Z3, 1, 1, 30);
Y0 := DIAG_D_1.BO;

Because ENA input is TRUE(ON), the state of interlock circuit input BI is monitored.
Interlock circuit output BO outputs the state of interlock circuit input BI as it is.

Error information
If I/O variable, index modification, or nonpointer BOOL that cannot be specified
directly for the variable specified for contacts of the interlock circuit is specified, the
monitoring result is not displayed correctly when the state of interlock circuit input BI
becomes FALSE(OFF).
If the calendar of the controller is abnormal, the monitoring result cannot be displayed
correctly.
2 LD/FBD
6F8C1226
694

Interlock Diagnosis with First Fault Diagnosis Permission Input

RAS
Interlock Diagnosis with First Fault Diagnosis
Permission Input

LD/FBD language
notation

Interlock circuit input Interlock circuit
output
DIAG_D2
permission
Interlock circuit
screen permission
Interlock group number
Instance name
BI BO
ENA
DSP
GRP
FFENA
Interlock circuit first fault


ST language notation [Instance name]( BI, ENA, FFENA, DSP, GRP );
[Variable name]:=[Instance name]. BO;

Arguments

BI BOOL Interlock circuit input
ENA BOOL

permission
1: Permitted, 0:
Prohibited
FFENA BOOL

Interlock circuit first fault
1: Permitted, 0:
Prohibited
DSP BOOL
*1
Interlock circuit screen
permission
1: Permitted, 0:
Prohibited
Input
GRP UINT
Interlock group number 1 to 32

Output BO BOOL Interlock circuit output
*1 : Only constants can be specified.

Instance structure

BO BOOL Interlock circuit output
program.
RESERVE Reserved (79W)
program.

Function
This function block creates, monitors, and diagnoses the interlock signals of the entire
system.
It can display the diagnosis result for the interlock signals of the entire system by using
the V Engineering Tool's add-in software, "Interlock Diagnosis Package." For details,
2.24 RAS
695
refer to "Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 2 Permissive Fault Diagnosis
Package Users Manual (6F8C1117)."
LD circuit that consists of a contact, b contact, contact force, left bus, and horizontal/vertical
connection lines is input to interlock circuit input BI. The number of available contacts is 1 to
32.
Interlock circuit diagnosis permission ENA can be specified with constants and variables.
Interlock diagnosis is performed when ENA is TRUE(ON), or stopped when it is FALSE(OFF).
When ENA is FALSE(OFF), interlock circuit output BO is set to TRUE(ON) by force.
Note that this operation differs from interlock diagnosis instruction DIAG_D.
Interlock circuit first fault diagnosis permission FFENA can be specified with constants
and variables. Interlock diagnosis is performed at all the time when interlock circuit
diagnosis permission ENA is TRUE(ON) and FFENA=TRUE(ON). First fault detection
is stopped when FFENA is FALSE(OFF). Interlock diagnosis is restarted by setting
FFENA to TRUE(ON).
Interlock circuit screen permission DSP can be specified only with constants. The interlock
diagnosis screen is displayed when it is TRUE(ON), or not displayed when it is FALSE(OFF).
When the interlock circuit consists of the main circuit and other sub circuits, only relevant
interlock signals can be displayed on the interlock diagnosis screen by setting DSP=TRUE(ON)
for the main circuit and DSP=FALSE(OFF) for the sub circuits.
Interlock group number GRP is a number for grouping the interlock signals of the entire system
by plant monitoring section for efficient diagnosis and monitoring. It can be specified by
constants (1 to 32) or variables specified by the interlock grouping screen of the interlock
diagnosis package (special register interlock group number).
Interlock group number GRP takes in the group number specified by the rise of
interlock circuit diagnosis permission ENA and performs interlock diagnosis according
to the group number.
DIAG_D2 can be used only in programs of the POU type (excluding programs within user
defined action). Also, DIAG_D2 is used in conditions where it operates in every cycle in the
scan system tasks (mains task (MS), high-speed task (HS), ultra-high speed task (SS)) (e.g.
there are cycles not executed due to the IF statement).
The group specified with interlock group number GRP must use the interlock circuit in the same
task..
2 LD/FBD
6F8C1226
696

Interlock circuit diagnosis permission ENA and interlock circuit first fault diagnosis
permission FFENA operate as follows. The first fault state is retained by setting
FFENA to FALSE(OFF) with the next scan that detects the first fault.

ENA FFENA Action
FALSE(OFF) * Interlock diagnosis stop
FALSE(OFF) First fault diagnosis stop TRUE(ON)
TRUE(ON) First fault diagnosis execution

Restriction
/O variable, index modification, non-pointer BOOL cannot be specified directly for the
variable specified for contacts of the interlock circuit.
Interlock group number GRP must use the interlock circuit in the same task.
Correct example Group number is used in MS010, MS100, and MS250.
Wrong example Group number is used in MS010 and HS050.
Function block DIAG_D2 cannot be used in functions or function blocks of the POU
type.
The number of DIAG_D2 used in one program is 64.
Changing the GRP number is invalid while interlock circuit diagnosis permission ENA
is TRUE(ON).

Note
Do not combine DIAG_D and DIAG_D2 in the Controller. Use either DIAG_D or
DIAG_D2.

2.24 RAS
697

Program example

DIAG_D2
BI
ENA
FFENA
DSP
BO
1
LD
X1 X2
X3
X4
X5
1
LD
1
LD
Y0
Only normal coil can
be connected
Interlock circuit
DIAG_D2_1
GRP
30
LD

Z1 := X1 AND X2;
Z2 := X3 AND NOT(X4);
Z3 := ( Z1 OR Z2) AND X5;
DIAG_D2_1( Z3, 1, 1, 1, 30);
Y0 := DIAG_D2_1.BO;

Because ENA input and and FFENA are TRUE(ON), the state of interlock circuit input BI
is monitored. When ENA input is TRUE(ON), Interlock circuit output BO outputs the state of
interlock circuit input BI as it is.

Error information
If I/O variable, index modification, or non-pointer BOOL that cannot be specified directly for the
variable specified for contacts of the interlock circuit is specified, the monitoring result is not
displayed correctly when the state of interlock circuit input BI becomes FALSE(OFF).
If the calendar of the controller is abnormal, the monitoring result cannot be displayed
correctly.
2 LD/FBD
6F8C1226
698

Special register interlock group number
Special register-Xnterlock group number is initialized at the Controller startup.
Special register-interlock group numbers are placed as follows by the Controller.
In a duplex system, special register interlock group numbers are not variables for
tracking. Do not change the variable value of the special register-interlock group
number from the user application program.
Refer to Integrated Controller V series Engineering Tool 2 Permissive Fault Diagnosis
Package Users Manual (6F8C1117) to specify variables for interlock group numbers.

Special register word No.
Group
number
Unified
type1
Integrated
S3
1 166 426
2 167 427
3 168 428
4 169 429
5 170 430
6 171 431
7 172 432
8 173 433
9 174 434
10 175 435
11 176 436
12 177 437
13 178 438
14 179 439
15 180 440
16 181 441
17 182 442
18 183 443
19 184 444
20 185 445
21 186 446
22 187 447
23 188 448
24 189 449
25 190 450
26 191 451
27 192 454
28 193 455
29 194 456
30 195 457
31 196 458
32 197 459

699
Chapter 3
SFC Instructions

Chapter 3 SFC Instructions
6F8C1226
700

1 Step
2 Initial Step
3 Transition
4
Divergence/Convergence of
Sequence

5
Divergence/Convergence of
Simultaneous Sequence

6 Link
BOOL
7 Action
User Defined
8 Sequence *1
9 Phase Step *1
10 Phase End Step *1
11 Answer Step *1
12 Phase step 2 *
13 Answer step 2 *
*1 V-Tool3 and Worksheet Editor does not support these instructions.
Ans2
Ph2 N

701

Step

SFC Step
Diagram

Step name LD circui t or action
Modifier

Function
Represents the minimum unit of SFC network operation.
When the state of predecessor transition becomes TRUE(ON), the connected steps
become active and the ladder circuit or action connected on the right side of the step is
executed.
The step state can be determined from the following variables:
Step flag: step name .X (TRUE(ON) when step is active, FALSE(OFF) when step is
inactive)
Step execution duration: step name .T (represents the duration when step is active
and is cleared to 0 the first time the step is active)
Steps cannot be placed consecutively. A transition must be placed between steps.
Step is not executed consecutively within the same scan.

Program example

S2
S3
T0
S3.X
T1
T2 GE_TIME S2.T
T#30s
S1
N SIGNAL2
Transition T1
=TRUE(ON)
T2
S1.T
S1.X
T1
S2.X
S2.T
T0
Scan
S1
S3
T0
S3.X
T1
T2 GE_TIME S2.T
T#30s
SIGNAL1
S2 N SIGNAL2
SIGNAL1

6F8C1226
702

When transition T1 becomes TRUE(ON) while step S1 is active, step S1 becomes
inactive and step S2 becomes active. Step S1 remains active until transition T1
becomes TRUE(ON).

Important
All steps within an SFC network, whether they are active or inactive, are executed during each
scan. With LD circuits directly connected in step flag status, active steps are executed ON and
inactive steps are executed OFF. Therefore, do not use coils with the same variable name in
more than one step. A sample program and its process are shown below:

When an LD circuit is connected to the step
If a coil with the same variable name is used in steps S1 and S3, the BOOL variable
SIGNAL1 is set to TRUE(ON) when step S1 is active. Next, the BOOL variable
SIGNAL1 becomes FALSE(OFF) because step S3 is inactive. In other words,
SIGNAL1=FALSE(OFF) is the final value of this variable.

S2
S3
T0
T3
T1
T2
SIGNAL1
S1
SIGNAL1
SIGNAL2
[Step S1=Active: BOOL variable SIGNAL1=TRUE (ON)]
[Step S3=Inactive: BOOL variable SIGNAL1=FALSE(OFF)]

When an action is connected to the step
If a BOOL action with the same variable name is used in steps S1 and S3, the
connected action is executed because step S1 is active and the BOOL variable
SIGNAL1 is set to TRUE(ON). Next, the connected action is not executed because
step S3 is inactive. But the action block state (N) is substituted for the BOOL variable
and the SIGNAL=FALSE(OFF) is the final value of this variable.

N SIGNAL1
S1
S2
S3
T0
T3
T1
T2
SIGNAL2
[Step S1=Active: BOOL variable due to action execution
SIGNAL1=TRUE(ON)]
[Step S3=Inactive: BOOL variable due to action not executed
SIGNAL1=FALSE(OFF)]
N SIGNAL1

703

Initial Step

SFC Initial Step
Diagram

Step name LD circuit or action
Modifier

Function
Only during controller cold start, the connected initial step becomes active
unconditionally and makes all other steps connected to the same SFC network
inactive. Also, the connected ladder circuit and action are executed.
Step activation flag: step name .X (TRUE(ON) when step is active, FALSE(OFF) when
step is inactive)
Step duration: step name .T (represents the duration when step is active and is
cleared to 0 when the step first becomes active)
One initial step is required in an SFC network.
Initial steps cannot be placed consecutively. A transition must be placed between
initial step and other step.
Initial step is not executed consecutively within the same scan.

Program example

S1
T1
INI.X GE_TIME INI.T
T#30s
INI
N SIGNAL2
S1
T1
INI.X GE_TIME INI.T
T#30s
N SIGNAL2 INI
When INI.T30s
and
INI.X=TRUE(ON)
<During cold start>

During controller cold start, initial step INI becomes active and other step S1 on the
same circuit become inactive.
After initial step INI has been active for 30 seconds, it becomes inactive and step S1
becomes active.
6F8C1226
704

Transition

SFC Transition
Diagram

Variable (BOOL) LD circui t or BOOL output FBD circui t
Modifier

Function
Defines the transition condition from step to step.
Transition to the next step is performed when the variable specified for transition is
TRUE(ON).
An LD circuit or FBD circuit with BOOL output may be specified on the left connecting
side of the transition. The operation result of this connected circuit is assigned to the
variable specified with the transition and transition is made to the next step when the
operation result is TRUE(ON).
The operation of the network stops when the SFC network ends with the transition.

Program example

S2
S3
T0
S3.X
T1
T2 GE_TIME S2.T
T#30s
SIGNAL1
S1
N SIGNAL2
S1
S3
T0
S3.X
T1
T2 GE_TIME S2.T
T#30s
SIGNAL1
S2 N SIGNAL2
When transition
T1=TRUE(ON)

Step S2 becomes active when transition T1 becomes TRUE(ON). Step S1 remains
active until transition T1 becomes TRUE(ON).

705

S1
S3
T0
S3.X
T1
T2 GE_TIME S2.T
T#30s
SIGNAL1
S2 N SIGNAL2
When S2.T30s
S1
S2
T0
S3.X
T1
T2 S2.T
T#30s S3
GE_TIME
SIGNAL1
N SIGNAL2

When step S2 is active, if duration of S2 exceeds 30 seconds, step S2 becomes
inactive and step S3 becomes active.
6F8C1226
706

Divergence/Convergence of Sequence

SFC Divergence/Convergence of Sequence
Diagram

Variable (BOOL)
Variable (BOOL)
Variable (BOOL)
Variable (BOOL)
Variable (BOOL)
Variable (BOOL)
Modifier

Function
Selectively executes the SFC flow according to the transition condition placed at the
beginning of each divergence of sequence.
Only one circuit is executed with the divergence of sequence. Scan is made from the
left transition state and the first branch circuit that satisfies the condition is executed.
If more than one transition is satisfied, the priority of transition evaluation is from left to
right.
A step must be placed on the predecessor divergence of sequence.
A transaction must be placed on the predecessor divergence of sequence.

Program example

S2
S1
SIGNAL1
S1
S4 S6 S8
S3 S5 S7
Transitions T12 and T13 are
both TRUE(ON)
T11
T2
T3
T12
T4
T5
T13
T6
T7
T14
T8

When transitions T12 and T13 both become TRUE(ON) while step S1 is active, step
S1 becomes inactive and step S4 becomes active.
The step execution priority for the divergence of sequence is S2 > S4 > S6 > S8.

707

Divergence/Convergence of Simultaneous Sequence

SFC Divergence/Convergence of Simultaneous Sequence
Diagram

Variable (BOOL)
Variable (BOOL)
Modifier

Function
Simultaneously executes more than one step following divergence of simultaneous
sequences.
Up to 15 divergences of simultaneous sequences are allowed.
Divergence of simultaneous sequences ends when execution of all branch circuit ends.
(Transition to steps following the convergence of simultaneous sequences is not
performed until execution of all branch circuit completes).
A transition must be placed on the predecessor divergence of simultaneous
sequences.
A transition must be placed below the successor convergence of simultaneous
sequences.
Program example

S1
SIGNAL1
S2 S4 S6 S8
S3 S5 S7 S9
S10
T1
T2 T4 T6 T8
T3

inactive and steps S2, S4, S6, and S8 become active.
When steps S3, S5, S7, and S9 become active, if transition T3 is TRUE(ON), steps S3,
S5, S7, and S9 are made inactive and step S10 becomes active.
6F8C1226
708

Link

SFC Link
Diagram

Step name

Modifier

Function
Represents the link destination (loop or jump destination) of the network.
If the predecessor transition condition becomes TRUE(ON), transition is made to the
step specified by the link.

Program example
Loop specification

S1
S2
S3
T0
T3
T1
T2
SIGNAL1
S1
S1
S2
S3
T0
T3
T1
T2
SIGNAL1
Equivalent circuit
*Tools use representation on left


709

Jump specification

T21
S3
S1
S2
S3
SIGNAL1
S4
S5
S1
S2
S3
T3
T1
T2
SIGNAL1
S4
T4
S5
Equivalent
circuit
T0
T3
T2 T21
T1 T11
T0
T4
T11


6F8C1226
710

Action

SFC Action
Diagram
BOOL action User defined action

B: Qualifier specification U: Qualifier specification
I: Indicator variable
B Variable (BOOL) U Action name I
Modifier

Function
An action can be added to a step and it is executed when the step becomes active.
More than one action can be connected to a step.
A qualifier (action qualifier) can be used to specify the behavior of the action.
The action state can be determined from the following variables:
Active flag :Action name .Q (TRUE(ON) when action is active, FALSE(OFF) when
action is inactive)
Activation :Action name .A (TRUE(ON) when action is executed, FALSE(OFF) when
action is not executed)
Action timer work :Action name .T (action duration with timer)
Two types of actions are available:
BOOL action:Specified with a qualifier in the action box and a variable (BOOL).
The specified action variable (BOOL) can be controlled according to the qualifier.
User defined action :Specified with a qualifier in the action box, action name, and
indicator variable (indicator variable is optional). The execution of the program
specified with action name can be controlled according to the qualifier. Also, the
indicator variable may be updated within the action program.

711

The following qualifier types are actions are available:
[Qualifier types]

Qualifier Action
N or none
Specified action variable is TRUE(ON) while the action input is TRUE(ON) or
executes the specified program.
R: Reset
Resets the set state of the specified action variable when the action input is
TRUE(ON) or resets the set state of the specified program (The actual reset is
performed by the corresponding set action).
S: Set
Specified action variable is set while the action input is TRUE(ON) or continues
execution of the specified program.
L: time Limited
Keeps the specified action variable to TRUE(ON) for the specified interval when the
action input is TRUE(ON) or executes the specified program. If the input becomes
FALSE(OFF) before the specified interval, the specified action variable is immediately
reset to FALSE(OFF) or stops execution of the specified program.
D: Time delayed
When action input is TRUE(ON), sets the specified action variable to TRUE(ON) after
the specified delay or executes the specified program. If the input becomes
FALSE(OFF) before the specified interval, the specified variable is not set to
TRUE(ON) and the specified program is not executed.
P: Pulse
Sets the specified action variable to TRUE(ON) only when the action input changes
from FALSE(OFF) to TRUE(ON) or executes the specified program. Unlike P0 or
P1, this action performs final scan.
P0: Pulse
(falling edge)
from TRUE(ON) to FALSE(OFF) or executes the specified program. Unlike P, this
action does not perform final scan.
P1: Pulse
(rising edge)
from FALSE(OFF) to TRUE(ON) or executes the specified program. Unlike P, this
action does not perform final scan.
SD: Stored and time
delayed
Retains the state when the action input is TRUE(ON) and sets the specified action
variable to TRUE(ON) after the specified delay or executes the specified program.
The action is not executed if there is a reset before the specified interval.
DS: Delayed and Stored
When the action input is TRUE(ON), performs set operation, sets the specified action
variable, and executes the specified program after the specified delay. Does not
perform set operation if the input becomes FALSE(OFF) before the specified interval.
The corresponding reset action is necessary to reset the stored action.
SL: Stored and time limited
Retains the action state when the action input is TRUE(ON) and then sets the
specified action variable and executes the specified program for the specified interval.
The set action must be reset before it can be reused.
NH: N without final scan Same action as N without final scan.
SH: S without final scan Same action as S without final scan.
LH: L without final scan Same action as L without final scan.
DH: D without final scan Same action as D without final scan.

Note: Final scan
After an action connected to a step becomes active, an action is executed for one scan where
the step changes from active to inactive. This is referred to as final scan.
6F8C1226
712

[Qualifier action diagram]
The following figures show the operation of an action. AN stands for action name.
N or none

Step status
AN.Q
AN.A
(actual operation)
Scan
Final scan performed

S: Set and R: Reset

R step status
AN.Q
AN.A
(actual operation)
Scan
Fi nal scan performed
S step status

L: Limited

Step status
AN.Q
AN.A (actual operation)
Scan
AN.T
Setting ti me
Setting time
Setting time

D: Time delayed

Step status
AN.Q
Scan
AN.T
Setting ti me
Setting time Setting time

713

P: Pulse

Step status
AN.Q
Scan

P0: Pulse (falling edge)

Step status
AN.Q
Scan
1 scan time

P1: Pulse (rising edge)

Step status
AN.Q
Scan
1 scan time

SD: Stored and time delayed

SD step status
AN.Q
Scan
AN.T
Setting ti me
Setting ti me
R step status
Setting time
6F8C1226
714

DS: Delayed and stored

DS step status
AN.Q
Scan
AN.T
Setting ti me
Setting ti me Setti ng time
R step status
SL: Stored and time limited

SL step status
AN.Q
Scan
AN.T
Setting ti me
Setting ti me
Setting time
R step status

NH: N without final scan

Step status
AN.Q
Scan
Final scan not performed
SH: S without final scan

R step status
AN.Q
Scan
Fi nal scan not performed
S step status

715

LH: L without final scan

Step status
AN.Q
Scan
Fi nal scan not performed
AN.T
Setting ti me
Setting ti me
Setti ng time

DH: D without final scan

Step status
AN.Q
Scan
AN.T
Setting ti me
Setting ti me Setti ng time

Important
When specifying an action qualifier, always use R to reset the action variable specified with S,
SD, DS, SL, or SH. A Coil instruction cannot be used to reset action variables.

6F8C1226
716

Program example

Scan
S1
S2
S3
T0
T3
T1
T2
SIGNAL1
N SIGNAL2
Transition
T1=TRUE(ON)
SIGNAL1
S1.X
T1
S2.X
SIGNAL2
T0
T2
S1
S2
S3
T0
T3
T1
T2
SIGNAL1
N SIGNAL2

inactive and step S2 becomes active. The connected N action variable SIGNAL2 is
TRUE(ON) only while step S2 is TRUE(ON).

717

Sequence

SFC Sequence
Diagram
SQ parameter
SEQ

Modifier

Function
Associates connected SFC network with sequence tag.
Controls the execution of SFC network according to the mode of the associated
sequence tag.
C mode: SFC network execution (continuous progress)
A mode: SFC network execution (conf progress)
M/RM mode: SFC network halt (jump to end of SFC network)
(Refer to the Phase Step instruction for details concerning continuous progress and
conf progress.)
Single step execution
When the mode of the sequence tag is M/RM, the SFC network can be executed for
just one process cycle from the tool (pressing the button on the program editor
control panel) or by setting the sequence tag SSE ON.

Single step execution example:

T1
T2
T3
INI
SEQ001
SEQ
1 PHASE1
Time#10s
2 PHASE2
Time#10s
T1
T2
T3
INI
SEQ001
SEQ
1 PHASE1
Time#10s
2 PHASE2
Time#10s
T1
T2
T3
INI
SEQ001
SEQ
1 PHASE1
Time#10s
2 PHASE2
Time#10s
Single step
execution
After 1 scan
>
<Initialized state> <During execution (1 scan only) > <After executing 1 scan>

All transition conditions are assumed to be satisfied.
When single step execution is performed once from an initialized state such as
Initializing (long stop) or immediately after program DL, the INI step is activated for just
one scan time and the active location moves to PHASE1. And when single step
execution is performed again, the phase part of PHASE1 is executed in sequence one
step at a time from the initial step.
6F8C1226
718

Changing the active location
The SFC network connected to a sequence instruction can change the active location
from OIS-DS, tool, or instruction.
Changing the active location from OIS-DS is possible when the SFC network is
stopped (RM mode) and the change can be made in phase units.
Changing the active location from the tool is possible when the SFC network is
stopped (RM or M mode) and the change can be made in step units.
Changing the active location from an instruction is possible when the SFC network is
executing (A or C mode) and the change can be made in step units. The instructions to
change the active location are Reset Jump (RJ_P) and Self Step Jump (SJ_P). Reset
jump activates the specified step after initializing (resetting all active information) the
SFC network similar to OIS-DS and tool. On the other hand, Self Step Jump makes
the step to which the Self Step Jump is connected to inactive and activates the
specified step. Therefore, when self step jump is performed within a parallel process,
only that active location is changed and other parallel active locations are unaffected.
This is summarized in the following table:

Method Unit
Possible
mode
Action
OIS-DS Phase RM Resets all active information and activates specified phase
Tool Step RM or M Resets all active information and activates specified step
Instruction (RJ_P) Step A or C Resets all active information and activates specified step
Instruction (SJ_P) Step A or C Makes self step inactive and activates specified step

Notes
Neither OIS-DS, tool, nor instruction can change the active location to within a parallel
process (does not become parallel action). If the active location is switched inside a
parallel process, steps are executed in sequence from that location and held at the end
of the parallel process (waiting for other parallel process to end). In such case, the
activate location must be switched once more.
Changing the active location

OIS-DS:
Change the mode to RM (press the
M

button twice) in the point screen of the sequence.
Press the
[Phase change]

button.
Select the change destination phase from the phase list and press

[Change]
.
Tool:
From the control panel of the program editor, change the mode to M or RM (press the

button).
Select the change destination step and press the

button.
Change the mode to A or C (press the

button).
Refer to "2.23 Tag Operation" for information on instructions RJ_P and SJ_P.

719

Program example

T1
T2
T3
INI
SEQ001
SEQ
1 PHASE1
Time#10s
2 PHASE2
Time#10s
T1
T2
T3
INI
SEQ001
SEQ
1 PHASE1
Time#10s
2 PHASE2
Time#10s
<In M or RM mode> <In A or C mode>

Stop SFC network when SEQ001 mode is M (or RM).
Sequentially execute SFC network when SEQ001 mode is A (or C).

Restriction
This instruction must be written at the beginning of an SFC network. If it is written in
the middle of an SFC network, its operation will be unstable (not as expected).
The beginning of the sequence parameter must be specified for the SQ parameter. An
index register cannot be specified for array No. A table operation error will occur if
there is an incorrect specification.
Correct example :SQ_PARA[1] :SEQ001.TAG[0]
Wrong example :SQ_DATA[1] :SEQ001.TYPE SQ_PARA[XI]
6F8C1226
720

Phase Step

SFC Phase Step
Diagram

Step name
Congestion timer
N: Phase no. (1-32)

Modifier

Function
Unlike the Step instruction, action (sub screen) is performed from the phase step itself.
When the transition condition of the previous step becomes TRUE(ON), the connected
phase step becomes active and executes the ladder circuit or action connected to the
right side of the phase step (if conf progress wait, the connection on the right side of
the phase step remains FALSE(OFF) and the ladder circuit is not executed. (When
"acknowledge operation" is performed the connection on the right side of the phase
step becomes TRUE(ON)). At the same time, the SFC network written in the action
(sub screen) is executed as "phase". When phase execution completes (phase end
instruction becomes active) and the transition condition of the proceeding step
becomes TRUE(ON), its own phase step is deactivated (inactive).
The portion containing the Sequence instruction and Phase Step instruction is referred
to as the operation and the portion expanded by the Phase Step instruction is referred
to as the phase.
A number from 1 to 32 is set as the phase No. This number is used to associate with a
sequence tag member (phase name (PNAM) and interlock/single selection (FA)) and
the phase execution status can be monitored from OIS-DS.
The Phase Step instruction has a congestion monitor timer. If phase execution does
not completed before the congestion monitor timer expires, a congestion alarm is
issued. In this case, the timer value is limited by the set value. Congestion monitor is
disabled when the congestion monitor timer is set to 0 seconds (time#0s).
Step flag : Step name .X (TRUE(ON) when step is active,
FALSE(OFF) when step is inactive)
Step execution duration : Step name .T (represents the duration when step is
active and is cleared to 0 the first time the step is
active)
Phase step cannot be placed consecutively with other steps. A transition must be
placed between phase step and other step.
Phase step is not executed consecutively within the same scan.
Conf progress and continuous progress

721
Phase execution can be controlled with sequence tag execution control information
(mode, interlock/single setting). When the sequence tag mode is C mode, phase is
executed continuously regardless of the interlock/single setting. When the sequence
tag mode is A mode, phase is executed continuously as in C mode if the
interlock/single setting is interlock, but if the interlock/single setting is single, the phase
is temporarily halted (conf progress wait) before execution, a conf progress wait alarm
is issued, and phase execution is resumed after it is acknowledged by the operator.

Phase setting
sequence mode
Interlock Single
C mode
(continuous progress)
Execute Execute
A mode (conf progress) Execute
Temporary halt Executed
resumed when acknowledged
M, RM mode Halt Halt

If several phases are in "conf progress wait" in a parallel process, a single acknowledge will
cancel all acknowledge waits and resume execution.
When the mode is switched to C while in "conf progress wait", all conf progress waits are
canceled and changed to continuous execution. Also, if the mode is switched to M/RM while in
"conf progress wait" and single step execution is performed, conf progress wait is canceled and
inside of the phase is executed.
Acknowledge method
Press the

[conf progress]
button on the OIS-DIS sequence tag point screen.
Press the button on the tool's program editor control panel.
Set conf progress request (CNE) of sequence tag ON from tool's tag editor or other program.
Conf progress example

T1
T2
2 PHASE2
Time#10s
T3
4 PHASE4
Time#10s
1 PHASE1
Time#10s
3 PHASE3
Time#10s
T1
T2
2 PHASE2
Time#10s
T3
4 PHASE4
Time#10s
1 PHASE1
Time#10s
3 PHASE3
Time#10s
T1
T2
2 PHASE2
Time#10s
T3
4 PHASE4
Time#10s
1 PHASE1
Time#10s
3 PHASE3
Time#10s
>
> || > >
Sequence tag (parameter)
:
FA1 : Interlock/single setting 1 Interlock
FA2 : Interlock/single setting 2 Interlock
FA3 : Interlock/single setting 3 Standalone
:
Sequence tag (data
:
MODEmode A
:

Transition T1
=TRUE(ON)
Acknowledge
CNE=ON
PHASE1 : Active(phase execution complete)

PHASE2 : Active (executing within phase)
PHASE3 : Active (conf progress wait)

6F8C1226
722

If transition (T1) becomes TRUE(ON) when PHASE1 is active, PHASE2 and PHASE3 become
active. Execution within phase is started immediately because PHASE2 is "interlock". PHASE3
is temporarily halted and placed in conf progress wait because it is "single". When
acknowledged, PHASE3's conf progress wait is canceled and the inside of PHASE3 is
executed.

Program example

Main screen (operation) Sub screen (phase)
T1
T2
T3
INI
SEQ001
SEQ
1 PHASE1
Time#10s
2 PHASE2
Time#10s
T11
T2
T13
P1INI
S11
S12
S13
PhaseEnd

When phase 1 (step name: PHASE1) becomes active, the initial step (step name:
P1INI) of the sub screen (phase) becomes active. Step is executed sequentially from
P1INI and "Phase execution complete" is indicated when the phase end step (step
name: S13) becomes active. When S13 becomes active and operation transition
condition (T2) becomes TRUE(ON), phase execution is ended and the active point is
moved to the next step (phase).

Restriction
Description in phase level is not allowed (phase step nesting is not allowed). If phase
steps are nested, operation will be unstable (not as expected).

723

Phase End Step

SFC Phase End Step
Diagram Step name
Phase End

Modifier

Function
When the transition condition in the previous step becomes TRUE(ON), the connected
phase end step becomes active and the ladder circuit or action connected on the right
side of the phase end step is executed. At the same time, phase execution completion
is notified to the calling Phase Step instruction.
The phase end step is active only for one scan.
Phase end step can be written more than once within a phase. Execution of the phase
(SFC network) is ended when any of the phase end step becomes active.
Step flag: step name .X (TRUE(ON) when step is active, FALSE(OFF) when step is
inactive)
Phase end step cannot be placed consecutively with other steps. A transition must be
placed between phase step and other step.
Transition or other step instruction cannot be placed below phase end step.
Phase end step is not executed consecutively within the same scan.
6F8C1226
724

Program example

T1
T2
T3
INI
SEQ001
SEQ
1 PHASE1
Time#10s
2 PHASE2
Time#10s
T11
T2
T13
P1INI
S11
S12
S13
PhaseEnd

When phase 1 (step name: PHASE1) becomes active, the initial step (step name:
P1INI) of the sub screen (phase) becomes active. Step is executed sequentially from
P1INI and "Phase execution complete" is indicated when the phase end step (step
name: S13) becomes active. When S13 becomes active and operation transition
condition (T2) becomes ON, phase execution is ended and the active point is moved
to the next step (phase).

Restriction
Description at the operation level is not allowed. If phase step is nested, operation will
be unstable (not as expected).
At least one phase end step must be written within a phase. If there is no phase end
step, the phase will not end (no transition of operation active pointer).

725

Answer Step

SFC Answer Step
Diagram

Step name
Ans
Answer timer

Modifier

Function
When the state of the predecessor transition becomes TRUE(ON), the connected
answer step becomes active and the ladder circuit or action connected on the right
side of the answer step is executed.
Answer step can be written more than once only in phase. Description at the operation
level is not allowed.
Answer step instruction has an answer back monitor timer. If execution of the answer
step does not complete before the answer back monitor timer expires (answer back
proceeding transition is satisfied), an answer back alarm is issued. In this case, the
timer value is limited by the set value. Answer back monitor is disabled when the timer
is set to 0 seconds (time#0s).
Step flag : Stepname.X (TRUE(ON) when step is active, FALSE(OFF) when step is
inactive)
Step execution duration : Stepname.T (represents the duration when step is active and
is cleared to 0 the first time the step is active)
Answer step cannot be placed consecutively with other steps. A transition must be
placed between Answer step and other step.
Answer step is not executed consecutively within the same scan.
Restarting answer back monitor
When the SEQ tag mode is set to M (or RM) and later changed to A (or C), the answer
back monitor is restarted (timer current value is cleared to 0, answer back alarm
restored). The answer back alarm causes M demotion. When reclosed to A, the
answer back alarm is restored to perform answer back monitor again.

Remarks
The timer current value is initialized when the mode is changed from M(or RM) to A(or C).
(The answer back monitor restart function is valid for PU821 (all versions), L3DS(V3.26 and
following versions) and L2DS(V3.18 and following versions)).
6F8C1226
726

Program example

T12
PB_P
SIGNAL1
PB_PARA[1]
PB_D
BNO
PB_P
E
PB_DATA[1]
1
PB_DATA[1].
FI[1]

T1
T2
INI
SEQ001
SEQ
1 PHASE1
Time#10s
T11
P1INI
S12
PhaseEnd
S11
Ans
Time#10s

When answer step (step name: S1) becomes active, Push Button instruction (PB_P)
is executed and PB_DATA[1] button 1 is pressed. If the transition condition
(PB_DATA[1].FI[1]) is satisfied before the answer back timer expires (10s), no alarm
is issued and transition is made to the next step. If the timer expires, an answer back alarm is
issued.

Restriction
Description at the operation level is not allowed. Please be sure to describe in phase
level. When it describes in operation level, an active step does not move.

727

Phase Step 2

SFC Phase Step 2
Diagram

Ph2
TIM Step
N
TIM Congestion timer set val ue [ms]
N Phase No. (1-32)
Step Variable name to indicate step instance
Modifier

Function
When the transition condition of the previous step becomes TRUE(ON), the connected
phase step becomes active and executes the ladder circuit or action connected to the
right side of the phase step 2 (for conf progress wait, the connection on the right side
of the phase step 2 remains FALSE(OFF) and the ladder circuit is not executed).
When acknowledge operation is performed, the connection on the right side of the
phase step 2 becomes TRUE(ON).
At the same time, the SFC network is executed as phase.
When phase execution completes (when the next phase step is active) and the
transition condition of the proceeding step becomes TRUE(ON), its own phase step is
deactivated (inactive).
The numbers from 1 to 32 are set as phase numbers. A number is used to associate
with a sequence tag member (phase name PNAM and interlock/single selection (FA))
and the phase execution status can be monitored by OIS-DS.
The phase step 2 instruction has a congestion monitor timer. If phase execution is not
completed before the congestion monitor timer expires, a congestion alarm is issued.
In such case the time value is limited by the set value.
6F8C1226
728

Program example

T2
T1
INI
SEQ001
SEQ
1 PHASE1
Time#10s
T5
2 PHASE2
Time#10s
T3
S1
T4
S2
Phase 1

When T1 is TRUE(ON), phase 1 (up to the previous step of the next phase step 2) is
executed.
If the phase is not executed in 10 seconds, the congestion alarm is issued.

Error information
No action is made when the phase number is out of the range (other than 1 to 32).
When the congestion monitor timer set value is 0, the timer current value is not
updated and the alarm is not issued (treated as no setting for congestion monitor).

729

Answer Step 2

SFC Answer Step 2
Diagram

Ans2
TIM Step
TIM : Answer back timer set value [ms]
Step: Variable name to indicate step instance
Modifier

Function
When the state of the predecessor transition becomes TRUE(ON), the connected
answer step becomes active and the ladder circuit or action connected on the right
side of the answer step 2 executed.
Answer step 2 instruction has an answer back monitor timer. if execution of the answer
step 2 does not complete before the answer back monitor timer expires (answer back
proceeding transition is satisfied), an answer back alarm is issued. In this case, the
timer value is limited by the set value.
Answer back monitor is disabled when the timer is set to 0 second (TIME#0s).
Answer step 2 cannot be placed consecutively with other steps. A transition must be
placed between the answer step 2 and other step.
The answer step 2 is not executed consecutively within the same scan.

Program example

Ans2
S3
T3
T1
T2
S1
SIGNAL1
TIME#10s

The monitor timer is updated when the answer step (step name:Ans2) is activated.
When the transition condition (T2) is satisfied before the answer back timer (10
seconds) expires, no alarm is issued and transition is made to the next step.
If the timer expires, an answer back alarm is issued.
6F8C1226
730

Error information
When the answer back monitor timer set value is 0, the timer current value is not
updated and the alarm is not issued (treated as no setting for answer back monitor).

731
Appendix A
Using Any Function

Appendix A Using Any Function
6F8C1226
732

No. Instruction
Remarks
(Real instruction)
Arithmetic Operations
Add + ADD_
1
Multiply * MUL_
Subtract - SUB_
2
Divide / DIV_
Logical Operations
Bitwise Boolean AND AND AND_
Bitwise Boolean OR OR OR_ 3
Bitwise Boolean XOR XOR XOR_
4 Bitwise Boolean NOT ~ NOT_
Comparison Functions
Greater Than > GT_
Greater Than or Equal >= GE_
Equal = EQ_
Less Than or Equal <= LE_
5
Less Than < LT_
6 Not Equal <> NE_

733

Any function instructions
These are standard functions for any data types. The user can use the instruction
symbols without specifying the data type.
Any Function instructions are supported by Program Editor (full graphic).
Converts to equivalent instructions in the "Remarks" column when compiled.
The instruction data type is fixed automatically.

Instruction type Instruction data type
Arithmetic Operations
Logical Operations
Using the output data type, their data type is fixed.
Comparison Functions Using the input data type, their data type is fixed.

If the fixed data type is different from the input one, Type Conversion instruction is
inserted automatically.
Automatic insertion of Type Conversion Instruction.
1) The program code steps increases, when Type Conversion instruction is inserted
automatically.
2) Type Conversion instruction is NOT inserted, if the value is rounded down or the
error margin is caused. (It is the compile error.)
Example A: Value is rounded down.
Output (UINT) = Input1 (INT) + Input2 (UINT)
If the value of input (INT) is a minus, it is rounded down.
Example B: Error margin is caused.
Output (REAL) = Input1 (DINT) + Input2 (DINT)
If the value of result beyond the limits of "-16777215" to "16777215",
the error margin is caused.
3) When their instruction type is Arithmetic Operations or Comparison Functions, and
the input data type is "WORD", the type is converted into "DINT" or "UINT".
The BCD data is not supported.
Data types are indicated by "notations" (INT, REAL and others) in this section.

6F8C1226
734

Add/multiply

Arithmetic Operation Add/Multiply
LD/FBD language
notation

Input 1 Output

Input 2
Input n

Modifier

Arguments
The following data types are supported for input and output arguments:

Input See below
Input1n 2n15
Output Output

Input 1 Output

Input 2
Input n

Input1n Symbol () Output
See below +
*
See below

735

Function
The type of the instruction symbol (data type) is the same as the output data type.
Refer to the following rule tables for the input data type that can be used at once.
The data type that does not exist in the following table will be the compile error:

[Table: Rules of data types]
: Compile OK, : Compile error

Input1n data type
Output data type
Input1n data type
INT DINT UINT REAL WORD
INT

DINT
UINT
REAL
INT
WORD
INT

DINT

UINT

REAL
DINT
WORD

INT
DINT
UINT

REAL
UINT
WORD

INT

DINT
UINT

REAL

REAL
WORD

If the output data type and the input data type are different, the input data type fix
according to the output data type. That is, Type Conversion instruction is inserted
between input data and the instruction.
If the input data type is "WORD", Type Conversion instruction "Bit string - Integer
conversion" is inserted.

Type conversion Type conversion instruction
WORDDINT WORD_TO_DINT
WORDUINT WORD_TO_UINT

Refer to the description of "Arithmetic Operation Instructions" for "function",
"operation" and "error information" of each instruction (ADD / SUB / MUL / DIV).
6F8C1226
736

Program example

SAMPLE1
INT
LD

SAMPLE2
REAL
LD
SAMPLE3
UINT
LD
SAMPLE4
REAL
ST
SAMPLE1
INT
LD
ADD_REAL
SAMPLE2
REAL
LD
SAMPLE3
UINT
LD
SAMPLE4
REAL
ST
Type conversion
instruction
INTREAL
INT_TO_REAL
Internal
process
Type conversion
instruction
UINTREAL
UINT_TO_REAL

As the output data type is "REAL", "ADD_REAL" is used.
To operate SAMPLE1 ("INT") and SAMPLE3 ("UINT") by "REAL", Type Conversion
instructions are automatically inserted.

737

Subtract/Divide

Arithmetic Operation Subtract/Divide
LD/FBD language
notation

Input 1 Output

Input 2

Modifier

Arguments

Input See below
Input1, 2
Output Output

Input 2
Input 1 Output

Input1, 2 Symbol(
) Output
See below
/
See below

6F8C1226
738

Function
The data type that does not exist in the following table will the compile error:

: Compile OK, : Compile Error

Input2 data type
Output data type Input1 data type
INT DINT UINT REAL WORD
INT

DINT
UINT
REAL
INT
WORD
INT

DINT

UINT

REAL
DINT
WORD

INT
DINT
UINT

REAL
UINT
WORD

INT

DINT
UINT

REAL

REAL
WORD

according to the output data type. That is, type conversion instruction is inserted
If the input data type is "WORD", Type Conversion instruction "Bit string - Integer
conversion" is inserted.


Refer to the description of "Arithmetic Operation Instructions" for "function",
"operation" and "error information" of each instruction (ADD / SUB / MUL / DIV).

739

Program example

LD/FBD language notation

SAMPLE1
INT
LD

SAMPLE2
REAL
LD
SAMPLE3
REAL
ST
SAMPLE1
INT
LD
SUB_REAL
SAMPLE2
REAL
LD
SAMPLE3
REAL
ST
Type conversion
instruction
INTREAL
INT_TO_REAL
Internal
process

As the output data type is "REAL", "ADD_REAL" is used.
To operate SAMPLE1 ("INT") and SAMPLE3 ("UINT") by "REAL", the Type
Conversion Instructions are automatically inserted.
6F8C1226
740

Bitwise Boolean AND/Bitwise Boolean OR/Bitwise Boolean XOR

Logical Operation
Bitwise Boolean AND/Bitwise Boolean OR/Bitwise
Boolean XOR

LD/FBD language
notation

Input 1 Output

Input 2
Input n

Modifier

Arguments

Input See below
Input1n 2n15
Output Output

Input 1 Output

Input 2
Input n

Input1n Symbol(
) Output
See below AND
OR
XOR
See below

741

Function


: Compile OK, : Compile Error

Input 1n data type
Output data type Input 1n data type
BOOL WORD DWORD
BOOL

WORD BOOL
DWORD
BOOL
WORD
WORD
DWORD
BOOL
WORD
DWORD
DWORD

Refer to the description of "Logical Operation Instructions" for "function", "operation"
and "error information" of each instruction (Bitwise Boolean AND / Bitwise Boolean
OR / Bitwise Boolean XOR).

Program example

SAMPLE1
DWORD
LD
AND
SAMPLE2
DWORD
LD
SAMPLE3
WORD
LD
SAMPLE4
DWORD
ST
AND_DWORD
Internal
process
Type conversion
instruction
WORDDWORD
WORD_TO_DWORD
SAMPLE1
DWORD
LD
SAMPLE2
DWORD
LD
SAMPLE3
WORD
LD
SAMPLE4
DWORD
ST

As the output data type is "DWORD", "AND_DWORD" is used.
To operate SAMPLE3 ("WORD") by "DWORD", Type Conversion instructions are
automatically inserted.
6F8C1226
742

Bitwise Boolean NOT

Logical Operation Bitwise Boolean NOT
LD/FBD language
notation
Input Output
~

Modifier

Arguments

Input See below
Input
Output Output

Input Output

Input1, 2 Symbol(
) Output
See below ~ See below

Function
Refer to the following rule table for the input data type that can be used at once.

Input data type
Output data type
BOOL WORD DWORD
BOOL

WORD

DWORD

and "error information" of each instruction (Bitwise Boolean NOT).

743

Program example


SAMPLE1
WORD
LD
~ SAMPLE2
DWORD
ST
NOT_DWORD
Internal
process
Type conversion
instruction
WORDDWORD
WORD_TO_DWORD
SAMPLE1
WORD
LD
SAMPLE2
DWORD
ST

As the output data type is "DWORD", "NOT_DWORD" is used.
To operate SAMPLE1 ("WORD") by "DWORD", Type Conversion instructions are
6F8C1226
744

Greater Than/Greater Than or Equal/Equal/Less Than or Equal/less Than

Comparison
Function
Greater Than/Greater Than or Equal/Equal/Less Than
or Equal/Less Than

LD/FBD language
notation

Input 1 Output

Input 2
Input n

Modifier

Arguments

Input See below
Input1n 2n15
Output BOOL Output

Input 1 Output

Input 2
Input n

Input1n Symbol(
)
See below >
>=
=
<=
<

745

Function



Input1n data type
Input1n data type
INT DINT UINT REAL WORD DWORD
INT

DINT

UINT

REAL

WORD

DWORD

When all the rules of "Input 1 n" are "
", the compiler is successes.

The type of the instruction symbol is determined by the input data type.
If "Input 1 ... n" has two types or more of the data type, the data type is determined by
the rule in the following table:

: Compile error
Input1n data type
Input1n data type
INT INT DINT DINT REAL DINT
DINT DINT DINT DINT DINT
UINT DINT DINT UINT REAL UINT DWORD
REAL REAL REAL REAL
WORD DINT DINT UINT WORD DWORD
DWORD DWORD DWORD DWORD

If the data type of the inputs have three types or more of the data type, the data type
of the instruction symbol is determined by the following flow:

Example1:

Input 1
INT
Input 2
INT
Input 3
REAL

INT

REAL
Input n
UINT

REAL
Instruction symbol type
(data type)
REAL

6F8C1226
746

If the data type of inputs (1n) and the fixed data type are different, the input data type
fix according to the fixed data type. That is, the Type Conversion instruction is inserted
If the input data type is "WORD", "Bit string - Integer conversion" of the Type
Conversion instructions is inserted


and "error information" of each instruction (Greater than/Greater than or
equal/Equal/Less than or equal/Less than).

Important
"Comparison Function Instructions" are used following the data types that are not
supported.
"TIME", "TIME_OF_DAY (Abbreviation: TOD) ",
"DATE (Abbreviation: D) ", "DATE_AND_TIME (Abbreviation: DT) "

Program example

SAMPLE1
INT
LD
>
SAMPLE2
REAL
LD
SAMPLE3
UINT
LD
SAMPLE4
BOOL
ST
SAMPLE1
INT
LD
GT_REAL
SAMPLE2
REAL
LD
SAMPLE3
UINT
LD
SAMPLE4
BOOL
ST
Type conversion
instruction
INTREAL
INT_TO_REAL
Internal
process
Type conversion
instruction
UINTREAL
UINT_TO_REAL

Because SAMPLE1, SAMPLE2 and SAMPLE3 are different each the data type, the
data type of instruction fix "REAL" by "Rules of data types" table.
To convert the SAMPLE1 ("INT") and SAMPLE3 ("UINT") into "REAL", the Type
Conversion instruction is automatically inserted.

747

Not Equal

Comparison
Function
Not Equal
LD/FBD language
notation

Input 1 Output
<>
Input 2

Modifier

Arguments

Input See below
Input1, 2 Input number =2

Output BOOL Output

Input 1 Output

Input 2

Input1, 2 Symbol(
)
See below <>
Function
Refer to the following rule table for the input data type that can be used at once.


Input2 data type
Input1 data type
INT
DINT
UINT
REAL
WORD
DWORD

The type of the instruction symbol is fixed by the input data type. If "Input 1, 2 " have
two types or more of the data type, the data type is fixed by the rule in the following
table.
6F8C1226
748

: Compile error
Input2 data type
Input1 data type
INT INT DINT DINT REAL DINT
DINT DINT DINT DINT DINT
UINT DINT DINT UINT REAL UINT DWORD
REAL REAL REAL REAL
WORD DINT DINT UINT WORD DWORD
DWORD DWORD DWORD DWORD

If the data type of inputs (1, 2) and the fixed data type are different, the input data
type fix according to the fixed data type. That is, Type Conversion instruction is
inserted between input data and the instruction.
If the input data type is "WORD", "Bit string - Integer conversion" of the Type
Conversion instructions is inserted.


and "error information" of each instruction (Not equal).

Important
"Comparison Function Instructions" are used following the data types that are not
supported.
"TIME", "TIME_OF_DAY (Abbreviation: TOD) ",
"DATE (Abbreviation: D) ", "DATE_AND_TIME (Abbreviation: DT) "

Program example

SAMPLE1
INT
LD
<>
SAMPLE2
REAL
LD
SAMPLE3
BOOL
ST
SAMPLE1
INT
LD
NE_REAL
SAMPLE2
REAL
LD
SAMPLE3
BOOL
ST
Type conversion
instruction
INTREAL
INT_TO_REAL
Internal
process

Because variable SAMPLE1 and variable SAMPLE2 are different each the data type,
the data type of instruction fix "REAL" by table "Rules of data types".
To convert the SAMPLE1 ("INT") into "REAL ", the Type Conversion instruction is

749
Symbol
, 501
.. , 503
.. : 499
: 497
% conversion 420
A
ABS 245
ACC_P 670
ACOS 255
ACT_P 666
ADC 294
ADD 292, 313
AND 260
ARRAY_TO_STRING 231
ASC module string data input 346
ASC module string data output 349
ASC_TO_REAL 214
ASCDEC_TO_DINT 219
ASCHEX_TO_DINT 222
ASCII (decimal)-double integer conversion 219
ASCII (hexadecimal)-double integer conversion 222
ASCII-HEX conversion 210
ASCII-real numbers conversion 214
ASCREAD 346
ASCWRITE 349
ASIN 253
ATAN 257
ATOH_T 210
AVE 154
AVEL 156
Absolute value 245
Action 710
Action counter 670
Action timer 666
Add 292
Add time data 313
Add with carry 294
Answer step 725
Arccosine 255
Arcsine 253
Arctangent 257
Arithmetic operation 291
Arithmetic shift 287
Array-string conversion231
Average of table data156
Average value154
B
BC328
BCD-duration conversion191
BCD-integer conversion187
BCD-real numbers conversion189
BIN204
BIN conversion204
Bit counter328
Bit operation278
Bit string-bit string conversion185
Bit string-integer conversion183
Bitwise Boolean AND260
Bitwise Boolean AND of table data 262
Bitwise Boolean NOT268
Bitwise Boolean NOT of table data 269
Bitwise Boolean NOT XOR of table data 275
Bitwise Boolean OR264
Bitwise Boolean OR of table data 266
Bitwise Boolean XOR271
Bitwise Boolean XOR of table data273
C
CASE495
CMLP_P639
CMPB_P641
CMSQ_P643
CONCAT_D_TOD208
CONCAT_STRING 473
COS249
CTD80
CTU78
CTUD82
Calendar data acquisition689
Change adjuster mode639
Change push button mode641
Change sequence mode643
Coil 60
Common logarithms241
Communication524
Communication FB (XMIT_N)592
Communication FB (XMIT_T) 590
Comparison124

6F8C1226
750
Comparison with hysteresis (greater than) 137
Comparison with hysteresis (greater than or equal)
141
Comparison with hysteresis (less than) 139
Comparison with hysteresis (less than or equal)
143
Concatenate string 473
Concatenate time data 208
Conditional execution instruction/End of conditional
execution instruction 75
Contacts/Coils 52
Control statements 485
Controller global variable 10
Cosine 249
Counters 77
Current output PID 605
Current output sample PI 612
Cyclic trace 687
D
DATALOGC 687
DB 372
DCL_P 633
DEC 309, 326
DEF_STRING 483
DEG_TO_RAD 202
DEG-RAD conversion 202
DEL_L 102
DELETE 477
DI_T 464
DIAG_D 691
DIAG_D2 694
DIF2 374
DINT_TO_ASCDEC 225
DINT_TO_ASCHEX 228
DINT_TO_BCD_DWORD 174
DINT_TO_BCD_WORD 174
DINT_TO_DWORD 172
DINT_TO_INT 169
DINT_TO_REAL 171
DINT_TO_TIME 176
DINT_TO_UINT 169
DINT_TO_WORD 172
DIS_P 458
DIV 303, 319
DLM 414
DO 515
Drive Device State Read369
DT 402
DT_TO_DATE206
DT_TO_TOD206
DUPLEX_CHG595
DUPLEX_DOWN597
DWORD_BCD_TO_DINT187
DWORD_BCD_TO_INT187
DWORD_BCD_TO_REAL189
DWORD_BCD_TO_TIME191
DWORD_BCD_TO_UINT187
DWORD_TO_DINT183
DWORD_TO_INT 183
DWORD_TO_UINT183
DWORD_TO_WORD185
Data type6
Data exchange120
Data structure8
Data processing321
Dead band 372
Dead time402
Decode326
Decrement 309
Define string483
Delete string477
Derivative374
Direct I/O355
Divergence/Convergence of sequence706
Divergence/Convergence of simultaneous sequences
707
Divide303
Divide time data 319
Double cross limit633
Double integer-ASCII (decimal) conversion225
Double integer-ASCII (hexadecimal) conversion228
Down counter80
Drive Device State Read369
Duplex control 594
Duplex online-standby change595
Duplex self-system down597
Duration-BCD conversion 196
Duration-integer conversion193
Duration-real numbers conversion195
E
EI_T 463
ELSE (CASE statement)505

751
ELSE (IF statement) 490
ELSEIF 492
EN_P 456
ENC 324
END_CASE 507
END_FOR 513
END_IF 494
END_REPEAT 523
END_WHILE 518
EQ 129
EQUALIZE_ADDR 601
EQUALIZE_VAR 599
EXIT (FOR statement) 511
EXIT (REPEAT statement) 521
EXIT (WHILE statement) 516
EXP 239
EXPT 311
Encode 324
Engineering unit conversion 418
Equal 129
Essential succession PID 422
Estimate with reset 430
Event program start up 460
Execution control 72
Exponential 239
Extract string 471
F
FBD language 3
FFD_P 629
FIND 481
FOR_DO 509
Falling edge detector 58
Feed forward 629
Find string 481
Fix MV 388
Flip-flops 104
Forced coil 66
Forced negated coil 67
Forced negative transition-sensing coil 71
Forced positive transition-sensing coil 70
Forced RESET coil 69
Forced SET coil 68
Function 18
Function block 22
G
GE127
GE_L141
GET_CLND689
GET_DRV_STS369
GET_IO_STS361
GET_IP_INF 352
GET_SIO_STS 357
GT125
GT_L137
Global variable10
Greater than125
Greater than or equal 127
H
HEX-ASCII conversion212
HTOA_T212
I
I/O fallback recovery request 367
I/O fallback request 365
I/O module state read361
I/O node state read 357
IF486
ILNL 395
ILNL_REAL2399
INC307
INI_STEP684
INSERT475
INT_TO_BCD_DWORD174
INT_TO_BCD_WORD174
INT_TO_DINT169
INT_TO_DWORD172
INT_TO_REAL171
INT_TO_TIME176
INT_TO_UINT169
INT_TO_WORD172
INTG 377
IO_T355
IOFB_REQ365
IORC_REQ367
Increment 307
Index registers25
Initial step703
Initialize table data 122

6F8C1226
752
Insert string 475
Integer-BCD conversion 174
Integer-bit string conversion 172
Integer-duration conversion 176
Integer-integer conversion 169
Integer-real numbers conversion 171
Integrator 377
Interlock diagnosis 691
Interlock Diagnosis with First Fault Diagnosis Permission Input
694
Interrupt disable 464
Interrupt enable 463
Inverse polygonal line function 395
Inverse polygonal line function (high-speed version)
399
Inverter 59
I/O 333
I/O memory read 334
I/O memory read (nv) 340
I/O memory write 337
I/O memory write (nv) 343

J
JCR 73
JCS 73
Jump control set/reset 73
Jump/Label 74
L
LABEL 74
LAG2 416
LB_P 664
LD language 3
LE 131
LE_L 143
LEFT 467
LEN 466
LIMIT 158
LN 243
LOG 241
LT 133
LT_L 139
Lag/Lead filter 416
Leftmost extract string 467
Less than 133
Less than or equal 131
Limiter 158
Link 708
Local variable10
Logical operation259
Logical shift 289

M
MAV406
MAV_N410
MAX146
MAXL 148
MCR76
MCS76
MID 471
MIN 150
MINL 152
MOD305
MOVE 116
MPX165
MREAD334
MREAD_N 340
MUL 300, 317
MUL_INT_DINT302
MUX163
MVF 388
MV calculation385
MVS385
MWRITE 337
MWRITE_N343
Master control set/reset76
Maximum 146
Maximum of table data148
Minimum 150
Minimum of table data152
Move data 116
Move table data118
Moving 111
Moving average (high-speed version)406
Moving average (low-speed version) 410
Multiplex163
Multiplex of table data 165
Multiply300, 302
Multiply time data317

753
N
NE 135
NEG 200
NOT 268
Natural logarithms 243
Negated coil 61
Negative transition sensing contact 56
Negative transition-sensing coil 65
Network variable 10
Non-tracking type static variable 10
Normally closed contact 54
Normally closed contact gate 114
Normally open contact 53
Normally open contact gate 112
Not equal 135
Numeric function 237
O
OR 264
Off-delay timer 90
On/off-delay timer 102
On-delay timer 87
P
PB_P 661
PCT 420
PID_P 605
PID2 380
PID3 422
PIDP_P 618
PLN 390
PLN_REAL2 393
Parameter structure 433
Partial equalizer (address specification) 601
Partial equalizer (variable specification) 599
Phase end step 723
Phase step 720
Polygonal line function 390
Polygonal line function (high-speed version) 393
Positive transition-sensing coil 64
Positive transition-sensing contact 55
Power 311
Process control 603
Process operation 371
Program 18
Program control 451
Program disable458
Program enable 456
Program organization unit 17
Pulse output PID618
Pulse output sample PI 623
Pulse timer 93
Push button lock 664
Push button ON 661
R
RAD_TO_DEG203
RAD-DEG conversion203
RAS686
REAL_TO_ASC216
REAL_TO_BCD_DWORD179
REAL_TO_BCD_WORD179
REAL_TO_DINT 177
REAL_TO_INT177
REAL_TO_TIME181
REAL_TO_UINT 177
REPEAT519
REPLACE479
RETURN452
RIGHT469
RJ_P678
RJ_P2 682
RMV_P655
ROL285
ROR283
RS107
RSM_L430
RSTC323
RSV_P649
RTC98
RTC_N100
Rate limiter414
Reading and writing variable15
Real number format 9
Real numbers-ASCII conversion216
Real numbers-BCD conversion 179
Real numbers-duration conversion181
Real numbers-integer conversion177
Real time clock98, 100
Remainder 305
Replace string479
Reset carry323

6F8C1226
754
RESET coil 63
Reset jump 678
Reset MV 655
Reset SV 649
Reset type flip-flop 107
Return 452
Rightmost extract string 469
Rising edge detector 57
Rotate bits left 285
Rotate bits right 283
S
SBB 298
SCV_P 657
SEL 161
SEMA 109
SETC 322
SFA 287
SFC language 4
SFL 289
SHL 281
SHR 279
SIN 247
SJ_P 674
SMV_P 651
SPI_P 612
SPIP_P 623
SQRT 238
SR 105
SS 96
SSV_P 645
ST language 4
START_P 460
STRING_TO_ARRAY 233
SUB 296, 315
Selection 145
Selector 161
Self step jump 674
Semaphore 109
Sequence 717
Set carry 322
SET coil 62
Set MV 651
Set SV 645
Set type flip-flop 105
Shift bits left 281
Shift bits right 279
Shut CV657
Sign negative 200
Sine247
Single shot 96
Socket communication receive 558, 570
Socket communication send525, 542
Square root 238
State change detection read 352
Static variable10
Station global variable10
Step701
String length466
String processing 465
String-array conversion233
Subtract296
Subtract time data315
Subtract with carry 298
Super two degrees of freedom PID380
System flags 26
T
TAN251
TAND262
TEST277
THEN488
TIME_TO_BCD_DWORD196
TIME_TO_BCD_WORD 196
TIME_TO_DINT193
TIME_TO_INT193
TIME_TO_REAL195
TIME_TO_UINT193
TINZ122
TMOV118
TNOT 269
TO_INDEX235
TOF90
TOFM_P 90
TON87
TONM_P87
TOR266
TP 93
TRST331
TRUNC 198
TSET329
TXNR275
TXOR273
Table bit reset331

755
Table bit set 329
Tag number conversion 235
Tag operation 638
Tangent 251
Task 16
Temporary variable 10
Test 277
Time data type conversion 206
Timers 85
Transition 704
Truncation 198
Type conversion 167
U
UINT_TO_BCD_DWORD 174
UINT_TO_BCD_WORD 174
UINT_TO_DINT 169
UINT_TO_DWORD 172
UINT_TO_INT 169
UINT_TO_REAL 171
UINT_TO_TIME 176
UINT_TO_WORD 172
UNT 418
UNTIL 520
URCV_N 570
URCV_T 558
USEND_N 542
USEND_T 525
Up counter 78
Up down counter 82
User defined function 453
User defined function block 454
V
Variable declaration examples 11
Variable memory allocation rules 11
Variables 10
W
WHILE 514
WORD_BCD_TO_DINT 187
WORD_BCD_TO_INT 187
WORD_BCD_TO_REAL 189
WORD_BCD_TO_TIME 191
WORD_BCD_TO_UINT 187
WORD_TO_DINT 183
WORD_TO_DWORD185
WORD_TO_INT183
WORD_TO_UINT183
X
XCHG120
XMIT_N592
XMIT_590
XOR271

6F8C1226
756

Unied Controller nv series & Integrated Controller V series
Programming Instructions (LD/FBD/SFC/ST)
September 30, 2010
Toshiba Corporation 2010
All Right Reserved.
No part of this document may be reproduced
without the prior written consent of Toshiba.
Transmission Distribution & Industrial Systems Company
Microelectronics & System Components Department - System Components Support Group
1, Toshiba-Cho, Fuchu-Shi, Tokyo, 183-8511, Japan Tel +81-42-333-2206
Third Edition
Notes
(1) The technical information provided herein describes typical operations and applications of the product and does not
guarantee the intellectual property rights or other rights of Toshiba or third parties nor allows license of its use.
(2) No part or the whole of this document may be reproduced without prior consent.
(3) The information herein may be changed in the future without notice.
(4) All possible measures have been taken to prepare the information herein. If you have any question, comment, or
nd any error, please contact us.
PROSEC, TOSLINE, TOSDIC, CIEMAC are trademarks or registered trademarks of Toshiba Corporation.
Microsoft, Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and other countries.
DeviceNet is a registered trademark of Open DeviceNet Vender Association Inc.
6F8C1226
Programming Instructions
(LD/FBD/SFC/ST)
Unied Controller
nv Series
vseries
1226.3.1009

P
r
o
g
r
a
m
m
i
n
g

I
n
s
t
r
u
c
t
i
o
n
s

(
L
D
/
F
B
D
/
S
F
C
/
S
T
)
U
n
i
e
d

C
o
n
t
r
o
l
l
e
r

n
v

s
e
r
i
e
s

&
I
n
t
e
g
r
a
t
e
d

C
o
n
t
r
o
l
l
e
r

V

s
e
r
i
e
s

NV Series V Series Programming Instructions (LD FBD SFC ST)

Încărcat de

Informații document

Titlu original

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

NV Series V Series Programming Instructions (LD FBD SFC ST)

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

6F8C1226

:Longer instruction process time,

:Normal instruction process time, :Cannot be specified

) and the argument is referenced or updated in the

:Longer instruction process time,

:Normal instruction process time

: Supported from the initial version of the respective controller (available)

Reset command Input

Count down command

Reset command Input

Count down command

Timer activation command

Timer activation command

Timer activation command

Timer activation command

Timer activation command

Timer activation command

On-delay time(0)[sec] Input

Test and set command

( IN, N, Output table );

( Input1, Input2, , Inputn );

( Input1, Input2, , Inputn );

( Input1, Input2, , Inputn );

( Input1, Input2, , Inputn );

( Input1, Input2, , Inputn );

Input1, Input2 Input number =2

Hysteresis width (0)

Hysteresis width (0)

Hysteresis width (0)

Hysteresis width (0)

( Input1, Input2, , Inputn );

( Input1, Input2, , Inputn );

( Input1, Input2, , Inputn );

Input value Input

(G, IN0, IN1 );

Input point No. 0K(n-1)

Selection point No. 0K(N-1) Input

Table word number 1N256

Input1 (Date data)

Table size 1N64

Table size 1N32

Table size 1N64

Table size 1N64

Table size 1N64

Table size 1N64

Table size 1N129

( Input1, Input2 , , Inputn );

2.11 Logical Operation

Table word number 1N64

( Input1, Input2 , , Inputn );

2.11 Logical Operation

Table word number 1N64

2.11 Logical Operation

Table word number 1N1024

( Input1, Input2 , putn );

Chapter 2 LD/FBD Instructions

Table word number 1N64

Table word number 1N64

Input1, 2 Input number=2

Chapter 2 LD/FBD Instructions

Chapter 2 LD/FBD Instructions

Chapter 2 LD/FBD Instructions

Chapter 2 LD/FBD Instructions